export declare class Adaptor3d_Curve extends Standard_Transient {
  constructor();
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters. i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a curve equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  Trim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve with its first derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec, V3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not CN. Raised if N < 1. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns the parametric resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  Resolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the curve in the current interval: Line, Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola, BezierCurve, BSplineCurve, OtherCurve. */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_CurveType;
  Line(): gp_Lin;
  Circle(): gp_Circ;
  Ellipse(): gp_Elips;
  Hyperbola(): gp_Hypr;
  Parabola(): gp_Parab;
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  OffsetCurve(): any;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first three derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the Nth derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Adaptor3d_Surface extends Standard_Transient {
  constructor();
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  FirstUParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastUParameter(): Standard_Real;
  FirstVParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastVParameter(): Standard_Real;
  UContinuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  VContinuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of U intervals for continuity . May be one if UContinuity(me) >= */
  NbUIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of V intervals for continuity . May be one if VContinuity(me) >= */
  NbVIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the intervals with the requested continuity in the U direction. */
  UIntervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the intervals with the requested continuity in the V direction. */
  VIntervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a surface trimmed in the U direction equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  UTrim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns a surface trimmed in the V direction between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  VTrim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  UPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  VPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameters U,V on the surface. Tip: use GeomLib::NormEstim() to calculate surface normal at specified (U, V) point. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point of parameters U,V on the surface. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point and the first derivatives on the surface. Raised if the continuity of the current intervals is not C1. Tip: use GeomLib::NormEstim() to calculate surface normal at specified (U, V) point. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point, the first and second derivatives on the surface. Raised if the continuity of the current intervals is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point, the first, second and third derivatives on the surface. Raised if the continuity of the current intervals is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec, D3U: gp_Vec, D3V: gp_Vec, D3UUV: gp_Vec, D3UVV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in the direction U and Nv in the direction V at the point P(U, V). Raised if the current U interval is not not CNu and the current V interval is not CNv. Raised if Nu + Nv < 1 or Nu < 0 or Nv < 0. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns the parametric U resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  UResolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parametric V resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  VResolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the surface: Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus, BezierSurface, BSplineSurface, SurfaceOfRevolution, SurfaceOfExtrusion, OtherSurface */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_SurfaceType;
  Plane(): gp_Pln;
  Cylinder(): gp_Cylinder;
  Cone(): gp_Cone;
  Sphere(): gp_Sphere;
  Torus(): gp_Torus;
  UDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  NbUPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  VDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  NbVPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbUKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  NbVKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  IsURational(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsVRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  AxeOfRevolution(): gp_Ax1;
  Direction(): gp_Dir;
  BasisCurve(): any;
  BasisSurface(): any;
  OffsetValue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameters (U, V) on the surface. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first partial derivatives at (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 2nd order at (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 3rd order at (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in U and Nv in V at (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_CylindricalSurface extends Geom_ElementarySurface {
  /** Set <me> so that <me> has the same geometric properties as C. */
  SetCylinder(C: gp_Cylinder): void;
  /** Changes the radius of the cylinder. Raised if R < 0.0 */
  SetRadius(R: Standard_Real): void;
  /** returns a non transient cylinder with the same geometric properties as <me>. */
  Cylinder(): gp_Cylinder;
  /** Return the parameter on the Ureversed surface for the point of parameter U on <me>. Return 2.PI - U. */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Return the parameter on the Vreversed surface for the point of parameter V on <me>. Return -V */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the parameters on the transformed surface for the transform of the point of parameters U,V on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are the new values of U,V after calling me->TransformParameters(U,V,T) This method multiplies V by T.ScaleFactor() */
  TransformParameters(T: gp_Trsf): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Returns a 2d transformation used to find the new parameters of a point on the transformed surface. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are obtained by transforming U,V with the 2d transformation returned by me->ParametricTransformation(T) This method returns a scale centered on the U axis with T.ScaleFactor */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf): gp_GTrsf2d;
  /** The CylindricalSurface is infinite in the V direction so V1 = Realfirst, V2 = RealLast from package Standard. U1 = 0 and U2 = 2*PI. */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Returns the coefficients of the implicit equation of the quadric in the absolute cartesian coordinate system : These coefficients are normalized. A1.X**2+A2.Y**2+A3.Z**2+2.(B1.X.Y+B2.X.Z+B3.Y.Z)+2.(C1.X+C2.Y+C3.Z)+D=0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { A1: number; A2: number; A3: number; B1: number; B2: number; B3: number; C1: number; C2: number; C3: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the radius of this cylinder. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** The UIso curve is a Line. The location point of this line is on the placement plane (XAxis, YAxis) of the surface. This line is parallel to the axis of symmetry of the surface. */
  UIso(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** The VIso curve is a circle. The start point of this circle (U = 0) is defined with the "XAxis" of the surface. The center of the circle is on the symmetry axis. */
  VIso(V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point P (U, V) on the surface. P (U, V) = Loc + Radius * (cos (U) * XDir + sin (U) * YDir) + V * ZDir where Loc is the origin of the placement plane (XAxis, YAxis) XDir is the direction of the XAxis and YDir the direction of the YAxis. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the current point and the first derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first and the second derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first, the second and the third derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in the direction u and Nv in the direction v. Raised if Nu + Nv < 1 or Nu < 0 or Nv < 0. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this cylinder. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this cylinder. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_CylindricalSurface_1 extends Geom_CylindricalSurface {
    constructor(A3: gp_Ax3, Radius: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom_CylindricalSurface_2 extends Geom_CylindricalSurface {
    constructor(C: gp_Cylinder);
  }

export declare class Geom_Geometry extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a Geometry with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_1(P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a Geometry with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_2(A1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a Geometry with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_3(A2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Rotates a Geometry. A1 is the axis of the rotation. Ang is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotate(A1: gp_Ax1, Ang: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a Geometry. S is the scaling value. */
  Scale(P: gp_Pnt, S: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Translates a Geometry. V is the vector of the translation. */
  Translate_1(V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates a Geometry. V is the vector of the translation. */
  Translate_2(P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Transformation of a geometric object. This transformation can be a translation, a rotation, a symmetry, a scaling or a complex transformation obtained by combination of the previous elementaries transformations. (see class Transformation of the package Geom). */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  Mirrored_1(P: gp_Pnt): any;
  Mirrored_2(A1: gp_Ax1): any;
  Mirrored_3(A2: gp_Ax2): any;
  Rotated(A1: gp_Ax1, Ang: Standard_Real): any;
  Scaled(P: gp_Pnt, S: Standard_Real): any;
  Transformed(T: gp_Trsf): any;
  Translated_1(V: gp_Vec): any;
  Translated_2(P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt): any;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this geometric object. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_ConicalSurface extends Geom_ElementarySurface {
  /** Set <me> so that <me> has the same geometric properties as C. */
  SetCone(C: gp_Cone): void;
  /** Changes the radius of the conical surface in the placement plane (Z = 0, V = 0). The local coordinate system is not modified. Raised if R < 0.0 */
  SetRadius(R: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the semi angle of the conical surface. Semi-angle can be negative. Its absolute value std::abs(Ang) is in range ]0,PI/2[. Raises ConstructionError if std::abs(Ang) < Resolution from gp or std::abs(Ang) >= PI/2 - Resolution */
  SetSemiAngle(Ang: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns a non transient cone with the same geometric properties as <me>. */
  Cone(): gp_Cone;
  /** Eeturn 2.PI - U. */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the u (or v) parameter on the modified surface, when reversing its u (or v) parametric direction, for any point of u parameter U (or of v parameter V) on this cone. In the case of a cone, these functions return respectively: 2.*Pi - U, -V. */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Changes the orientation of this cone in the v parametric direction. The bounds of the surface are not changed but the v parametric direction is reversed. As a consequence, for a cone: the "main Direction" of the local coordinate system is reversed, and the half-angle at the apex is inverted. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameters on the transformed surface for the transform of the point of parameters U,V on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are the new values of U,V after calling me->TransformParameters(U,V,T) This method multiplies V by T.ScaleFactor() */
  TransformParameters(T: gp_Trsf): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Returns a 2d transformation used to find the new parameters of a point on the transformed surface. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are obtained by transforming U,V with the 2d transformation returned by me->ParametricTransformation(T) This method returns a scale centered on the U axis with T.ScaleFactor */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf): gp_GTrsf2d;
  /** Computes the apex of this cone. It is on the negative side of the axis of revolution of this cone if the half-angle at the apex is positive, and on the positive side of the "main Axis" if the half-angle is negative. */
  Apex(): gp_Pnt;
  /** The conical surface is infinite in the V direction so V1 = Realfirst from Standard and V2 = RealLast. U1 = 0 and U2 = 2*PI. */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Returns the coefficients of the implicit equation of the quadric in the absolute cartesian coordinate system : These coefficients are normalized. A1.X**2+A2.Y**2+A3.Z**2+2.(B1.X.Y+B2.X.Z+B3.Y.Z)+2.(C1.X+C2.Y+C3.Z)+D= 0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { A1: number; A2: number; A3: number; B1: number; B2: number; B3: number; C1: number; C2: number; C3: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the reference radius of this cone. The reference radius is the radius of the circle formed by the intersection of this cone and its reference plane (i.e. the plane defined by the origin, "X Direction" and "Y Direction" of the local coordinate system of this cone). If the apex of this cone is on the origin of the local coordinate system of this cone, the returned value is 0. */
  RefRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the semi-angle at the apex of this cone. Attention! Semi-angle can be negative. */
  SemiAngle(): Standard_Real;
  /** returns True. */
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns False. */
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Builds the U isoparametric line of this cone. The origin of this line is on the reference plane of this cone (i.e. the plane defined by the origin, "X Direction" and "Y Direction" of the local coordinate system of this cone). */
  UIso(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Builds the V isoparametric circle of this cone. It is the circle on this cone, located in the plane of Z coordinate V*cos(Semi-Angle) in the local coordinate system of this cone. The "Axis" of this circle is the axis of revolution of this cone. Its starting point is defined by the "X Direction" of this cone. Warning If the V isoparametric circle is close to the apex of this cone, the radius of the circle becomes very small. It is possible to have a circle with radius equal to 0.0. */
  VIso(V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point P (U, V) on the surface. P(U,V)=Loc+ (RefRadius+V*sin(Semi-Angle))*(cos(U)*XDir+sin(U)*YDir)+ V*cos(Semi-Angle)*ZDir where Loc is the origin of the placement plane (XAxis, YAxis) XDir is the direction of the XAxis and YDir the direction of the YAxis. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the current point and the first derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first and the second derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first,the second and the third derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in the u parametric direction, and Nv in the v parametric direction at the point of parameters (U, V) of this cone. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if: Nu + Nv is less than 1, Nu or Nv is negative. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this cone. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this cone. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_ConicalSurface_1 extends Geom_ConicalSurface {
    constructor(A3: gp_Ax3, Ang: Standard_Real, Radius: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom_ConicalSurface_2 extends Geom_ConicalSurface {
    constructor(C: gp_Cone);
  }

export declare class Geom_BezierCurve extends Geom_BoundedCurve {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Increases the degree of a bezier curve. Degree is the new degree of <me>. Raises ConstructionError if Degree is greater than MaxDegree or lower than 2 or lower than the initial degree of <me>. */
  Increase(Degree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts a pole P after the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is rational the weight value for the new pole of range Index is 1.0. raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleAfter_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Inserts a pole P after the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is rational the weight value for the new pole of range Index is 1.0. raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleAfter_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Inserts a pole P before the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is rational the weight value for the new pole of range Index is 1.0. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] Raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleBefore_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Inserts a pole P before the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is rational the weight value for the new pole of range Index is 1.0. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] Raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleBefore_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Removes the pole of range Index. If the curve was rational it can become non rational. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] Raised if Degree is lower than 2. */
  RemovePole(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Reverses the direction of parametrization of <me> Value (NewU) = Value (1 - OldU) */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. returns 1-U */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Segments the curve between U1 and U2 which can be out of the bounds of the curve. The curve is oriented from U1 to U2. The control points are modified, the first and the last point are not the same but the parametrization range is [0, 1] else it could not be a Bezier curve. Warnings : Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the curve <me> or if the curve makes loop. After the segmentation the length of a curve can be null. */
  Segment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Substitutes the pole of range index with P. If the curve <me> is rational the weight of range Index is not modified. raiseD if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  SetPole_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Substitutes the pole of range index with P. If the curve <me> is rational the weight of range Index is not modified. raiseD if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  SetPole_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the weight of the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is not rational it can become rational if all the weights are not identical. If the curve was rational it can become non rational if all the weights are identical. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] Raised if Weight <= Resolution from package gp */
  SetWeight(Index: Standard_Integer, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to the Resolution from package gp. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Continuity of the curve, returns True. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the parametrization of a curve is periodic. (P(u) = P(u + T) T = constante) */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns false if all the weights are identical. The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** a Bezier curve is CN */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the polynomial degree of the curve. it is the number of poles - 1 point P and derivatives (V1, V2, V3) computation The Bezier Curve has a Polynomial representation so the parameter U can be out of the bounds of the curve. */
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. Raises an exception on failure (e.g. OffsetCurve at singular point). */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For this Bezier curve, computes the point P of parameter U, or the point P and one or more of the following values: V1, the first derivative vector, V2, the second derivative vector, V3, the third derivative vector. Note: the parameter U can be outside the bounds of the curve. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this Bezier curve, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Note: the parameter U can be outside the bounds of the curve. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns Value (U=0.), it is the first control point of the curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns Value (U=1.), it is the last control point of the Bezier curve. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of this Bezier curve. This is 0.0, which gives the start point of this Bezier curve */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of this Bezier curve. This is 1.0, which gives the end point of this Bezier curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the number of poles of this Bezier curve. */
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the pole of range Index. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  Pole(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns all the poles of the curve. */
  Poles_1(P: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): void;
  /** Returns all the poles of the curve. */
  Poles_2(): TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  /** Returns the weight of range Index. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  Weight(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns all the weights of the curve. */
  Weights_1(W: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns all the weights of the curve. */
  Weights_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns a const reference to the weights array. For rational curves: the internal owning weights array. For non-rational curves: a non-owning view of unit weights from BSplCLib. The array is always sized to match NbPoles(). Do NOT modify elements through the returned reference. */
  WeightsArray(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this Bezier curve. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns the value of the maximum polynomial degree of any Geom_BezierCurve curve. This value is 25. */
  static MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes for this Bezier curve the parametric tolerance UTolerance for a given 3D tolerance Tolerance3D. If f(t) is the equation of this Bezier curve, UTolerance ensures that: |t1-t0| < UTolerance ===> |f(t1)-f(t0)| < Tolerance3D */
  Resolution(Tolerance3D: Standard_Real): { UTolerance: number };
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this Bezier curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Returns Bezier knots {0.0, 1.0} as a static array. */
  Knots(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns Bezier multiplicities for the current degree. */
  Multiplicities(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns Bezier flat knots for the current degree. */
  KnotSequence(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_BezierCurve_1 extends Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(CurvePoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BezierCurve_2 extends Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(CurvePoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, PoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BezierCurve_3 extends Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theOther: Geom_BezierCurve);
  }

export declare class Geom_TrimmedCurve extends Geom_BoundedCurve {
  /** Constructs a trimmed curve from the basis curve C which is limited between parameter values U1 and U2. Note: - U1 can be greater or less than U2; in both cases, the returned curve is oriented from U1 to U2. If the basis curve C is periodic, there is an ambiguity because two parts are available. In this case, the trimmed curve has the same orientation as the basis curve if Sense is true (default value) or the opposite orientation if Sense is false. If the curve is closed but not periodic, it is not possible to keep the part of the curve which includes the junction point (except if the junction point is at the beginning or at the end of the trimmed curve). If you tried to do this, you could alter the fundamental characteristics of the basis curve, which are used, for example, to compute the derivatives of the trimmed curve. The rules for a closed curve are therefore the same as those for an open curve. Warning: The trimmed curve is built from a copy of curve C. Therefore, when C is modified, the trimmed curve is not modified. If the basis curve is periodic and theAdjustPeriodic is True, the bounds of the trimmed curve may be different from U1 and U2 if the parametric origin of the basis curve is within the arc of the trimmed curve. In this case, the modified parameter will be equal to U1 or U2 plus or minus the period. When theAdjustPeriodic is False, parameters U1 and U2 will be the same, without adjustment into the first period. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: C is not periodic and U1 or U2 is outside the bounds of C, or U1 is equal to U2. */
  constructor(C: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean, theAdjustPeriodic: Standard_Boolean)
  /** Changes the orientation of this trimmed curve. As a result: the basis curve is reversed, the start point of the initial curve becomes the end point of the reversed curve, the end point of the initial curve becomes the start point of the reversed curve, the first and last parameters are recomputed. If the trimmed curve was defined by: a basis curve whose parameter range is [ 0., 1. ], the two trim values U1 (first parameter) and U2 (last parameter), the reversed trimmed curve is defined by: the reversed basis curve, whose parameter range is still [ 0., 1. ], the two trim values 1. - U2 (first parameter) and 1. - U1 (last parameter). */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on this trimmed curve. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Changes this trimmed curve, by redefining the parameter values U1 and U2 which limit its basis curve. Note: If the basis curve is periodic, the trimmed curve has the same orientation as the basis curve if Sense is true (default value) or the opposite orientation if Sense is false. Warning If the basis curve is periodic and theAdjustPeriodic is True, the bounds of the trimmed curve may be different from U1 and U2 if the parametric origin of the basis curve is within the arc of the trimmed curve. In this case, the modified parameter will be equal to U1 or U2 plus or minus the period. When theAdjustPeriodic is False, parameters U1 and U2 will be the same, without adjustment into the first period. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: the basis curve is not periodic, and either U1 or U2 are outside the bounds of the basis curve, or U1 is equal to U2. */
  SetTrim(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean, theAdjustPeriodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the basis curve. Warning This function does not return a constant reference. Consequently, any modification of the returned value directly modifies the trimmed curve. */
  BasisCurve(): any;
  /** Returns the continuity of the curve : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns true if the degree of continuity of the basis curve of this trimmed curve is at least N. A trimmed curve is at least "C0" continuous. Warnings : The continuity of the trimmed curve can be greater than the continuity of the basis curve because you consider only a part of the basis curve. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the end point of <me>. This point is the evaluation of the curve for the "LastParameter". */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of <me>. The first parameter is the parameter of the "StartPoint" of the trimmed curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the StartPoint and the EndPoint is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Always returns FALSE (independently of the type of basis curve). */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of the basis curve of this trimmed curve. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if the basis curve is not periodic. */
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of <me>. The last parameter is the parameter of the "EndPoint" of the trimmed curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the start point of <me>. This point is the evaluation of the curve from the "FirstParameter". value and derivatives Warnings : The returned derivatives have the same orientation as the derivatives of the basis curve even if the trimmed curve has not the same orientation as the basis curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the point of parameter U. If the basis curve is an OffsetCurve sometimes it is not possible to do the evaluation of the curve at the parameter U (see class OffsetCurve). */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** N is the order of derivation. Raised if the continuity of the curve is not CN. Raised if N < 1. geometric transformations */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this trimmed curve. Warning The basis curve is also modified. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point of parameter U on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(me->TransformedParameter(U,T)) is the same point as me->Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a coefficient to compute the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point on <me>. Transformed(T)->Value(U * ParametricTransformation(T)) is the same point as Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf): Standard_Real;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this trimmed curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_ElementarySurface extends Geom_Surface {
  /** Changes the main axis (ZAxis) of the elementary surface. Raised if the direction of A1 is parallel to the XAxis of the coordinate system of the surface. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the location of the local coordinates system of the surface. */
  SetLocation(theLoc: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the local coordinates system of the surface. */
  SetPosition(theAx3: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Returns the main axis of the surface (ZAxis). */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the location point of the local coordinate system of the surface. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the local coordinates system of the surface. */
  Position(): gp_Ax3;
  /** Reverses the U parametric direction of the surface. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Return the parameter on the Ureversed surface for the point of parameter U on <me>. me->UReversed()->Value(me->UReversedParameter(U),V) is the same point as me->Value(U,V) */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Reverses the V parametric direction of the surface. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Return the parameter on the Vreversed surface for the point of parameter V on <me>. me->VReversed()->Value(U,me->VReversedParameter(V)) is the same point as me->Value(U,V) */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns GeomAbs_CN, the global continuity of any elementary surface. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsCNu(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsCNv(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_BoundedSurface extends Geom_Surface {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_Curve extends Geom_Geometry {
  /** Changes the direction of parametrization of <me>. The "FirstParameter" and the "LastParameter" are not changed but the orientation of the curve is modified. If the curve is bounded the StartPoint of the initial curve becomes the EndPoint of the reversed curve and the EndPoint of the initial curve becomes the StartPoint of the reversed curve. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. me->Reversed()->Value(me->ReversedParameter(U)) is the same point as me->Value(U) */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point of parameter U on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(me->TransformedParameter(U,T)) is the same point as me->Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods returns It can be redefined. For example on the Line. */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a coefficient to compute the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point on <me>. Transformed(T)->Value(U * ParametricTransformation(T)) is the same point as Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods returns 1. It can be redefined. For example on the Line. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a copy of <me> reversed. */
  Reversed(): any;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter. Warnings : It can be RealFirst from package Standard if the curve is infinite */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter. Warnings : It can be RealLast from package Standard if the curve is infinite */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns true if the curve is closed. Some curves such as circle are always closed, others such as line are never closed (by definition). Some Curves such as OffsetCurve can be closed or not. These curves are considered as closed if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to the Resolution from package gp which is a fixed criterion independent of the application. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Is the parametrization of the curve periodic ? It is possible only if the curve is closed and if the following relation is satisfied : for each parametric value U the distance between the point P(u) and the point P (u + T) is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp, T is the period and must be a constant. There are three possibilities : . the curve is never periodic by definition (SegmentLine) . the curve is always periodic by definition (Circle) . the curve can be defined as periodic (BSpline). In this case a function SetPeriodic allows you to give the shape of the curve. The general rule for this case is : if a curve can be periodic or not the default periodicity set is non periodic and you have to turn (explicitly) the curve into a periodic curve if you want the curve to be periodic. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of this curve. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this curve is not periodic. */
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** It is the global continuity of the curve C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, G1 : tangency continuity all along the Curve, G2 : curvature continuity all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns true if the degree of continuity of this curve is at least N. Exceptions - Standard_RangeError if N is less than 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. Raises an exception on failure (e.g. OffsetCurve at singular point). */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): ResD1;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): ResD2;
  /** Computes the point and first three derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): ResD3;
  /** Computes the Nth derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not CN, or N < 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns in P the point of parameter U. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U and the first derivative V1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec, V3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on <me>. It is implemented with D0. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_Surface extends Geom_Geometry {
  /** Reverses the U direction of parametrization of <me>. The bounds of the surface are not modified. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the U direction of parametrization of <me>. The bounds of the surface are not modified. A copy of <me> is returned. */
  UReversed(): any;
  /** Returns the parameter on the Ureversed surface for the point of parameter U on <me>. me->UReversed()->Value(me->UReversedParameter(U),V) is the same point as me->Value(U,V) */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Reverses the V direction of parametrization of <me>. The bounds of the surface are not modified. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the V direction of parametrization of <me>. The bounds of the surface are not modified. A copy of <me> is returned. */
  VReversed(): any;
  /** Returns the parameter on the Vreversed surface for the point of parameter V on <me>. me->VReversed()->Value(U,me->VReversedParameter(V)) is the same point as me->Value(U,V) */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the parameters on the transformed surface for the transform of the point of parameters U,V on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are the new values of U,V after calling me->TransformParameters(U,V,T) This method does not change and <V> It can be redefined. For example on the Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Revolved and Extruded surfaces. */
  TransformParameters(T: gp_Trsf): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Returns a 2d transformation used to find the new parameters of a point on the transformed surface. me->Transformed(T)->Value(U',V') is the same point as me->Value(U,V).Transformed(T) Where U',V' are obtained by transforming U,V with the 2d transformation returned by me->ParametricTransformation(T) This method returns an identity transformation It can be redefined. For example on the Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Revolved and Extruded surfaces. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf): gp_GTrsf2d;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds U1, U2, V1 and V2 of this surface. If the surface is infinite, this function can return a value equal to Precision::Infinite: instead of double::LastReal. */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Checks whether this surface is closed in the u parametric direction. Returns true if, in the u parametric direction: taking uFirst and uLast as the parametric bounds in the u parametric direction, for each parameter v, the distance between the points P(uFirst, v) and P(uLast, v) is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). */
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Checks whether this surface is closed in the u parametric direction. Returns true if, in the v parametric direction: taking vFirst and vLast as the parametric bounds in the v parametric direction, for each parameter u, the distance between the points P(u, vFirst) and P(u, vLast) is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). */
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Checks if this surface is periodic in the u parametric direction. Returns true if: this surface is closed in the u parametric direction, and there is a constant T such that the distance between the points P (u, v) and P (u + T, v) (or the points P (u, v) and P (u, v + T)) is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). Note: T is the parametric period in the u parametric direction. */
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of this surface in the u parametric direction. Raises if the surface is not uperiodic. */
  UPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  /** Checks if this surface is periodic in the v parametric direction. Returns true if: this surface is closed in the v parametric direction, and there is a constant T such that the distance between the points P (u, v) and P (u + T, v) (or the points P (u, v) and P (u, v + T)) is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). Note: T is the parametric period in the v parametric direction. */
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of this surface in the v parametric direction. raises if the surface is not vperiodic. */
  VPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the U isoparametric curve. */
  UIso(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the V isoparametric curve. */
  VIso(V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the Global Continuity of the surface in direction U and V : C0: only geometric continuity, C1: continuity of the first derivative all along the surface, C2: continuity of the second derivative all along the surface, C3: continuity of the third derivative all along the surface, G1: tangency continuity all along the surface, G2: curvature continuity all along the surface, CN: the order of continuity is infinite. Example: If the surface is C1 in the V parametric direction and C2 in the U parametric direction Shape = C1. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the order of continuity of the surface in the U parametric direction. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCNu(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the order of continuity of the surface in the V parametric direction. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCNv(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the point of parameter (U, V) on the surface. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first partial derivatives at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): ResD1;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 2nd order at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): ResD2;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 3rd order at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): ResD3;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in U and Nv in V at the point (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Computes the point of parameter (U, V). */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point and first partial derivatives. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 2nd order. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 3rd order. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec, D3U: gp_Vec, D3V: gp_Vec, D3UUV: gp_Vec, D3UVV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in U and Nv in V. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Computes the point of parameter (U, V) on the surface. Implemented with D0. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_SphericalSurface extends Geom_ElementarySurface {
  /** Assigns the value R to the radius of this sphere. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if R is less than 0.0. */
  SetRadius(R: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Converts the gp_Sphere S into this sphere. */
  SetSphere(S: gp_Sphere): void;
  /** Returns a non persistent sphere with the same geometric properties as <me>. */
  Sphere(): gp_Sphere;
  /** Computes the u parameter on the modified surface, when reversing its u parametric direction, for any point of u parameter U on this sphere. In the case of a sphere, these functions returns 2.PI - U. */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the v parameter on the modified surface, when reversing its v parametric direction, for any point of v parameter V on this sphere. In the case of a sphere, these functions returns -U. */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the area of the spherical surface. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds U1, U2, V1 and V2 of this sphere. For a sphere: U1 = 0, U2 = 2*PI, V1 = -PI/2, V2 = PI/2. */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Returns the coefficients of the implicit equation of the quadric in the absolute cartesian coordinates system : These coefficients are normalized. A1.X**2 + A2.Y**2 + A3.Z**2 + 2.(B1.X.Y + B2.X.Z + B3.Y.Z) + 2.(C1.X + C2.Y + C3.Z) + D = 0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { A1: number; A2: number; A3: number; B1: number; B2: number; B3: number; C1: number; C2: number; C3: number; D: number };
  /** Computes the coefficients of the implicit equation of this quadric in the absolute Cartesian coordinate system: A1.X**2 + A2.Y**2 + A3.Z**2 + 2.(B1.X.Y + B2.X.Z + B3.Y.Z) + 2.(C1.X + C2.Y + C3.Z) + D = 0.0 An implicit normalization is applied (i.e. A1 = A2 = 1. in the local coordinate system of this sphere). */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the volume of the spherical surface. */
  Volume(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the U isoparametric curve. The U isoparametric curves of the surface are defined by the section of the spherical surface with plane obtained by rotation of the plane (Location, XAxis, ZAxis) around ZAxis. This plane defines the origin of parametrization u. For a SphericalSurface the UIso curve is a Circle. Warnings : The radius of this circle can be zero. */
  UIso(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the V isoparametric curve. The V isoparametric curves of the surface are defined by the section of the spherical surface with plane parallel to the plane (Location, XAxis, YAxis). This plane defines the origin of parametrization V. Be careful if V is close to PI/2 or 3*PI/2 the radius of the circle becomes tiny. It is not forbidden in this toolkit to create circle with radius = 0.0 For a SphericalSurface the VIso curve is a Circle. Warnings : The radius of this circle can be zero. */
  VIso(V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point P (U, V) on the surface. P (U, V) = Loc + Radius * Sin (V) * Zdir + Radius * Cos (V) * (cos (U) * XDir + sin (U) * YDir) where Loc is the origin of the placement plane (XAxis, YAxis) XDir is the direction of the XAxis and YDir the direction of the YAxis and ZDir the direction of the ZAxis. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the current point and the first derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first and the second derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the current point, the first,the second and the third derivatives in the directions U and V. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in the direction u and Nv in the direction v. Raised if Nu + Nv < 1 or Nu < 0 or Nv < 0. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this sphere. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this sphere. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_SphericalSurface_1 extends Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor(A3: gp_Ax3, Radius: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom_SphericalSurface_2 extends Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor(S: gp_Sphere);
  }

export declare class Geom_BoundedCurve extends Geom_Curve {
  /** Returns the end point of the curve. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the start point of the curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom_BSplineSurface extends Geom_BoundedSurface {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Exchanges the u and v parametric directions on this BSpline surface. As a consequence: the poles and weights tables are transposed, the knots and multiplicities tables are exchanged, degrees of continuity, and rational, periodic and uniform characteristics are exchanged, and the orientation of the surface is inverted. */
  ExchangeUV(): void;
  /** Sets the surface U periodic. Modifies this surface to be periodic in the U parametric direction. To become periodic in a given parametric direction a surface must be closed in that parametric direction, and the knot sequence relative to that direction must be periodic. To generate this periodic sequence of knots, the functions FirstUKnotIndex and LastUKnotIndex are used to compute I1 and I2. These are the indexes, in the knot array associated with the given parametric direction, of the knots that correspond to the first and last parameters of this BSpline surface in the given parametric direction. Hence the period is: Knots(I1) - Knots(I2) As a result, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the surface is not closed in the given parametric direction. */
  SetUPeriodic(): void;
  /** Sets the surface V periodic. Modifies this surface to be periodic in the V parametric direction. To become periodic in a given parametric direction a surface must be closed in that parametric direction, and the knot sequence relative to that direction must be periodic. To generate this periodic sequence of knots, the functions FirstVKnotIndex and LastVKnotIndex are used to compute I1 and I2. These are the indexes, in the knot array associated with the given parametric direction, of the knots that correspond to the first and last parameters of this BSpline surface in the given parametric direction. Hence the period is: Knots(I1) - Knots(I2) As a result, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the surface is not closed in the given parametric direction. */
  SetVPeriodic(): void;
  /** returns the parameter normalized within the period if the surface is periodic : otherwise does not do anything */
  PeriodicNormalization(): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Assigns the knot of index Index in the knots table in the corresponding parametric direction to be the origin of this periodic BSpline surface. As a consequence, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this BSpline surface is not periodic in the given parametric direction. Standard_DomainError if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table in the given parametric direction. */
  SetUOrigin(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Assigns the knot of index Index in the knots table in the corresponding parametric direction to be the origin of this periodic BSpline surface. As a consequence, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this BSpline surface is not periodic in the given parametric direction. Standard_DomainError if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table in the given parametric direction. */
  SetVOrigin(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets the surface U not periodic. Changes this BSpline surface into a non-periodic surface along U direction. If this surface is already non-periodic, it is not modified. Note: the poles and knots tables are modified. */
  SetUNotPeriodic(): void;
  /** Sets the surface V not periodic. Changes this BSpline surface into a non-periodic surface along V direction. If this surface is already non-periodic, it is not modified. Note: the poles and knots tables are modified. */
  SetVNotPeriodic(): void;
  /** Changes the orientation of this BSpline surface in the U parametric direction. The bounds of the surface are not changed but the given parametric direction is reversed. Hence the orientation of the surface is reversed. The knots and poles tables are modified. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Changes the orientation of this BSpline surface in the V parametric direction. The bounds of the surface are not changed but the given parametric direction is reversed. Hence the orientation of the surface is reversed. The knots and poles tables are modified. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Computes the u parameter on the modified surface, produced by reversing its U parametric direction, for the point of u parameter U, on this BSpline surface. For a BSpline surface, these functions return respectively: UFirst + ULast - U, where UFirst, ULast are the values of the first and last parameters of this BSpline surface, in the u parametric directions. */
  UReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the v parameter on the modified surface, produced by reversing its V parametric direction, for the point of v parameter V on this BSpline surface. For a BSpline surface, these functions return respectively: VFirst + VLast - V, VFirst and VLast are the values of the first and last parameters of this BSpline surface, in the v pametric directions. */
  VReversedParameter(V: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Increases the degrees of this BSpline surface to UDegree and VDegree in the u and v parametric directions respectively. As a result, the tables of poles, weights and multiplicities are modified. The tables of knots is not changed. Note: Nothing is done if the given degree is less than or equal to the current degree in the corresponding parametric direction. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if UDegree or VDegree is greater than Geom_BSplineSurface::MaxDegree(). */
  IncreaseDegree(UDegree: Standard_Integer, VDegree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts into the knots table for the U parametric direction of this BSpline surface: the values of the array Knots, with their respective multiplicities, Mults. If the knot value to insert already exists in the table, its multiplicity is: increased by M, if Add is true (the default), or increased to M, if Add is false. The tolerance criterion used to check the equality of the knots is the larger of the values ParametricTolerance and double::Epsilon(val), where val is the knot value to be inserted. Warning If a given multiplicity coefficient is null, or negative, nothing is done. The new multiplicity of a knot is limited to the degree of this BSpline surface in the corresponding parametric direction. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if a knot value to insert is outside the bounds of this BSpline surface in the specified parametric direction. The comparison uses the precision criterion ParametricTolerance. */
  InsertUKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Mults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Inserts into the knots table for the V parametric direction of this BSpline surface: the values of the array Knots, with their respective multiplicities, Mults. If the knot value to insert already exists in the table, its multiplicity is: increased by M, if Add is true (the default), or increased to M, if Add is false. The tolerance criterion used to check the equality of the knots is the larger of the values ParametricTolerance and double::Epsilon(val), where val is the knot value to be inserted. Warning If a given multiplicity coefficient is null, or negative, nothing is done. The new multiplicity of a knot is limited to the degree of this BSpline surface in the corresponding parametric direction. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if a knot value to insert is outside the bounds of this BSpline surface in the specified parametric direction. The comparison uses the precision criterion ParametricTolerance. */
  InsertVKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Mults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Reduces to M the multiplicity of the knot of index Index in the U parametric direction. If M is 0, the knot is removed. With a modification of this type, the table of poles is also modified. Two different algorithms are used systematically to compute the new poles of the surface. For each pole, the distance between the pole calculated using the first algorithm and the same pole calculated using the second algorithm, is checked. If this distance is less than Tolerance it ensures that the surface is not modified by more than Tolerance. Under these conditions, the function returns true; otherwise, it returns false. A low tolerance prevents modification of the surface. A high tolerance "smoothes" the surface. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table of this BSpline surface. */
  RemoveUKnot(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer, Tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Reduces to M the multiplicity of the knot of index Index in the V parametric direction. If M is 0, the knot is removed. With a modification of this type, the table of poles is also modified. Two different algorithms are used systematically to compute the new poles of the surface. For each pole, the distance between the pole calculated using the first algorithm and the same pole calculated using the second algorithm, is checked. If this distance is less than Tolerance it ensures that the surface is not modified by more than Tolerance. Under these conditions, the function returns true; otherwise, it returns false. A low tolerance prevents modification of the surface. A high tolerance "smoothes" the surface. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table of this BSpline surface. */
  RemoveVKnot(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer, Tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot of range UIndex in the UKnots sequence. M is the new multiplicity. M must be greater than the previous multiplicity and lower or equal to the degree of the surface in the U parametric direction. Raised if M is not in the range [1, UDegree] Raised if UIndex is not in the range [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] given by the methods with the same name. */
  IncreaseUMultiplicity_1(UIndex: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot of range UIndex in the UKnots sequence. M is the new multiplicity. M must be greater than the previous multiplicity and lower or equal to the degree of the surface in the U parametric direction. Raised if M is not in the range [1, UDegree] Raised if UIndex is not in the range [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] given by the methods with the same name. */
  IncreaseUMultiplicity_2(FromI1: Standard_Integer, ToI2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increments the multiplicity of the consecutives uknots FromI1..ToI2 by step. The multiplicity of each knot FromI1,.....,ToI2 must be lower or equal to the UDegree of the B_spline. Raised if FromI1 or ToI2 is not in the range [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] Raised if one knot has a multiplicity greater than UDegree. */
  IncrementUMultiplicity(FromI1: Standard_Integer, ToI2: Standard_Integer, Step: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of a knot in the V direction. M is the new multiplicity. M should be greater than the previous multiplicity and lower than the degree of the surface in the V parametric direction. Raised if VIndex is not in the range [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] given by the methods with the same name. */
  IncreaseVMultiplicity_1(VIndex: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of a knot in the V direction. M is the new multiplicity. M should be greater than the previous multiplicity and lower than the degree of the surface in the V parametric direction. Raised if VIndex is not in the range [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] given by the methods with the same name. */
  IncreaseVMultiplicity_2(FromI1: Standard_Integer, ToI2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increments the multiplicity of the consecutives vknots FromI1..ToI2 by step. The multiplicity of each knot FromI1,.....,ToI2 must be lower or equal to the VDegree of the B_spline. Raised if FromI1 or ToI2 is not in the range [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] Raised if one knot has a multiplicity greater than VDegree. */
  IncrementVMultiplicity(FromI1: Standard_Integer, ToI2: Standard_Integer, Step: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts a knot value in the sequence of UKnots. If U is a knot value this method increases the multiplicity of the knot if the previous multiplicity was lower than M else it does nothing. The tolerance criterion is ParametricTolerance. ParametricTolerance should be greater or equal than Resolution from package gp. Raised if U is out of the bounds [U1, U2] given by the methods Bounds, the criterion ParametricTolerance is used. Raised if M is not in the range [1, UDegree]. */
  InsertUKnot(U: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Inserts a knot value in the sequence of VKnots. If V is a knot value this method increases the multiplicity of the knot if the previous multiplicity was lower than M otherwise it does nothing. The tolerance criterion is ParametricTolerance. ParametricTolerance should be greater or equal than Resolution from package gp. raises if V is out of the Bounds [V1, V2] given by the methods Bounds, the criterion ParametricTolerance is used. raises if M is not in the range [1, VDegree]. */
  InsertVKnot(V: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Segments the surface between U1 and U2 in the U-Direction. between V1 and V2 in the V-Direction. The control points are modified, the first and the last point are not the same. Parameters theUTolerance, theVTolerance define the possible proximity along the corresponding direction of the segment boundaries and B-spline knots to treat them as equal. Warnings : Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the surface <me> or if the surface makes loop. raises if U2 < U1 or V2 < V1. Standard_DomainError if U2 - U1 exceeds the uperiod for uperiodic surfaces. i.e. ((U2 - U1) - UPeriod) > Precision::PConfusion(). Standard_DomainError if V2 - V1 exceeds the vperiod for vperiodic surfaces. i.e. ((V2 - V1) - VPeriod) > Precision::PConfusion()). */
  Segment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, V1: Standard_Real, V2: Standard_Real, theUTolerance: Standard_Real, theVTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Segments the surface between U1 and U2 in the U-Direction. between V1 and V2 in the V-Direction. same as Segment but do nothing if U1 and U2 (resp. V1 and V2) are equal to the bounds in U (resp. in V) of <me>. For example, if <me> is periodic in V, it will be always periodic in V after the segmentation if the bounds in V are unchanged Parameters theUTolerance, theVTolerance define the possible proximity along the corresponding direction of the segment boundaries and B-spline knots to treat them as equal. Warnings : Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the surface <me> or if the surface makes loop. raises if U2 < U1 or V2 < V1. Standard_DomainError if U2 - U1 exceeds the uperiod for uperiodic surfaces. i.e. ((U2 - U1) - UPeriod) > Precision::PConfusion(). Standard_DomainError if V2 - V1 exceeds the vperiod for vperiodic surfaces. i.e. ((V2 - V1) - VPeriod) > Precision::PConfusion()). */
  CheckAndSegment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, V1: Standard_Real, V2: Standard_Real, theUTolerance: Standard_Real, theVTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Substitutes the UKnots of range UIndex with K. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUKnots Raised if K >= UKnots(UIndex+1) or K <= UKnots(UIndex-1) */
  SetUKnot_1(UIndex: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes all the U-knots of the surface. The multiplicity of the knots are not modified. Raised if there is an index such that UK (Index+1) <= UK (Index). Raised if UK.Lower() < 1 or UK.Upper() > NbUKnots */
  SetUKnots(UK: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Substitutes the UKnots of range UIndex with K. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUKnots Raised if K >= UKnots(UIndex+1) or K <= UKnots(UIndex-1) */
  SetUKnot_2(UIndex: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Substitutes the VKnots of range VIndex with K. Raised if VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVKnots Raised if K >= VKnots(VIndex+1) or K <= VKnots(VIndex-1) */
  SetVKnot_1(VIndex: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes all the V-knots of the surface. The multiplicity of the knots are not modified. Raised if there is an index such that VK (Index+1) <= VK (Index). Raised if VK.Lower() < 1 or VK.Upper() > NbVKnots */
  SetVKnots(VK: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Substitutes the VKnots of range VIndex with K. Raised if VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVKnots Raised if K >= VKnots(VIndex+1) or K <= VKnots(VIndex-1) */
  SetVKnot_2(VIndex: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Locates the parametric value U in the sequence of UKnots. If "WithKnotRepetition" is True we consider the knot's representation with repetition of multiple knot value, otherwise we consider the knot's representation with no repetition of multiple knot values. UKnots (I1) <= U <= UKnots (I2) . if I1 = I2 U is a knot value (the tolerance criterion ParametricTolerance is used). . if I1 < 1 => U < UKnots(1) - std::abs(ParametricTolerance) . if I2 > NbUKnots => U > UKnots(NbUKnots)+std::abs(ParametricTolerance) */
  LocateU(U: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, WithKnotRepetition: Standard_Boolean): { I1: number; I2: number };
  /** Locates the parametric value V in the sequence of knots. If "WithKnotRepetition" is True we consider the knot's representation with repetition of multiple knot value, otherwise we consider the knot's representation with no repetition of multiple knot values. VKnots (I1) <= V <= VKnots (I2) . if I1 = I2 V is a knot value (the tolerance criterion ParametricTolerance is used). . if I1 < 1 => V < VKnots(1) - std::abs(ParametricTolerance) . if I2 > NbVKnots => V > VKnots(NbVKnots)+std::abs(ParametricTolerance) poles insertion and removing The following methods are available only if the surface is Uniform or QuasiUniform in the considered direction The knot repartition is modified. */
  LocateV(V: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, WithKnotRepetition: Standard_Boolean): { I1: number; I2: number };
  /** Substitutes the pole of range (UIndex, VIndex) with P. If the surface is rational the weight of range (UIndex, VIndex) is not modified. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles or VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. */
  SetPole_1(UIndex: Standard_Integer, VIndex: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Substitutes the pole of range (UIndex, VIndex) with P. If the surface is rational the weight of range (UIndex, VIndex) is not modified. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles or VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. */
  SetPole_2(UIndex: Standard_Integer, VIndex: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes a column of poles or a part of this column. Raised if Vindex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. Raised if CPoles.Lower() < 1 or CPoles.Upper() > NbUPoles. */
  SetPoleCol_1(VIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): void;
  /** Changes a column of poles or a part of this column. Raised if Vindex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. Raised if CPoles.Lower() < 1 or CPoles.Upper() > NbUPoles. */
  SetPoleCol_2(VIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, CPoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Changes a row of poles or a part of this row with the corresponding weights. If the surface was rational it can become non rational. If the surface was non rational it can become rational. Raised if Uindex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles. Raised if CPoles.Lower() < 1 or CPoles.Upper() > NbVPoles raises if the bounds of CPoleWeights are not the same as the bounds of CPoles. Raised if one of the weight value of CPoleWeights is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  SetPoleRow_1(UIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, CPoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Changes a row of poles or a part of this row with the corresponding weights. If the surface was rational it can become non rational. If the surface was non rational it can become rational. Raised if Uindex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles. Raised if CPoles.Lower() < 1 or CPoles.Upper() > NbVPoles raises if the bounds of CPoleWeights are not the same as the bounds of CPoles. Raised if one of the weight value of CPoleWeights is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  SetPoleRow_2(UIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): void;
  /** Changes the weight of the pole of range UIndex, VIndex. If the surface was non rational it can become rational. If the surface was rational it can become non rational. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles or VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles Raised if weight is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp */
  SetWeight(UIndex: Standard_Integer, VIndex: Standard_Integer, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes a column of weights of a part of this column. Raised if VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles Raised if CPoleWeights.Lower() < 1 or CPoleWeights.Upper() > NbUPoles. Raised if a weight value is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  SetWeightCol(VIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Changes a row of weights or a part of this row. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles Raised if CPoleWeights.Lower() < 1 or CPoleWeights.Upper() > NbVPoles. Raised if a weight value is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  SetWeightRow(UIndex: Standard_Integer, CPoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Move a point with parameter U and V to P. given u,v as parameters) to reach a new position UIndex1, UIndex2, VIndex1, VIndex2: indicates the poles which can be moved if Problem in BSplineBasis calculation, no change for the curve and UFirstIndex, VLastIndex = 0 VFirstIndex, VLastIndex = 0 Raised if UIndex1 < UIndex2 or VIndex1 < VIndex2 or UIndex1 < 1 || UIndex1 > NbUPoles or UIndex2 < 1 || UIndex2 > NbUPoles VIndex1 < 1 || VIndex1 > NbVPoles or VIndex2 < 1 || VIndex2 > NbVPoles characteristics of the surface */
  MovePoint(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, UIndex1: Standard_Integer, UIndex2: Standard_Integer, VIndex1: Standard_Integer, VIndex2: Standard_Integer): { UFirstIndex: number; ULastIndex: number; VFirstIndex: number; VLastIndex: number };
  /** Returns true if the first control points row and the last control points row are identical. The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the first control points column and the last last control points column are identical. The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the order of continuity of the surface in the U direction is N. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCNu(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the order of continuity of the surface in the V direction is N. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCNv(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the surface is closed in the U direction and if the B-spline has been turned into a periodic surface using the function SetUPeriodic. */
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False if for each row of weights all the weights are identical. The tolerance criterion is resolution from package gp. Example : |1.0, 1.0, 1.0| if Weights = |0.5, 0.5, 0.5| returns False |2.0, 2.0, 2.0| */
  IsURational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the surface is closed in the V direction and if the B-spline has been turned into a periodic surface using the function SetVPeriodic. */
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False if for each column of weights all the weights are identical. The tolerance criterion is resolution from package gp. Examples : |1.0, 2.0, 0.5| if Weights = |1.0, 2.0, 0.5| returns False |1.0, 2.0, 0.5| */
  IsVRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the surface. Warnings : These parametric values are the bounds of the array of knots UKnots and VKnots only if the first knots and the last knots have a multiplicity equal to UDegree + 1 or VDegree + 1 */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Returns the continuity of the surface : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Surface, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Surface, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Surface, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. A B-spline surface is infinitely continuously differentiable for the couple of parameters U, V such that U != UKnots(i) and V != VKnots(i). The continuity of the surface at a knot value depends on the multiplicity of this knot. Example : If the surface is C1 in the V direction and C2 in the U direction this function returns Shape = C1. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Computes the Index of the UKnots which gives the first parametric value of the surface in the U direction. The UIso curve corresponding to this value is a boundary curve of the surface. */
  FirstUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the Index of the VKnots which gives the first parametric value of the surface in the V direction. The VIso curve corresponding to this knot is a boundary curve of the surface. */
  FirstVKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the Index of the UKnots which gives the last parametric value of the surface in the U direction. The UIso curve corresponding to this knot is a boundary curve of the surface. */
  LastUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the Index of the VKnots which gives the last parametric value of the surface in the V direction. The VIso curve corresponding to this knot is a boundary curve of the surface. */
  LastVKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of knots in the U direction. */
  NbUKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns number of poles in the U direction. */
  NbUPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of knots in the V direction. */
  NbVKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of poles in the V direction. */
  NbVPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the pole of range (UIndex, VIndex). Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles or VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. */
  Pole(UIndex: Standard_Integer, VIndex: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline surface. */
  Poles_1(P: TColgp_Array2OfPnt): void;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline surface. */
  Poles_2(): TColgp_Array2OfPnt;
  /** Returns the degree of the normalized B-splines Ni,n in the U direction. */
  UDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the Knot value of range UIndex. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUKnots */
  UKnot(UIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns NonUniform or Uniform or QuasiUniform or PiecewiseBezier. If all the knots differ by a positive constant from the preceding knot in the U direction the B-spline surface can be : Uniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1, QuasiUniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1 except for the first and last knot which are of multiplicity Degree + 1, PiecewiseBezier if the first and last knots have multiplicity Degree + 1 and if interior knots have multiplicity Degree otherwise the surface is non uniform in the U direction The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  UKnotDistribution(): GeomAbs_BSplKnotDistribution;
  /** Returns the knots in the U direction. */
  UKnots_1(Ku: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the knots in the U direction. */
  UKnots_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns the uknots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : Ku = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  UKnotSequence_1(Ku: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the uknots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : Ku = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  UKnotSequence_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns the multiplicity value of knot of range UIndex in the u direction. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUKnots. */
  UMultiplicity(UIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the multiplicities of the knots in the U direction. */
  UMultiplicities_1(Mu: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): void;
  /** Returns the multiplicities of the knots in the U direction. */
  UMultiplicities_2(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns the degree of the normalized B-splines Ni,d in the V direction. */
  VDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the Knot value of range VIndex. Raised if VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVKnots */
  VKnot(VIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns NonUniform or Uniform or QuasiUniform or PiecewiseBezier. If all the knots differ by a positive constant from the preceding knot in the V direction the B-spline surface can be : Uniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1, QuasiUniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1 except for the first and last knot which are of multiplicity Degree + 1, PiecewiseBezier if the first and last knots have multiplicity Degree + 1 and if interior knots have multiplicity Degree otherwise the surface is non uniform in the V direction. The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  VKnotDistribution(): GeomAbs_BSplKnotDistribution;
  /** Returns the knots in the V direction. */
  VKnots_1(Kv: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the knots in the V direction. */
  VKnots_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns the vknots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : Ku = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  VKnotSequence_1(Kv: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the vknots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : Ku = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  VKnotSequence_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns the multiplicity value of knot of range VIndex in the v direction. Raised if VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVKnots */
  VMultiplicity(VIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the multiplicities of the knots in the V direction. */
  VMultiplicities_1(Mv: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): void;
  /** Returns the multiplicities of the knots in the V direction. */
  VMultiplicities_2(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns the weight value of range UIndex, VIndex. Raised if UIndex < 1 or UIndex > NbUPoles or VIndex < 1 or VIndex > NbVPoles. */
  Weight(UIndex: Standard_Integer, VIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline surface. value and derivatives computation */
  Weights_1(W: TColStd_Array2OfReal): void;
  /** Returns a const reference to the weights array. For rational surfaces: the internal owning weights array. For non-rational surfaces: a non-owning view of unit weights from BSplSLib. The array is always sized to match NbUPoles() x NbVPoles(). Do NOT modify elements through the returned reference. */
  WeightsArray(): TColStd_Array2OfReal;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline surface. value and derivatives computation */
  Weights_2(): TColStd_Array2OfReal;
  /** Computes the point of parameter (U, V) on the surface. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point and first partial derivatives at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 2nd order at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and partial derivatives up to 3rd order at (U, V). Raises an exception if the surface continuity is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in U and Nv in V at (U, V). Raises an exception on failure. Raised if the continuity of the surface is not CNu in the U direction and CNv in the V direction. Raised if Nu + Nv < 1 or Nu < 0 or Nv < 0. The following functions computes the point for the parametric values (U, V) and the derivatives at this point on the B-spline surface patch delimited with the knots FromUK1, FromVK1 and the knots ToUK2, ToVK2. (U, V) can be out of these parametric bounds but for the computation we only use the definition of the surface between these knots. This method is useful to compute local derivative, if the order of continuity of the whole surface is not greater enough. Inside the parametric knot's domain previously defined the evaluations are the same as if we consider the whole definition of the surface. Of course the evaluations are different outside this parametric domain. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalD0(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the surface is not C1 between the knots FromUK1, ToUK2 and FromVK1, ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalD1(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the surface is not C2 between the knots FromUK1, ToUK2 and FromVK1, ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalD2(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the surface is not C3 between the knots FromUK1, ToUK2 and FromVK1, ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalD3(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, D1U: gp_Vec, D1V: gp_Vec, D2U: gp_Vec, D2V: gp_Vec, D2UV: gp_Vec, D3U: gp_Vec, D3V: gp_Vec, D3UUV: gp_Vec, D3UVV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the surface is not CNu between the knots FromUK1, ToUK2 and CNv between the knots FromVK1, ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalDN(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, Nu: Standard_Integer, Nv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U, V on the BSpline surface patch defines between the knots UK1 UK2, VK1, VK2. U can be out of the bounds [Knot UK1, Knot UK2] and V can be outof the bounds [Knot VK1, Knot VK2] but for the computation we only use the definition of the surface between these knot values. Raises if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2. */
  LocalValue(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the U isoparametric curve. A B-spline curve is returned. */
  UIso_1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the V isoparametric curve. A B-spline curve is returned. */
  VIso_1(V: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the U isoparametric curve. A B-spline curve is returned. */
  UIso_2(U: Standard_Real, CheckRational: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Computes the V isoparametric curve. A B-spline curve is returned. */
  VIso_2(V: Standard_Real, CheckRational: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this BSpline surface. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns the value of the maximum degree of the normalized B-spline basis functions in the u and v directions. */
  static MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes two tolerance values for this BSpline surface, based on the given tolerance in 3D space Tolerance3D. The tolerances computed are: UTolerance in the u parametric direction, and VTolerance in the v parametric direction. If f(u,v) is the equation of this BSpline surface, UTolerance and VTolerance guarantee that : | u1 - u0 | < UTolerance and | v1 - v0 | < VTolerance ====> |f (u1,v1) - f (u0,v0)| < Tolerance3D */
  Resolution(Tolerance3D: Standard_Real): { UTolerance: number; VTolerance: number };
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this BSpline surface. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_BSplineSurface_1 extends Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, UKnots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, VKnots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, UMults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, VMults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, UDegree: Standard_Integer, VDegree: Standard_Integer, UPeriodic: Standard_Boolean, VPeriodic: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BSplineSurface_2 extends Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, Weights: TColStd_Array2OfReal, UKnots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, VKnots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, UMults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, VMults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, UDegree: Standard_Integer, VDegree: Standard_Integer, UPeriodic: Standard_Boolean, VPeriodic: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BSplineSurface_3 extends Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(theOther: Geom_BSplineSurface);
  }

export declare class Geom_BSplineCurve extends Geom_BoundedCurve {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Increases the degree of this BSpline curve to Degree. As a result, the poles, weights and multiplicities tables are modified; the knots table is not changed. Nothing is done if Degree is less than or equal to the current degree. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if Degree is greater than Geom_BSplineCurve::MaxDegree(). */
  IncreaseDegree(Degree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot <Index> to <M>. If <M> is lower or equal to the current multiplicity nothing is done. If <M> is higher than the degree, the degree is used. If <Index> is not in [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  IncreaseMultiplicity_1(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot <Index> to <M>. If <M> is lower or equal to the current multiplicity nothing is done. If <M> is higher than the degree, the degree is used. If <Index> is not in [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  IncreaseMultiplicity_2(I1: Standard_Integer, I2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increment the multiplicities of the knots in [I1,I2] by <M>. If <M> is not positive nothing is done. For each knot the resulting multiplicity is limited to the Degree. If <I1,I2> are not in [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  IncrementMultiplicity(I1: Standard_Integer, I2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts a knot value in the sequence of knots. If is an existing knot the multiplicity is increased by <M>. If U is not on the parameter range nothing is done. If the multiplicity is negative or null nothing is done. The new multiplicity is limited to the degree. The tolerance criterion for knots equality is the max of Epsilon(U) and ParametricTolerance. */
  InsertKnot(U: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Inserts a set of knots values in the sequence of knots. For each U = Knots(i), M = Mults(i) If is an existing knot the multiplicity is increased by <M> if <Add> is True, increased to <M> if <Add> is False. If U is not on the parameter range nothing is done. If the multiplicity is negative or null nothing is done. The new multiplicity is limited to the degree. The tolerance criterion for knots equality is the max of Epsilon(U) and ParametricTolerance. */
  InsertKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Mults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Reduces the multiplicity of the knot of index Index to M. If M is equal to 0, the knot is removed. With a modification of this type, the array of poles is also modified. Two different algorithms are systematically used to compute the new poles of the curve. If, for each pole, the distance between the pole calculated using the first algorithm and the same pole calculated using the second algorithm, is less than Tolerance, this ensures that the curve is not modified by more than Tolerance. Under these conditions, true is returned; otherwise, false is returned. A low tolerance is used to prevent modification of the curve. A high tolerance is used to "smooth" the curve. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. pole insertion and pole removing this operation is limited to the Uniform or QuasiUniform BSplineCurve. The knot values are modified. If the BSpline is NonUniform or Piecewise Bezier an exception Construction error is raised. */
  RemoveKnot(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer, Tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Changes the direction of parametrization of <me>. The Knot sequence is modified, the FirstParameter and the LastParameter are not modified. The StartPoint of the initial curve becomes the EndPoint of the reversed curve and the EndPoint of the initial curve becomes the StartPoint of the reversed curve. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. returns UFirst + ULast - U */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by segmenting it between U1 and U2. Either of these values can be outside the bounds of the curve, but U2 must be greater than U1. All data structure tables of this BSpline curve are modified, but the knots located between U1 and U2 are retained. The degree of the curve is not modified. Parameter theTolerance defines the possible proximity of the segment boundaries and B-spline knots to treat them as equal. Warnings : Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the curve <me> or if the curve makes loop. After the segmentation the length of a curve can be null. raises if U2 < U1. Standard_DomainError if U2 - U1 exceeds the period for periodic curves. i.e. ((U2 - U1) - Period) > Precision::PConfusion(). */
  Segment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, theTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the value K to the knot of index Index in the knots table. This is a relatively local modification because K must be such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) The second syntax allows you also to increase the multiplicity of the knot to M (but it is not possible to decrease the multiplicity of the knot with this function). Standard_ConstructionError if: K is not such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) M is greater than the degree of this BSpline curve or lower than the previous multiplicity of knot of index Index in the knots table. Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetKnot_1(Index: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the array K to its knots table. The multiplicity of the knots is not modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the values in the array K are not in ascending order. Standard_OutOfRange if the bounds of the array K are not respectively 1 and the number of knots of this BSpline curve. */
  SetKnots(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the value K to the knot of index Index in the knots table. This is a relatively local modification because K must be such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) The second syntax allows you also to increase the multiplicity of the knot to M (but it is not possible to decrease the multiplicity of the knot with this function). Standard_ConstructionError if: K is not such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) M is greater than the degree of this BSpline curve or lower than the previous multiplicity of knot of index Index in the knots table. Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetKnot_2(Index: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** returns the parameter normalized within the period if the curve is periodic : otherwise does not do anything */
  PeriodicNormalization(): { U: number };
  /** Changes this BSpline curve into a periodic curve. To become periodic, the curve must first be closed. Next, the knot sequence must be periodic. For this, FirstUKnotIndex and LastUKnotIndex are used to compute I1 and I2, the indexes in the knots array of the knots corresponding to the first and last parameters of this BSpline curve. The period is therefore: Knots(I2) - Knots(I1). Consequently, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if this BSpline curve is not closed. */
  SetPeriodic(): void;
  /** Assigns the knot of index Index in the knots table as the origin of this periodic BSpline curve. As a consequence, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this curve is not periodic. Standard_DomainError if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetOrigin_1(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Assigns the knot of index Index in the knots table as the origin of this periodic BSpline curve. As a consequence, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this curve is not periodic. Standard_DomainError if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetOrigin_2(U: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes this BSpline curve into a non-periodic curve. If this curve is already non-periodic, it is not modified. Note: the poles and knots tables are modified. Warning If this curve is periodic, as the multiplicity of the first and last knots is not modified, and is not equal to Degree + 1, where Degree is the degree of this BSpline curve, the start and end points of the curve are not its first and last poles. */
  SetNotPeriodic(): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning P to the pole of index Index in the poles table. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the poles table. Standard_ConstructionError if Weight is negative or null. */
  SetPole_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning P to the pole of index Index in the poles table. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the poles table. Standard_ConstructionError if Weight is negative or null. */
  SetPole_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the weight for the pole of range Index. If the curve was non rational it can become rational. If the curve was rational it can become non rational. Raised if Index < 1 || Index > NbPoles Raised if Weight <= 0.0 */
  SetWeight(Index: Standard_Integer, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Moves the point of parameter U of this BSpline curve to P. Index1 and Index2 are the indexes in the table of poles of this BSpline curve of the first and last poles designated to be moved. FirstModifiedPole and LastModifiedPole are the indexes of the first and last poles which are effectively modified. In the event of incompatibility between Index1, Index2 and the value U: no change is made to this BSpline curve, and the FirstModifiedPole and LastModifiedPole are returned null. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if: Index1 is greater than or equal to Index2, or Index1 or Index2 is less than 1 or greater than the number of poles of this BSpline curve. */
  MovePoint(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, Index1: Standard_Integer, Index2: Standard_Integer): { FirstModifiedPole: number; LastModifiedPole: number };
  /** Move a point with parameter U to P. and makes it tangent at U be Tangent. StartingCondition = -1 means first can move EndingCondition = -1 means last point can move StartingCondition = 0 means the first point cannot move EndingCondition = 0 means the last point cannot move StartingCondition = 1 means the first point and tangent cannot move EndingCondition = 1 means the last point and tangent cannot move and so forth ErrorStatus != 0 means that there are not enough degree of freedom with the constrain to deform the curve accordingly */
  MovePointAndTangent(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, Tangent: gp_Vec, Tolerance: Standard_Real, StartingCondition: Standard_Integer, EndingCondition: Standard_Integer): { ErrorStatus: number };
  /** Returns the continuity of the curve, the curve is at least C0. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Check if curve has at least G1 continuity in interval [theTf, theTl] Returns true if IsCN(1) or angle between "left" and "right" first derivatives at knots with C0 continuity is less then theAngTol only knots in interval [theTf, theTl] is checked */
  IsG1(theTf: Standard_Real, theTl: Standard_Real, theAngTol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. Warnings : The first and the last point can be different from the first pole and the last pole of the curve. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the curve is periodic. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the weights are not identical. The tolerance criterion is Epsilon of the class Real. */
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the global continuity of the curve : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. For a B-spline curve of degree d if a knot Ui has a multiplicity p the B-spline curve is only Cd-p continuous at Ui. So the global continuity of the curve can't be greater than Cd-p where p is the maximum multiplicity of the interior Knots. In the interior of a knot span the curve is infinitely continuously differentiable. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the degree of this BSpline curve. The degree of a Geom_BSplineCurve curve cannot be greater than Geom_BSplineCurve::MaxDegree(). Computation of value and derivatives */
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the point of parameter U. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this BSpline curve, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Warning On a point where the continuity of the curve is not the one requested, this function impacts the part defined by the parameter with a value greater than U, i.e. the part of the curve to the "right" of the singularity. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. The following functions compute the point of parameter U and the derivatives at this point on the B-spline curve arc defined between the knot FromK1 and the knot ToK2. U can be out of bounds [Knot (FromK1), Knot (ToK2)] but for the computation we only use the definition of the curve between these two knots. This method is useful to compute local derivative, if the order of continuity of the whole curve is not greater enough. Inside the parametric domain Knot (FromK1), Knot (ToK2) the evaluations are the same as if we consider the whole definition of the curve. Of course the evaluations are different outside this parametric domain. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalValue(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD0(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C1 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD1(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C2 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD2(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C3 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD3(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec, V3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not CN between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. Raised if N < 1. */
  LocalDN(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns the last point of the curve. Warnings : The last point of the curve is different from the last pole of the curve if the multiplicity of the last knot is lower than Degree. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the index in the knot array of the knot corresponding to the first or last parameter of this BSpline curve. For a BSpline curve, the first (or last) parameter (which gives the start (or end) point of the curve) is a knot value. However, if the multiplicity of the first (or last) knot is less than Degree + 1, where Degree is the degree of the curve, it is not the first (or last) knot of the curve. */
  FirstUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of this BSpline curve. This is a knot value. The first parameter is the one of the start point of the BSpline curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the knot of range Index. When there is a knot with a multiplicity greater than 1 the knot is not repeated. The method Multiplicity can be used to get the multiplicity of the Knot. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbKnots */
  Knot(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the knot values of the B-spline curve; Warning A knot with a multiplicity greater than 1 is not repeated in the knot table. The Multiplicity function can be used to obtain the multiplicity of each knot. */
  Knots_1(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** returns the knot values of the B-spline curve; Warning A knot with a multiplicity greater than 1 is not repeated in the knot table. The Multiplicity function can be used to obtain the multiplicity of each knot. */
  Knots_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** returns the knots of the B-spline curve. Knots with multiplicit greater than 1 are repeated */
  KnotSequence_1(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** returns the knots of the B-spline curve. Knots with multiplicit greater than 1 are repeated */
  KnotSequence_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns NonUniform or Uniform or QuasiUniform or PiecewiseBezier. If all the knots differ by a positive constant from the preceding knot the BSpline Curve can be : Uniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1, QuasiUniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1 except for the first and last knot which are of multiplicity Degree + 1, PiecewiseBezier if the first and last knots have multiplicity Degree + 1 and if interior knots have multiplicity Degree A piecewise Bezier with only two knots is a BezierCurve. else the curve is non uniform. The tolerance criterion is Epsilon from class Real. */
  KnotDistribution(): GeomAbs_BSplKnotDistribution;
  /** For a BSpline curve the last parameter (which gives the end point of the curve) is a knot value but if the multiplicity of the last knot index is lower than Degree + 1 it is not the last knot of the curve. This method computes the index of the knot corresponding to the last parameter. */
  LastUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the parametric value of the end point of the curve. It is a knot value. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Locates the parametric value U in the sequence of knots. If "WithKnotRepetition" is True we consider the knot's representation with repetition of multiple knot value, otherwise we consider the knot's representation with no repetition of multiple knot values. Knots (I1) <= U <= Knots (I2) . if I1 = I2 U is a knot value (the tolerance criterion ParametricTolerance is used). . if I1 < 1 => U < Knots (1) - std::abs(ParametricTolerance) . if I2 > NbKnots => U > Knots (NbKnots) + std::abs(ParametricTolerance) */
  LocateU(U: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, WithKnotRepetition: Standard_Boolean): { I1: number; I2: number };
  /** Returns the multiplicity of the knots of range Index. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbKnots */
  Multiplicity(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the multiplicity of the knots of the curve. */
  Multiplicities_1(M: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): void;
  /** returns the multiplicity of the knots of the curve. */
  Multiplicities_2(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns the number of knots. This method returns the number of knot without repetition of multiple knots. */
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of poles. */
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the pole of range Index. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbPoles. */
  Pole(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline curve;. */
  Poles_1(P: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): void;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline curve;. */
  Poles_2(): TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  /** Returns the start point of the curve. Warnings : This point is different from the first pole of the curve if the multiplicity of the first knot is lower than Degree. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the weight of the pole of range Index . Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbPoles. */
  Weight(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline curve;. */
  Weights_1(W: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline curve;. */
  Weights_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns a const reference to the weights array. For rational curves: the internal owning weights array. For non-rational curves: a non-owning view of unit weights from BSplCLib. The array is always sized to match NbPoles(). Do NOT modify elements through the returned reference. */
  WeightsArray(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this BSpline curve. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns the value of the maximum degree of the normalized B-spline basis functions in this package. */
  static MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes for this BSpline curve the parametric tolerance UTolerance for a given 3D tolerance Tolerance3D. If f(t) is the equation of this BSpline curve, UTolerance ensures that: | t1 - t0| < Utolerance ===> |f(t1) - f(t0)| < Tolerance3D */
  Resolution(Tolerance3D: Standard_Real): { UTolerance: number };
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this BSpline curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Compare two Bspline curve on identity;. */
  IsEqual(theOther: any, thePreci: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom_BSplineCurve_1 extends Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Multiplicities: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, Degree: Standard_Integer, Periodic: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BSplineCurve_2 extends Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Weights: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Multiplicities: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, Degree: Standard_Integer, Periodic: Standard_Boolean, CheckRational: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom_BSplineCurve_3 extends Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theOther: Geom_BSplineCurve);
  }

export declare class GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface extends Adaptor3d_Surface {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Loads the surface geometry. theSurface underlying geometry */
  Load_1(theSurface: any): void;
  /** Loads the surface geometry. theSurface underlying geometry */
  Load_2(theSurface: any, theUFirst: Standard_Real, theULast: Standard_Real, theVFirst: Standard_Real, theVLast: Standard_Real, theTolU: Standard_Real, theTolV: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the transformation. theTrsf transformation to apply */
  SetTrsf(theTrsf: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns the transformation. */
  Trsf(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns the underlying GeomAdaptor_Surface. */
  Surface(): GeomAdaptor_Surface;
  /** Returns the underlying GeomAdaptor_Surface for modification. */
  ChangeSurface(): GeomAdaptor_Surface;
  /** Returns the underlying Geom_Surface. */
  GeomSurface(): any;
  FirstUParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastUParameter(): Standard_Real;
  FirstVParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastVParameter(): Standard_Real;
  UContinuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  VContinuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of U intervals for continuity . May be one if UContinuity(me) >= */
  NbUIntervals(theS: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of V intervals for continuity . May be one if VContinuity(me) >= */
  NbVIntervals(theS: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the intervals with the requested continuity in the U direction. */
  UIntervals(theT: TColStd_Array1OfReal, theS: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the intervals with the requested continuity in the V direction. */
  VIntervals(theT: TColStd_Array1OfReal, theS: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a surface trimmed in the U direction equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  UTrim(theFirst: Standard_Real, theLast: Standard_Real, theTol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns a surface trimmed in the V direction between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  VTrim(theFirst: Standard_Real, theLast: Standard_Real, theTol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsUClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsVClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsUPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  UPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  IsVPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  VPeriod(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameters U,V on the surface. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  Value(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point of parameters U,V on the surface. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  D0(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real, theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point and the first derivatives on the surface. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  D1(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real, theP: gp_Pnt, theD1U: gp_Vec, theD1V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point, the first and second derivatives on the surface. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  D2(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real, theP: gp_Pnt, theD1U: gp_Vec, theD1V: gp_Vec, theD2U: gp_Vec, theD2V: gp_Vec, theD2UV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the point, the first, second and third derivatives on the surface. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  D3(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real, theP: gp_Pnt, theD1U: gp_Vec, theD1V: gp_Vec, theD2U: gp_Vec, theD2V: gp_Vec, theD2UV: gp_Vec, theD3U: gp_Vec, theD3V: gp_Vec, theD3UUV: gp_Vec, theD3UVV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the derivative of order Nu in the direction U and Nv in the direction V. Applies transformation after evaluation. */
  DN(theU: Standard_Real, theV: Standard_Real, theNu: Standard_Integer, theNv: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** Returns the parametric U resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  UResolution(theR3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parametric V resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  VResolution(theR3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the surface: Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus, BezierSurface, BSplineSurface, SurfaceOfRevolution, SurfaceOfExtrusion, OtherSurface */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_SurfaceType;
  Plane(): gp_Pln;
  Cylinder(): gp_Cylinder;
  Cone(): gp_Cone;
  Sphere(): gp_Sphere;
  Torus(): gp_Torus;
  UDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  NbUPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  VDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  NbVPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbUKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  NbVKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  IsURational(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsVRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  AxeOfRevolution(): gp_Ax1;
  Direction(): gp_Dir;
  BasisCurve(): any;
  BasisSurface(): any;
  OffsetValue(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_1 extends GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_2 extends GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface {
    constructor(theSurface: any, theTrsf: gp_Trsf);
  }

  export declare class GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_3 extends GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface {
    constructor(theSurface: any, theUFirst: Standard_Real, theULast: Standard_Real, theVFirst: Standard_Real, theVLast: Standard_Real, theTrsf: gp_Trsf, theTolU: Standard_Real, theTolV: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare type TopAbs_ShapeEnum = {
  TopAbs_COMPOUND: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_COMPSOLID: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_SOLID: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_SHELL: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_FACE: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_WIRE: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_EDGE: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_VERTEX: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
  TopAbs_SHAPE: TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue;
}

export declare type TopAbs_ShapeEnumValue = 'TopAbs_COMPOUND' | 'TopAbs_COMPSOLID' | 'TopAbs_SOLID' | 'TopAbs_SHELL' | 'TopAbs_FACE' | 'TopAbs_WIRE' | 'TopAbs_EDGE' | 'TopAbs_VERTEX' | 'TopAbs_SHAPE';

export declare type TopAbs_Orientation = {
  TopAbs_FORWARD: TopAbs_OrientationValue;
  TopAbs_REVERSED: TopAbs_OrientationValue;
  TopAbs_INTERNAL: TopAbs_OrientationValue;
  TopAbs_EXTERNAL: TopAbs_OrientationValue;
}

export declare type TopAbs_OrientationValue = 'TopAbs_FORWARD' | 'TopAbs_REVERSED' | 'TopAbs_INTERNAL' | 'TopAbs_EXTERNAL';

export declare class GProp_GProps {
  /** Either initializes the global properties retained by this framework from those retained by the framework Item, or brings together the global properties still retained by this framework with those retained by the framework Item. The value Density, which is 1.0 by default, is used as the density of the system analysed by Item. Sometimes the density will have already been given at the time of construction of the framework Item. This may be the case for example, if Item is a GProp_PGProps framework built to compute the global properties of a set of points ; or another GProp_GProps object which already retains composite global properties. In these cases the real density was perhaps already taken into account at the time of construction of Item. Note that this is not checked: if the density of parts of the system is taken into account two or more times, results of the computation will be false. Notes : The point relative to which the inertia of Item is computed (i.e. the reference point of Item) may be different from the reference point in this framework. Huygens' theorem is applied automatically to transfer inertia values to the reference point in this framework. The function Add is used once per component of the system. After that, you use the interrogation functions available to access values computed for the system. The system whose global properties are already brought together by this framework is referred to as the current system. However, the current system is not retained by this framework, which maintains only its global properties. Exceptions Standard_DomainError if Density is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). */
  Add(Item: GProp_GProps, Density: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the mass of the current system. If no density is attached to the components of the current system the returned value corresponds to : the total length of the edges of the current system if this framework retains only linear properties, as is the case for example, when using only the LinearProperties function to combine properties of lines from shapes, or the total area of the faces of the current system if this framework retains only surface properties, as is the case for example, when using only the SurfaceProperties function to combine properties of surfaces from shapes, or the total volume of the solids of the current system if this framework retains only volume properties, as is the case for example, when using only the VolumeProperties function to combine properties of volumes from solids. Warning A length, an area, or a volume is computed in the current data unit system. The mass of a single object is obtained by multiplying its length, its area or its volume by the given density. You must be consistent with respect to the units used. */
  Mass(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the center of mass of the current system. If the gravitational field is uniform, it is the center of gravity. The coordinates returned for the center of mass are expressed in the absolute Cartesian coordinate system. */
  CentreOfMass(): gp_Pnt;
  /** returns the matrix of inertia. It is a symmetrical matrix. The coefficients of the matrix are the quadratic moments of inertia. | Ixx Ixy Ixz | matrix = | Ixy Iyy Iyz | | Ixz Iyz Izz | The moments of inertia are denoted by Ixx, Iyy, Izz. The products of inertia are denoted by Ixy, Ixz, Iyz. The matrix of inertia is returned in the central coordinate system (G, Gx, Gy, Gz) where G is the centre of mass of the system and Gx, Gy, Gz the directions parallel to the X(1,0,0) Y(0,1,0) Z(0,0,1) directions of the absolute cartesian coordinate system. It is possible to compute the matrix of inertia at another location point using the Huyghens theorem (you can use the method of package GProp : HOperator). */
  MatrixOfInertia(): gp_Mat;
  /** Returns Ix, Iy, Iz, the static moments of inertia of the current system; i.e. the moments of inertia about the three axes of the Cartesian coordinate system. */
  StaticMoments(): { Ix: number; Iy: number; Iz: number };
  /** computes the moment of inertia of the material system about the axis A. */
  MomentOfInertia(A: gp_Ax1): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the principal properties of inertia of the current system. There is always a set of axes for which the products of inertia of a geometric system are equal to 0; i.e. the matrix of inertia of the system is diagonal. These axes are the principal axes of inertia. Their origin is coincident with the center of mass of the system. The associated moments are called the principal moments of inertia. This function computes the eigen values and the eigen vectors of the matrix of inertia of the system. Results are stored by using a presentation framework of principal properties of inertia (GProp_PrincipalProps object) which may be queried to access the value sought. */
  PrincipalProperties(): GProp_PrincipalProps;
  /** Returns the radius of gyration of the current system about the axis A. */
  RadiusOfGyration(A: gp_Ax1): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GProp_GProps_1 extends GProp_GProps {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GProp_GProps_2 extends GProp_GProps {
    constructor(SystemLocation: gp_Pnt);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_Conic extends Geom2d_Curve {
  /** Modifies this conic, redefining its local coordinate system partially, by assigning theA as its axis */
  SetAxis(theA: gp_Ax22d): void;
  /** Assigns the origin and unit vector of axis theA to the origin of the local coordinate system of this conic and X Direction. The other unit vector of the local coordinate system of this conic is recomputed normal to theA, without changing the orientation of the local coordinate system (right-handed or left-handed). */
  SetXAxis(theAX: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Assigns the origin and unit vector of axis theA to the origin of the local coordinate system of this conic and Y Direction. The other unit vector of the local coordinate system of this conic is recomputed normal to theA, without changing the orientation of the local coordinate system (right-handed or left-handed). */
  SetYAxis(theAY: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Modifies this conic, redefining its local coordinate system partially, by assigning theP as its origin. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns the "XAxis" of the conic. This axis defines the origin of parametrization of the conic. This axis and the "Yaxis" define the local coordinate system of the conic. -C++: return const& */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the "YAxis" of the conic. The "YAxis" is perpendicular to the "Xaxis". */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** returns the eccentricity value of the conic e. e = 0 for a circle 0 < e < 1 for an ellipse (e = 0 if MajorRadius = MinorRadius) e > 1 for a hyperbola e = 1 for a parabola */
  Eccentricity(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the location point of the conic. For the circle, the ellipse and the hyperbola it is the center of the conic. For the parabola it is the vertex of the parabola. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the local coordinates system of the conic. */
  Position(): gp_Ax22d;
  /** Reverses the direction of parameterization of <me>. The local coordinate system of the conic is modified. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns GeomAbs_CN which is the global continuity of any conic. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns True, the order of continuity of a conic is infinite. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2d_OffsetCurve extends Geom2d_Curve {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Changes the direction of parametrization of <me>. As a result: the basis curve is reversed, the start point of the initial curve becomes the end point of the reversed curve, the end point of the initial curve becomes the start point of the reversed curve, and the first and last parameters are recomputed. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on this offset curve. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Changes this offset curve by assigning C as the basis curve from which it is built. If isNotCheckC0 = TRUE checking if basis curve has C0-continuity is not made. Exceptions if isNotCheckC0 = false, Standard_ConstructionError if the curve C is not at least "C1" continuous. */
  SetBasisCurve(C: any, isNotCheckC0: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Changes this offset curve by assigning D as the offset value. */
  SetOffsetValue(D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the basis curve of this offset curve. The basis curve can be an offset curve. */
  BasisCurve(): any;
  /** Continuity of the Offset curve : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, G1 : tangency continuity all along the Curve, G2 : curvature continuity all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. Warnings : Returns the continuity of the basis curve - 1. The offset curve must have a unique normal direction defined at any point. Value and derivatives Warnings : The exception UndefinedValue or UndefinedDerivative is raised if it is not possible to compute a unique offset direction. If T is the first derivative with not null length and Z the direction normal to the plane of the curve, the relation ||T(U) ^ Z|| != 0 must be satisfied to evaluate the offset curve. No check is done at the creation time and we suppose in this package that the offset curve is well defined. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Warning! this should not be called if the basis curve is not at least C1. Nevertheless if used on portion where the curve is C1, it is OK */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Warning! this should not be called if the continuity of the basis curve is not C2. Nevertheless, it's OK to use it on portion where the curve is C2 */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Warning! This should not be called if the continuity of the basis curve is not C3. Nevertheless, it's OK to use it on portion where the curve is C3 */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Warning! This should not be called if the continuity of the basis curve is not C4. Nevertheless, it's OK to use it on portion where the curve is C4 */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Warning! this should not be called raises UndefunedDerivative if the continuity of the basis curve is not CN+1. Nevertheless, it's OK to use it on portion where the curve is CN+1 raises RangeError if N < 1. raises NotImplemented if N > 3. The following functions compute the value and derivatives on the offset curve and returns the derivatives on the basis curve too. The computation of the value and derivatives on the basis curve are used to evaluate the offset curve Warnings : The exception UndefinedValue or UndefinedDerivative is raised if it is not possible to compute a unique offset direction. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of this offset curve. The first parameter corresponds to the start point of the curve. Note: the first and last parameters of this offset curve are also the ones of its basis curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of this offset curve. The last parameter corresponds to the end point. Note: the first and last parameters of this offset curve are also the ones of its basis curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the offset value of this offset curve. */
  Offset(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the start point and the end point of the curve is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Is the order of continuity of the curve N ? Warnings : This method answer True if the continuity of the basis curve is N + 1. We suppose in this class that a normal direction to the basis curve (used to compute the offset curve) is defined at any point on the basis curve. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Is the parametrization of a curve is periodic ? If the basis curve is a circle or an ellipse the corresponding OffsetCurve is periodic. If the basis curve can't be periodic (for example BezierCurve) the OffsetCurve can't be periodic. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of this offset curve, i.e. the period of the basis curve of this offset curve. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if the basis curve is not periodic. */
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this offset curve. Note: the basis curve is also modified. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point of parameter U on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(me->TransformedParameter(U,T)) is the same point as me->Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a coefficient to compute the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point on <me>. Transformed(T)->Value(U * ParametricTransformation(T)) is the same point as Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Creates a new object, which is a copy of this offset curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Returns continuity of the basis curve. */
  GetBasisCurveContinuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_OffsetCurve_1 extends Geom2d_OffsetCurve {
    constructor(C: any, Offset: Standard_Real, isNotCheckC0: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_OffsetCurve_2 extends Geom2d_OffsetCurve {
    constructor(theOther: Geom2d_OffsetCurve);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_Curve extends Geom2d_Geometry {
  /** Changes the direction of parametrization of <me>. The "FirstParameter" and the "LastParameter" are not changed but the orientation of the curve is modified. If the curve is bounded the StartPoint of the initial curve becomes the EndPoint of the reversed curve and the EndPoint of the initial curve becomes the StartPoint of the reversed curve. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on this curve. Note: The point of parameter U on this curve is identical to the point of parameter ReversedParameter(U) on the reversed curve. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the parameter on the curve transformed by T for the point of parameter U on this curve. Note: this function generally returns U but it can be redefined (for example, on a line). */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coefficient required to compute the parametric transformation of this curve when transformation T is applied. This coefficient is the ratio between the parameter of a point on this curve and the parameter of the transformed point on the new curve transformed by T. Note: this function generally returns 1. but it can be redefined (for example, on a line). */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Creates a reversed duplicate Changes the orientation of this curve. The first and last parameters are not changed, but the parametric direction of the curve is reversed. If the curve is bounded: the start point of the initial curve becomes the end point of the reversed curve, and the end point of the initial curve becomes the start point of the reversed curve. Reversed creates a new curve. */
  Reversed(): any;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter. Warnings : It can be RealFirst or RealLast from package Standard if the curve is infinite */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Value of the last parameter. Warnings : It can be RealFirst or RealLast from package Standard if the curve is infinite */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns true if the curve is closed. Examples : Some curves such as circle are always closed, others such as line are never closed (by definition). Some Curves such as OffsetCurve can be closed or not. These curves are considered as closed if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to the Resolution from package gp which is a fixed criterion independent of the application. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the parameter of the curve is periodic. It is possible only if the curve is closed and if the following relation is satisfied : for each parametric value U the distance between the point P(u) and the point P (u + T) is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp, T is the period and must be a constant. There are three possibilities : . the curve is never periodic by definition (SegmentLine) . the curve is always periodic by definition (Circle) . the curve can be defined as periodic (BSpline). In this case a function SetPeriodic allows you to give the shape of the curve. The general rule for this case is : if a curve can be periodic or not the default periodicity set is non periodic and you have to turn (explicitly) the curve into a periodic curve if you want the curve to be periodic. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of this curve. raises if the curve is not periodic */
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** It is the global continuity of the curve : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, G1 : tangency continuity all along the Curve, G2 : curvature continuity all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns true if the degree of continuity of this curve is at least N. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): ResD1;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): ResD2;
  /** Computes the point and first three derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): ResD3;
  /** Computes the Nth derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not CN, or N < 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Returns in P the point of parameter U. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U and the first derivative V1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d, V3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Computes the Nth derivative vector. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on <me>. Implemented with D0. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2d_BezierCurve extends Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Increases the degree of a bezier curve. Degree is the new degree of <me>. raises ConstructionError if Degree is greater than MaxDegree or lower than 2 or lower than the initial degree of <me>. */
  Increase(Degree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts a pole with its weight in the set of poles after the pole of range Index. If the curve was non rational it can become rational if all the weights are not identical. Raised if Index is not in the range [0, NbPoles] Raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleAfter(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Inserts a pole with its weight in the set of poles after the pole of range Index. If the curve was non rational it can become rational if all the weights are not identical. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles+1] Raised if the resulting number of poles is greater than MaxDegree + 1. */
  InsertPoleBefore(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Removes the pole of range Index. If the curve was rational it can become non rational. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  RemovePole(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Reverses the direction of parametrization of <me> Value (NewU) = Value (1 - OldU) */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. returns 1-U */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Segments the curve between U1 and U2 which can be out of the bounds of the curve. The curve is oriented from U1 to U2. The control points are modified, the first and the last point are not the same but the parametrization range is [0, 1] else it could not be a Bezier curve. Warnings: Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the curve <me> or if the curve makes loop. After the segmentation the length of a curve can be null. */
  Segment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Substitutes the pole of range index with P. If the curve <me> is rational the weight of range Index is not modified. raiseD if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  SetPole_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Substitutes the pole of range index with P. If the curve <me> is rational the weight of range Index is not modified. raiseD if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  SetPole_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the weight of the pole of range Index. If the curve <me> is not rational it can become rational if all the weights are not identical. If the curve was rational it can become non rational if all the weights are identical. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] Raised if Weight <= Resolution from package gp */
  SetWeight(Index: Standard_Integer, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to the Resolution from package gp. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Continuity of the curve, returns True. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. A BezierCurve cannot be periodic in this package */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns false if all the weights are identical. The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns GeomAbs_CN, which is the continuity of any Bezier curve. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the polynomial degree of the curve. It is the number of poles less one. In this package the Degree of a Bezier curve cannot be greater than "MaxDegree". */
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first three derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For this Bezier curve, computes the point P of parameter U, or the point P and one or more of the following values: V1, the first derivative vector, V2, the second derivative vector, V3, the third derivative vector. Note: the parameter U can be outside the bounds of the curve. Raises RangeError if N < 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Returns the end point or start point of this Bezier curve. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of this Bezier curve. This is 0.0, which gives the start point of this Bezier curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of this Bezier curve. This is 1.0, which gives the end point of this Bezier curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the number of poles for this Bezier curve. */
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the pole of range Index. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  Pole(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns all the poles of the curve. */
  Poles_1(P: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d): void;
  /** Returns all the poles of the curve. */
  Poles_2(): TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  /** Returns Value (U=1), it is the first control point of the curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the weight of range Index. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, NbPoles] */
  Weight(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns all the weights of the curve. */
  Weights_1(W: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns all the weights of the curve. */
  Weights_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns a const reference to the weights array. For rational curves: the internal owning weights array. For non-rational curves: a non-owning view of unit weights from BSplCLib. The array is always sized to match NbPoles(). Do NOT modify elements through the returned reference. */
  WeightsArray(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this Bezier curve. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Returns the value of the maximum polynomial degree of a BezierCurve. This value is 25. */
  static MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes for this Bezier curve the parametric tolerance UTolerance for a given tolerance Tolerance3D (relative to dimensions in the plane). If f(t) is the equation of this Bezier curve, UTolerance ensures that | t1 - t0| < Utolerance ===> |f(t1) - f(t0)| < ToleranceUV */
  Resolution(ToleranceUV: Standard_Real): { UTolerance: number };
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this Bezier curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Returns Bezier knots {0.0, 1.0} as a static array. */
  Knots(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns Bezier multiplicities for the current degree. */
  Multiplicities(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns Bezier flat knots for the current degree. */
  KnotSequence(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_BezierCurve_1 extends Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(CurvePoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_BezierCurve_2 extends Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(CurvePoles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, PoleWeights: TColStd_Array1OfReal);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_BezierCurve_3 extends Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theOther: Geom2d_BezierCurve);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_Ellipse extends Geom2d_Conic {
  /** Converts the gp_Elips2d ellipse E into this ellipse. */
  SetElips2d(E: gp_Elips2d): void;
  /** Assigns a value to the major radius of this ellipse. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: the major radius of this ellipse becomes less than the minor radius, or MinorRadius is less than 0. */
  SetMajorRadius(MajorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns a value to the minor radius of this ellipse. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: the major radius of this ellipse becomes less than the minor radius, or MinorRadius is less than 0. */
  SetMinorRadius(MinorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Converts this ellipse into a gp_Elips2d ellipse. */
  Elips2d(): gp_Elips2d;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed ellipse for the point of parameter U on this ellipse. For an ellipse, the returned value is: 2.*Pi - U. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the directrices of this ellipse. This directrix is the line normal to the XAxis of the ellipse in the local plane (Z = 0) at a distance d = MajorRadius / e from the center of the ellipse, where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. This line is parallel to the "YAxis". The intersection point between directrix1 and the "XAxis" is the "Location" point of the directrix1. This point is on the positive side of the "XAxis". Raises ConstructionError if Eccentricity = 0.0. (The ellipse degenerates into a circle) */
  Directrix1(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** This line is obtained by the symmetrical transformation of "Directrix1" with respect to the "YAxis" of the ellipse. Raises ConstructionError if Eccentricity = 0.0. (The ellipse degenerates into a circle). */
  Directrix2(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the eccentricity of the ellipse between 0.0 and 1.0 If f is the distance between the center of the ellipse and the Focus1 then the eccentricity e = f / MajorRadius. Returns 0 if MajorRadius = 0 */
  Eccentricity(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the focal distance. The focal distance is the distance between the center and a focus of the ellipse. */
  Focal(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the positive side of the "XAxis" of the ellipse. */
  Focus1(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the second focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the negative side of the "XAxis" of the ellipse. */
  Focus2(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the major radius of this ellipse. */
  MajorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the minor radius of this ellipse. */
  MinorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the parameter of this ellipse. This value is given by the formula p = (1 - e * e) * MajorRadius where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. Returns 0 if MajorRadius = 0 */
  Parameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of this ellipse. This is 0.0, which gives the start point of this ellipse. The start point and end point of an ellipse are coincident. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of this ellipse. This is 2.*Pi, which gives the end point of this ellipse. The start point and end point of an ellipse are coincident. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** return True. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** return True. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns in P the point of parameter U. P = C + MajorRadius * Cos (U) * XDir + MinorRadius * Sin (U) * YDir where C is the center of the ellipse , XDir the direction of the "XAxis" and "YDir" the "YAxis" of the ellipse. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception if the curve continuity is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U. The vectors V1 and V2 are the first and second derivatives at this point. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first second and third derivatives V1 V2 and V3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this ellipse, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this ellipse. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this ellipse. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_Ellipse_1 extends Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(E: gp_Elips2d);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Ellipse_2 extends Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(MajorAxis: gp_Ax2d, MajorRadius: Standard_Real, MinorRadius: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Ellipse_3 extends Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax22d, MajorRadius: Standard_Real, MinorRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_BoundedCurve extends Geom2d_Curve {
  /** Returns the end point of the curve. The end point is the value of the curve for the "LastParameter" of the curve. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the start point of the curve. The start point is the value of the curve for the "FirstParameter" of the curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2d_BSplineCurve extends Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
  /** Returns true if an evaluation representation is attached. */
  HasEvalRepresentation(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the current evaluation representation descriptor (may be null). */
  EvalRepresentation(): any;
  /** Sets a new evaluation representation. Validates descriptor data and ensures no circular references. */
  SetEvalRepresentation(theDesc: any): void;
  /** Removes the evaluation representation. */
  ClearEvalRepresentation(): void;
  /** Increases the degree of this BSpline curve to Degree. As a result, the poles, weights and multiplicities tables are modified; the knots table is not changed. Nothing is done if Degree is less than or equal to the current degree. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if Degree is greater than Geom2d_BSplineCurve::MaxDegree(). */
  IncreaseDegree(Degree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot <Index> to <M>. If <M> is lower or equal to the current multiplicity nothing is done. If <M> is higher than the degree, the degree is used. If <Index> is not in [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  IncreaseMultiplicity_1(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases the multiplicity of the knot <Index> to <M>. If <M> is lower or equal to the current multiplicity nothing is done. If <M> is higher than the degree, the degree is used. If <Index> is not in [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  IncreaseMultiplicity_2(I1: Standard_Integer, I2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Increases by M the multiplicity of the knots of indexes I1 to I2 in the knots table of this BSpline curve. For each knot, the resulting multiplicity is limited to the degree of this curve. If M is negative, nothing is done. As a result, the poles and weights tables of this BSpline curve are modified. Warning It is forbidden to modify the multiplicity of the first or last knot of a non-periodic curve. Be careful as Geom2d does not protect against this. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if I1 or I2 is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  IncrementMultiplicity(I1: Standard_Integer, I2: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Inserts a knot value in the sequence of knots. If is an existing knot the multiplicity is increased by <M>. If U is not on the parameter range nothing is done. If the multiplicity is negative or null nothing is done. The new multiplicity is limited to the degree. The tolerance criterion for knots equality is the max of Epsilon(U) and ParametricTolerance. Warning If U is less than the first parameter or greater than the last parameter of this BSpline curve, nothing is done. If M is negative or null, nothing is done. The multiplicity of a knot is limited to the degree of this BSpline curve. */
  InsertKnot(U: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Inserts the values of the array Knots, with the respective multiplicities given by the array Mults, into the knots table of this BSpline curve. If a value of the array Knots is an existing knot, its multiplicity is: increased by M, if Add is true, or increased to M, if Add is false (default value). The tolerance criterion used for knot equality is the larger of the values ParametricTolerance (defaulted to 0.) and double::Epsilon(U), where U is the current knot value. Warning For a value of the array Knots which is less than the first parameter or greater than the last parameter of this BSpline curve, nothing is done. For a value of the array Mults which is negative or null, nothing is done. The multiplicity of a knot is limited to the degree of this BSpline curve. */
  InsertKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Mults: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, Add: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Reduces the multiplicity of the knot of index Index to M. If M is equal to 0, the knot is removed. With a modification of this type, the array of poles is also modified. Two different algorithms are systematically used to compute the new poles of the curve. If, for each pole, the distance between the pole calculated using the first algorithm and the same pole calculated using the second algorithm, is less than Tolerance, this ensures that the curve is not modified by more than Tolerance. Under these conditions, true is returned; otherwise, false is returned. A low tolerance is used to prevent modification of the curve. A high tolerance is used to "smooth" the curve. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  RemoveKnot(Index: Standard_Integer, M: Standard_Integer, Tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** The new pole is inserted after the pole of range Index. If the curve was non rational it can become rational. Raised if the B-spline is NonUniform or PiecewiseBezier or if Weight <= 0.0 Raised if Index is not in the range [1, Number of Poles] */
  InsertPoleAfter(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** The new pole is inserted before the pole of range Index. If the curve was non rational it can become rational. Raised if the B-spline is NonUniform or PiecewiseBezier or if Weight <= 0.0 Raised if Index is not in the range [1, Number of Poles] */
  InsertPoleBefore(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Removes the pole of range Index If the curve was rational it can become non rational. Raised if the B-spline is NonUniform or PiecewiseBezier. Raised if the number of poles of the B-spline curve is lower or equal to 2 before removing. Raised if Index is not in the range [1, Number of Poles] */
  RemovePole(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Reverses the orientation of this BSpline curve. As a result the knots and poles tables are modified; the start point of the initial curve becomes the end point of the reversed curve; the end point of the initial curve becomes the start point of the reversed curve. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on this BSpline curve. The returned value is: UFirst + ULast - U, where UFirst and ULast are the values of the first and last parameters of this BSpline curve. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by segmenting it between U1 and U2. Either of these values can be outside the bounds of the curve, but U2 must be greater than U1. All data structure tables of this BSpline curve are modified, but the knots located between U1 and U2 are retained. The degree of the curve is not modified. Parameter theTolerance defines the possible proximity of the segment boundaries and B-spline knots to treat them as equal. Warnings: Even if <me> is not closed it can become closed after the segmentation for example if U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of the curve <me> or if the curve makes loop. After the segmentation the length of a curve can be null. The segmentation of a periodic curve over an interval corresponding to its period generates a non-periodic curve with equivalent geometry. Exceptions Standard_DomainError if U2 is less than U1. raises if U2 < U1. Standard_DomainError if U2 - U1 exceeds the period for periodic curves. i.e. ((U2 - U1) - Period) > Precision::PConfusion(). */
  Segment(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, theTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the value K to the knot of index Index in the knots table. This is a relatively local modification because K must be such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: K is not such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) M is greater than the degree of this BSpline curve or lower than the previous multiplicity of knot of index Index in the knots table. Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetKnot_1(Index: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the array K to its knots table. The multiplicity of the knots is not modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the values in the array K are not in ascending order. Standard_OutOfRange if the bounds of the array K are not respectively 1 and the number of knots of this BSpline curve. */
  SetKnots(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning the value K to the knot of index Index in the knots table. This is a relatively local modification because K must be such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: K is not such that: Knots(Index - 1) < K < Knots(Index + 1) M is greater than the degree of this BSpline curve or lower than the previous multiplicity of knot of index Index in the knots table. Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetKnot_2(Index: Standard_Integer, K: Standard_Real, M: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes the parameter normalized within the "first" period of this BSpline curve, if it is periodic: the returned value is in the range Param1 and Param1 + Period, where: Param1 is the "first parameter", and Period the period of this BSpline curve. Note: If this curve is not periodic, U is not modified. */
  PeriodicNormalization(): { U: number };
  /** Changes this BSpline curve into a periodic curve. To become periodic, the curve must first be closed. Next, the knot sequence must be periodic. For this, FirstUKnotIndex and LastUKnotIndex are used to compute I1 and I2, the indexes in the knots array of the knots corresponding to the first and last parameters of this BSpline curve. The period is therefore Knot(I2) - Knot(I1). Consequently, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if this BSpline curve is not closed. */
  SetPeriodic(): void;
  /** Assigns the knot of index Index in the knots table as the origin of this periodic BSpline curve. As a consequence, the knots and poles tables are modified. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this curve is not periodic. Standard_DomainError if Index is outside the bounds of the knots table. */
  SetOrigin(Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Changes this BSpline curve into a non-periodic curve. If this curve is already non-periodic, it is not modified. Note that the poles and knots tables are modified. Warning If this curve is periodic, as the multiplicity of the first and last knots is not modified, and is not equal to Degree + 1, where Degree is the degree of this BSpline curve, the start and end points of the curve are not its first and last poles. */
  SetNotPeriodic(): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning P to the pole of index Index in the poles table. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the poles table. Standard_ConstructionError if Weight is negative or null. */
  SetPole_1(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Modifies this BSpline curve by assigning P to the pole of index Index in the poles table. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the poles table. Standard_ConstructionError if Weight is negative or null. */
  SetPole_2(Index: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the weight Weight to the pole of index Index of the poles table. If the curve was non rational it can become rational. If the curve was rational it can become non rational. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is outside the bounds of the poles table. Standard_ConstructionError if Weight is negative or null. */
  SetWeight(Index: Standard_Integer, Weight: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Moves the point of parameter U of this BSpline curve to P. Index1 and Index2 are the indexes in the table of poles of this BSpline curve of the first and last poles designated to be moved. FirstModifiedPole and LastModifiedPole are the indexes of the first and last poles, which are effectively modified. In the event of incompatibility between Index1, Index2 and the value U: no change is made to this BSpline curve, and the FirstModifiedPole and LastModifiedPole are returned null. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if: Index1 is greater than or equal to Index2, or Index1 or Index2 is less than 1 or greater than the number of poles of this BSpline curve. */
  MovePoint(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, Index1: Standard_Integer, Index2: Standard_Integer): { FirstModifiedPole: number; LastModifiedPole: number };
  /** Move a point with parameter U to P. and makes it tangent at U be Tangent. StartingCondition = -1 means first can move EndingCondition = -1 means last point can move StartingCondition = 0 means the first point cannot move EndingCondition = 0 means the last point cannot move StartingCondition = 1 means the first point and tangent cannot move EndingCondition = 1 means the last point and tangent cannot move and so forth ErrorStatus != 0 means that there are not enough degree of freedom with the constrain to deform the curve accordingly */
  MovePointAndTangent(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, Tangent: gp_Vec2d, Tolerance: Standard_Real, StartingCondition: Standard_Integer, EndingCondition: Standard_Integer): { ErrorStatus: number };
  /** Returns true if the degree of continuity of this BSpline curve is at least N. A BSpline curve is at least GeomAbs_C0. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is negative. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Check if curve has at least G1 continuity in interval [theTf, theTl] Returns true if IsCN(1) or angle between "left" and "right" first derivatives at knots with C0 continuity is less then theAngTol only knots in interval [theTf, theTl] is checked */
  IsG1(theTf: Standard_Real, theTl: Standard_Real, theAngTol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the distance between the first point and the last point of the curve is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. Warnings : The first and the last point can be different from the first pole and the last pole of the curve. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the curve is periodic. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the weights are not identical. The tolerance criterion is Epsilon of the class Real. */
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the global continuity of the curve : C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. For a B-spline curve of degree d if a knot Ui has a multiplicity p the B-spline curve is only Cd-p continuous at Ui. So the global continuity of the curve can't be greater than Cd-p where p is the maximum multiplicity of the interior Knots. In the interior of a knot span the curve is infinitely continuously differentiable. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the degree of this BSpline curve. In this class the degree of the basis normalized B-spline functions cannot be greater than "MaxDegree" Computation of value and derivatives */
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For this BSpline curve, computes the point P of parameter U, or the point P and one or more of the following values: V1, the first derivative vector, V2, the second derivative vector, V3, the third derivative vector. Warning On a point where the continuity of the curve is not the one requested, these functions impact the part defined by the parameter with a value greater than U, i.e. the part of the curve to the "right" of the singularity. Raises UndefinedDerivative if the continuity of the curve is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this BSpline curve, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Warning On a point where the continuity of the curve is not the one requested, this function impacts the part defined by the parameter with a value greater than U, i.e. the part of the curve to the "right" of the singularity. Raises UndefinedDerivative if the continuity of the curve is not CN. RangeError if N < 1. The following functions computes the point of parameter U and the derivatives at this point on the B-spline curve arc defined between the knot FromK1 and the knot ToK2. U can be out of bounds [Knot (FromK1), Knot (ToK2)] but for the computation we only use the definition of the curve between these two knots. This method is useful to compute local derivative, if the order of continuity of the whole curve is not greater enough. Inside the parametric domain Knot (FromK1), Knot (ToK2) the evaluations are the same as if we consider the whole definition of the curve. Of course the evaluations are different outside this parametric domain. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalValue(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD0(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C1 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD1(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C2 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD2(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not C3 between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. */
  LocalD3(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d, V3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Raised if the local continuity of the curve is not CN between the knot K1 and the knot K2. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2. Raised if N < 1. */
  LocalDN(U: Standard_Real, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Returns the last point of the curve. Warnings : The last point of the curve is different from the last pole of the curve if the multiplicity of the last knot is lower than Degree. */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** For a B-spline curve the first parameter (which gives the start point of the curve) is a knot value but if the multiplicity of the first knot index is lower than Degree + 1 it is not the first knot of the curve. This method computes the index of the knot corresponding to the first parameter. */
  FirstUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the parametric value of the start point of the curve. It is a knot value. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the knot of range Index. When there is a knot with a multiplicity greater than 1 the knot is not repeated. The method Multiplicity can be used to get the multiplicity of the Knot. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbKnots */
  Knot(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the knot values of the B-spline curve; */
  Knots_1(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** returns the knot values of the B-spline curve; */
  Knots_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns the knots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : K = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  KnotSequence_1(K: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the knots sequence. In this sequence the knots with a multiplicity greater than 1 are repeated. Example : K = {k1, k1, k1, k2, k3, k3, k4, k4, k4} */
  KnotSequence_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns NonUniform or Uniform or QuasiUniform or PiecewiseBezier. If all the knots differ by a positive constant from the preceding knot the BSpline Curve can be : Uniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1, QuasiUniform if all the knots are of multiplicity 1 except for the first and last knot which are of multiplicity Degree + 1, PiecewiseBezier if the first and last knots have multiplicity Degree + 1 and if interior knots have multiplicity Degree A piecewise Bezier with only two knots is a BezierCurve. else the curve is non uniform. The tolerance criterion is Epsilon from class Real. */
  KnotDistribution(): GeomAbs_BSplKnotDistribution;
  /** For a BSpline curve the last parameter (which gives the end point of the curve) is a knot value but if the multiplicity of the last knot index is lower than Degree + 1 it is not the last knot of the curve. This method computes the index of the knot corresponding to the last parameter. */
  LastUKnotIndex(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes the parametric value of the end point of the curve. It is a knot value. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Locates the parametric value U in the sequence of knots. If "WithKnotRepetition" is True we consider the knot's representation with repetition of multiple knot value, otherwise we consider the knot's representation with no repetition of multiple knot values. Knots (I1) <= U <= Knots (I2) . if I1 = I2 U is a knot value (the tolerance criterion ParametricTolerance is used). . if I1 < 1 => U < Knots (1) - std::abs(ParametricTolerance) . if I2 > NbKnots => U > Knots (NbKnots) + std::abs(ParametricTolerance) */
  LocateU(U: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, WithKnotRepetition: Standard_Boolean): { I1: number; I2: number };
  /** Returns the multiplicity of the knots of range Index. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbKnots */
  Multiplicity(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the multiplicity of the knots of the curve. */
  Multiplicities_1(M: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): void;
  /** returns the multiplicity of the knots of the curve. */
  Multiplicities_2(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns the number of knots. This method returns the number of knot without repetition of multiple knots. */
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of poles. */
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the pole of range Index. Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbPoles. */
  Pole(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline curve;. */
  Poles_1(P: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d): void;
  /** Returns the poles of the B-spline curve;. */
  Poles_2(): TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  /** Returns the start point of the curve. Warnings : This point is different from the first pole of the curve if the multiplicity of the first knot is lower than Degree. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the weight of the pole of range Index . Raised if Index < 1 or Index > NbPoles. */
  Weight(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline curve;. */
  Weights_1(W: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the weights of the B-spline curve;. */
  Weights_2(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Returns a const reference to the weights array. For rational curves: the internal owning weights array. For non-rational curves: a non-owning view of unit weights from BSplCLib. The array is always sized to match NbPoles(). Do NOT modify elements through the returned reference. */
  WeightsArray(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this BSpline curve. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Returns the value of the maximum degree of the normalized B-spline basis functions in this package. */
  static MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Computes for this BSpline curve the parametric tolerance UTolerance for a given tolerance Tolerance3D (relative to dimensions in the plane). If f(t) is the equation of this BSpline curve, UTolerance ensures that: | t1 - t0| < Utolerance ===> |f(t1) - f(t0)| < ToleranceUV */
  Resolution(ToleranceUV: Standard_Real): { UTolerance: number };
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this BSpline curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1 extends Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Multiplicities: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, Degree: Standard_Integer, Periodic: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2 extends Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(Poles: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Weights: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Multiplicities: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, Degree: Standard_Integer, Periodic: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3 extends Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theOther: Geom2d_BSplineCurve);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_Circle extends Geom2d_Conic {
  /** Converts the gp_Circ2d circle C into this circle. */
  SetCirc2d(C: gp_Circ2d): void;
  SetRadius(R: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the non persistent circle from gp with the same geometric properties as <me>. */
  Circ2d(): gp_Circ2d;
  /** Returns the radius of this circle. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed circle for the point of parameter U on this circle. For a circle, the returned value is: 2.*Pi - U. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns 0., which is the eccentricity of any circle. */
  Eccentricity(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns 0.0. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns 2*PI. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** returns True. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns True. The period of a circle is 2.*Pi. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns in P the point of parameter U. P = C + R * Cos (U) * XDir + R * Sin (U) * YDir where C is the center of the circle , XDir the XDirection and YDir the YDirection of the circle's local coordinate system. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U and the first derivative V1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter u, the first second and third derivatives V1 V2 and V3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this circle, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Exceptions: Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this circle. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Creates a new object which is a copy of this circle. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_Circle_1 extends Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(C: gp_Circ2d);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Circle_2 extends Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(A: gp_Ax2d, Radius: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Circle_3 extends Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(A: gp_Ax22d, Radius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Geom2d_Geometry extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a Geometry with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and assigns the result to this geometric object. */
  Mirror_1(P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a Geometry with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and assigns the result to this geometric object. */
  Mirror_2(A: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Rotates a Geometry. P is the center of the rotation. Ang is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotate(P: gp_Pnt2d, Ang: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a Geometry. S is the scaling value. */
  Scale(P: gp_Pnt2d, S: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Translates a Geometry. V is the vector of the translation. */
  Translate_1(V: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Translates a Geometry. V is the vector of the translation. */
  Translate_2(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Transformation of a geometric object. This transformation can be a translation, a rotation, a symmetry, a scaling or a complex transformation obtained by combination of the previous elementaries transformations. (see class Transformation of the package Geom2d). The following transformations have the same properties as the previous ones but they don't modified the object itself. A copy of the object is returned. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  Mirrored_1(P: gp_Pnt2d): any;
  Mirrored_2(A: gp_Ax2d): any;
  Rotated(P: gp_Pnt2d, Ang: Standard_Real): any;
  Scaled(P: gp_Pnt2d, S: Standard_Real): any;
  Transformed(T: gp_Trsf2d): any;
  Translated_1(V: gp_Vec2d): any;
  Translated_2(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d): any;
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2d_TrimmedCurve extends Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
  /** Creates a trimmed curve from the basis curve C limited between U1 and U2. . U1 can be greater or lower than U2. . The returned curve is oriented from U1 to U2. . If the basis curve C is periodic there is an ambiguity because two parts are available. In this case by default the trimmed curve has the same orientation as the basis curve (Sense = True). If Sense = False then the orientation of the trimmed curve is opposite to the orientation of the basis curve C. If the curve is closed but not periodic it is not possible to keep the part of the curve including the junction point (except if the junction point is at the beginning or at the end of the trimmed curve) because you could lose the fundamental characteristics of the basis curve which are used for example to compute the derivatives of the trimmed curve. So for a closed curve the rules are the same as for a open curve. Warnings : In this package the entities are not shared. The TrimmedCurve is built with a copy of the curve C. So when C is modified the TrimmedCurve is not modified Warnings : If is periodic and <theAdjustPeriodic> is True, parametrics bounds of the TrimmedCurve, can be different to [<U1>;<U2>}, if <U1> or <U2> are not in the principal period. Include : For more explanation see the scheme given with this class. Raises ConstructionError the C is not periodic and U1 or U2 are out of the bounds of C. Raised if U1 = U2. */
  constructor(C: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean, theAdjustPeriodic: Standard_Boolean)
  /** Changes the direction of parametrization of <me>. The first and the last parametric values are modified. The "StartPoint" of the initial curve becomes the "EndPoint" of the reversed curve and the "EndPoint" of the initial curve becomes the "StartPoint" of the reversed curve. Example - If the trimmed curve is defined by: a basis curve whose parameter range is [ 0.,1. ], and the two trim values U1 (first parameter) and U2 (last parameter), the reversed trimmed curve is defined by: the reversed basis curve, whose parameter range is still [ 0.,1. ], and the two trim values 1. - U2 (first parameter) and 1. - U1 (last parameter). */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the reversed curve for the point of parameter U on <me>. returns UFirst + ULast - U */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Changes this trimmed curve, by redefining the parameter values U1 and U2, which limit its basis curve. Note: If the basis curve is periodic, the trimmed curve has the same orientation as the basis curve if Sense is true (default value) or the opposite orientation if Sense is false. Warning If the basis curve is periodic and theAdjustPeriodic is True, the bounds of the trimmed curve may be different from U1 and U2 if the parametric origin of the basis curve is within the arc of the trimmed curve. In this case, the modified parameter will be equal to U1 or U2 plus or minus the period. If theAdjustPeriodic is False, parameters U1 and U2 will stay unchanged. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: the basis curve is not periodic, and either U1 or U2 are outside the bounds of the basis curve, or U1 is equal to U2. */
  SetTrim(U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean, theAdjustPeriodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the basis curve. Warning This function does not return a constant reference. Consequently, any modification of the returned value directly modifies the trimmed curve. */
  BasisCurve(): any;
  /** Returns the global continuity of the basis curve of this trimmed curve. C0 : only geometric continuity, C1 : continuity of the first derivative all along the Curve, C2 : continuity of the second derivative all along the Curve, C3 : continuity of the third derivative all along the Curve, CN : the order of continuity is infinite. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Purpose Returns True if the order of continuity of the trimmed curve is N. A trimmed curve is at least "C0" continuous. Warnings : The continuity of the trimmed curve can be greater than the continuity of the basis curve because you consider only a part of the basis curve. Raised if N < 0. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the end point of <me>. This point is the evaluation of the curve for the "LastParameter". */
  EndPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the value of the first parameter of <me>. The first parameter is the parameter of the "StartPoint" of the trimmed curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the StartPoint and the EndPoint is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Always returns FALSE (independently of the type of basis curve). */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the period of the basis curve of this trimmed curve. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if the basis curve is not periodic. */
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value of the last parameter of <me>. The last parameter is the parameter of the "EndPoint" of the trimmed curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the start point of <me>. This point is the evaluation of the curve from the "FirstParameter". value and derivatives Warnings : The returned derivatives have the same orientation as the derivatives of the basis curve. */
  StartPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** If the basis curve is an OffsetCurve sometimes it is not possible to do the evaluation of the curve at the parameter U (see class OffsetCurve). */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C2. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Raised if the continuity of the curve is not C3. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this trimmed curve, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Warning The returned derivative vector has the same orientation as the derivative vector of the basis curve, even if the trimmed curve does not have the same orientation as the basis curve. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. geometric transformations */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this trimmed curve. Warning The basis curve is also modified. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Returns the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point of parameter U on <me>. me->Transformed(T)->Value(me->TransformedParameter(U,T)) is the same point as me->Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a coefficient to compute the parameter on the transformed curve for the transform of the point on <me>. Transformed(T)->Value(U * ParametricTransformation(T)) is the same point as Value(U).Transformed(T) This methods calls the basis curve method. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Creates a new object, which is a copy of this trimmed curve. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2d_Line extends Geom2d_Curve {
  /** Set <me> so that <me> has the same geometric properties as L. */
  SetLin2d(L: gp_Lin2d): void;
  /** changes the direction of the line. */
  SetDirection(V: gp_Dir2d): void;
  /** changes the direction of the line. */
  Direction(): gp_Dir2d;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of the line. */
  SetLocation(P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of the line. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Changes the "Location" and a the "Direction" of <me>. */
  SetPosition(A: gp_Ax2d): void;
  Position(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns non persistent line from gp with the same geometric properties as <me> */
  Lin2d(): gp_Lin2d;
  /** Changes the orientation of this line. As a result, the unit vector of the positioning axis of this line is reversed. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the reversed line for the point of parameter U on this line. For a line, the returned value is -U. */
  ReversedParameter(U: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns RealFirst from Standard. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns RealLast from Standard. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False. */
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns GeomAbs_CN, which is the global continuity of any line. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Computes the distance between <me> and the point P. */
  Distance(P: gp_Pnt2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True. */
  IsCN(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns in P the point of parameter U. P (U) = O + U * Dir where O is the "Location" point of the line and Dir the direction of the line. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter u and the first derivative V1. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. V2 is a vector with null magnitude for a line. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** V2 and V3 are vectors with null magnitude for a line. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** For the point of parameter U of this line, computes the vector corresponding to the Nth derivative. Note: if N is greater than or equal to 2, the result is a vector with null magnitude. Exceptions Standard_RangeError if N is less than 1. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Applies the transformation T to this line. */
  Transform(T: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Computes the parameter on the line transformed by T for the point of parameter U on this line. For a line, the returned value is equal to U multiplied by the scale factor of transformation T. */
  TransformedParameter(U: Standard_Real, T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coefficient required to compute the parametric transformation of this line when transformation T is applied. This coefficient is the ratio between the parameter of a point on this line and the parameter of the transformed point on the new line transformed by T. For a line, the returned value is the scale factor of the transformation T. */
  ParametricTransformation(T: gp_Trsf2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Creates a new object, which is a copy of this line. */
  Copy(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2d_Line_1 extends Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(A: gp_Ax2d);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Line_2 extends Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(L: gp_Lin2d);
  }

  export declare class Geom2d_Line_3 extends Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt2d, V: gp_Dir2d);
  }

export declare class Geom2dAdaptor_Curve extends Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Reset currently loaded curve (undone Load()). */
  Reset(): void;
  Load_1(theCurve: any): void;
  Load_2(theCurve: any, theUFirst: Standard_Real, theULast: Standard_Real): void;
  Curve(): any;
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** If necessary, breaks the curve in intervals of continuity . And returns the number of intervals. */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters. i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a curve equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  Trim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve with its first derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d, V3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not CN. Raised if N < 1. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** returns the parametric resolution */
  Resolution(Ruv: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the curve in the current interval: Line, Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola, BezierCurve, BSplineCurve, OtherCurve. */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_CurveType;
  Line(): gp_Lin2d;
  Circle(): gp_Circ2d;
  Ellipse(): gp_Elips2d;
  Hyperbola(): gp_Hypr2d;
  Parabola(): gp_Parab2d;
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  NbSamples(): Standard_Integer;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  /** Point evaluation. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** D1 evaluation. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** D2 evaluation. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** D3 evaluation. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** DN evaluation. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_1 extends Geom2dAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_2 extends Geom2dAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor(C: any);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_3 extends Geom2dAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor(C: any, UFirst: Standard_Real, ULast: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Adaptor2d_Curve2d extends Standard_Transient {
  constructor();
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** If necessary, breaks the curve in intervals of continuity . And returns the number of intervals. */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters. i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a curve equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  Trim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve with its first derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d, V2: gp_Vec2d, V3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not CN. Raised if N < 1. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Returns the parametric resolution corresponding to the real space resolution <R3d>. */
  Resolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the curve in the current interval: Line, Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola, BezierCurve, BSplineCurve, OtherCurve. */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_CurveType;
  Line(): gp_Lin2d;
  Circle(): gp_Circ2d;
  Ellipse(): gp_Elips2d;
  Hyperbola(): gp_Hypr2d;
  Parabola(): gp_Parab2d;
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  NbSamples(): Standard_Integer;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD0(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Computes the point and first derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD1(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first two derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD2(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the point and first three derivatives at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalD3(U: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Computes the Nth derivative at parameter U. Raises an exception on failure. */
  EvalDN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Tool to keep shapes in binary format. */
export declare class BinTools {
  constructor();
  /** Writes the shape to the stream in binary format BinTools_FormatVersion_CURRENT. This alias writes shape with triangulation data. theShape the shape to write out] theStream the stream to output shape into theRange the range of progress indicator to fill in */
  static Write_3(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theRange: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Writes the shape to the stream in binary format BinTools_FormatVersion_CURRENT. This alias writes shape with triangulation data. theShape the shape to write out] theStream the stream to output shape into theRange the range of progress indicator to fill in */
  static Write_4(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theWithTriangles: Standard_Boolean, theWithNormals: Standard_Boolean, theVersion: BinTools_FormatVersion, theRange: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Reads a shape from <theStream> and returns it in <theShape>. */
  static Read_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theRange: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRep_Tool {
  constructor();
  /** If S is Shell, returns True if it has no free boundaries (edges). If S is Wire, returns True if it has no free ends (vertices). (Internal and External sub-shepes are ignored in these checks) If S is Edge, returns True if its vertices are the same. For other shape types returns S.Closed(). */
  static IsClosed_1(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the geometric surface of the face. Returns in <L> the location for the surface. */
  static Surface_1(F: TopoDS_Face, L: TopLoc_Location): any;
  /** Returns the geometric surface of the face. Returns in <L> the location for the surface. */
  static Surface_2(F: TopoDS_Face): any;
  /** Returns the triangulation of the face according to the mesh purpose. theFace the input face to find triangulation. theLocation the face location. theMeshPurpose a mesh purpose to find appropriate triangulation (NONE by default). an active triangulation in case of NONE purpose, the first triangulation appropriate for the input purpose, just the first triangulation if none matching other criteria and input purpose is AnyFallback or null handle if there is no any suitable triangulation. */
  static Triangulation(theFace: TopoDS_Face, theLocation: TopLoc_Location, theMeshPurpose: Poly_MeshPurpose): any;
  /** Returns all triangulations of the face. theFace the input face. theLocation the face location. list of all available face triangulations. */
  static Triangulations(theFace: TopoDS_Face, theLocation: TopLoc_Location): any;
  /** Returns the tolerance of the face. */
  static Tolerance_1(F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the NaturalRestriction flag of the face. */
  static NaturalRestriction(F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if <F> has a surface, false otherwise. */
  static IsGeometric_1(F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if <F> has a surface, false otherwise. */
  static IsGeometric_2(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the 3D curve of the edge. May be a Null handle. Returns in <L> the location for the curve. In <First> and <Last> the parameter range. */
  static Curve_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, L: TopLoc_Location): { result: any; First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the 3D curve of the edge. May be a Null handle. Returns in <L> the location for the curve. In <First> and <Last> the parameter range. */
  static Curve_2(E: TopoDS_Edge): { result: any; First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the 3D polygon of the edge. May be a Null handle. Returns in <L> the location for the polygon. */
  static Polygon3D(E: TopoDS_Edge, L: TopLoc_Location): any;
  /** Returns the curve associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this curve does not exist. Returns in <First> and <Last> the parameter range. If the surface is a plane the curve can be not stored but created a new each time. The flag pointed by <theIsStored> serves to indicate storage status. It is valued if the pointer is non-null. */
  static CurveOnSurface_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face, theIsStored: Standard_Boolean): { result: any; First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the curve associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this curve does not exist. Returns in <First> and <Last> the parameter range. If the surface is a plane the curve can be not stored but created a new each time. The flag pointed by <theIsStored> serves to indicate storage status. It is valued if the pointer is non-null. */
  static CurveOnSurface_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location, theIsStored: Standard_Boolean): { result: any; First: number; Last: number };
  /** For the planar surface builds the 2d curve for the edge by projection of the edge on plane. Returns a NULL handle if the surface is not planar or the projection failed. */
  static CurveOnPlane(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): { result: any; First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the curve associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this curve does not exist. Returns in <First> and <Last> the parameter range. If the surface is a plane the curve can be not stored but created a new each time. The flag pointed by <theIsStored> serves to indicate storage status. It is valued if the pointer is non-null. */
  static CurveOnSurface_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, C: any, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): { First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the curve associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this curve does not exist. Returns in <First> and <Last> the parameter range. If the surface is a plane the curve can be not stored but created a new each time. The flag pointed by <theIsStored> serves to indicate storage status. It is valued if the pointer is non-null. */
  static CurveOnSurface_4(E: TopoDS_Edge, C: any, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location, Index: Standard_Integer): { First: number; Last: number };
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnSurface_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): any;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnSurface_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): any;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnSurface_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, C: any, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): void;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnSurface_4(E: TopoDS_Edge, C: any, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location, Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnTriangulation_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, T: any, L: TopLoc_Location): any;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnTriangulation_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, P: any, T: any, L: TopLoc_Location): void;
  /** Returns the polygon associated to the edge in the parametric space of the face. Returns a NULL handle if this polygon does not exist. */
  static PolygonOnTriangulation_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, P: any, T: any, L: TopLoc_Location, Index: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** If S is Shell, returns True if it has no free boundaries (edges). If S is Wire, returns True if it has no free ends (vertices). (Internal and External sub-shepes are ignored in these checks) If S is Edge, returns True if its vertices are the same. For other shape types returns S.Closed(). */
  static IsClosed_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Boolean;
  /** If S is Shell, returns True if it has no free boundaries (edges). If S is Wire, returns True if it has no free ends (vertices). (Internal and External sub-shepes are ignored in these checks) If S is Edge, returns True if its vertices are the same. For other shape types returns S.Closed(). */
  static IsClosed_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Boolean;
  /** If S is Shell, returns True if it has no free boundaries (edges). If S is Wire, returns True if it has no free ends (vertices). (Internal and External sub-shepes are ignored in these checks) If S is Edge, returns True if its vertices are the same. For other shape types returns S.Closed(). */
  static IsClosed_4(E: TopoDS_Edge, T: any, L: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the tolerance of the face. */
  static Tolerance_2(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the SameParameter flag for the edge. */
  static SameParameter(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the SameRange flag for the edge. */
  static SameRange(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the edge is degenerated. */
  static Degenerated(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gets the range of the 3d curve. */
  static Range_1(E: TopoDS_Edge): { First: number; Last: number };
  /** Gets the range of the 3d curve. */
  static Range_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): { First: number; Last: number };
  /** Gets the range of the 3d curve. */
  static Range_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): { First: number; Last: number };
  /** Gets the UV locations of the extremities of the edge. */
  static UVPoints_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location, PFirst: gp_Pnt2d, PLast: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Gets the UV locations of the extremities of the edge. */
  static UVPoints_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face, PFirst: gp_Pnt2d, PLast: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Sets the UV locations of the extremities of the edge. */
  static SetUVPoints_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location, PFirst: gp_Pnt2d, PLast: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Sets the UV locations of the extremities of the edge. */
  static SetUVPoints_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face, PFirst: gp_Pnt2d, PLast: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns True if the edge is on the surfaces of the two faces. */
  static HasContinuity_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, F1: TopoDS_Face, F2: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the continuity. */
  static Continuity_1(E: TopoDS_Edge, F1: TopoDS_Face, F2: TopoDS_Face): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns True if the edge is on the surfaces of the two faces. */
  static HasContinuity_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, S1: any, S2: any, L1: TopLoc_Location, L2: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the continuity. */
  static Continuity_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, S1: any, S2: any, L1: TopLoc_Location, L2: TopLoc_Location): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns True if the edge is on the surfaces of the two faces. */
  static HasContinuity_3(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the max continuity of edge between some surfaces or GeomAbs_C0 if there are no such surfaces. */
  static MaxContinuity(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the 3d point. */
  static Pnt(V: TopoDS_Vertex): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the tolerance of the face. */
  static Tolerance_3(V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** Finds the parameter of <theV> on <theE>. theV input vertex theE input edge theParam calculated parameter on the curve TRUE if done */
  static Parameter_1(theV: TopoDS_Vertex, theE: TopoDS_Edge): { result: Standard_Boolean; theParam: number };
  /** Finds the parameter of <theV> on <theE>. theV input vertex theE input edge theParam calculated parameter on the curve TRUE if done */
  static Parameter_2(V: TopoDS_Vertex, E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Real;
  /** Finds the parameter of <theV> on <theE>. theV input vertex theE input edge theParam calculated parameter on the curve TRUE if done */
  static Parameter_3(V: TopoDS_Vertex, E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Real;
  /** Finds the parameter of <theV> on <theE>. theV input vertex theE input edge theParam calculated parameter on the curve TRUE if done */
  static Parameter_4(V: TopoDS_Vertex, E: TopoDS_Edge, S: any, L: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parameters of the vertex on the face. */
  static Parameters(V: TopoDS_Vertex, F: TopoDS_Face): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the maximum tolerance of input shape subshapes. */
  static MaxTolerance(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theSubShape: TopAbs_ShapeEnum): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve extends Adaptor3d_Curve {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Reset currently loaded curve (undone Load()). */
  Reset(): void;
  /** Sets the Curve <me> to access the geometry of edge <E>. */
  Initialize_1(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Sets the Curve <me> to access the geometry of edge <E>. */
  Initialize_2(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate system of the curve. */
  Trsf(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns True if the edge geometry is computed from a 3D curve. */
  Is3DCurve(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the edge geometry is computed from a pcurve on a surface. */
  IsCurveOnSurface(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Curve of the edge. */
  Curve(): GeomAdaptor_Curve;
  /** Returns the CurveOnSurface of the edge. */
  CurveOnSurface(): Adaptor3d_CurveOnSurface;
  /** Returns the edge. */
  Edge(): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Returns the edge tolerance. */
  Tolerance(): Standard_Real;
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters. i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a curve equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  Trim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve with its first derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec, V3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not CN. Raised if N < 1. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** returns the parametric resolution */
  Resolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the curve in the current interval: Line, Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola, BezierCurve, BSplineCurve, OtherCurve. */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_CurveType;
  Line(): gp_Lin;
  Circle(): gp_Circ;
  Ellipse(): gp_Elips;
  Hyperbola(): gp_Hypr;
  Parabola(): gp_Parab;
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Warning: This will make a copy of the Bezier Curve since it applies to it myTsrf. Be careful when using this method. */
  Bezier(): any;
  /** Warning: This will make a copy of the BSpline Curve since it applies to it myTsrf. Be careful when using this method. */
  BSpline(): any;
  OffsetCurve(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve_1 extends BRepAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve_2 extends BRepAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor(E: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve_3 extends BRepAdaptor_Curve {
    constructor(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face);
  }

export declare class BRepAdaptor_Surface extends GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Sets the surface to the geometry of <F>. */
  Initialize(F: TopoDS_Face, Restriction: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the face. */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns the face tolerance. */
  Tolerance(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Surface_1 extends BRepAdaptor_Surface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Surface_2 extends BRepAdaptor_Surface {
    constructor(F: TopoDS_Face, R: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve2d extends Geom2dAdaptor_Curve {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Initialize with the pcurve of <E> on <F>. */
  Initialize(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Returns the Edge. */
  Edge(): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Returns the Face. */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_1 extends BRepAdaptor_Curve2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_2 extends BRepAdaptor_Curve2d {
    constructor(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face);
  }

export declare class BRepAdaptor_CompCurve extends Adaptor3d_Curve {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Shallow copy of adaptor. */
  ShallowCopy(): any;
  /** Sets the wire <W>. */
  Initialize_1(W: TopoDS_Wire, KnotByCurvilinearAbcissa: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the wire <W>. */
  Initialize_2(W: TopoDS_Wire, KnotByCurvilinearAbcissa: Standard_Boolean, First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the wire. */
  Wire(): TopoDS_Wire;
  /** returns an edge and one parameter on them corresponding to the parameter U. */
  Edge(U: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge): { UonE: number };
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters. i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns a curve equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. If <First> >= <Last> */
  Trim(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  IsClosed(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  Period(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve. */
  Value(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U. */
  D0(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Computes the point of parameter U on the curve with its first derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C1. */
  D1(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first and second derivatives V1 and V2. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C2. */
  D2(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Returns the point P of parameter U, the first, the second and the third derivative. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not C3. */
  D3(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, V1: gp_Vec, V2: gp_Vec, V3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** The returned vector gives the value of the derivative for the order of derivation N. Raised if the continuity of the current interval is not CN. Raised if N < 1. */
  DN(U: Standard_Real, N: Standard_Integer): gp_Vec;
  /** returns the parametric resolution */
  Resolution(R3d: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the type of the curve in the current interval: Line, Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola, BezierCurve, BSplineCurve, OtherCurve. */
  GetType(): GeomAbs_CurveType;
  Line(): gp_Lin;
  Circle(): gp_Circ;
  Ellipse(): gp_Elips;
  Hyperbola(): gp_Hypr;
  Parabola(): gp_Parab;
  Degree(): Standard_Integer;
  IsRational(): Standard_Boolean;
  NbPoles(): Standard_Integer;
  NbKnots(): Standard_Integer;
  Bezier(): any;
  BSpline(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_1 extends BRepAdaptor_CompCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_2 extends BRepAdaptor_CompCurve {
    constructor(W: TopoDS_Wire, KnotByCurvilinearAbcissa: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_3 extends BRepAdaptor_CompCurve {
    constructor(W: TopoDS_Wire, KnotByCurvilinearAbcissa: Standard_Boolean, First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class TopExp_Explorer {
  /** Resets this explorer on the shape S. It is initialized to search the shape S, for shapes of type ToFind, that are not part of a shape ToAvoid. If the shape ToAvoid is equal to TopAbs_SHAPE, or if it is the same as, or less complex than, the shape ToFind it has no effect on the search. */
  Init(S: TopoDS_Shape, ToFind: TopAbs_ShapeEnum, ToAvoid: TopAbs_ShapeEnum): void;
  /** Returns True if there are more shapes in the exploration. */
  More(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Moves to the next Shape in the exploration. */
  Next(): void;
  /** Returns the current shape in the exploration. */
  Value(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the current shape in the exploration. */
  Current(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Reinitialize the exploration with the original arguments. */
  ReInit(): void;
  /** Return explored shape. */
  ExploredShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the current depth of the exploration. 0 is the shape to explore itself. */
  Depth(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Clears the content of the explorer. */
  Clear(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TopExp_Explorer_1 extends TopExp_Explorer {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TopExp_Explorer_2 extends TopExp_Explorer {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, ToFind: TopAbs_ShapeEnum, ToAvoid: TopAbs_ShapeEnum);
  }

export declare class BRepTools {
  constructor();
  /** Returns in UMin, UMax, VMin, VMax the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static UVBounds_1(F: TopoDS_Face): { UMin: number; UMax: number; VMin: number; VMax: number };
  /** Returns in UMin, UMax, VMin, VMax the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static UVBounds_2(F: TopoDS_Face, W: TopoDS_Wire): { UMin: number; UMax: number; VMin: number; VMax: number };
  /** Returns in UMin, UMax, VMin, VMax the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static UVBounds_3(F: TopoDS_Face, E: TopoDS_Edge): { UMin: number; UMax: number; VMin: number; VMax: number };
  /** Adds to the box the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static AddUVBounds_1(F: TopoDS_Face, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the box the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static AddUVBounds_2(F: TopoDS_Face, W: TopoDS_Wire, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the box the bounding values in the parametric space of F. */
  static AddUVBounds_3(F: TopoDS_Face, E: TopoDS_Edge, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_1(V: TopoDS_Vertex): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_2(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_3(W: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_4(F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_5(S: TopoDS_Shell): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_6(S: TopoDS_Solid): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_7(C: TopoDS_CompSolid): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_8(C: TopoDS_Compound): void;
  /** Update a vertex (nothing is done) */
  static Update_9(S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** For each edge of the face <F> reset the UV points to the bounding points of the parametric curve of the edge on the face. */
  static UpdateFaceUVPoints(theF: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Removes all cached polygonal representation of the shape, i.e. the triangulations of the faces of and polygons on triangulations and polygons 3d of the edges. In case polygonal representation is the only available representation for the shape (shape does not have geometry) it is not removed. theShape the shape to clean theForce allows removing all polygonal representations from the shape, including polygons on triangulations irrelevant for the faces of the given shape. */
  static Clean(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theForce: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Removes geometry (curves and surfaces) from all edges and faces of the shape. */
  static CleanGeometry(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Removes all the pcurves of the edges of that refer to surfaces not belonging to any face of */
  static RemoveUnusedPCurves(S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Verifies that each Face from the shape has got a triangulation with a deflection smaller or equal to specified one and the Edges a discretization on this triangulation. theShape shape to verify theLinDefl maximum allowed linear deflection theToCheckFreeEdges if TRUE, then free Edges are required to have 3D polygon FALSE if input Shape contains Faces without triangulation, or that triangulation has worse (greater) deflection than specified one, or Edges in Shape lack polygons on triangulation or free Edges in Shape lack 3D polygons */
  static Triangulation(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theLinDefl: Standard_Real, theToCheckFreeEdges: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Loads triangulation data for each face of the shape from some deferred storage using specified shared input file system theShape shape to load triangulations theTriangulationIdx index defining what triangulation should be loaded. Starts from 0. -1 is used in specific case to load currently already active triangulation. If some face doesn't contain triangulation with this index, nothing will be loaded for it. Exception will be thrown in case of invalid negative index theToSetAsActive flag to activate triangulation after its loading theFileSystem shared file system TRUE if at least one triangulation is loaded. */
  static LoadTriangulation(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theTriangulationIdx: Standard_Integer, theToSetAsActive: Standard_Boolean, theFileSystem: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Releases triangulation data for each face of the shape if there is deferred storage to load it later theShape shape to unload triangulations theTriangulationIdx index defining what triangulation should be unloaded. Starts from 0. -1 is used in specific case to unload currently already active triangulation. If some face doesn't contain triangulation with this index, nothing will be unloaded for it. Exception will be thrown in case of invalid negative index TRUE if at least one triangulation is unloaded. */
  static UnloadTriangulation(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theTriangulationIdx: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Activates triangulation data for each face of the shape from some deferred storage using specified shared input file system theShape shape to activate triangulations theTriangulationIdx index defining what triangulation should be activated. Starts from 0. Exception will be thrown in case of invalid negative index theToActivateStrictly flag to activate exactly triangulation with defined theTriangulationIdx index. In TRUE case if some face doesn't contain triangulation with this index, active triangulation will not be changed for it. Else the last available triangulation will be activated. TRUE if at least one active triangulation was changed. */
  static ActivateTriangulation(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theTriangulationIdx: Standard_Integer, theToActivateStrictly: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Loads all available triangulations for each face of the shape from some deferred storage using specified shared input file system theShape shape to load triangulations theFileSystem shared file system TRUE if at least one triangulation is loaded. */
  static LoadAllTriangulations(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFileSystem: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Releases all available triangulations for each face of the shape if there is deferred storage to load them later theShape shape to unload triangulations TRUE if at least one triangulation is unloaded. */
  static UnloadAllTriangulations(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the two vertices is lower than their tolerance. */
  static Compare_1(V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the distance between the two vertices is lower than their tolerance. */
  static Compare_2(E1: TopoDS_Edge, E2: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the outer most wire of <F>. Returns a Null wire if <F> has no wires. */
  static OuterWire(F: TopoDS_Face): TopoDS_Wire;
  /** Stores in the map <M> all the 3D topology edges of . */
  static Map3DEdges(S: TopoDS_Shape, M: TopTools_IndexedMapOfShape): void;
  /** Verifies that the edge <E> is found two times on the face <F> before calling BRep_Tool::IsClosed. */
  static IsReallyClosed(E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Detect closedness of face in U and V directions. */
  static DetectClosedness(theFace: TopoDS_Face): { theUclosed: boolean; theVclosed: boolean };
  /** Writes the shape to the stream in an ASCII format TopTools_FormatVersion_VERSION_1. This alias writes shape with triangulation data. theShape the shape to write out] theStream the stream to output shape into theRange the range of progress indicator to fill in */
  static Write_3(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Writes the shape to the stream in an ASCII format TopTools_FormatVersion_VERSION_1. This alias writes shape with triangulation data. theShape the shape to write out] theStream the stream to output shape into theRange the range of progress indicator to fill in */
  static Write_4(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theWithTriangles: Standard_Boolean, theWithNormals: Standard_Boolean, theVersion: TopTools_FormatVersion, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Reads a Shape from in returns it in <Sh>. is used to build the shape. */
  static Read_2(Sh: TopoDS_Shape, File: Standard_Character, B: BRep_Builder, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Evals real tolerance of edge <theE>. <theC3d>, <theC2d>, <theS>, <theF>, <theL> are correspondently 3d curve of edge, 2d curve on surface <theS> and rang of edge If calculated tolerance is more then current edge tolerance, edge is updated. Method returns actual tolerance of edge */
  static EvalAndUpdateTol(theE: TopoDS_Edge, theC3d: any, theC2d: any, theS: any, theF: Standard_Real, theL: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the cumul of the orientation of <Edge> and the containing wire in <Face> */
  static OriEdgeInFace(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge, theFace: TopoDS_Face): TopAbs_Orientation;
  /** Removes internal sub-shapes from the shape. The check on internal status is based on orientation of sub-shapes, classification is not performed. Before removal of internal sub-shapes the algorithm checks if such removal is not going to break topological connectivity between sub-shapes. The flag <theForce> if set to true disables the connectivity check and clears the given shape from all sub-shapes with internal orientation. */
  static RemoveInternals(theS: TopoDS_Shape, theForce: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Check all locations of shape according criterium: aTrsf.IsNegative() || (std::abs(std::abs(aTrsf.ScaleFactor()) - 1.) > TopLoc_Location::ScalePrec()) All sub-shapes having such locations are put in list theProblemShapes */
  static CheckLocations(theS: TopoDS_Shape, theProblemShapes: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Solid extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Constructs an Undefined Solid. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Builder {
  constructor();
  /** Make an empty Wire. */
  MakeWire(W: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Make an empty Shell. */
  MakeShell(S: TopoDS_Shell): void;
  /** Make a Solid covering the whole 3D space. */
  MakeSolid(S: TopoDS_Solid): void;
  /** Make an empty Composite Solid. */
  MakeCompSolid(C: TopoDS_CompSolid): void;
  /** Make an empty Compound. */
  MakeCompound(C: TopoDS_Compound): void;
  /** Add the Shape C in the Shape S. Exceptions TopoDS_FrozenShape if S is not free and cannot be modified. TopoDS__UnCompatibleShapes if S and C are not compatible. */
  Add(S: TopoDS_Shape, C: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Remove the Shape C from the Shape S. Exceptions TopoDS_FrozenShape if S is frozen and cannot be modified. */
  Remove(S: TopoDS_Shape, C: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Wire extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Undefined Wire. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Vertex extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Undefined Vertex. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Edge extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Undefined Edge. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Shell extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Constructs an Undefined Shell. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Compound extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Constructs an Undefined Compound. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Creates a NULL Shape referring to nothing. */
  constructor()
  /** Returns true if this shape is null. In other words, it references no underlying shape with the potential to be given a location and an orientation. */
  IsNull(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Destroys the reference to the underlying shape stored in this shape. As a result, this shape becomes null. */
  Nullify(): void;
  /** Returns the shape local coordinate system. */
  Location_1(): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns the shape local coordinate system. */
  Location_2(theLoc: TopLoc_Location, theRaiseExc: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with the local coordinate system set to <Loc>. theLoc the new local coordinate system. theRaiseExc flag to raise exception in case of transformation with scale or negative. the located shape. */
  Located(theLoc: TopLoc_Location, theRaiseExc: Standard_Boolean): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the shape orientation. */
  Orientation_1(): TopAbs_Orientation;
  /** Returns the shape orientation. */
  Orientation_2(theOrient: TopAbs_Orientation): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with the orientation set to <Or>. */
  Oriented(theOrient: TopAbs_Orientation): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the value of the TopAbs_ShapeEnum enumeration that corresponds to this shape, for example VERTEX, EDGE, and so on. Exceptions Standard_NullObject if this shape is null. */
  ShapeType(): TopAbs_ShapeEnum;
  /** Returns the free flag. */
  Free_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the free flag. */
  Free_2(theIsFree: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the locked flag. */
  Locked_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the locked flag. */
  Locked_2(theIsLocked: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the modification flag. */
  Modified_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the modification flag. */
  Modified_2(theIsModified: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the checked flag. */
  Checked_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the checked flag. */
  Checked_2(theIsChecked: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the orientability flag. */
  Orientable_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the orientability flag. */
  Orientable_2(theIsOrientable: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the closedness flag. */
  Closed_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the closedness flag. */
  Closed_2(theIsClosed: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the infinity flag. */
  Infinite_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the infinity flag. */
  Infinite_2(theIsInfinite: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the convexness flag. */
  Convex_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the convexness flag. */
  Convex_2(theIsConvex: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Multiplies the Shape location by thePosition. thePosition the transformation to apply. theRaiseExc flag to raise exception in case of transformation with scale or negative. */
  Move(thePosition: TopLoc_Location, theRaiseExc: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with a location multiplied by thePosition. thePosition the transformation to apply. theRaiseExc flag to raise exception in case of transformation with scale or negative. the moved shape. */
  Moved(thePosition: TopLoc_Location, theRaiseExc: Standard_Boolean): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Reverses the orientation, using the Reverse method from the TopAbs package. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with the orientation reversed, using the Reverse method from the TopAbs package. */
  Reversed(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Complements the orientation, using the Complement method from the TopAbs package. */
  Complement(): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with the orientation complemented, using the Complement method from the TopAbs package. */
  Complemented(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Updates the Shape Orientation by composition with theOrient, using the Compose method from the TopAbs package. */
  Compose(theOrient: TopAbs_Orientation): void;
  /** Returns a shape similar to <me> with the orientation composed with theOrient, using the Compose method from the TopAbs package. */
  Composed(theOrient: TopAbs_Orientation): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of direct sub-shapes (children). TopoDS_Iterator for accessing sub-shapes */
  NbChildren(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns True if two shapes are partners, i.e. if they share the same TShape. Locations and Orientations may differ. */
  IsPartner(theOther: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if two shapes are same, i.e. if they share the same TShape with the same Locations. Orientations may differ. */
  IsSame(theOther: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if two shapes are equal, i.e. if they share the same TShape with the same Locations and Orientations. */
  IsEqual(theOther: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Negation of the IsEqual method. */
  IsNotEqual(theOther: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Replace <me> by a new Shape with the same Orientation and Location and a new TShape with the same geometry and no sub-shapes. */
  EmptyCopy(): void;
  /** Returns a new Shape with the same Orientation and Location and a new TShape with the same geometry and no sub-shapes. */
  EmptyCopied(): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Face extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Undefined Face. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_CompSolid extends TopoDS_Shape {
  /** Constructs an Undefined CompSolid. */
  constructor()
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BndLib_Add2dCurve {
  constructor();
  /** Adds to the bounding box B the curve C B is then enlarged by the tolerance value Tol. Note: depending on the type of curve, one of the following representations of the curve C is used to include it in the bounding box B: an exact representation if C is built from a line, a circle or a conic curve, the poles of the curve if C is built from a Bezier curve or a BSpline curve, if not, the points of an approximation of the curve C. Warning C is an adapted curve, that is, an object which is an interface between: the services provided by a 2D curve from the package Geom2d and those required of the curve by the computation algorithm. The adapted curve is created in the following way: occ::handle<Geom2d_Curve> mycurve = ... ; Geom2dAdaptor_Curve C(mycurve); The bounding box B is then enlarged by adding it: Bnd_Box2d B; // ... double Tol = ... ; Add2dCurve::Add ( C, Tol, B ); Exceptions Standard_Failure if the curve is built from: a Geom_Line, or a Geom_Parabola, or a Geom_Hyperbola, and P1 and P2 are either two negative infinite real numbers, or two positive infinite real numbers. */
  static Add_1(C: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, Tol: Standard_Real, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the bounding box B the curve C B is then enlarged by the tolerance value Tol. Note: depending on the type of curve, one of the following representations of the curve C is used to include it in the bounding box B: an exact representation if C is built from a line, a circle or a conic curve, the poles of the curve if C is built from a Bezier curve or a BSpline curve, if not, the points of an approximation of the curve C. Warning C is an adapted curve, that is, an object which is an interface between: the services provided by a 2D curve from the package Geom2d and those required of the curve by the computation algorithm. The adapted curve is created in the following way: occ::handle<Geom2d_Curve> mycurve = ... ; Geom2dAdaptor_Curve C(mycurve); The bounding box B is then enlarged by adding it: Bnd_Box2d B; // ... double Tol = ... ; Add2dCurve::Add ( C, Tol, B ); Exceptions Standard_Failure if the curve is built from: a Geom_Line, or a Geom_Parabola, or a Geom_Hyperbola, and P1 and P2 are either two negative infinite real numbers, or two positive infinite real numbers. */
  static Add_2(C: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the bounding box B the curve C B is then enlarged by the tolerance value Tol. Note: depending on the type of curve, one of the following representations of the curve C is used to include it in the bounding box B: an exact representation if C is built from a line, a circle or a conic curve, the poles of the curve if C is built from a Bezier curve or a BSpline curve, if not, the points of an approximation of the curve C. Warning C is an adapted curve, that is, an object which is an interface between: the services provided by a 2D curve from the package Geom2d and those required of the curve by the computation algorithm. The adapted curve is created in the following way: occ::handle<Geom2d_Curve> mycurve = ... ; Geom2dAdaptor_Curve C(mycurve); The bounding box B is then enlarged by adding it: Bnd_Box2d B; // ... double Tol = ... ; Add2dCurve::Add ( C, Tol, B ); Exceptions Standard_Failure if the curve is built from: a Geom_Line, or a Geom_Parabola, or a Geom_Hyperbola, and P1 and P2 are either two negative infinite real numbers, or two positive infinite real numbers. */
  static Add_3(C: any, Tol: Standard_Real, Box: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the bounding box B the curve C B is then enlarged by the tolerance value Tol. Note: depending on the type of curve, one of the following representations of the curve C is used to include it in the bounding box B: an exact representation if C is built from a line, a circle or a conic curve, the poles of the curve if C is built from a Bezier curve or a BSpline curve, if not, the points of an approximation of the curve C. Warning C is an adapted curve, that is, an object which is an interface between: the services provided by a 2D curve from the package Geom2d and those required of the curve by the computation algorithm. The adapted curve is created in the following way: occ::handle<Geom2d_Curve> mycurve = ... ; Geom2dAdaptor_Curve C(mycurve); The bounding box B is then enlarged by adding it: Bnd_Box2d B; // ... double Tol = ... ; Add2dCurve::Add ( C, Tol, B ); Exceptions Standard_Failure if the curve is built from: a Geom_Line, or a Geom_Parabola, or a Geom_Hyperbola, and P1 and P2 are either two negative infinite real numbers, or two positive infinite real numbers. */
  static Add_4(C: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  /** Adds to the bounding box B the part of curve C B is then enlarged by the tolerance value Tol. U1, U2 - the parametric range to compute the bounding box; Note: depending on the type of curve, one of the following algorithms is used to include it in the bounding box B: an exact analytical if C is built from a line, a circle or a conic curve, numerical calculation of bounding box sizes, based on minimization algorithm, for other types of curve If Tol = < Precision::PConfusion(), Precision::PConfusion is used as tolerance for calculation */
  static AddOptimal(C: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real, B: Bnd_Box2d): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GC_Root {
  constructor();
  /** Returns true if the construction is successful. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the status of the construction: gce_Done, if the construction is successful, or another value of the gce_ErrorType enumeration indicating why the construction failed. */
  Status(): gce_ErrorType;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle extends GC_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed arc of circle. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no arc of circle is constructed. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle_1 extends GC_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ, Alpha1: Standard_Real, Alpha2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle_2 extends GC_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ, P: gp_Pnt, Alpha: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle_3 extends GC_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle_4 extends GC_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, P3: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfCircle_5 extends GC_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt, V: gp_Vec, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

export declare class GC_MakeArcOfEllipse extends GC_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed arc of ellipse. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_1 extends GC_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips, Alpha1: Standard_Real, Alpha2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_2 extends GC_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips, P: gp_Pnt, Alpha: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_3 extends GC_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare type Extrema_ExtAlgo = {
  Extrema_ExtAlgo_Grad: Extrema_ExtAlgoValue;
  Extrema_ExtAlgo_Tree: Extrema_ExtAlgoValue;
}

export declare type Extrema_ExtAlgoValue = 'Extrema_ExtAlgo_Grad' | 'Extrema_ExtAlgo_Tree';

export declare class Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve {
  /** Constructs and returns the Bezier curve of index Index to the table of adjacent Bezier arcs computed by this algorithm. This Bezier curve has the same orientation as the BSpline curve analyzed in this framework. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is less than 1 or greater than the number of adjacent Bezier arcs computed by this algorithm. */
  Arc(Index: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Constructs all the Bezier curves whose data is computed by this algorithm and loads these curves into the Curves table. The Bezier curves have the same orientation as the BSpline curve analyzed in this framework. Exceptions Standard_DimensionError if the Curves array was not created with the following bounds: 1 , and the number of adjacent Bezier arcs computed by this algorithm (as given by the function NbArcs). */
  Arcs(Curves: any): void;
  /** This methode returns the bspline's knots associated to the converted arcs Raises DimensionError if the length of Curves is not equal to NbArcs + 1 */
  Knots(TKnots: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the number of BezierCurve arcs. If at the creation time you have decomposed the basis curve between the parametric values UFirst, ULast the number of BezierCurve arcs depends on the number of knots included inside the interval [UFirst, ULast]. If you have decomposed the whole basis B-spline curve the number of BezierCurve arcs NbArcs is equal to the number of knots less one. */
  NbArcs(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_1 extends Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve {
    constructor(BasisCurve: any);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_2 extends Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve {
    constructor(BasisCurve: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve {
  /** Returns the 2D BSpline curve resulting from the approximation algorithm. */
  Curve(): any;
  /** returns true if the approximation has been done with within required tolerance */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns true if the approximation did come out with a result that is not NECESSARELY within the required tolerance */
  HasResult(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the greatest distance between a point on the source conic and the BSpline curve resulting from the approximation. (>0 when an approximation has been done, 0 if no approximation) */
  MaxError(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_1 extends Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve {
    constructor(Curve: any, Tol2d: Standard_Real, Order: GeomAbs_Shape, MaxSegments: Standard_Integer, MaxDegree: Standard_Integer);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_2 extends Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve {
    constructor(Curve: any, Tol2d: Standard_Real, Order: GeomAbs_Shape, MaxSegments: Standard_Integer, MaxDegree: Standard_Integer);
  }

export declare class Geom2dConvert {
  constructor();
  /** Convert a curve to BSpline by Approximation This method computes the arc of B-spline curve between the two knots FromK1 and ToK2. If C is periodic the arc has the same orientation as C if SameOrientation = true. If C is not periodic SameOrientation is not used for the computation and C is oriented from the knot fromK1 to the knot toK2. We just keep the local definition of C between the knots FromK1 and ToK2. The returned B-spline curve has its first and last knots with a multiplicity equal to degree + 1, where degree is the polynomial degree of C. The indexes of the knots FromK1 and ToK2 doesn't include the repetition of multiple knots in their definition. Raised if FromK1 or ToK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] Raised if FromK1 = ToK2 */
  static SplitBSplineCurve_1(C: any, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Convert a curve to BSpline by Approximation This method computes the arc of B-spline curve between the two knots FromK1 and ToK2. If C is periodic the arc has the same orientation as C if SameOrientation = true. If C is not periodic SameOrientation is not used for the computation and C is oriented from the knot fromK1 to the knot toK2. We just keep the local definition of C between the knots FromK1 and ToK2. The returned B-spline curve has its first and last knots with a multiplicity equal to degree + 1, where degree is the polynomial degree of C. The indexes of the knots FromK1 and ToK2 doesn't include the repetition of multiple knots in their definition. Raised if FromK1 or ToK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] Raised if FromK1 = ToK2 */
  static SplitBSplineCurve_2(C: any, FromU1: Standard_Real, ToU2: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** This function converts a non infinite curve from Geom into a B-spline curve. C must be an ellipse or a circle or a trimmed conic or a trimmed line or a Bezier curve or a trimmed Bezier curve or a BSpline curve or a trimmed BSpline curve or an Offset curve or a trimmed Offset curve. The returned B-spline is not periodic except if C is a Circle or an Ellipse. ParameterisationType applies only if the curve is a Circle or an ellipse : TgtThetaOver2, TgtThetaOver2_1, TgtThetaOver2_2, TgtThetaOver2_3, TgtThetaOver2_4, Purpose: this is the classical rational parameterisation 2 1 - t cos(theta) = --- 2 1 + t 2t sin(theta) = --- 2 1 + t t = tan (theta/2) with TgtThetaOver2 the routine will compute the number of spans using the rule num_spans = [ (ULast - UFirst) / 1.2 ] + 1 with TgtThetaOver2_N, N spans will be forced: an error will be raized if (ULast - UFirst) >= PI and N = 1, ULast - UFirst >= 2 PI and N = 2 QuasiAngular, here t is a rational function that approximates theta -> tan(theta/2). Nevetheless the composing with above function yields exact functions whose square sum up to 1 RationalC1 ; t is replaced by a polynomial function of u so as to grant C1 contiuity across knots. Exceptions Standard_DomainError if the curve C is infinite. Standard_ConstructionError: if C is a complete circle or ellipse, and if Parameterisation is not equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2 or to Convert_RationalC1, or if C is a trimmed circle or ellipse and if Parameterisation is equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1 and if U2 - U1 > 0.9999 * Pi where U1 and U2 are respectively the first and the last parameters of the trimmed curve (this method of parameterization cannot be used to convert a half-circle or a half-ellipse, for example), or if C is a trimmed circle or ellipse and Parameterisation is equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2 and U2 - U1 > 1.9999 * Pi where U1 and U2 are respectively the first and the last parameters of the trimmed curve (this method of parameterization cannot be used to convert a quasi-complete circle or ellipse). */
  static CurveToBSplineCurve(C: any, Parameterisation: Convert_ParameterisationType): any;
  /** This Method concatenates G1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatG1(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method concatenates C1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatC1_1(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfIndices: any, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method concatenates C1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatC1_2(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfIndices: any, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns a new BSpline which could still be C0. tolerance is a geometrical tolerance */
  static C0BSplineToC1BSplineCurve(BS: any, Tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns an array of BSpline C1. Tolerance is a geometrical tolerance */
  static C0BSplineToArrayOfC1BSplineCurve_1(BS: any, tabBS: any, Tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns an array of BSpline C1. Tolerance is a geometrical tolerance */
  static C0BSplineToArrayOfC1BSplineCurve_2(BS: any, tabBS: any, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real, Tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GeomLib {
  constructor();
  /** Computes the curve 3d from package Geom corresponding to curve 2d from package Geom2d, on the plan defined with the local coordinate system Position. */
  static To3d(Position: gp_Ax2, Curve2d: any): any;
  /** Computes the curve 3d from package Geom corresponding to the curve 3d from package Geom, transformed with the transformation <GTrsf> WARNING : this method may return a null Handle if it's impossible to compute the transformation of a curve. It's not implemented when : 1) the curve is an infinite parabola or hyperbola 2) the curve is an offsetcurve */
  static GTransform(Curve: any, GTrsf: gp_GTrsf2d): any;
  /** Make the curve Curve2dPtr have the imposed range First to List the most economic way, that is if it can change the range without changing the nature of the curve it will try to do that. Otherwise it will produce a Bspline curve that has the required range */
  static SameRange(Tolerance: Standard_Real, Curve2dPtr: any, First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, RequestedFirst: Standard_Real, RequestedLast: Standard_Real, NewCurve2dPtr: any): void;
  static BuildCurve3d(Tolerance: Standard_Real, CurvePtr: Adaptor3d_CurveOnSurface, FirstParameter: Standard_Real, LastParameter: Standard_Real, NewCurvePtr: any, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, MaxDegree: Standard_Integer, MaxSegment: Standard_Integer): { MaxDeviation: number; AverageDeviation: number };
  static AdjustExtremity(Curve: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, T1: gp_Vec, T2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Extends the bounded curve Curve to the point Point. The extension is built: at the end of the curve if After equals true, or at the beginning of the curve if After equals false. The extension is performed according to a degree of continuity equal to Cont, which in its turn must be equal to 1, 2 or 3. This function converts the bounded curve Curve into a BSpline curve. Warning Nothing is done, and Curve is not modified if Cont is not equal to 1, 2 or 3. It is recommended that the extension should not be too large with respect to the size of the bounded curve Curve: Point must not be located too far from one of the extremities of Curve. */
  static ExtendCurveToPoint(Curve: any, Point: gp_Pnt, Cont: Standard_Integer, After: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Extends the bounded surface Surf along one of its boundaries. The chord length of the extension is equal to Length. The direction of the extension is given as: the u parametric direction of Surf, if InU equals true, or the v parametric direction of Surf, if InU equals false. In this parametric direction, the extension is built on the side of: the last parameter of Surf, if After equals true, or the first parameter of Surf, if After equals false. The extension is performed according to a degree of continuity equal to Cont, which in its turn must be equal to 1, 2 or 3. This function converts the bounded surface Surf into a BSpline surface. Warning Nothing is done, and Surf is not modified if Cont is not equal to 1, 2 or 3. It is recommended that Length, the size of the extension should not be too large with respect to the size of the bounded surface Surf. Surf must not be a periodic BSpline surface in the parametric direction corresponding to the direction of extension. */
  static ExtendSurfByLength(Surf: any, Length: Standard_Real, Cont: Standard_Integer, InU: Standard_Boolean, After: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Compute axes of inertia, of some points <Axe>.Location() is the BaryCentre <Axe>.XDirection is the axe of upper inertia <Axe>.Direction is the Normal to the average plane IsSingular is True if points are on line Tol is used to determine singular cases. */
  static AxeOfInertia(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Axe: gp_Ax2, Tol: Standard_Real): { IsSingular: boolean };
  /** Compute principale axes of inertia, and dispersion value of some points. */
  static Inertia(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Bary: gp_Pnt, XDir: gp_Dir, YDir: gp_Dir): { Xgap: number; YGap: number; ZGap: number };
  /** Warning! This assume that the InParameter is an increasing sequence of real number and it will not check for that : Unpredictable result can happen if this is not satisfied. It is the caller responsibility to check for that property. This method makes uniform NumPoints segments S1,...SNumPoints out of the segment defined by the first parameter and the last parameter of the InParameter ; keeps only one point of the InParameters set of parameter in each of the uniform segments taking care of the first and the last parameters. For the ith segment the element of the InParameter is the one that is the first to exceed the midpoint of the segment and to fall before the midpoint of the next segment There will be at the end at most NumPoints + 1 if NumPoints > 2 in the OutParameters Array */
  static RemovePointsFromArray(NumPoints: Standard_Integer, InParameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, OutParameters: any): void;
  /** this makes sure that there is at least MinNumPoints in OutParameters taking into account the parameters in the InParameters array provided those are in order, that is the sequence of real in the InParameter is strictly non decreasing */
  static DensifyArray1OfReal(MinNumPoints: Standard_Integer, InParameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, OutParameters: any): void;
  /** This method fuse intervals Interval1 and Interval2 with specified Confusion Interval1 first interval to fuse Interval2 second interval to fuse Confision tolerance to compare intervals IsAdjustToFirstInterval flag to set method of fusion, if intervals are close if false, intervals are fusing by half-division method if true, intervals are fusing by selecting value from Interval1 Fusion output interval */
  static FuseIntervals(Interval1: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Interval2: TColStd_Array1OfReal, Fusion: TColStd_SequenceOfReal, Confusion: Standard_Real, IsAdjustToFirstInterval: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** this will compute the maximum distance at the parameters given in the Parameters array by evaluating each parameter the two curves and taking the maximum of the evaluated distance */
  static EvalMaxParametricDistance(Curve: Adaptor3d_Curve, AReferenceCurve: Adaptor3d_Curve, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal): { MaxDistance: number };
  /** this will compute the maximum distance at the parameters given in the Parameters array by projecting from the Curve to the reference curve and taking the minimum distance Than the maximum will be taken on those minimas. */
  static EvalMaxDistanceAlongParameter(Curve: Adaptor3d_Curve, AReferenceCurve: Adaptor3d_Curve, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal): { MaxDistance: number };
  /** Cancel,on the boundaries,the denominator first derivative in the directions wished by the user and set its value to 1. */
  static CancelDenominatorDerivative(BSurf: any, UDirection: Standard_Boolean, VDirection: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Estimate surface normal at the given (U, V) point. theSurf input surface theUV (U, V) point coordinates on the surface theTol estimation tolerance theNorm computed normal 0 if normal estimated from D1, 1 if estimated from D2 (quasysingular), >=2 in case of failure (undefined or infinite solutions) */
  static NormEstim(theSurf: any, theUV: gp_Pnt2d, theTol: Standard_Real, theNorm: gp_Dir): Standard_Integer;
  /** This method defines if opposite boundaries of surface coincide with given tolerance */
  static IsClosed(S: any, Tol: Standard_Real): { isUClosed: boolean; isVClosed: boolean };
  /** Returns true if the poles of U1 isoline and the poles of U2 isoline of surface are identical according to tolerance criterion. For rational surfaces Weights(i)*Poles(i) are checked. */
  static IsBSplUClosed(S: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the poles of V1 isoline and the poles of V2 isoline of surface are identical according to tolerance criterion. For rational surfaces Weights(i)*Poles(i) are checked. */
  static IsBSplVClosed(S: any, V1: Standard_Real, V2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the poles of U1 isoline and the poles of U2 isoline of surface are identical according to tolerance criterion. */
  static IsBzUClosed(S: any, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the poles of V1 isoline and the poles of V2 isoline of surface are identical according to tolerance criterion. */
  static IsBzVClosed(S: any, V1: Standard_Real, V2: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Checks whether the 2d curve is a isoline. It can be represented by b-spline, bezier, or geometric line. This line should have natural parameterization. theC2D Trimmed curve to be checked. theIsU Flag indicating that line is u const. theParam Line parameter. theIsForward Flag indicating forward parameterization on a isoline. true when 2d curve is a line and false otherwise. */
  static isIsoLine(theC2D: any): { result: Standard_Boolean; theIsU: boolean; theParam: number; theIsForward: boolean };
  /** Builds 3D curve for a isoline. This method takes corresponding isoline from the input surface. theC2D Trimmed curve to be approximated. theIsU Flag indicating that line is u const. theParam Line parameter. theIsForward Flag indicating forward parameterization on a isoline. true when 3d curve is built and false otherwise. */
  static buildC3dOnIsoLine(theC2D: any, theSurf: any, theFirst: Standard_Real, theLast: Standard_Real, theTolerance: Standard_Real, theIsU: Standard_Boolean, theParam: Standard_Real, theIsForward: Standard_Boolean): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
  /** Initialize algorithm for 3D curve. theC 3d curve theAngularDeflection angular deflection in radians theCurvatureDeflection linear deflection theMinimumOfPoints minimum number of points theUTol tolerance in curve parametric scope theMinLen minimal length */
  Initialize_1(theC: Adaptor3d_Curve, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Initialize algorithm for 3D curve. theC 3d curve theAngularDeflection angular deflection in radians theCurvatureDeflection linear deflection theMinimumOfPoints minimum number of points theUTol tolerance in curve parametric scope theMinLen minimal length */
  Initialize_2(theC: Adaptor3d_Curve, theFirstParameter: Standard_Real, theLastParameter: Standard_Real, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Initialize algorithm for 3D curve. theC 3d curve theAngularDeflection angular deflection in radians theCurvatureDeflection linear deflection theMinimumOfPoints minimum number of points theUTol tolerance in curve parametric scope theMinLen minimal length */
  Initialize_3(theC: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Initialize algorithm for 3D curve. theC 3d curve theAngularDeflection angular deflection in radians theCurvatureDeflection linear deflection theMinimumOfPoints minimum number of points theUTol tolerance in curve parametric scope theMinLen minimal length */
  Initialize_4(theC: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, theFirstParameter: Standard_Real, theLastParameter: Standard_Real, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Add point to already calculated points (or replace existing) Returns index of new added point or founded with parametric tolerance (replaced if theIsReplace is true) */
  AddPoint(thePnt: gp_Pnt, theParam: Standard_Real, theIsReplace: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  NbPoints(): Standard_Integer;
  Parameter(I: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  Value(I: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Computes angular step for the arc using the given parameters. */
  static ArcAngularStep(theRadius: Standard_Real, theLinearDeflection: Standard_Real, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinLength: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_1 extends GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_2 extends GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
    constructor(theC: Adaptor3d_Curve, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_3 extends GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
    constructor(theC: Adaptor3d_Curve, theFirstParameter: Standard_Real, theLastParameter: Standard_Real, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_4 extends GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
    constructor(theC: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_5 extends GCPnts_TangentialDeflection {
    constructor(theC: Adaptor2d_Curve2d, theFirstParameter: Standard_Real, theLastParameter: Standard_Real, theAngularDeflection: Standard_Real, theCurvatureDeflection: Standard_Real, theMinimumOfPoints: Standard_Integer, theUTol: Standard_Real, theMinLen: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class GCE2d_Root {
  constructor();
  /** Returns true if the construction is successful. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the status of the construction gce_Done, if the construction is successful, or another value of the gce_ErrorType enumeration indicating why the construction failed. */
  Status(): gce_ErrorType;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle extends GCE2d_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed arc of circle. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no arc of circle is constructed. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_1 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ2d, Alpha1: Standard_Real, Alpha2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_2 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ2d, P: gp_Pnt2d, Alpha: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_3 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ2d, P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_4 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d, P3: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_5 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt2d, V: gp_Vec2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

export declare class GCE2d_MakeEllipse extends GCE2d_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed ellipse. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no ellipse is constructed. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeEllipse_1 extends GCE2d_MakeEllipse {
    constructor(E: gp_Elips2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeEllipse_2 extends GCE2d_MakeEllipse {
    constructor(MajorAxis: gp_Ax2d, MajorRadius: Standard_Real, MinorRadius: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeEllipse_3 extends GCE2d_MakeEllipse {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax22d, MajorRadius: Standard_Real, MinorRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeEllipse_4 extends GCE2d_MakeEllipse {
    constructor(S1: gp_Pnt2d, S2: gp_Pnt2d, Center: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse extends GCE2d_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed arc of ellipse. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_1 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips2d, Alpha1: Standard_Real, Alpha2: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_2 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips2d, P: gp_Pnt2d, Alpha: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_3 extends GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse {
    constructor(Elips: gp_Elips2d, P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle extends GCE2d_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed circle. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no circle is constructed. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_1 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(C: gp_Circ2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_2 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(A: gp_Ax2d, Radius: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_3 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(A: gp_Ax22d, Radius: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_4 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ2d, Dist: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_5 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(Circ: gp_Circ2d, Point: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_6 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d, P3: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_7 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt2d, Radius: Standard_Real, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeCircle_8 extends GCE2d_MakeCircle {
    constructor(Center: gp_Pnt2d, Point: gp_Pnt2d, Sense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment extends GCE2d_Root {
  /** Returns the constructed line segment. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no line segment is constructed. */
  Value(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment_1 extends GCE2d_MakeSegment {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment_2 extends GCE2d_MakeSegment {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt2d, V: gp_Dir2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment_3 extends GCE2d_MakeSegment {
    constructor(Line: gp_Lin2d, U1: Standard_Real, U2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment_4 extends GCE2d_MakeSegment {
    constructor(Line: gp_Lin2d, Point: gp_Pnt2d, Ulast: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GCE2d_MakeSegment_5 extends GCE2d_MakeSegment {
    constructor(Line: gp_Lin2d, P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

export declare class GeomConvert {
  constructor();
  /** Convert a curve from Geom by an approximation method This method computes the arc of B-spline curve between the two knots FromK1 and ToK2. If C is periodic the arc has the same orientation as C if SameOrientation = true. If C is not periodic SameOrientation is not used for the computation and C is oriented from the knot fromK1 to the knot toK2. We just keep the local definition of C between the knots FromK1 and ToK2. The returned B-spline curve has its first and last knots with a multiplicity equal to degree + 1, where degree is the polynomial degree of C. The indexes of the knots FromK1 and ToK2 doesn't include the repetition of multiple knots in their definition. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2 Raised if FromK1 or ToK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineCurve_1(C: any, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Convert a curve from Geom by an approximation method This method computes the arc of B-spline curve between the two knots FromK1 and ToK2. If C is periodic the arc has the same orientation as C if SameOrientation = true. If C is not periodic SameOrientation is not used for the computation and C is oriented from the knot fromK1 to the knot toK2. We just keep the local definition of C between the knots FromK1 and ToK2. The returned B-spline curve has its first and last knots with a multiplicity equal to degree + 1, where degree is the polynomial degree of C. The indexes of the knots FromK1 and ToK2 doesn't include the repetition of multiple knots in their definition. Raised if FromK1 = ToK2 Raised if FromK1 or ToK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineCurve_2(C: any, FromU1: Standard_Real, ToU2: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Computes the B-spline surface patche between the knots values FromUK1, ToUK2, FromVK1, ToVK2. If S is periodic in one direction the patche has the same orientation as S in this direction if the flag is true in this direction (SameUOrientation, SameVOrientation). If S is not periodic SameUOrientation and SameVOrientation are not used for the computation and S is oriented FromUK1 ToUK2 and FromVK1 ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2 FromUK1 or ToUK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] FromVK1 or ToVK2 are out of the bounds [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineSurface_1(S: any, FromUK1: Standard_Integer, ToUK2: Standard_Integer, FromVK1: Standard_Integer, ToVK2: Standard_Integer, SameUOrientation: Standard_Boolean, SameVOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Computes the B-spline surface patche between the knots values FromUK1, ToUK2, FromVK1, ToVK2. If S is periodic in one direction the patche has the same orientation as S in this direction if the flag is true in this direction (SameUOrientation, SameVOrientation). If S is not periodic SameUOrientation and SameVOrientation are not used for the computation and S is oriented FromUK1 ToUK2 and FromVK1 ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2 FromUK1 or ToUK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] FromVK1 or ToVK2 are out of the bounds [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineSurface_2(S: any, FromK1: Standard_Integer, ToK2: Standard_Integer, USplit: Standard_Boolean, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Computes the B-spline surface patche between the knots values FromUK1, ToUK2, FromVK1, ToVK2. If S is periodic in one direction the patche has the same orientation as S in this direction if the flag is true in this direction (SameUOrientation, SameVOrientation). If S is not periodic SameUOrientation and SameVOrientation are not used for the computation and S is oriented FromUK1 ToUK2 and FromVK1 ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2 FromUK1 or ToUK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] FromVK1 or ToVK2 are out of the bounds [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineSurface_3(S: any, FromU1: Standard_Real, ToU2: Standard_Real, FromV1: Standard_Real, ToV2: Standard_Real, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, SameUOrientation: Standard_Boolean, SameVOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Computes the B-spline surface patche between the knots values FromUK1, ToUK2, FromVK1, ToVK2. If S is periodic in one direction the patche has the same orientation as S in this direction if the flag is true in this direction (SameUOrientation, SameVOrientation). If S is not periodic SameUOrientation and SameVOrientation are not used for the computation and S is oriented FromUK1 ToUK2 and FromVK1 ToVK2. Raised if FromUK1 = ToUK2 or FromVK1 = ToVK2 FromUK1 or ToUK2 are out of the bounds [FirstUKnotIndex, LastUKnotIndex] FromVK1 or ToVK2 are out of the bounds [FirstVKnotIndex, LastVKnotIndex] */
  static SplitBSplineSurface_4(S: any, FromParam1: Standard_Real, ToParam2: Standard_Real, USplit: Standard_Boolean, ParametricTolerance: Standard_Real, SameOrientation: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** This function converts a non infinite curve from Geom into a B-spline curve. C must be an ellipse or a circle or a trimmed conic or a trimmed line or a Bezier curve or a trimmed Bezier curve or a BSpline curve or a trimmed BSpline curve or an OffsetCurve. The returned B-spline is not periodic except if C is a Circle or an Ellipse. If the Parameterisation is QuasiAngular than the returned curve is NOT periodic in case a periodic Geom_Circle or Geom_Ellipse. For TgtThetaOver2_1 and TgtThetaOver2_2 the method raises an exception in case of a periodic Geom_Circle or a Geom_Ellipse ParameterisationType applies only if the curve is a Circle or an ellipse: TgtThetaOver2, TgtThetaOver2_1, TgtThetaOver2_2, TgtThetaOver2_3, TgtThetaOver2_4, Purpose: this is the classical rational parameterisation 2 1 - t cos(theta) = --- 2 1 + t 2t sin(theta) = --- 2 1 + t t = tan (theta/2) with TgtThetaOver2 the routine will compute the number of spans using the rule num_spans = [ (ULast - UFirst) / 1.2 ] + 1 with TgtThetaOver2_N, N spans will be forced: an error will be raized if (ULast - UFirst) >= PI and N = 1, ULast - UFirst >= 2 PI and N = 2 QuasiAngular, here t is a rational function that approximates theta -> tan(theta/2). Nevetheless the composing with above function yields exact functions whose square sum up to 1 RationalC1 ; t is replaced by a polynomial function of u so as to grant C1 contiuity across knots. Exceptions Standard_DomainError: if the curve C is infinite, or if C is a (complete) circle or ellipse, and Parameterisation is equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1 or Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2. Standard_ConstructionError: if C is a (complete) circle or ellipse, and if Parameterisation is not equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2, Convert_RationalC1, Convert_QuasiAngular (the curve is converted in these three cases) or to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1 or Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2 (another exception is raised in these two cases). if C is a trimmed circle or ellipse, if Parameterisation is equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1 and if U2 - U1 > 0.9999 * Pi, where U1 and U2 are respectively the first and the last parameters of the trimmed curve (this method of parameterization cannot be used to convert a half-circle or a half-ellipse, for example), or if C is a trimmed circle or ellipse, if Parameterisation is equal to Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2 and U2 - U1 > 1.9999 * Pi where U1 and U2 are respectively the first and the last parameters of the trimmed curve (this method of parameterization cannot be used to convert a quasi-complete circle or ellipse). */
  static CurveToBSplineCurve(C: any, Parameterisation: Convert_ParameterisationType): any;
  /** This algorithm converts a non infinite surface from Geom into a B-spline surface. S must be a trimmed plane or a trimmed cylinder or a trimmed cone or a trimmed sphere or a trimmed torus or a sphere or a torus or a Bezier surface of a trimmed Bezier surface or a trimmed swept surface with a corresponding basis curve which can be turned into a B-spline curve (see the method CurveToBSplineCurve). Raises DomainError if the type of the surface is not previously defined. */
  static SurfaceToBSplineSurface(S: any): any;
  /** This Method concatenates G1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatG1(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method concatenates C1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatC1_1(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfIndices: any, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method concatenates C1 the ArrayOfCurves as far as it is possible. ArrayOfCurves[0..N-1] ArrayOfToler contains the biggest tolerance of the two points shared by two consecutives curves. Its dimension: [0..N-2] ClosedFlag indicates if the ArrayOfCurves is closed. In this case ClosedTolerance contains the biggest tolerance of the two points which are at the closure. Otherwise its value is 0.0 ClosedFlag becomes False on the output if it is impossible to build closed curve. */
  static ConcatC1_2(ArrayOfCurves: any, ArrayOfToler: TColStd_Array1OfReal, ArrayOfIndices: any, ArrayOfConcatenated: any, ClosedTolerance: Standard_Real, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): { ClosedFlag: boolean };
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns a new BSpline which could still be C0. tolerance is a geometrical tolerance. The Angular toleranceis in radians and measures the angle of the tangents on the left and on the right to decide if the curve is G1 or not at a given point */
  static C0BSplineToC1BSplineCurve(BS: any, tolerance: Standard_Real, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns an array of BSpline C1. tolerance is a geometrical tolerance. */
  static C0BSplineToArrayOfC1BSplineCurve_1(BS: any, tabBS: any, tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** This Method reduces as far as it is possible the multiplicities of the knots of the BSpline BS.(keeping the geometry). It returns an array of BSpline C1. tolerance is a geometrical tolerance. */
  static C0BSplineToArrayOfC1BSplineCurve_2(BS: any, tabBS: any, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real, tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class GeomTools {
  constructor();
  static SetUndefinedTypeHandler(aHandler: any): void;
  static GetUndefinedTypeHandler(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
  static BeginPosition(theRowLower: number, a1: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number): number;
  static LastPosition(theRowLower: number, theRowUpper: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number): number;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  NbRows(): number;
  NbColumns(): number;
  RowLength(): number;
  ColLength(): number;
  LowerRow(): number;
  UpperRow(): number;
  LowerCol(): number;
  UpperCol(): number;
  UpdateLowerRow(theLowerRow: number): void;
  UpdateLowerCol(theLowerCol: number): void;
  UpdateUpperRow(theUpperRow: number): void;
  UpdateUpperCol(theUpperCol: number): void;
  Assign(theOther: TColgp_Array2OfPnt): TColgp_Array2OfPnt;
  Move_1(theOther: TColgp_Array2OfPnt): TColgp_Array2OfPnt;
  Move_2(theOther: TColgp_Array2OfPnt): TColgp_Array2OfPnt;
  SetValue_1(theRow: number, theCol: number, theItem: gp_Pnt): void;
  SetValue_2(theRow: number, theCol: number, theItem: gp_Pnt): void;
  Resize(theRowLower: number, theRowUpper: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  ResizeWithTrim(theRowLower: number, theRowUpper: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt_1 extends TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt_2 extends TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
    constructor(theRowLower: number, theRowUpper: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt_4 extends TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array2OfPnt);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt_5 extends TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array2OfPnt);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array2OfPnt_6 extends TColgp_Array2OfPnt {
    constructor(theBegin: gp_Pnt, theRowLower: number, theRowUpper: number, theColLower: number, theColUpper: number);
  }

export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir {
  Init(theValue: gp_Dir): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfDir): TColgp_Array1OfDir;
  Move_1(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfDir): TColgp_Array1OfDir;
  Move_2(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfDir): TColgp_Array1OfDir;
  First(): gp_Dir;
  ChangeFirst(): gp_Dir;
  Last(): gp_Dir;
  ChangeLast(): gp_Dir;
  Value(theIndex: number): gp_Dir;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): gp_Dir;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Dir): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Dir): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir_1 extends TColgp_Array1OfDir {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir_2 extends TColgp_Array1OfDir {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir_4 extends TColgp_Array1OfDir {
    constructor(theBegin: gp_Dir, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir_5 extends TColgp_Array1OfDir {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfDir);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfDir_6 extends TColgp_Array1OfDir {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfDir);
  }

export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal {
  Init(theValue: number): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfReal): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  Move_1(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfReal): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  Move_2(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfReal): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  First(): number;
  ChangeFirst(): number;
  Last(): number;
  ChangeLast(): number;
  Value(theIndex: number): number;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): number;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: number): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: number): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal_1 extends TColStd_Array1OfReal {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal_2 extends TColStd_Array1OfReal {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal_4 extends TColStd_Array1OfReal {
    constructor(theBegin: number, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal_5 extends TColStd_Array1OfReal {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfReal);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfReal_6 extends TColStd_Array1OfReal {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfReal);
  }

export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
  Init(theValue: Poly_Triangle): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: Poly_Array1OfTriangle): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  Move_1(theOther: Poly_Array1OfTriangle): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  Move_2(theOther: Poly_Array1OfTriangle): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  First(): Poly_Triangle;
  ChangeFirst(): Poly_Triangle;
  Last(): Poly_Triangle;
  ChangeLast(): Poly_Triangle;
  Value(theIndex: number): Poly_Triangle;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): Poly_Triangle;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: Poly_Triangle): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: Poly_Triangle): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle_1 extends Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle_2 extends Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle_4 extends Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
    constructor(theBegin: Poly_Triangle, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle_5 extends Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
    constructor(theOther: Poly_Array1OfTriangle);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Array1OfTriangle_6 extends Poly_Array1OfTriangle {
    constructor(theOther: Poly_Array1OfTriangle);
  }

export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec {
  Init(theValue: gp_Vec): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfVec): TColgp_Array1OfVec;
  Move_1(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfVec): TColgp_Array1OfVec;
  Move_2(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfVec): TColgp_Array1OfVec;
  First(): gp_Vec;
  ChangeFirst(): gp_Vec;
  Last(): gp_Vec;
  ChangeLast(): gp_Vec;
  Value(theIndex: number): gp_Vec;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): gp_Vec;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Vec): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Vec): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec_1 extends TColgp_Array1OfVec {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec_2 extends TColgp_Array1OfVec {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec_4 extends TColgp_Array1OfVec {
    constructor(theBegin: gp_Vec, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec_5 extends TColgp_Array1OfVec {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfVec);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfVec_6 extends TColgp_Array1OfVec {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfVec);
  }

export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
  Init(theValue: boolean): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfBoolean): TColStd_Array1OfBoolean;
  Move_1(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfBoolean): TColStd_Array1OfBoolean;
  Move_2(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfBoolean): TColStd_Array1OfBoolean;
  First(): boolean;
  ChangeFirst(): boolean;
  Last(): boolean;
  ChangeLast(): boolean;
  Value(theIndex: number): boolean;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): boolean;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: boolean): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: boolean): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_1 extends TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_2 extends TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_4 extends TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
    constructor(theBegin: boolean, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_5 extends TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfBoolean);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_6 extends TColStd_Array1OfBoolean {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfBoolean);
  }

export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape extends NCollection_BaseList {
  Size(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  Clear(theAllocator: any): void;
  First_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  First_2(): TopoDS_Shape;
  Last_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  Last_2(): TopoDS_Shape;
  Append_1(theItem: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  Append_2(theItem: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  Append_5(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  Prepend_1(theItem: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  Prepend_2(theItem: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  Prepend_3(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  RemoveFirst(): void;
  Reverse(): void;
  Exchange(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape_1 extends TopTools_ListOfShape {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape_2 extends TopTools_ListOfShape {
    constructor(theAllocator: any);
  }

  export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape_3 extends TopTools_ListOfShape {
    constructor(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape);
  }

  export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape_4 extends TopTools_ListOfShape {
    constructor(theOther: TopTools_ListOfShape);
  }

  export declare class TopTools_ListOfShape_5 extends TopTools_ListOfShape {
    constructor(theInitList: any, theAllocator: any);
  }

export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
  Init(theValue: number): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  Move_1(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  Move_2(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfInteger): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  First(): number;
  ChangeFirst(): number;
  Last(): number;
  ChangeLast(): number;
  Value(theIndex: number): number;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): number;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: number): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: number): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger_1 extends TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger_2 extends TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger_4 extends TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
    constructor(theBegin: number, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger_5 extends TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfInteger);
  }

  export declare class TColStd_Array1OfInteger_6 extends TColStd_Array1OfInteger {
    constructor(theOther: TColStd_Array1OfInteger);
  }

export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
  Init(theValue: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d): TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  Move_1(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d): TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  Move_2(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d): TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  First(): gp_Pnt2d;
  ChangeFirst(): gp_Pnt2d;
  Last(): gp_Pnt2d;
  ChangeLast(): gp_Pnt2d;
  Value(theIndex: number): gp_Pnt2d;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): gp_Pnt2d;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_1 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_2 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_4 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
    constructor(theBegin: gp_Pnt2d, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_5 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_6 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d);
  }

export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
  Init(theValue: gp_Pnt): void;
  Size(): number;
  Length(): number;
  IsEmpty(): boolean;
  Lower(): number;
  Upper(): number;
  Assign(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  Move_1(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  Move_2(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt): TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  First(): gp_Pnt;
  ChangeFirst(): gp_Pnt;
  Last(): gp_Pnt;
  ChangeLast(): gp_Pnt;
  Value(theIndex: number): gp_Pnt;
  ChangeValue(theIndex: number): gp_Pnt;
  SetValue_1(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Pnt): void;
  SetValue_2(theIndex: number, theItem: gp_Pnt): void;
  UpdateLowerBound(theLower: number): void;
  UpdateUpperBound(theUpper: number): void;
  Resize(theLower: number, theUpper: number, theToCopyData: boolean): void;
  IsDeletable(): boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt_1 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt_2 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
    constructor(theLower: number, theUpper: number);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt_4 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
    constructor(theBegin: gp_Pnt, theLower: number, theUpper: number, theUseBuffer: boolean);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt_5 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt);
  }

  export declare class TColgp_Array1OfPnt_6 extends TColgp_Array1OfPnt {
    constructor(theOther: TColgp_Array1OfPnt);
  }

export declare type IFSelect_ReturnStatus = {
  IFSelect_RetVoid: IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue;
  IFSelect_RetDone: IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue;
  IFSelect_RetError: IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue;
  IFSelect_RetFail: IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue;
  IFSelect_RetStop: IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue;
}

export declare type IFSelect_ReturnStatusValue = 'IFSelect_RetVoid' | 'IFSelect_RetDone' | 'IFSelect_RetError' | 'IFSelect_RetFail' | 'IFSelect_RetStop';

export declare class IFSelect_WorkSession extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Creates a Work Session It provides default, empty ShareOut and ModelCopier, which can be replaced (if required, should be done just after creation). */
  constructor()
  /** Changes the Error Handler status (by default, it is not set) */
  SetErrorHandle(toHandle: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the Error Handler status. */
  ErrorHandle(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the ShareOut defined at creation time. */
  ShareOut(): any;
  /** Sets a new ShareOut. Fills Items which its content Warning : data from the former ShareOut are lost */
  SetShareOut(shareout: any): void;
  /** Set value of mode responsible for presence of selections after loading If mode set to true that different selections will be accessible after loading else selections will be not accessible after loading( for economy memory in applications) */
  SetModeStat(theMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Return value of mode defining of filling selection during loading. */
  GetModeStat(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a WorkLibrary, which will be used to Read and Write Files. */
  SetLibrary(theLib: any): void;
  /** Returns the WorkLibrary. Null Handle if not yet set should be C++ : return const & */
  WorkLibrary(): any;
  /** Sets a Protocol, which will be used to determine Graphs, to Read and to Write Files */
  SetProtocol(protocol: any): void;
  /** Returns the Protocol. Null Handle if not yet set should be C++ : return const & */
  Protocol(): any;
  /** Sets a specific Signature to be the SignType, i.e. the Signature which will determine TypeName from the Model (basic function). It is recorded in the GTool This Signature is also set as "xst-sign-type" (reserved name) */
  SetSignType(signtype: any): void;
  /** Returns the current SignType. */
  SignType(): any;
  /** Returns True is a Model has been set. */
  HasModel(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a Model as input : this will be the Model from which the ShareOut will work if <clearpointed> is True (default) all SelectPointed items are cleared, else they must be managed by the caller Remark : SetModel clears the Graph, recomputes it if a Protocol is set and if the Model is not empty, of course */
  SetModel(model: any, clearpointed: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the Model of the Work Session (Null Handle if none) should be C++ : return const & */
  Model(): any;
  /** Stores the filename used for read for setting the model It is cleared by SetModel and ClearData(1) */
  SetLoadedFile(theFileName: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Returns the filename used to load current model empty if unknown */
  LoadedFile(): Standard_Character;
  /** Reads a file with the WorkLibrary (sets Model and LoadedFile) Returns a integer status which can be : RetDone if OK, RetVoid if no Protocol not defined, RetError for file not found, RetFail if fail during read */
  ReadFile(filename: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Returns the count of Entities stored in the Model, or 0. */
  NbStartingEntities(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns an Entity stored in the Model of the WorkSession (Null Handle is no Model or num out of range) */
  StartingEntity(num: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the Number of an Entity in the Model (0 if no Model set or <ent> not in the Model) */
  StartingNumber(ent: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** From a given label in Model, returns the corresponding number Starts from first entity by Default, may start after a given number : this number may be given negative, its absolute value is then considered. Hence a loop on NumberFromLabel may be programmed (stop test is : returned value positive or null) Returns 0 if not found, < 0 if more than one found (first found in negative). If <val> just gives an integer value, returns it */
  NumberFromLabel(val: Standard_Character, afternum: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the label for <ent>, as the Model does If <ent> is not in the Model or if no Model is loaded, a Null Handle is returned */
  EntityLabel(ent: any): any;
  /** Returns the Name of an Entity This Name is computed by the general service Name Returns a Null Handle if fails */
  EntityName(ent: any): any;
  /** Returns the Category Number determined for an entity it is computed by the class Category An unknown entity (number 0) gives a value -1 */
  CategoryNumber(ent: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the Category Name determined for an entity it is computed by the class Category Remark : an unknown entity gives an empty string */
  CategoryName(ent: any): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the Validity Name determined for an entity it is computed by the class SignValidity Remark : an unknown entity gives an empty string */
  ValidityName(ent: any): Standard_Character;
  /** Clears recorded data (not the items) according mode : 1 : all Data : Model, Graph, CheckList, + ClearData 4 2 : Graph and CheckList (they will then be recomputed later) 3 : CheckList (it will be recomputed by ComputeCheck) 4 : just content of SelectPointed and Counters Plus 0 : does nothing but called by SetModel ClearData is virtual, hence it can be redefined to clear other data of a specialised Work Session */
  ClearData(mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes the Graph used for Selections, Displays ... If a HGraph is already set, with same model as given by method Model, does nothing. Else, computes a new Graph. If <enforce> is given True, computes a new Graph anyway. Remark that a call to ClearGraph will cause ComputeGraph to really compute a new Graph Returns True if Graph is OK, False else (i.e. if no Protocol is set, or if Model is absent or empty). */
  ComputeGraph(enforce: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Computed Graph as HGraph (Null Handle if not set) */
  HGraph(): any;
  /** Returns the Computed Graph, for Read only. */
  Graph(): Interface_Graph;
  /** Returns the list of entities shared by <ent> (can be empty) Returns a null Handle if <ent> is unknown */
  Shareds(ent: any): any;
  /** Returns the list of entities sharing <ent> (can be empty) Returns a null Handle if <ent> is unknown */
  Sharings(ent: any): any;
  /** Returns True if a Model is defined and really loaded (not empty), a Protocol is set and a Graph has been computed. In this case, the WorkSession can start to work */
  IsLoaded(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the CheckList for the Model currently loaded It can then be used for displays, queries ... Returns True if OK, False else (i.e. no Protocol set, or Model absent). If <enforce> is False, works only if not already done or if a new Model has been loaded from last call. Remark : computation is enforced by every call to SetModel or RunTransformer */
  ComputeCheck(enforce: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Maximum Value for an Item Identifier. It can be greater to the count of known Items, because some can have been removed */
  MaxIdent(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns an Item, given its Ident. Returns a Null Handle if no Item corresponds to this Ident. */
  Item(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the Ident attached to an Item in the WorkSession, or Zero if it is unknown */
  ItemIdent(item: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the Item which corresponds to a Variable, given its Name (whatever the type of this Item). Returns a Null Handle if this Name is not recorded */
  NamedItem_1(name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns the Item which corresponds to a Variable, given its Name (whatever the type of this Item). Returns a Null Handle if this Name is not recorded */
  NamedItem_2(name: any): any;
  /** Returns the Ident attached to a Name, 0 if name not recorded. */
  NameIdent(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns True if an Item of the WorkSession has an attached Name. */
  HasName(item: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Name attached to an Item as a Variable of this WorkSession. If is Null or not recorded, returns an empty string. */
  Name(item: any): any;
  /** Adds an Item and returns its attached Ident. Does nothing if is already recorded (and returns its attached Ident) <active> if True commands call to SetActive (see below) Remark : the determined Ident is used if is a Dispatch, to fill the ShareOut */
  AddItem(item: any, active: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Adds an Item with an attached Name. If the Name is already known in the WorkSession, the older item losts it Returns Ident if Done, 0 else, i.e. if is null If <name> is empty, works as AddItem (i.e. with no name) If is already known but with no attached Name, this method tries to attached a Name to it <active> if True commands call to SetActive (see below) */
  AddNamedItem(name: Standard_Character, item: any, active: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Following the type of : Dispatch : Adds or Removes it in the ShareOut & FileNaming GeneralModifier : Adds or Removes it for final sending (i.e. in the ModelCopier) Returns True if it did something, False else (state unchanged) */
  SetActive(item: any, mode: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Removes an Item from the Session, given its Name Returns True if Done, False else (Name not recorded) (Applies only on Item which are Named) */
  RemoveNamedItem(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Removes a Name without removing the Item Returns True if Done, False else (Name not recorded) */
  RemoveName(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Removes an Item given its Ident. Returns False if <id> is attached to no Item in the WorkSession. For a Named Item, also removes its Name. */
  RemoveItem(item: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Clears all the recorded Items : Selections, Dispatches, Modifiers, and Strings & IntParams, with their Idents & Names. Remark that if a Model has been loaded, it is not cleared. */
  ClearItems(): void;
  /** Returns a Label which illustrates the content of an Item, given its Ident. This Label is : for a Text Parameter, "Text:<text value>" for an Integer Parameter, "Integer:<integer value>" for a Selection, a Dispatch or a Modifier, its Label (see these classes) for any other kind of Variable, its cdl type */
  ItemLabel(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Fills a Sequence with the List of Idents attached to the Items of which Type complies with (IsKind) <type> (alphabetic order) Remark : <type> = TYPE(Standard_Transient) gives all the Idents which are suitable in the WorkSession */
  ItemIdents(type: Handle_Standard_Type): any;
  /** Fills a Sequence with the list of the Names attached to Items of which Type complies with (IsKind) <type> (alphabetic order) Remark : <type> = TYPE(Standard_Transient) gives all the Names */
  ItemNames(type: Handle_Standard_Type): any;
  /** Fills a Sequence with the NAMES of the control items, of which the label matches <label> (contain it) : see NextIdentForLabel Search mode is fixed to "contained" If <label> is empty, returns all Names */
  ItemNamesForLabel(label: Standard_Character): any;
  /** For query by Label with possible iterations Searches the Ident of which Item has a Label which matches a given one, the search starts from an initial Ident. Returns the first found Ident which follows <id>, or ZERO The search must start with <id> = 0, it returns the next Ident which matches. To iterate, call again this method which this returned value as <id>. Once an Ident has been returned, the Item can be obtained by the method Item <mode> precises the required matching mode : 0 (Default) : <label> must match exactly with the Item Label 1 : <label> must match the exact beginning (the end is free) 2 : <label> must be at least once wherever in the Item Label other values are ignored */
  NextIdentForLabel(label: Standard_Character, id: Standard_Integer, mode: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Creates a parameter as being bound to a Static If the Static is Integer, this creates an IntParam bound to it by its name. Else this creates a String which is the value of the Static. Returns a null handle if <statname> is unknown as a Static */
  NewParamFromStatic(statname: Standard_Character, name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns an IntParam, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for an IntParam (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  IntParam(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns Integer Value of an IntParam. */
  IntValue(it: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Creates a new IntParam. A Name can be set (Optional) Returns the created IntParam, or a Null Handle in case of Failure (see AddItem/AddNamedItem) */
  NewIntParam(name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Changes the Integer Value of an IntParam Returns True if Done, False if <it> is not in the WorkSession */
  SetIntValue(it: any, val: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a TextParam, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a TextParam (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  TextParam(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns Text Value of a TextParam (a String) or an empty string if <it> is not in the WorkSession */
  TextValue(par: any): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Creates a new (empty) TextParam. A Name can be set (Optional) Returns the created TextParam (as an HAsciiString), or a Null Handle in case of Failure (see AddItem/AddNamedItem) */
  NewTextParam(name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Changes the Text Value of a TextParam (an HAsciiString) Returns True if Done, False if <it> is not in the WorkSession */
  SetTextValue(par: any, val: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a Signature, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Signature (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  Signature(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the Value computed by a Signature for an Entity Returns an empty string if the entity does not belong to the loaded model */
  SignValue(sign: any, ent: any): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns a Selection, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Selection (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  Selection(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the result of a Selection, computed by EvalSelection (see above) under the form of a HSequence (hence, it can be used by a frontal-engine logic). It can be empty Returns a Null Handle if <sel> is not in the WorkSession */
  SelectionResult(sel: any): any;
  /** Returns the result of a Selection, by forcing its input with a given list unless Null). RULES : only for a SelectDeduct kind Selection : its Input is considered : if it is a SelectDeduct kind Selection, its Input is considered, etc... until an Input is not a Deduct/Extract : its result is replaced by all the chain of deductions is applied */
  SelectionResultFromList(sel: any, list: any): any;
  /** Sets a Selection as input for an item, according its type : if is a Dispatch : as Final Selection if is a GeneralModifier (i.e. any kind of Modifier) : as Selection used to filter entities to modify <sel> Null causes this Selection to be nullified Returns False if is not of a suitable type, or or <sel> is not in the WorkSession */
  SetItemSelection(item: any, sel: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Resets input Selection which was set by SetItemSelection Same conditions as for SetItemSelection Returns True if done, False if is not in the WorkSession */
  ResetItemSelection(item: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Selection of a Dispatch or a GeneralModifier. Returns a Null Handle if none is defined or not good type */
  ItemSelection(item: any): any;
  /** Returns a SignCounter from its ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a SignCounter (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  SignCounter(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Computes the content of a SignCounter when it is defined with a Selection, then returns True Returns False if the SignCounter is not defined with a Selection, or if its Selection Mode is inhibited <forced> to work around optimisations */
  ComputeCounter(counter: any, forced: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the content of a SignCounter from an input list If Null, uses internal definition of the Counter : a Selection, else the whole Model (recomputation forced) If <clear> is True (D), starts from scratch Else, cumulates computations */
  ComputeCounterFromList(counter: any, list: any, clear: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the ordered list of dispatches stored by the ShareOut. */
  AppliedDispatches(): any;
  /** Clears the list of Dispatches recorded by the ShareOut if <only> disp is True, tha's all. Else, clears also the lists of Modifiers recorded by the ShareOut */
  ClearShareOut(onlydisp: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns a Dispatch, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Dispatch (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  Dispatch(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the rank of a Dispatch in the ShareOut, or 0 if <disp> is not in the ShareOut or not in the WorkSession */
  DispatchRank(disp: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives access to the complete ModelCopier. */
  ModelCopier(): any;
  /** Sets a new ModelCopier. Fills Items which its content. */
  SetModelCopier(copier: any): void;
  /** Returns the count of Modifiers applied to final sending Model Modifiers if <formodel> is True, File Modifiers else (i.e. Modifiers which apply once the Models have been filled) */
  NbFinalModifiers(formodel: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Fills a Sequence with a list of Idents, those attached to the Modifiers applied to final sending. Model Modifiers if <formodel> is True, File Modifiers else This list is given in the order in which they will be applied (which takes into account the Changes to Modifier Ranks) */
  FinalModifierIdents(formodel: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Returns a Modifier, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Modifier (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  GeneralModifier(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns a Model Modifier, given its Ident in the Session, i.e. typed as a Modifier (not simply a GeneralModifier) Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Modifier (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  ModelModifier(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the Rank of a Modifier given its Ident. Model or File Modifier according its type (ModelModifier or not) Remember that Modifiers are applied sequentially following their Rank : first Model Modifiers then File Modifiers Rank is given by rank of call to AddItem and can be changed by ChangeModifierRank */
  ModifierRank(item: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Changes the Rank of a Modifier in the Session : Model Modifiers if <formodel> is True, File Modifiers else the Modifier n0 <before> is put to n0 <after> Return True if Done, False if <before> or <after> out of range */
  ChangeModifierRank(formodel: Standard_Boolean, before: Standard_Integer, after: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Removes all the Modifiers active in the ModelCopier : they become inactive and they are removed from the Session */
  ClearFinalModifiers(): void;
  /** Sets a GeneralModifier to be applied to an item : item = ShareOut : applies for final sending (all dispatches) item is a Dispatch : applies for this dispatch only Returns True if done, False if <modif> or not in <me> */
  SetAppliedModifier(modif: any, item: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Resets a GeneralModifier to be applied Returns True if done, False if <modif> was not applied */
  ResetAppliedModifier(modif: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the item on which a GeneralModifier is applied : the ShareOut, or a given Dispatch Returns a Null Handle if <modif> is not applied */
  UsesAppliedModifier(modif: any): any;
  /** Returns a Transformer, given its Ident in the Session Null result if <id> is not suitable for a Transformer (undefined, or defined for another kind of variable) */
  Transformer(id: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Runs a Transformer on starting Model, which can then be edited or replaced by a new one. The Protocol can also be changed. Fills LastRunCheckList Returned status is 0 if nothing done (<transf> or model undefined), positive if OK, negative else : 0 : Nothing done 1 : OK, edition on the spot with no change to the graph of dependencies (purely local) 2 : OK, model edited on the spot (graph recomputed, may have changed), protocol unchanged 3 : OK, new model produced, same protocol 4 : OK, model edited on the spot (graph recomputed), but protocol has changed 5 : OK, new model produced, protocol has changed -1 : Error on the spot (slight changes), data may be corrupted (remark : corruption should not be profound) -2 : Error on edition the spot, data may be corrupted (checking them is recommended) -3 : Error with a new data set, transformation ignored -4 : OK as 4, but graph of dependences count not be recomputed (the former one is kept) : check the protocol */
  RunTransformer(transf: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Runs a Modifier on Starting Model. It can modify entities, or add new ones. But the Model or the Protocol is unchanged. The Modifier is applied on each entity of the Model. See also RunModifierSelected Fills LastRunCheckList <copy> : if True, a new data set is produced which brings the modifications (Model + its Entities) if False, data are modified on the spot It works through a TransformStandard defined with <modif> Returned status as RunTransformer : 0 nothing done, >0 OK, <0 problem, but only between -3 and 3 (protocol unchanged) Remark : <copy> True will give <effect> = 3 or -3 */
  RunModifier(modif: any, copy: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Acts as RunModifier, but the Modifier is applied on the list determined by a Selection, rather than on the whole Model If the selection is a null handle, the whole model is taken */
  RunModifierSelected(modif: any, sel: any, copy: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Creates and returns a TransformStandard, empty, with its Copy Option (True = Copy, False = On the Spot) and an optional name. To a TransformStandard, the method SetAppliedModifier applies */
  NewTransformStandard(copy: Standard_Boolean, name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Defines a new content from the former one If <keep> is True, it is given by entities selected by Selection <sel> (and all shared entities) Else, it is given by all the former content but entities selected by the Selection <sel> (and properly shared ones) Returns True if done. Returns False if the selected list (from <sel>) is empty, hence nothing is done */
  SetModelContent(sel: any, keep: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the defined File Prefix. Null Handle if not defined. */
  FilePrefix(): any;
  /** Returns the defined Default File Root. It is used for Dispatches which have no specific root attached. Null Handle if not defined */
  DefaultFileRoot(): any;
  /** Returns the defined File Extension. Null Handle if not defined. */
  FileExtension(): any;
  /** Returns the File Root defined for a Dispatch. Null if no Root Name is defined for it (hence, no File will be produced) */
  FileRoot(disp: any): any;
  /** Defines a File Prefix. */
  SetFilePrefix(name: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Defines a Default File Root Name. Clears it is <name> = "" Returns True if OK, False if <name> already set for a Dispatch */
  SetDefaultFileRoot(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Defines a File Extension. */
  SetFileExtension(name: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Defines a Root for a Dispatch If <name> is empty, clears Root Name This has as effect to inhibit the production of File by <disp> Returns False if <disp> is not in the WorkSession or if a root name is already defined for it */
  SetFileRoot(disp: any, name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Extracts File Root Name from a given complete file name (uses OSD_Path) */
  GiveFileRoot(file: Standard_Character): Standard_Character;
  /** Completes a file name as required, with Prefix and Extension (if defined; for a non-defined item, completes nothing) */
  GiveFileComplete(file: Standard_Character): Standard_Character;
  /** Erases all stored data from the File Evaluation (i.e. ALL former naming information are lost) */
  ClearFile(): void;
  /** Performs and stores a File Evaluation. The Results are a List of produced Models and a List of names (Strings), in parallel Fills LastRunCheckList */
  EvaluateFile(): void;
  /** Returns the count of produced Models. */
  NbFiles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns a Model, given its rank in the Evaluation List. */
  FileModel(num: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the name of a file corresponding to a produced Model, given its rank in the Evaluation List */
  FileName(num: Standard_Integer): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Commands file sending to clear the list of already sent files, commands to record a new one if <record> is True This list is managed by the ModelCopier when SendSplit is called It allows a global exploitation of the set of sent files */
  BeginSentFiles(record: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the list of recorded sent files, or a Null Handle is recording has not been enabled */
  SentFiles(): any;
  /** Performs creation of derived files from the input Model Takes its data (sub-models and names), from result EvaluateFile if active, else by dynamic Evaluation (not stored) After SendSplit, result of EvaluateFile is Cleared Fills LastRunCheckList Works with the WorkLibrary which acts on specific type of Model and can work with File Modifiers (managed by the Model Copier) and a ModelCopier, which can work with Model Modifiers Returns False if, either WorkLibrary has failed on at least one sub-file, or the Work Session is badly conditioned (no Model defined, or FileNaming not in phase with ShareOut) */
  SendSplit(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns an Evaluation of the whole ShareOut definition : i.e. how the entities of the starting model are forecast to be sent to various files : list of packets according the dispatches, effective lists of roots for each packet (which determine the content of the corresponding file); plus evaluation of which entities are : forgotten (sent into no file), duplicated (sent into more than one file), sent into a given file. See the class PacketList for more details. */
  EvalSplit(): any;
  /** Returns the greater count of different files in which any of the starting entities could be sent. Before any file output, this count is 0. Ideal count is 1. More than 1 means that duplications occur. */
  MaxSendingCount(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Processes Remaining data (after having sent files), mode : Forget : forget remaining info (i.e. clear all "Sent" status) Compute : compute and keep remaining (does nothing if : remaining is empty or if no files has been sent) Display : display entities recorded as remaining Undo : restore former state of data (after Remaining(1) ) Returns True if OK, False else (i.e. mode = 2 and Remaining List is either empty or takes all the entities, or mode = 3 and no former computation of remaining data was done) */
  SetRemaining(mode: IFSelect_RemainMode): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sends the starting Model into one file, without splitting, managing remaining data or anything else. <computegraph> true commands the Graph to be recomputed before sending : required when a Model is filled in several steps The Model and File Modifiers recorded to be applied on sending files are. Returns a status of execution : Done if OK, Void if no data available, Error if errors occurred (work library is not defined), errors during translation Fail if exception during translation is raised Stop if no disk space or disk, file is write protected Fills LastRunCheckList */
  SendAll(filename: Standard_Character, computegraph: Standard_Boolean): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Sends a part of the starting Model into one file, without splitting. But remaining data are managed. <computegraph> true commands the Graph to be recomputed before sending : required when a Model is filled in several steps The Model and File Modifiers recorded to be applied on sending files are. Returns a status : Done if OK, Fail if error during send, Error : WorkLibrary not defined, Void : selection list empty Fills LastRunCheckList */
  SendSelected(filename: Standard_Character, sel: any, computegraph: Standard_Boolean): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Writes the current Interface Model globally to a File, and returns a write status which can be : Done OK, Fail file could not be written, Error no norm is selected Remark : It is a simple, one-file writing, other operations are available (such as splitting ...) which calls SendAll */
  WriteFile_1(filename: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Writes the current Interface Model globally to a File, and returns a write status which can be : Done OK, Fail file could not be written, Error no norm is selected Remark : It is a simple, one-file writing, other operations are available (such as splitting ...) which calls SendAll */
  WriteFile_2(filename: Standard_Character, sel: any): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Returns the count of Input Selections known for a Selection, or 0 if <sel> not in the WorkSession. This count is one for a SelectDeduct / SelectExtract kind, two for SelectControl kind, variable for a SelectCombine (Union/Intersection), zero else */
  NbSources(sel: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the <num>th Input Selection of a Selection (see NbSources). Returns a Null Handle if <sel> is not in the WorkSession or if <num> is out of the range <1-NbSources> To obtain more details, see the method Sources */
  Source(sel: any, num: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns True if <sel> a Reversed SelectExtract, False else. */
  IsReversedSelectExtract(sel: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Toggles the Sense (Direct <-> Reversed) of a SelectExtract Returns True if Done, False if <sel> is not a SelectExtract or is not in the WorkSession */
  ToggleSelectExtract(sel: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets an Input Selection (as <input>) to a SelectExtract or a SelectDeduct (as <sel>). Returns True if Done, False if <sel> is neither a SelectExtract nor a SelectDeduct, or not in the WorkSession */
  SetInputSelection(sel: any, input: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets an Input Selection, Main if <formain> is True, Second else (as <sc>) to a SelectControl (as <sel>). Returns True if Done, False if <sel> is not a SelectControl, or <sc> or <sel> is not in the WorkSession */
  SetControl(sel: any, sc: any, formain: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds an input selection to a SelectCombine (Union or Inters.). Returns new count of inputs for this SelectCombine if Done or 0 if <sel> is not kind of SelectCombine, or if <seladd> or <sel> is not in the WorkSession By default, adding is done at the end of the list Else, it is an insertion to rank <atnum> (useful for Un-ReDo) */
  CombineAdd(selcomb: any, seladd: any, atnum: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Removes an input selection from a SelectCombine (Union or Intersection). Returns True if done, False if <selcomb> is not kind of SelectCombine or <selrem> is not source of <selcomb> */
  CombineRemove(selcomb: any, selrem: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates a new Selection, of type SelectPointed, its content starts with A name must be given (can be empty) */
  NewSelectPointed(list: any, name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Changes the content of a Selection of type SelectPointed According <mode> : 0 set new content (clear former) 1 : adds actual content -1 : removes actual content Returns True if done, False if <sel> is not a SelectPointed */
  SetSelectPointed(sel: any, list: any, mode: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a Selection from a Name : the name of a Selection : this Selection the name of a Signature + criteria between (..) : a new Selection from this Signature an entity or a list of entities : a new SelectPointed Else, returns a Null Handle */
  GiveSelection(selname: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Determines a list of entities from an object : <obj> already HSequenceOfTransient : returned itself <obj> Selection : its Result of Evaluation is returned <obj> an entity of the Model : a HSequence which contains it else, an empty HSequence <obj> the Model it self : ALL its content (not only the roots) */
  GiveList_1(obj: any): any;
  /** Determines a list of entities from an object : <obj> already HSequenceOfTransient : returned itself <obj> Selection : its Result of Evaluation is returned <obj> an entity of the Model : a HSequence which contains it else, an empty HSequence <obj> the Model it self : ALL its content (not only the roots) */
  GiveList_2(first: Standard_Character, second: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Computes a List of entities from the model as follows <first> being a Selection or a combination of Selections, <ent> being an entity or a list of entities (as a HSequenceOfTransient) : the standard result of this selection applied to this list if <ent> is Null, the standard definition of the selection is used (which contains a default input selection) if <selname> is erroneous, a null handle is returned REMARK : selname is processed as <first second> of preceding GiveList */
  GiveListFromList(selname: Standard_Character, ent: any): any;
  /** Combines two lists and returns the result, according to mode : <mode> < 0 : entities in <l1> AND NOT in <l2> <mode> = 0 : entities in <l1> AND in <l2> <mode> > 0 : entities in <l1> OR in <l2> */
  GiveListCombined(l1: any, l2: any, mode: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Determines check status for an entity regarding last call to QueryCheckList : -1 : <ent> unknown in the model, ignored 0 : no check at all, immediate or inherited thru Graph 1 : immediate warning (no fail), no inherited check 2 : immediate fail, no inherited check +10 : idem but some inherited warning (no fail) +20 : idem but some inherited fail */
  QueryCheckStatus(ent: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Determines if <entdad> is parent of <entson> (in the graph), returns : -1 if no; 0 if <entdad> = <entson> 1 if immediate parent, > 1 if parent, gives count of steps */
  QueryParent(entdad: any, entson: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Sets a list of Parameters, i.e. TypedValue, to be handled through an Editor The two lists are parallel, if <params> is longer than <uses>, surnumeral parameters are for general use EditForms are created to handle these parameters (list, edit) on the basis of a ParamEditor xst-params-edit A use number dispatches the parameter to a given EditForm EditForms are defined as follows Name Use Means xst-params all All Parameters (complete list) xst-params-general 1 Generals xst-params-load 2 LoadFile (no Transfer) xst-params-send 3 SendFile (Write, no Transfer) xst-params-split 4 Split xst-param-read 5 Transfer on Reading xst-param-write 6 Transfer on Writing */
  SetParams(params: Standard_Integer, uselist: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Traces the Statics attached to a given use number If <use> is given positive (normal), the trace is embedded with a header and a trailer If <use> is negative, just values are printed (this allows to make compositions) Remark : use number 5 commands use -2 to be traced Remark : use numbers 4 and 6 command use -3 to be traced */
  TraceStatics(use: Standard_Integer, mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Dumps contents of the ShareOut (on "cout") */
  DumpShare(): void;
  /** Lists the Labels of all Items of the WorkSession If <label> is defined, lists labels which contain it */
  ListItems(label: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Lists the Modifiers of the session (for each one, displays its Label). Listing is done following Ranks (Modifiers are invoked following their ranks) Model Modifiers if <formodel> is True, File Modifiers else */
  ListFinalModifiers(formodel: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Lists a Selection and its Sources (see SelectionIterator), given its rank in the list */
  DumpSelection(sel: any): void;
  /** Dumps the current Model (as inherited DumpModel), on currently defined Default Trace File (default is standard output) */
  TraceDumpModel(mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Dumps an entity from the current Model as inherited DumpEntity on currently defined Default Trace File (<level> interpreted according to the Norm, see WorkLibrary) */
  TraceDumpEntity(ent: any, level: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Displays the list of Entities selected by a Selection (i.e. the result of EvalSelection). */
  EvaluateSelection(sel: any): void;
  /** Displays the result of applying a Dispatch on the input Model (also shows Remainder if there is) <mode> = 0 (default), displays nothing else <mode> = 1 : displays also duplicated entities (because of this dispatch) <mode> = 2 : displays the entities of the starting Model which are not taken by this dispatch (forgotten entities) <mode> = 3 : displays both duplicated and forgotten entities Remark : EvaluateComplete displays these data evaluated for for all the dispatches, if there are several */
  EvaluateDispatch(disp: any, mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Displays the effect of applying the ShareOut on the input Model. <mode> = 0 (default) : displays only roots for each packet, <mode> = 1 : displays all entities for each packet, plus duplicated entities <mode> = 2 : same as <mode> = 1, plus displays forgotten entities (which are in no packet at all) */
  EvaluateComplete(mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Interface_TypedValue extends MoniTool_TypedValue {
  /** Creates a TypedValue, with a name type gives the type of the parameter, default is free text Also available : Integer, Real, Enum, Entity (i.e. Object) More precise specifications, titles, can be given to the TypedValue once created init gives an initial value. If it is not given, the TypedValue begins as "not set", its value is empty */
  constructor(name: Standard_Character, type: Interface_ParamType, init: Standard_Character)
  /** Returns the type I.E. calls ValueType then makes correspondence between ParamType from Interface (which remains for compatibility reasons) and ValueType from MoniTool */
  Type(): Interface_ParamType;
  /** Correspondence ParamType from Interface to ValueType from MoniTool. */
  static ParamTypeToValueType(typ: Interface_ParamType): MoniTool_ValueType;
  /** Correspondence ParamType from Interface to ValueType from MoniTool. */
  static ValueTypeToParamType(typ: MoniTool_ValueType): Interface_ParamType;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Interface_Static extends Interface_TypedValue {
  /** Returns the family. It can be : a resource name for applis, an internal name between : $e (environment variables), $l (other, purely local) */
  Family(): Standard_Character;
  /** Sets a "wild-card" static : its value will be considered if <me> is not properly set. (reset by set a null one) */
  SetWild(wildcard: any): void;
  /** Returns the wildcard static, which can be (is most often) null. */
  Wild(): any;
  /** Records a Static has "uptodate", i.e. its value has been taken into account by a reinitialisation procedure This flag is reset at each successful SetValue */
  SetUptodate(): void;
  /** Returns the status "uptodate". */
  UpdatedStatus(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Declares a new Static (by calling its constructor) If this name is already taken, does nothing and returns False Else, creates it and returns True For additional definitions, get the Static then edit it */
  static Init_1(family: Standard_Character, name: Standard_Character, type: Interface_ParamType, init: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Declares a new Static (by calling its constructor) If this name is already taken, does nothing and returns False Else, creates it and returns True For additional definitions, get the Static then edit it */
  static Init_2(family: Standard_Character, name: Standard_Character, type: Standard_Character, init: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a Static from its name. Null Handle if not present. */
  static Static(name: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns True if a Static named <name> is present, False else. */
  static IsPresent(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a part of the definition of a Static, as a CString The part is designated by its name, as a CString If the required value is not a string, it is converted to a CString then returned If <name> is not present, or <part> not defined for <name>, this function returns an empty string Allowed parts for CDef : family : the family type : the type ("integer","real","text","enum") label : the label satis : satisfy function name if any rmin : minimum real value rmax : maximum real value imin : minimum integer value imax : maximum integer value enum nn (nn : value of an integer) : enum value for nn unit : unit definition for a real */
  static CDef(name: Standard_Character, part: Standard_Character): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns a part of the definition of a Static, as an Integer The part is designated by its name, as a CString If the required value is not a string, returns zero For a Boolean, 0 for false, 1 for true If <name> is not present, or <part> not defined for <name>, this function returns zero Allowed parts for IDef : imin, imax : minimum or maximum integer value estart : starting number for enum ecount : count of enum values (starting from estart) ematch : exact match status eval val : case determined from a string */
  static IDef(name: Standard_Character, part: Standard_Character): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns True if <name> is present AND set <proper> True (D) : considers this item only <proper> False : if not set and attached to a wild-card, considers this wild-card */
  static IsSet(name: Standard_Character, proper: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the value of the parameter identified by the string name. If the specified parameter does not exist, an empty string is returned. Example Interface_Static::CVal("write.step.schema"); which could return: "AP214" */
  static CVal(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the integer value of the translation parameter identified by the string name. Returns the value 0 if the parameter does not exist. Example Interface_Static::IVal("write.step.schema"); which could return: 3 */
  static IVal(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the value of a static translation parameter identified by the string name. Returns the value 0.0 if the parameter does not exist. */
  static RVal(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Real;
  /** Modifies the value of the parameter identified by name. The modification is specified by the string val. false is returned if the parameter does not exist. Example Interface_Static::SetCVal ("write.step.schema","AP203") This syntax specifies a switch from the default STEP 214 mode to STEP 203 mode. */
  static SetCVal(name: Standard_Character, val: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Modifies the value of the parameter identified by name. The modification is specified by the integer value val. false is returned if the parameter does not exist. Example Interface_Static::SetIVal ("write.step.schema", 3) This syntax specifies a switch from the default STEP 214 mode to STEP 203 mode.S */
  static SetIVal(name: Standard_Character, val: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Modifies the value of a translation parameter. false is returned if the parameter does not exist. The modification is specified by the real number value val. */
  static SetRVal(name: Standard_Character, val: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a Static to be "uptodate" Returns False if <name> is not present This status can be used by a reinitialisation procedure to rerun if a value has been changed */
  static Update(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the status "uptodate" from a Static Returns False if <name> is not present */
  static IsUpdated(name: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a list of names of statics : <mode> = 0 (D) : criter is for family <mode> = 1 : criter is regexp on names, takes final items (ignore wild cards) <mode> = 2 : idem but take only wilded, not final items <mode> = 3 : idem, take all items matching criter idem + 100 : takes only non-updated items idem + 200 : takes only updated items criter empty (D) : returns all names else returns names which match the given criter Remark : families beginning by '$' are not listed by criter "" they are listed only by criter "$" This allows for instance to set new values after having loaded or reloaded a resource, then to update them as required */
  static Items(mode: Standard_Integer, criter: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Initializes all standard static parameters, which can be used by every function. statics specific of a norm or a function must be defined around it */
  static Standards(): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Interface_Static_1 extends Interface_Static {
    constructor(family: Standard_Character, name: Standard_Character, type: Interface_ParamType, init: Standard_Character);
  }

  export declare class Interface_Static_2 extends Interface_Static {
    constructor(family: Standard_Character, name: Standard_Character, other: any);
  }

export declare class XSControl_Reader {
  /** Sets a specific norm to <me> Returns True if done, False if <norm> is not available */
  SetNorm(norm: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a specific session to <me> */
  SetWS(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the session used in <me> */
  WS(): any;
  /** Loads a file and returns the read status Zero for a Model which complies with the Controller */
  ReadFile(filename: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Returns the model. It can then be consulted (header, product) */
  Model(): any;
  /** Returns a list of entities from the IGES or STEP file according to the following rules: if first and second are empty strings, the whole file is selected. if first is an entity number or label, the entity referred to is selected. if first is a list of entity numbers/labels separated by commas, the entities referred to are selected, if first is the name of a selection in the worksession and second is not defined, the list contains the standard output for that selection. if first is the name of a selection and second is defined, the criterion defined by second is applied to the result of the first selection. A selection is an operator which computes a list of entities from a list given in input according to its type. If no list is specified, the selection computes its list of entities from the whole model. A selection can be: A predefined selection (xst-transferrable-mode) A filter based on a signature A Signature is an operator which returns a string from an entity according to its type. For example: "xst-type" (CDL) "iges-level" "step-type". For example, if you wanted to select only the advanced_faces in a STEP file you would use the following code: Example Reader.GiveList("xst-transferrable-roots","step-type(ADVANCED_FACE)"); Warning If the value given to second is incorrect, it will simply be ignored. */
  GiveList_1(first: Standard_Character, second: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns a list of entities from the IGES or STEP file according to the following rules: if first and second are empty strings, the whole file is selected. if first is an entity number or label, the entity referred to is selected. if first is a list of entity numbers/labels separated by commas, the entities referred to are selected, if first is the name of a selection in the worksession and second is not defined, the list contains the standard output for that selection. if first is the name of a selection and second is defined, the criterion defined by second is applied to the result of the first selection. A selection is an operator which computes a list of entities from a list given in input according to its type. If no list is specified, the selection computes its list of entities from the whole model. A selection can be: A predefined selection (xst-transferrable-mode) A filter based on a signature A Signature is an operator which returns a string from an entity according to its type. For example: "xst-type" (CDL) "iges-level" "step-type". For example, if you wanted to select only the advanced_faces in a STEP file you would use the following code: Example Reader.GiveList("xst-transferrable-roots","step-type(ADVANCED_FACE)"); Warning If the value given to second is incorrect, it will simply be ignored. */
  GiveList_2(first: Standard_Character, ent: any): any;
  /** Determines the list of root entities which are candidate for a transfer to a Shape, and returns the number of entities in the list */
  NbRootsForTransfer(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns an IGES or STEP root entity for translation. The entity is identified by its rank in a list. */
  RootForTransfer(num: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Translates a root identified by the rank num in the model. false is returned if no shape is produced. */
  TransferOneRoot(num: Standard_Integer, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Translates an IGES or STEP entity identified by the rank num in the model. false is returned if no shape is produced. */
  TransferOne(num: Standard_Integer, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Translates an IGES or STEP entity in the model. true is returned if a shape is produced; otherwise, false is returned. */
  TransferEntity(start: any, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Translates a list of entities. Returns the number of IGES or STEP entities that were successfully translated. The list can be produced with GiveList. Warning - This function does not clear the existing output shapes. */
  TransferList(list: any, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Integer;
  /** Translates all translatable roots and returns the number of successful translations. Warning - This function clears existing output shapes first. */
  TransferRoots(theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Integer;
  /** Clears the list of shapes that may have accumulated in calls to TransferOne or TransferRoot.C */
  ClearShapes(): void;
  /** Returns the number of shapes produced by translation. */
  NbShapes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the shape resulting from a translation and identified by the rank num. num equals 1 by default. In other words, the first shape resulting from the translation is returned. */
  Shape(num: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns all of the results in a single shape which is: a null shape if there are no results, a shape if there is one result, a compound containing the resulting shapes if there are more than one. */
  OneShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Prints the check list attached to loaded data, on the Standard Trace File (starts at std::cout) All messages or fails only, according to <failsonly> mode = 0 : per entity, prints messages mode = 1 : per message, just gives count of entities per check mode = 2 : also gives entity numbers */
  PrintCheckLoad_1(failsonly: Standard_Boolean, mode: IFSelect_PrintCount): void;
  /** Displays check results for the last translation of IGES or STEP entities to Open CASCADE entities. Only fail messages are displayed if failsonly is true. All messages are displayed if failsonly is false. mode determines the contents and the order of the messages according to the terms of the IFSelect_PrintCount enumeration. */
  PrintCheckTransfer_1(failsonly: Standard_Boolean, mode: IFSelect_PrintCount): void;
  /** Displays the statistics for the last translation. what defines the kind of statistics that are displayed as follows: 0 gives general statistics (number of translated roots, number of warnings, number of fail messages), 1 gives root results, 2 gives statistics for all checked entities, 3 gives the list of translated entities, 4 gives warning and fail messages, 5 gives fail messages only. The use of mode depends on the value of what. If what is 0, mode is ignored. If what is 1, 2 or 3, mode defines the following: 0 lists the numbers of IGES or STEP entities in the respective model 1 gives the number, identifier, type and result type for each IGES or STEP entity and/or its status (fail, warning, etc.) 2 gives maximum information for each IGES or STEP entity (i.e. checks) 3 gives the number of entities per type of IGES or STEP entity 4 gives the number of IGES or STEP entities per result type and/or status 5 gives the number of pairs (IGES or STEP or result type and status) 6 gives the number of pairs (IGES or STEP or result type and status) AND the list of entity numbers in the IGES or STEP model. If what is 4 or 5, mode defines the warning and fail messages as follows: if mode is 0 all warnings and checks per entity are returned if mode is 2 the list of entities per warning is returned. If mode is not set, only the list of all entities per warning is given. */
  PrintStatsTransfer_1(what: Standard_Integer, mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Gives statistics about Transfer. */
  GetStatsTransfer(list: any): { nbMapped: number; nbWithResult: number; nbWithFail: number };
  /** Returns flags defining operations to be performed on shapes. Pair of values defining operations to be performed on shapes and a boolean value that indicates whether the flags were set. */
  GetShapeProcessFlags(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class XSControl_Reader_1 extends XSControl_Reader {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class XSControl_Reader_2 extends XSControl_Reader {
    constructor(norm: Standard_Character);
  }

  export declare class XSControl_Reader_3 extends XSControl_Reader {
    constructor(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class XSControl_WorkSession extends IFSelect_WorkSession {
  constructor()
  /** In addition to basic ClearData, clears Transfer and Management for interactive use, for mode = 0,1,2 and over 4 Plus : mode = 5 to clear Transfers (both ways) only mode = 6 to clear enforced results mode = 7 to clear transfers, results */
  ClearData(theMode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Selects a Norm defined by its name. A Norm is described and handled by a Controller Returns True if done, False if <normname> is unknown The current Profile for this Norm is taken. */
  SelectNorm(theNormName: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Selects a Norm defined by its Controller itself. */
  SetController(theCtl: any): void;
  /** Returns the name of the last Selected Norm. If none is defined, returns an empty string By default, returns the complete name of the norm If <rsc> is True, returns the short name used for resource */
  SelectedNorm(theRsc: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the norm controller itself. */
  NormAdaptor(): any;
  /** Returns the current Context List, Null if not defined The Context is given to the TransientProcess for TransferRead */
  Context(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Sets the current Context List, as a whole Sets it to the TransferReader */
  SetAllContext(theContext: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Clears the whole current Context (nullifies it) */
  ClearContext(): void;
  /** Sets a Transfer Reader, by internal ways, according mode : 0 recreates it clear 1 clears it (does not recreate) 2 aligns Roots of TransientProcess from final Results 3 aligns final Results from Roots of TransientProcess 4 begins a new transfer (by BeginTransfer) 5 recreates TransferReader then begins a new transfer */
  InitTransferReader(theMode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets a Transfer Reader, which manages transfers on reading. */
  SetTransferReader(theTR: any): void;
  /** Returns the Transfer Reader, Null if not set. */
  TransferReader(): any;
  /** Returns the TransientProcess(internal data for TransferReader) */
  MapReader(): any;
  /** Changes the Map Reader, i.e. considers that the new one defines the relevant read results (forgets the former ones) Returns True when done, False in case of bad definition, i.e. if Model from TP differs from that of Session */
  SetMapReader(theTP: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the result attached to a starting entity If <mode> = 0, returns Final Result If <mode> = 1, considers Last Result If <mode> = 2, considers Final, else if absent, Last returns it as Transient, if result is not transient returns the Binder <mode> = 10,11,12 idem but returns the Binder itself (if it is not, e.g. Shape, returns the Binder) <mode> = 20, returns the ResultFromModel */
  Result(theEnt: any, theMode: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Commands the transfer of, either one entity, or a list I.E. calls the TransferReader after having analysed <ents> It is cumulated from the last BeginTransfer <ents> is processed by GiveList, hence : <ents> a Selection : its SelectionResult <ents> a HSequenceOfTransient : this list <ents> the Model : in this specific case, all the roots, with no cumulation of former transfers (TransferReadRoots) */
  TransferReadOne(theEnts: any, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Integer;
  /** Commands the transfer of all the root entities of the model i.e. calls TransferRoot from the TransferReader with the Graph No cumulation with former calls to TransferReadOne */
  TransferReadRoots(theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Integer;
  /** produces and returns a new Model well conditioned It is produced by the Norm Controller It can be Null (if this function is not implemented) */
  NewModel(): any;
  /** Returns the Transfer Reader, Null if not set. */
  TransferWriter(): any;
  /** Changes the Map Reader, i.e. considers that the new one defines the relevant read results (forgets the former ones) Returns True when done, False if <FP> is Null */
  SetMapWriter(theFP: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a Shape from CasCade to a model of current norm, according to the last call to SetModeWriteShape Returns status :Done if OK, Fail if error during transfer, Error if transfer badly initialised */
  TransferWriteShape(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theCompGraph: Standard_Boolean, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  Vars(): any;
  SetVars(theVars: any): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class MoniTool_TypedValue extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Returns the name. */
  Name(): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the type of the value. */
  ValueType(): MoniTool_ValueType;
  /** Returns the Definition By priority, the enforced one, else an automatic one, computed from the specification */
  Definition(): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Enforces a Definition. */
  SetDefinition(deftext: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Completes the definition of a TypedValue by command <initext>, once created with its type Returns True if done, False if could not be interpreted <initext> may be : imin ival : minimum value for an integer imax ival : maximum value for an integer rmin rval : minimum value for a real rmax rval : maximum value for a real unit name : name of unit ematch i : enum from integer value i, match required enum i : enum from integer value i, match not required eval text : add an enumerative value (increments max by 1) eval ?? : add a non-authorised enum value (to be skipped) tmax l : maximum length for a text */
  AddDef(initext: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a label, which can then be displayed. */
  SetLabel(label: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Returns the label, if set; else returns an empty string. */
  Label(): Standard_Character;
  /** Sets a maximum length for a text (active only for a free text) */
  SetMaxLength(max: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns the maximum length, 0 if not set. */
  MaxLength(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Sets an Integer limit (included) to <val>, the upper limit if <max> is True, the lower limit if <max> is False */
  SetIntegerLimit(max: Standard_Boolean, val: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Gives an Integer Limit (upper if <max> True, lower if <max> False). Returns True if this limit is defined, False else (in that case, gives the natural limit for Integer) */
  IntegerLimit(max: Standard_Boolean): { result: Standard_Boolean; val: number };
  /** Sets a Real limit (included) to <val>, the upper limit if <max> is True, the lower limit if <max> is False */
  SetRealLimit(max: Standard_Boolean, val: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Gives an Real Limit (upper if <max> True, lower if <max> False). Returns True if this limit is defined, False else (in that case, gives the natural limit for Real) */
  RealLimit(max: Standard_Boolean): { result: Standard_Boolean; val: number };
  /** Sets (Clears if <def> empty) a unit definition, as an equation of dimensions. TypedValue just records this definition, does not exploit it, to be done as required by user applications */
  SetUnitDef(def: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Returns the recorded unit definition, empty if not set. */
  UnitDef(): Standard_Character;
  /** For an enumeration, precises the starting value (default 0) and the match condition : if True (D), the string value must match the definition, else it may take another value : in that case, the Integer Value will be Start - 1. (empty value remains allowed) */
  StartEnum(start: Standard_Integer, match: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Adds enumerative definitions. For more than 10, several calls. */
  AddEnum(v1: Standard_Character, v2: Standard_Character, v3: Standard_Character, v4: Standard_Character, v5: Standard_Character, v6: Standard_Character, v7: Standard_Character, v8: Standard_Character, v9: Standard_Character, v10: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Adds an enumeration definition, by its string and numeric values. If it is the first setting for this value, it is recorded as main value. Else, it is recognized as alternate string for this numeric value */
  AddEnumValue(val: Standard_Character, num: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Gives the Enum definitions : start value, end value, match status. Returns True for an Enum, False else. */
  EnumDef(): { result: Standard_Boolean; startcase: number; endcase: number; match: boolean };
  /** Returns the value of an enumerative definition, from its rank Empty string if out of range or not an Enum */
  EnumVal(num: Standard_Integer): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the case number which corresponds to a string value Works with main and additional values Returns (StartEnum - 1) if not OK, -1 if not an Enum */
  EnumCase(val: Standard_Character): Standard_Integer;
  /** Sets type of which an Object TypedValue must be kind of Error for a TypedValue not an Object (Entity) */
  SetObjectType(typ: Handle_Standard_Type): void;
  /** Returns the type of which an Object TypedValue must be kind of Default is Standard_Transient Null for a TypedValue not an Object */
  ObjectType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Sets a specific Interpret function. */
  SetInterpret(func: MoniTool_ValueInterpret): void;
  /** Tells if a TypedValue has an Interpret. */
  HasInterpret(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a specific Satisfies function : it is added to the already defined criteria It must match the form : satisfies (val : HAsciiString) returns Boolean */
  SetSatisfies(func: MoniTool_ValueSatisfies, name: Standard_Character): void;
  /** Returns name of specific satisfy, empty string if none. */
  SatisfiesName(): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns True if the value is set (not empty/not null object) */
  IsSetValue(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the value, as a cstring. Empty if not set. */
  CStringValue(): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns the value, as a Handle (can then be shared) Null if not defined */
  HStringValue(): any;
  /** Interprets a value. <native> True : returns a native value <native> False : returns a coded value If the Interpret function is set, calls it Else, for an Enum, Native returns the Text, Coded returns the number STANDARD RETURNS : = hval means no specific interpretation Null means senseless Can also be redefined */
  Interpret(hval: any, native: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Returns True if a value statifies the specification (remark : does not apply to Entity : see ObjectType, for this type, the string is just a comment) */
  Satisfies(hval: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Clears the recorded Value : it is now unset. */
  ClearValue(): void;
  /** Changes the value. The new one must satisfy the specification Returns False (and did not set) if the new value does not satisfy the specification Can be redefined to be managed (in a subclass) */
  SetCStringValue(val: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Forces a new Handle for the Value It can be empty, else (if Type is not free Text), it must satisfy the specification. Not only the value is changed, but also the way it is shared Remark : for Type=Object, this value is not controlled, it can be set as a comment Returns False (and did not set) if the new value does not satisfy the specification Can be redefined to be managed (in a subclass) */
  SetHStringValue(hval: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the value as integer, i.e. : For type = Integer, the integer itself; 0 if not set For type = Enum, the designated rank (see Enum definition) StartEnum - 1 if not set or not in the definition Else, returns 0 */
  IntegerValue(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Changes the value as an integer, only for Integer or Enum. */
  SetIntegerValue(ival: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the value as real, for a Real type TypedValue Else, returns 0. */
  RealValue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Changes the value as a real, only for Real. */
  SetRealValue(rval: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the value as Transient Object, only for Object/Entity Remark that the "HString value" is IGNORED here Null if not set; remains to be casted */
  ObjectValue(): any;
  /** Same as ObjectValue, but avoids DownCast : the receiving variable is directly loaded. It is assumed that it complies with the definition of ObjectType ! Otherwise, big trouble */
  GetObjectValue(val: any): void;
  /** Changes the value as Transient Object, only for Object/Entity Returns False if DynamicType does not satisfy ObjectType Can be redefined to be managed (in a subclass) */
  SetObjectValue(obj: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the type name of the ObjectValue, or an empty string if not set */
  ObjectTypeName(): Standard_Character;
  /** Adds a TypedValue in the library. It is recorded then will be accessed by its Name Its Definition may be imposed, else it is computed as usual By default it will be accessed by its Definition (string) Returns True if done, False if tv is Null or brings no Definition or <def> not defined If a TypedValue was already recorded under this name, it is replaced */
  static AddLib(tv: any, def: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the TypedValue bound with a given Name Null Handle if none recorded Warning: it is the original, not duplicated */
  static Lib(def: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns a COPY of the TypedValue bound with a given Name Null Handle if none recorded */
  static FromLib(def: Standard_Character): any;
  /** Returns the list of names of items of the Library of Types Library of TypedValue as Valued Parameters, accessed by parameter name for use by management of Static Parameters */
  static LibList(): any;
  /** Returns a static value from its name, null if unknown. */
  static StaticValue(name: Standard_Character): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class MoniTool_TypedValue_1 extends MoniTool_TypedValue {
    constructor(name: Standard_Character, type: MoniTool_ValueType, init: Standard_Character);
  }

  export declare class MoniTool_TypedValue_2 extends MoniTool_TypedValue {
    constructor(other: any);
  }

export declare class StlAPI_Reader {
  constructor();
  /** Reads STL file to the TopoDS_Shape (each triangle is converted to the face). True if reading is successful */
  Read_1(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFileName: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class StlAPI_Writer {
  /** Creates a writer object with default parameters: ASCIIMode. */
  constructor()
  /** Returns the address to the flag defining the mode for writing the file. This address may be used to either read or change the flag. If the mode returns True (default value) the generated file is an ASCII file. If the mode returns False, the generated file is a binary file. */
  ASCIIMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Converts a given shape to STL format and writes it to file with a given filename. the error state. */
  Write_1(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFileName: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Offers the API for STL data manipulation. */
export declare class StlAPI {
  constructor();
  /** Convert and write shape to STL format. File is written in binary if aAsciiMode is False otherwise it is written in Ascii (by default). */
  static Write(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theFile: Standard_Character, theAsciiMode: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  static Read(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, aFile: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Used to define a Length Unit attribute containing a length unit info. */
export declare class XCAFDoc_LengthUnit extends TDF_Attribute {
  constructor()
  /** Returns the GUID of the attribute. */
  static GetID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Finds or creates a LengthUnit attribute theUnitName - name of the unit: mm, m, cm, km, micron, in, min, nin, ft, stat.mile theUnitValue - length scale factor to meter The LengthUnit attribute is returned. */
  static Set_1(theLabel: TDF_Label, theUnitName: XCAFDoc_PartId, theUnitValue: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Finds or creates a LengthUnit attribute theUnitName - name of the unit: mm, m, cm, km, micron, in, min, nin, ft, stat.mile theUnitValue - length scale factor to meter The LengthUnit attribute is returned. */
  static Set_2(theLabel: TDF_Label, theUnitValue: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Finds or creates a LengthUnit attribute theUnitName - name of the unit: mm, m, cm, km, micron, in, min, nin, ft, stat.mile theUnitValue - length scale factor to meter The LengthUnit attribute is returned. */
  static Set_3(theLabel: TDF_Label, theGUID: Standard_GUID, theUnitName: XCAFDoc_PartId, theUnitValue: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Finds or creates a LengthUnit attribute theUnitName - name of the unit: mm, m, cm, km, micron, in, min, nin, ft, stat.mile theUnitValue - length scale factor to meter The LengthUnit attribute is returned. */
  Set_4(theUnitName: XCAFDoc_PartId, theUnitValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Length unit description (could be arbitrary text) */
  GetUnitName(): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Returns length unit scale factor to meter. */
  GetUnitValue(): Standard_Real;
  IsEmpty(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Restores the backuped contents from <anAttribute> into this one. It is used when aborting a transaction. */
  Restore(theWith: any): void;
  /** This method is different from the "Copy" one, because it is used when copying an attribute from a source structure into a target structure. This method may paste the contents of <me> into <intoAttribute>. The given pasted attribute can be full or empty of its contents. But don't make a NEW! Just set the contents! It is possible to use <aRelocationTable> to get/set the relocation value of a source attribute. */
  Paste(theInto: any, theRT: any): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  NewEmpty(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare type XCAFDoc_ColorType = {
  XCAFDoc_ColorGen: XCAFDoc_ColorTypeValue;
  XCAFDoc_ColorSurf: XCAFDoc_ColorTypeValue;
  XCAFDoc_ColorCurv: XCAFDoc_ColorTypeValue;
}

export declare type XCAFDoc_ColorTypeValue = 'XCAFDoc_ColorGen' | 'XCAFDoc_ColorSurf' | 'XCAFDoc_ColorCurv';

export declare class XCAFDoc_DocumentTool extends TDataStd_GenericEmpty {
  constructor()
  static GetID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Create (if not exist) DocumentTool attribute on 0.1 label if <IsAcces> is true, else on <L> label. This label will be returned by DocLabel(); If the attribute is already set it won't be reset on <L> even if <IsAcces> is false. ColorTool and ShapeTool attributes are also set by this method. */
  static Set(L: TDF_Label, IsAcces: Standard_Boolean): any;
  static IsXCAFDocument(Doc: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns label where the DocumentTool attribute is or 0.1 if DocumentTool is not yet set. */
  static DocLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 1. */
  static ShapesLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 2. */
  static ColorsLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 3. */
  static LayersLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 4. */
  static DGTsLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 5. */
  static MaterialsLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 7. */
  static ViewsLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 8. */
  static ClippingPlanesLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 9. */
  static NotesLabel(acces: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns sub-label of DocLabel() with tag 10. */
  static VisMaterialLabel(theLabel: TDF_Label): TDF_Label;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) ShapeTool attribute on ShapesLabel(). */
  static ShapeTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the ShapeTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckShapeTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) ColorTool attribute on ColorsLabel(). */
  static ColorTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the ColorTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckColorTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) XCAFDoc_VisMaterialTool attribute on VisMaterialLabel(). Should not be confused with MaterialTool() defining physical/manufacturing materials. */
  static VisMaterialTool(theLabel: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the VisMaterialTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckVisMaterialTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) LayerTool attribute on LayersLabel(). */
  static LayerTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the LayerTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckLayerTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) DimTolTool attribute on DGTsLabel(). */
  static DimTolTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the DimTolTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckDimTolTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) DimTolTool attribute on DGTsLabel(). */
  static MaterialTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the MaterialTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckMaterialTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) ViewTool attribute on ViewsLabel(). */
  static ViewTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the ViewTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckViewTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) ClippingPlaneTool attribute on ClippingPlanesLabel(). */
  static ClippingPlaneTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the ClippingPlaneTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckClippingPlaneTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates (if it does not exist) NotesTool attribute on NotesLabel(). */
  static NotesTool(acces: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Checks for the NotesTool attribute on the label's document Returns TRUE if Tool exists, ELSE if it has not been created */
  static CheckNotesTool(theAcces: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns value of current internal unit for the document converted to base unit type. */
  static GetLengthUnit_1(theDoc: any, theBaseUnit: UnitsMethods_LengthUnit): { result: Standard_Boolean; theResut: number };
  /** Returns value of current internal unit for the document converted to base unit type. */
  static GetLengthUnit_2(theDoc: any): { result: Standard_Boolean; theResut: number };
  /** Sets value of current internal unit to the document in meter. */
  static SetLengthUnit_1(theDoc: any, theUnitValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets value of current internal unit to the document in meter. */
  static SetLengthUnit_2(theDoc: any, theUnitValue: Standard_Real, theBaseUnit: UnitsMethods_LengthUnit): void;
  /** to be called when reading this attribute from file */
  Init(): void;
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** To init this derived attribute after the attribute restore using the base restore-methods. */
  AfterRetrieval(forceIt: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  NewEmpty(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class XCAFDoc_ColorTool extends TDataStd_GenericEmpty {
  constructor()
  /** Returns current auto-naming mode; TRUE by default. If TRUE then for added colors the TDataStd_Name attribute will be automatically added. This setting is global. */
  static AutoNaming(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** See also AutoNaming(). */
  static SetAutoNaming(theIsAutoNaming: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Creates (if not exist) ColorTool. */
  static Set(L: TDF_Label): any;
  static GetID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** returns the label under which colors are stored */
  BaseLabel(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns internal XCAFDoc_ShapeTool tool. */
  ShapeTool(): any;
  /** Returns True if label belongs to a colortable and is a color definition */
  IsColor(lab: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  static GetColor_1(lab: TDF_Label, col: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  static GetColor_2(lab: TDF_Label, col: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds a color definition in a colortable and returns its label if found Returns False if color is not found in colortable */
  FindColor_1(col: Quantity_Color, lab: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds a color definition in a colortable and returns its label if found Returns False if color is not found in colortable */
  FindColor_2(col: Quantity_ColorRGBA, lab: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds a color definition in a colortable and returns its label if found Returns False if color is not found in colortable */
  FindColor_3(col: Quantity_Color): TDF_Label;
  /** Finds a color definition in a colortable and returns its label if found Returns False if color is not found in colortable */
  FindColor_4(col: Quantity_ColorRGBA): TDF_Label;
  /** Adds a color definition to a colortable and returns its label (returns existing label if the same color is already defined) */
  AddColor_1(col: Quantity_Color): TDF_Label;
  /** Adds a color definition to a colortable and returns its label (returns existing label if the same color is already defined) */
  AddColor_2(col: Quantity_ColorRGBA): TDF_Label;
  /** Removes color from the colortable. */
  RemoveColor(lab: TDF_Label): void;
  /** Returns a sequence of colors currently stored in the colortable */
  GetColors(Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): void;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_1(L: TDF_Label, colorL: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): void;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_2(L: TDF_Label, Color: Quantity_Color, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): void;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_3(L: TDF_Label, Color: Quantity_ColorRGBA, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): void;
  /** Removes a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color */
  UnSetColor_1(L: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): void;
  /** Returns True if label <L> has a color assignment of the type <type> */
  IsSet_1(L: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  static GetColor_3(L: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, colorL: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  static GetColor_4(L: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  static GetColor_5(L: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_4(S: TopoDS_Shape, colorL: TDF_Label, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_5(S: TopoDS_Shape, Color: Quantity_Color, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color defined by <colorL>. Color of shape is defined following way in dependance with type of color. If type of color is XCAFDoc_ColorGen - then this color defines default color for surfaces and curves. If for shape color with types XCAFDoc_ColorSurf or XCAFDoc_ColorCurv is specified then such color overrides generic color. */
  SetColor_6(S: TopoDS_Shape, Color: Quantity_ColorRGBA, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Removes a link with GUID defined by <type> (see XCAFDoc::ColorRefGUID()) from label <L> to color */
  UnSetColor_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if label <L> has a color assignment of the type <type> */
  IsSet_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  GetColor_6(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, colorL: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  GetColor_7(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns color defined by label lab Returns False if the label is not in colortable or does not define a color */
  GetColor_8(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Return TRUE if object on this label is visible, FALSE if invisible. */
  static IsVisible(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set the visibility of object on label. Do nothing if there no any object. Set UAttribute with corresponding GUID. */
  SetVisibility(shapeLabel: TDF_Label, isvisible: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Return TRUE if object color defined by its Layer, FALSE if not. */
  IsColorByLayer(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set the Color defined by Layer flag on label. Do nothing if there no any object. Set UAttribute with corresponding GUID. */
  SetColorByLayer(shapeLabel: TDF_Label, isColorByLayer: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the color of component that styled with SHUO structure Returns FALSE if no sush component found NOTE: create SHUO structeure if it is necessary and if <isCreateSHUO> */
  SetInstanceColor_1(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_Color, isCreateSHUO: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets the color of component that styled with SHUO structure Returns FALSE if no sush component found NOTE: create SHUO structeure if it is necessary and if <isCreateSHUO> */
  SetInstanceColor_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_ColorRGBA, isCreateSHUO: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gets the color of component that styled with SHUO structure Returns FALSE if no sush component or color type */
  GetInstanceColor_1(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gets the color of component that styled with SHUO structure Returns FALSE if no sush component or color type */
  GetInstanceColor_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, type: XCAFDoc_ColorType, color: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gets the visibility status of component that styled with SHUO structure Returns FALSE if no sush component */
  IsInstanceVisible(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Reverses order in chains of TreeNodes (from Last to First) under each Color Label since we became to use function ::Prepend() instead of ::Append() in method SetColor() for acceleration */
  ReverseChainsOfTreeNodes(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  NewEmpty(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class XCAFDoc_ShapeTool extends TDataStd_GenericEmpty {
  /** Creates an empty tool Creates a tool to work with a document <Doc> Attaches to label XCAFDoc::LabelShapes() */
  constructor()
  static GetID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Create (if not exist) ShapeTool from XCAFDoc on <L>. */
  static Set(L: TDF_Label): any;
  /** Returns True if the label is a label of top-level shape, as opposed to component of assembly or subshape */
  IsTopLevel(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the label is not used by any assembly, i.e. contains sublabels which are assembly components This is relevant only if IsShape() is True (There is no Father TreeNode on this <L>) */
  static IsFree(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the label represents a shape (simple shape, assembly or reference) */
  static IsShape(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the label is a label of simple shape. */
  static IsSimpleShape(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Return true if <L> is a located instance of other shape i.e. reference */
  static IsReference(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the label is a label of assembly, i.e. contains sublabels which are assembly components This is relevant only if IsShape() is True */
  static IsAssembly(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Return true if <L> is reference serving as component of assembly */
  static IsComponent(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the label is a label of compound, i.e. contains some sublabels This is relevant only if IsShape() is True */
  static IsCompound(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Return true if <L> is subshape of the top-level shape. */
  static IsSubShape_1(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Return true if <L> is subshape of the top-level shape. */
  IsSubShape_2(shapeL: TDF_Label, sub: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  SearchUsingMap(S: TopoDS_Shape, L: TDF_Label, findWithoutLoc: Standard_Boolean, findSubshape: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** General tool to find a (sub) shape in the document If findInstance is True, and S has a non-null location, first tries to find the shape among the top-level shapes with this location If not found, and findComponent is True, tries to find the shape among the components of assemblies If not found, tries to find the shape without location among top-level shapes If not found and findSubshape is True, tries to find a shape as a subshape of top-level simple shapes Returns False if nothing is found */
  Search(S: TopoDS_Shape, L: TDF_Label, findInstance: Standard_Boolean, findComponent: Standard_Boolean, findSubshape: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the label corresponding to shape S (searches among top-level shapes, not including subcomponents of assemblies and subshapes) If findInstance is False (default), search for the input shape without location If findInstance is True, searches for the input shape as is. Return True if is found. */
  FindShape_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, L: TDF_Label, findInstance: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the label corresponding to shape S (searches among top-level shapes, not including subcomponents of assemblies and subshapes) If findInstance is False (default), search for the input shape without location If findInstance is True, searches for the input shape as is. Return True if is found. */
  FindShape_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, findInstance: Standard_Boolean): TDF_Label;
  /** To get TopoDS_Shape from shape's label For component, returns new shape with correct location Returns False if label does not contain shape */
  static GetShape_1(L: TDF_Label, S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** To get TopoDS_Shape from shape's label For component, returns new shape with correct location Returns False if label does not contain shape */
  static GetShape_2(L: TDF_Label): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Gets shape from a sequence of shape's labels theLabels a sequence of labels to get shapes from original shape in case of one label and a compound of shapes in case of more */
  static GetOneShape_1(theLabels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Gets shape from a sequence of shape's labels theLabels a sequence of labels to get shapes from original shape in case of one label and a compound of shapes in case of more */
  GetOneShape_2(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Creates new (empty) top-level shape. Initially it holds empty TopoDS_Compound */
  NewShape(): TDF_Label;
  /** Sets representation (TopoDS_Shape) for top-level shape. */
  SetShape(L: TDF_Label, S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Adds a new top-level (creates and returns a new label) If makeAssembly is True, treats TopAbs_COMPOUND shapes as assemblies (creates assembly structure). NOTE: <makePrepare> replace components without location in assembly by located components to avoid some problems. If AutoNaming() is True then automatically attaches names. */
  AddShape(S: TopoDS_Shape, makeAssembly: Standard_Boolean, makePrepare: Standard_Boolean): TDF_Label;
  /** Removes shape (whole label and all its sublabels) If removeCompletely is true, removes complete shape If removeCompletely is false, removes instance(location) only Returns False (and does nothing) if shape is not free or is not top-level shape */
  RemoveShape(L: TDF_Label, removeCompletely: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** set hasComponents into false */
  Init(): void;
  /** Sets auto-naming mode to <V>. If True then for added shapes, links, assemblies and SHUO's, the TDataStd_Name attribute is automatically added. For shapes it contains a shape type (e.g. "SOLID", "SHELL", etc); for links it has a form "=>[0:1:1:2]" (where a tag is a label containing a shape without a location); for assemblies it is "ASSEMBLY", and "SHUO" for SHUO's. This setting is global; it cannot be made a member function as it is used by static methods as well. By default, auto-naming is enabled. See also AutoNaming(). */
  static SetAutoNaming(V: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns current auto-naming mode. See SetAutoNaming() for description. */
  static AutoNaming(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** recursive */
  ComputeShapes(L: TDF_Label): void;
  /** Compute a sequence of simple shapes. */
  ComputeSimpleShapes(): void;
  /** Returns a sequence of all top-level shapes. */
  GetShapes(Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): void;
  /** Returns a sequence of all top-level shapes which are free (i.e. not referred by any other) */
  GetFreeShapes(FreeLabels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): void;
  /** Returns list of labels which refer shape L as component Returns number of users (0 if shape is free) */
  static GetUsers(L: TDF_Label, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, getsubchilds: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns location of instance. */
  static GetLocation(L: TDF_Label): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns label which corresponds to a shape referred by L Returns False if label is not reference */
  static GetReferredShape(L: TDF_Label, Label: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns number of Assembles components. */
  static NbComponents(L: TDF_Label, getsubchilds: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns list of components of assembly Returns False if label is not assembly */
  static GetComponents(L: TDF_Label, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, getsubchilds: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds a component given by its label and location to the assembly Note: assembly must be IsAssembly() or IsSimpleShape() */
  AddComponent_1(assembly: TDF_Label, comp: TDF_Label, Loc: TopLoc_Location): TDF_Label;
  /** Adds a component given by its label and location to the assembly Note: assembly must be IsAssembly() or IsSimpleShape() */
  AddComponent_2(assembly: TDF_Label, comp: TopoDS_Shape, expand: Standard_Boolean): TDF_Label;
  /** Removes a component from its assembly. */
  RemoveComponent(comp: TDF_Label): void;
  /** Top-down update for all assembly compounds stored in the document. */
  UpdateAssemblies(): void;
  /** Finds a label for subshape of shape stored on label shapeL Returns Null label if it is not found */
  FindSubShape(shapeL: TDF_Label, sub: TopoDS_Shape, L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds a label for subshape of shape stored on label shapeL Returns Null label if it is not subshape */
  AddSubShape_1(shapeL: TDF_Label, sub: TopoDS_Shape): TDF_Label;
  /** Adds a label for subshape of shape stored on label shapeL Returns Null label if it is not subshape */
  AddSubShape_2(shapeL: TDF_Label, sub: TopoDS_Shape, addedSubShapeL: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  FindMainShapeUsingMap(sub: TopoDS_Shape): TDF_Label;
  /** Performs a search among top-level shapes to find the shape containing as subshape Checks only simple shapes, and returns the first found label (which should be the only one for valid model) */
  FindMainShape(sub: TopoDS_Shape): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns list of labels identifying subshapes of the given shape Returns False if no subshapes are placed on that label */
  static GetSubShapes(L: TDF_Label, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns the label under which shapes are stored */
  BaseLabel(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Returns True if the label is a label of external references, i.e. there are some reference on the no-step files, which are described in document only their names */
  static IsExternRef(L: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets the names of references on the no-step files. */
  SetExternRefs_1(SHAS: TColStd_SequenceOfHAsciiString): TDF_Label;
  /** Sets the names of references on the no-step files. */
  SetExternRefs_2(L: TDF_Label, SHAS: TColStd_SequenceOfHAsciiString): void;
  /** Gets the names of references on the no-step files. */
  static GetExternRefs(L: TDF_Label, SHAS: TColStd_SequenceOfHAsciiString): void;
  /** Sets the SHUO structure between upper_usage and next_usage create multy-level (if number of labels > 2) SHUO from first to last Initialise out <MainSHUOAttr> by main upper_usage SHUO attribute. Returns FALSE if some of labels in not component label */
  SetSHUO(Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, MainSHUOAttr: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns founded SHUO GraphNode attribute <aSHUOAttr> Returns false in other case */
  static GetSHUO(SHUOLabel: TDF_Label, aSHUOAttr: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns founded SHUO GraphNodes of indicated component Returns false in other case */
  static GetAllComponentSHUO(CompLabel: TDF_Label, SHUOAttrs: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the sequence of labels of SHUO attributes, which is upper_usage for this next_usage SHUO attribute (that indicated by label) NOTE: returns upper_usages only on one level (not recurse) NOTE: do not clear the sequence before filling */
  static GetSHUOUpperUsage(NextUsageL: TDF_Label, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the sequence of labels of SHUO attributes, which is next_usage for this upper_usage SHUO attribute (that indicated by label) NOTE: returns next_usages only on one level (not recurse) NOTE: do not clear the sequence before filling */
  static GetSHUONextUsage(UpperUsageL: TDF_Label, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Remove SHUO from component sublabel, remove all dependencies on other SHUO. Returns FALSE if cannot remove SHUO dependencies. NOTE: remove any styles that associated with this SHUO. */
  RemoveSHUO(SHUOLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Search the path of labels in the document, that corresponds the component from any assembly Try to search the sequence of labels with location that produce this shape as component of any assembly NOTE: Clear sequence of labels before filling */
  FindComponent(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Search for the component shape that styled by shuo Returns null shape if no any shape is found. */
  GetSHUOInstance(theSHUO: any): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Search for the component shape by labelks path and set SHUO structure for founded label structure Returns null attribute if no component in any assembly found. */
  SetInstanceSHUO(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): any;
  /** Searching for component shapes that styled by shuo Returns empty sequence of shape if no any shape is found. */
  GetAllSHUOInstances(theSHUO: any, theSHUOShapeSeq: TopTools_SequenceOfShape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Searches the SHUO by labels of components from upper_usage component to next_usage Returns null attribute if no SHUO found */
  static FindSHUO(Labels: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, theSHUOAttr: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets location to the shape label If label is reference -> changes location attribute If label is free shape -> creates reference with location to it theShapeLabel the shape label to change location theLoc location to set theRefLabel the reference label with new location TRUE if new location was set */
  SetLocation(theShapeLabel: TDF_Label, theLoc: TopLoc_Location, theRefLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Convert Shape (compound/compsolid/shell/wire) to assembly. */
  Expand(Shape: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Method to get NamedData attribute assigned to the given shape label. theLabel the shape Label theToCreate create and assign attribute if it doesn't exist Handle to the NamedData attribute or Null if there is none */
  GetNamedProperties_1(theLabel: TDF_Label, theToCreate: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Method to get NamedData attribute assigned to the given shape label. theLabel the shape Label theToCreate create and assign attribute if it doesn't exist Handle to the NamedData attribute or Null if there is none */
  GetNamedProperties_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theToCreate: Standard_Boolean): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  NewEmpty(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class STEPControl_Writer {
  /** Sets a length-measure value that will be written to uncertainty-measure-with-unit when the next shape is translated. */
  SetTolerance(Tol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Unsets the tolerance formerly forced by SetTolerance. */
  UnsetTolerance(): void;
  /** Sets a specific session to <me> */
  SetWS(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the session used in <me> */
  WS(): any;
  /** Returns the produced model. Produces a new one if not yet done or if <newone> is True This method allows for instance to edit product or header data before writing. */
  Model(newone: Standard_Boolean): any;
  /** Translates shape sh to a STEP entity. mode defines the STEP entity type to be output: STEPControlStd_AsIs translates a shape to its highest possible STEP representation. STEPControlStd_ManifoldSolidBrep translates a shape to a STEP manifold_solid_brep or brep_with_voids entity. STEPControlStd_FacetedBrep translates a shape into a STEP faceted_brep entity. STEPControlStd_ShellBasedSurfaceModel translates a shape into a STEP shell_based_surface_model entity. STEPControlStd_GeometricCurveSet translates a shape into a STEP geometric_curve_set entity. */
  Transfer_1(sh: TopoDS_Shape, mode: STEPControl_StepModelType, compgraph: Standard_Boolean, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Translates shape sh to a STEP entity. mode defines the STEP entity type to be output: STEPControlStd_AsIs translates a shape to its highest possible STEP representation. STEPControlStd_ManifoldSolidBrep translates a shape to a STEP manifold_solid_brep or brep_with_voids entity. STEPControlStd_FacetedBrep translates a shape into a STEP faceted_brep entity. STEPControlStd_ShellBasedSurfaceModel translates a shape into a STEP shell_based_surface_model entity. STEPControlStd_GeometricCurveSet translates a shape into a STEP geometric_curve_set entity. */
  Transfer_2(sh: TopoDS_Shape, mode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters, compgraph: Standard_Boolean, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Writes a STEP model in the file identified by filename. */
  Write(theFileName: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Displays the statistics for the last translation. what defines the kind of statistics that are displayed: 0 gives general statistics (number of translated roots, number of warnings, number of fail messages), 1 gives root results, 2 gives statistics for all checked entities, 3 gives the list of translated entities, 4 gives warning and fail messages, 5 gives fail messages only. mode is used according to the use of what. If what is 0, mode is ignored. If what is 1, 2 or 3, mode defines the following: 0 lists the numbers of STEP entities in a STEP model, 1 gives the number, identifier, type and result type for each STEP entity and/or its status (fail, warning, etc.), 2 gives maximum information for each STEP entity (i.e. checks), 3 gives the number of entities by the type of a STEP entity, 4 gives the number of of STEP entities per result type and/or status, 5 gives the number of pairs (STEP or result type and status), 6 gives the number of pairs (STEP or result type and status) AND the list of entity numbers in the STEP model. */
  PrintStatsTransfer(what: Standard_Integer, mode: Standard_Integer): void;
  CleanDuplicateEntities(): void;
  /** Returns flags defining operations to be performed on shapes. Pair of values defining operations to be performed on shapes and a boolean value that indicates whether the flags were set. */
  GetShapeProcessFlags(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class STEPControl_Writer_1 extends STEPControl_Writer {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class STEPControl_Writer_2 extends STEPControl_Writer {
    constructor(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare type STEPControl_StepModelType = {
  STEPControl_AsIs: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_ManifoldSolidBrep: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_BrepWithVoids: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_FacetedBrep: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_FacetedBrepAndBrepWithVoids: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_ShellBasedSurfaceModel: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_GeometricCurveSet: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
  STEPControl_Hybrid: STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue;
}

export declare type STEPControl_StepModelTypeValue = 'STEPControl_AsIs' | 'STEPControl_ManifoldSolidBrep' | 'STEPControl_BrepWithVoids' | 'STEPControl_FacetedBrep' | 'STEPControl_FacetedBrepAndBrepWithVoids' | 'STEPControl_ShellBasedSurfaceModel' | 'STEPControl_GeometricCurveSet' | 'STEPControl_Hybrid';

export declare class STEPControl_Reader extends XSControl_Reader {
  /** Returns the model as a StepModel. It can then be consulted (header, product) */
  StepModel(): any;
  /** Loads a file and returns the read status Zero for a Model which compies with the Controller */
  ReadFile_1(filename: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Loads a file and returns the read status Zero for a Model which compies with the Controller */
  ReadFile_2(filename: Standard_Character, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Transfers a root given its rank in the list of candidate roots Default is the first one Returns True if a shape has resulted, false else Same as inherited TransferOneRoot, kept for compatibility */
  TransferRoot(num: Standard_Integer, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Determines the list of root entities from Model which are candidate for a transfer to a Shape (type of entities is PRODUCT) */
  NbRootsForTransfer(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns sequence of all unit names for shape representations found in file */
  FileUnits(theUnitLengthNames: TColStd_SequenceOfAsciiString, theUnitAngleNames: TColStd_SequenceOfAsciiString, theUnitSolidAngleNames: TColStd_SequenceOfAsciiString): void;
  /** Sets system length unit used by transfer process. Performs only if a model is not NULL */
  SetSystemLengthUnit(theLengthUnit: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns system length unit used by transfer process. Performs only if a model is not NULL */
  SystemLengthUnit(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class STEPControl_Reader_1 extends STEPControl_Reader {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class STEPControl_Reader_2 extends STEPControl_Reader {
    constructor(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class STEPCAFControl_Writer {
  /** Clears the internal data structures and attaches to a new session Clears the session if it was not yet set for STEP */
  Init(theWS: any, theScratch: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Writes all the produced models into file In case of multimodel with extern references, filename will be a name of root file, all other files have names of corresponding parts Provided for use like single-file writer */
  Write(theFileName: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_1(theDoc: any, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_2(theDoc: any, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_3(theLabel: TDF_Label, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_4(theLabel: TDF_Label, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_5(theLabelSeq: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Transfers a document (or single label) to a STEP model The mode of translation of shape is AsIs If multi is not null pointer, it switches to multifile mode (with external refs), and string pointed by <multi> gives prefix for names of extern files (can be empty string) Returns True if translation is OK */
  Transfer_6(theLabelSeq: NCollection_Sequence<TDF_Label>, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters, theMode: STEPControl_StepModelType, theIsMulti: Standard_Character, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns data on external files Returns Null handle if no external files are read */
  ExternFiles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns basic reader for root file. */
  ChangeWriter(): STEPControl_Writer;
  /** Returns basic reader as const. */
  Writer(): STEPControl_Writer;
  /** Set ColorMode for indicate write Colors or not. */
  SetColorMode(theColorMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetColorMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set NameMode for indicate write Name or not. */
  SetNameMode(theNameMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetNameMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set LayerMode for indicate write Layers or not. */
  SetLayerMode(theLayerMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetLayerMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** PropsMode for indicate write Validation properties or not. */
  SetPropsMode(thePropsMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetPropsMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set MetadataMode for indicate write metadata or not. */
  SetMetadataMode(theMetadataMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetMetadataMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set SHUO mode for indicate write SHUO or not. */
  SetSHUOMode(theSHUOMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetSHUOMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set dimtolmode for indicate write D&GTs or not. */
  SetDimTolMode(theDimTolMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetDimTolMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set flag for indicate write material or not. */
  SetMaterialMode(theMaterialMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetMaterialMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set flag for indicate write visual material or not. */
  SetVisualMaterialMode(theVisualMaterialMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetVisualMaterialMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set clean duplicates flag. If set to True, duplicates will be removed from the model. theCleanDuplicates the flag to set. */
  SetCleanDuplicates(theCleanDuplicates: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the flag indicating whether duplicates should be removed from the model. the flag indicating whether duplicates should be removed from the model. */
  GetCleanDuplicates(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns flags defining operations to be performed on shapes. Pair of values defining operations to be performed on shapes and a boolean value that indicates whether the flags were set. */
  GetShapeProcessFlags(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class STEPCAFControl_Writer_1 extends STEPCAFControl_Writer {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class STEPCAFControl_Writer_2 extends STEPCAFControl_Writer {
    constructor(theWS: any, theScratch: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class STEPCAFControl_Reader {
  /** Clears the internal data structures and attaches to a new session Clears the session if it was not yet set for STEP */
  Init(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Loads a file and returns the read status Provided for use like single-file reader. theFileName file to open read status */
  ReadFile_1(theFileName: Standard_Character): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Loads a file and returns the read status Provided for use like single-file reader. theFileName file to open read status */
  ReadFile_2(theFileName: Standard_Character, theParams: DESTEP_Parameters): IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  /** Returns number of roots recognized for transfer Shortcut for Reader().NbRootsForTransfer() */
  NbRootsForTransfer(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Translates currently loaded STEP file into the document Returns True if succeeded, and False in case of fail Provided for use like single-file reader */
  TransferOneRoot(num: Standard_Integer, doc: any, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Translates currently loaded STEP file into the document Returns True if succeeded, and False in case of fail Provided for use like single-file reader */
  Transfer_1(doc: any, theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns data on external files Returns Null handle if no external files are read */
  ExternFiles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns basic reader. */
  ChangeReader(): STEPControl_Reader;
  /** Returns basic reader as const. */
  Reader(): STEPControl_Reader;
  /** Returns label of instance of an assembly component corresponding to a given NAUO */
  static FindInstance(NAUO: any, STool: any, Tool: STEPConstruct_Tool, ShapeLabelMap: NCollection_DataMap<TopoDS_Shape, TDF_Label, TopTools_ShapeMapHasher>): TDF_Label;
  /** Set ColorMode for indicate read Colors or not. */
  SetColorMode(colormode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetColorMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set NameMode for indicate read Name or not. */
  SetNameMode(namemode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetNameMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set LayerMode for indicate read Layers or not. */
  SetLayerMode(layermode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetLayerMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** PropsMode for indicate read Validation properties or not. */
  SetPropsMode(propsmode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetPropsMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** MetaMode for indicate read Metadata or not. */
  SetMetaMode(theMetaMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetMetaMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** MetaMode for indicate whether to read Product Metadata or not. */
  SetProductMetaMode(theProductMetaMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetProductMetaMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set SHUO mode for indicate write SHUO or not. */
  SetSHUOMode(shuomode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetSHUOMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set GDT mode for indicate write GDT or not. */
  SetGDTMode(gdtmode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetGDTMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set Material mode. */
  SetMatMode(matmode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  GetMatMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set View mode. */
  SetViewMode(viewmode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Get View mode. */
  GetViewMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  GetShapeLabelMap(): any;
  /** Returns flags defining operations to be performed on shapes. Pair of values defining operations to be performed on shapes and a boolean value that indicates whether the flags were set. */
  GetShapeProcessFlags(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class STEPCAFControl_Reader_1 extends STEPCAFControl_Reader {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class STEPCAFControl_Reader_2 extends STEPCAFControl_Reader {
    constructor(WS: any, scratch: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeThickSolid extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffsetShape {
  /** Constructor does nothing. */
  constructor()
  /** Constructs solid using simple algorithm. According to its nature it is not possible to set list of the closing faces. This algorithm does not support faces removing. It is caused by fact that intersections are not computed during offset creation. Non-closed shell or face is expected as input. */
  MakeThickSolidBySimple(theS: TopoDS_Shape, theOffsetValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Constructs a hollowed solid from the solid S by removing the set of faces ClosingFaces from S, where: Offset defines the thickness of the walls. Its sign indicates which side of the surface of the solid the hollowed shape is built on; Tol defines the tolerance criterion for coincidence in generated shapes; Mode defines the construction type of parallels applied to free edges of shape S. Currently, only one construction type is implemented, namely the one where the free edges do not generate parallels; this corresponds to the default value BRepOffset_Skin; Intersection specifies how the algorithm must work in order to limit the parallels to two adjacent shapes: if Intersection is false (default value), the intersection is calculated with the parallels to the two adjacent shapes, if Intersection is true, the intersection is calculated by taking account of all parallels generated; this computation method is more general as it avoids self-intersections generated in the offset shape from features of small dimensions on shape S, however this method has not been completely implemented and therefore is not recommended for use; SelfInter tells the algorithm whether a computation to eliminate self-intersections needs to be applied to the resulting shape. However, as this functionality is not yet implemented, you should use the default value (false); Join defines how to fill the holes that may appear between parallels to the two adjacent faces. It may take values GeomAbs_Arc or GeomAbs_Intersection: if Join is equal to GeomAbs_Arc, then pipes are generated between two free edges of two adjacent parallels, and spheres are generated on "images" of vertices; it is the default value, if Join is equal to GeomAbs_Intersection, then the parallels to the two adjacent faces are enlarged and intersected, so that there are no free edges on parallels to faces. RemoveIntEdges flag defines whether to remove the INTERNAL edges from the result or not. Warnings Since the algorithm of MakeThickSolid is based on MakeOffsetShape algorithm, the warnings are the same as for MakeOffsetShape. */
  MakeThickSolidByJoin(S: TopoDS_Shape, ClosingFaces: TopTools_ListOfShape, Offset: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real, Mode: BRepOffset_Mode, Intersection: Standard_Boolean, SelfInter: Standard_Boolean, Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, RemoveIntEdges: Standard_Boolean, theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Does nothing. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep {
  Pipe(): BRepFill_Pipe;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the prism. */
  FirstShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the prism. */
  LastShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated_1(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated_2(SSpine: TopoDS_Shape, SProfile: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  ErrorOnSurface(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_1 extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe {
    constructor(Spine: TopoDS_Wire, Profile: TopoDS_Shape);
  }

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_2 extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe {
    constructor(Spine: TopoDS_Wire, Profile: TopoDS_Shape, aMode: GeomFill_Trihedron, ForceApproxC1: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeFilling extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Constructs a wire filling object defined by the energy minimizing criterion Degree the number of points on the curve NbPntsOnCur the number of iterations NbIter the Boolean Anisotropie the 2D tolerance Tol2d the 3D tolerance Tol3d the angular tolerance TolAng the tolerance for curvature TolCur the highest polynomial degree MaxDeg the greatest number of segments MaxSeg. If the Boolean Anistropie is true, the algorithm's performance is better in cases where the ratio of the length U and the length V indicate a great difference between the two. In other words, when the surface is, for example, extremely long. */
  constructor(Degree: Standard_Integer, NbPtsOnCur: Standard_Integer, NbIter: Standard_Integer, Anisotropie: Standard_Boolean, Tol2d: Standard_Real, Tol3d: Standard_Real, TolAng: Standard_Real, TolCurv: Standard_Real, MaxDeg: Standard_Integer, MaxSegments: Standard_Integer)
  /** Sets the values of Tolerances used to control the constraint. Tol2d: Tol3d: it is the maximum distance allowed between the support surface and the constraints TolAng: it is the maximum angle allowed between the normal of the surface and the constraints TolCurv: it is the maximum difference of curvature allowed between the surface and the constraint */
  SetConstrParam(Tol2d: Standard_Real, Tol3d: Standard_Real, TolAng: Standard_Real, TolCurv: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the parameters used for resolution. The default values of these parameters have been chosen for a good ratio quality/performance. Degree: it is the order of energy criterion to minimize for computing the deformation of the surface. The default value is 3 The recommended value is i+2 where i is the maximum order of the constraints. NbPtsOnCur: it is the average number of points for discretisation of the edges. NbIter: it is the maximum number of iterations of the process. For each iteration the number of discretisation points is increased. Anisotropie: */
  SetResolParam(Degree: Standard_Integer, NbPtsOnCur: Standard_Integer, NbIter: Standard_Integer, Anisotropie: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the parameters used to approximate the filling surface. These include: MaxDeg - the highest degree which the polynomial defining the filling surface can have MaxSegments - the greatest number of segments which the filling surface can have. */
  SetApproxParam(MaxDeg: Standard_Integer, MaxSegments: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Loads the initial surface Surf to begin the construction of the surface. This optional function is useful if the surface resulting from construction for the algorithm is likely to be complex. The support surface of the face under construction is computed by a deformation of Surf which satisfies the given constraints. The set of bounding edges defines the wire of the face. If no initial surface is given, the algorithm computes it automatically. If the set of edges is not connected (Free constraint), missing edges are automatically computed. Important: the initial surface must have orthogonal local coordinates, i.e. partial derivatives dS/du and dS/dv must be orthogonal at each point of surface. If this condition breaks, distortions of resulting surface are possible. */
  LoadInitSurface(Surf: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Adds a new constraint which also defines an edge of the wire of the face Order: Order of the constraint: GeomAbs_C0 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge GeomAbs_G1 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency with the first face of the edge GeomAbs_G2 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency and curvature with the first face of the edge. Raises ConstructionError if the edge has no representation on a face and Order is GeomAbs_G1 or GeomAbs_G2. */
  Add_1(Constr: TopoDS_Edge, Order: GeomAbs_Shape, IsBound: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Adds a new constraint which also defines an edge of the wire of the face Order: Order of the constraint: GeomAbs_C0 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge GeomAbs_G1 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency with the first face of the edge GeomAbs_G2 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency and curvature with the first face of the edge. Raises ConstructionError if the edge has no representation on a face and Order is GeomAbs_G1 or GeomAbs_G2. */
  Add_2(Constr: TopoDS_Edge, Support: TopoDS_Face, Order: GeomAbs_Shape, IsBound: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  /** Adds a new constraint which also defines an edge of the wire of the face Order: Order of the constraint: GeomAbs_C0 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge GeomAbs_G1 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency with the first face of the edge GeomAbs_G2 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency and curvature with the first face of the edge. Raises ConstructionError if the edge has no representation on a face and Order is GeomAbs_G1 or GeomAbs_G2. */
  Add_3(Support: TopoDS_Face, Order: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Adds a new constraint which also defines an edge of the wire of the face Order: Order of the constraint: GeomAbs_C0 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge GeomAbs_G1 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency with the first face of the edge GeomAbs_G2 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency and curvature with the first face of the edge. Raises ConstructionError if the edge has no representation on a face and Order is GeomAbs_G1 or GeomAbs_G2. */
  Add_4(Point: gp_Pnt): Standard_Integer;
  /** Adds a new constraint which also defines an edge of the wire of the face Order: Order of the constraint: GeomAbs_C0 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge GeomAbs_G1 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency with the first face of the edge GeomAbs_G2 : the surface has to pass by 3D representation of the edge and to respect tangency and curvature with the first face of the edge. Raises ConstructionError if the edge has no representation on a face and Order is GeomAbs_G1 or GeomAbs_G2. */
  Add_5(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, Support: TopoDS_Face, Order: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Builds the resulting faces. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Tests whether computation of the filling plate has been completed. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the maximum distance between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G0Error_1(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the maximum angle between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G1Error_1(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the maximum angle between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G2Error_1(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the maximum distance between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G0Error_2(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the maximum angle between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G1Error_2(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the maximum angle between the result and the constraints. This is set at construction time. */
  G2Error_2(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipeShell extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep {
  /** Constructs the shell-generating framework defined by the wire Spine. Sets an sweep's mode If no mode are set, the mode use in MakePipe is used */
  constructor(Spine: TopoDS_Wire)
  /** Sets a Frenet or a CorrectedFrenet trihedron to perform the sweeping If IsFrenet is false, a corrected Frenet trihedron is used. */
  SetMode_1(IsFrenet: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets a Discrete trihedron to perform the sweeping */
  SetDiscreteMode(): void;
  /** Sets a Frenet or a CorrectedFrenet trihedron to perform the sweeping If IsFrenet is false, a corrected Frenet trihedron is used. */
  SetMode_2(Axe: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Sets a Frenet or a CorrectedFrenet trihedron to perform the sweeping If IsFrenet is false, a corrected Frenet trihedron is used. */
  SetMode_3(BiNormal: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Sets a Frenet or a CorrectedFrenet trihedron to perform the sweeping If IsFrenet is false, a corrected Frenet trihedron is used. */
  SetMode_4(SpineSupport: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets a Frenet or a CorrectedFrenet trihedron to perform the sweeping If IsFrenet is false, a corrected Frenet trihedron is used. */
  SetMode_5(AuxiliarySpine: TopoDS_Wire, CurvilinearEquivalence: Standard_Boolean, KeepContact: BRepFill_TypeOfContact): void;
  /** Adds the section Profile to this framework. First and last sections may be punctual, so the shape Profile may be both wire and vertex. Correspondent point on spine is computed automatically. If WithContact is true, the section is translated to be in contact with the spine. If WithCorrection is true, the section is rotated to be orthogonal to the spine?s tangent in the correspondent point. This option has no sense if the section is punctual (Profile is of type TopoDS_Vertex). */
  Add_1(Profile: TopoDS_Shape, WithContact: Standard_Boolean, WithCorrection: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Adds the section Profile to this framework. First and last sections may be punctual, so the shape Profile may be both wire and vertex. Correspondent point on spine is computed automatically. If WithContact is true, the section is translated to be in contact with the spine. If WithCorrection is true, the section is rotated to be orthogonal to the spine?s tangent in the correspondent point. This option has no sense if the section is punctual (Profile is of type TopoDS_Vertex). */
  Add_2(Profile: TopoDS_Shape, Location: TopoDS_Vertex, WithContact: Standard_Boolean, WithCorrection: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the evolution law defined by the wire Profile with its position (Location, WithContact, WithCorrection are the same options as in methods Add) and a homotetic law defined by the function L. Warning: To be effective, it is not recommended to combine methods Add and SetLaw. */
  SetLaw_1(Profile: TopoDS_Shape, L: any, WithContact: Standard_Boolean, WithCorrection: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the evolution law defined by the wire Profile with its position (Location, WithContact, WithCorrection are the same options as in methods Add) and a homotetic law defined by the function L. Warning: To be effective, it is not recommended to combine methods Add and SetLaw. */
  SetLaw_2(Profile: TopoDS_Shape, L: any, Location: TopoDS_Vertex, WithContact: Standard_Boolean, WithCorrection: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Removes the section Profile from this framework. */
  Delete(Profile: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Returns true if this tool object is ready to build the shape, i.e. has a definition for the wire section Profile. */
  IsReady(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Get a status, when Simulate or Build failed. It can be BRepBuilderAPI_PipeDone, BRepBuilderAPI_PipeNotDone, BRepBuilderAPI_PlaneNotIntersectGuide, BRepBuilderAPI_ImpossibleContact. */
  GetStatus(): BRepBuilderAPI_PipeError;
  /** Sets the following tolerance values 3D tolerance Tol3d boundary tolerance BoundTol angular tolerance TolAngular. */
  SetTolerance(Tol3d: Standard_Real, BoundTol: Standard_Real, TolAngular: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Define the maximum V degree of resulting surface. */
  SetMaxDegree(NewMaxDegree: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Define the maximum number of spans in V-direction on resulting surface */
  SetMaxSegments(NewMaxSegments: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Set the flag that indicates attempt to approximate a C1-continuous surface if a swept surface proved to be C0. */
  SetForceApproxC1(ForceApproxC1: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the transition mode to manage discontinuities on the swept shape caused by fractures on the spine. The transition mode can be BRepBuilderAPI_Transformed (default value), BRepBuilderAPI_RightCorner, BRepBuilderAPI_RoundCorner: RepBuilderAPI_Transformed: discontinuities are treated by modification of the sweeping mode. The pipe is "transformed" at the fractures of the spine. This mode assumes building a self-intersected shell. BRepBuilderAPI_RightCorner: discontinuities are treated like right corner. Two pieces of the pipe corresponding to two adjacent segments of the spine are extended and intersected at a fracture of the spine. BRepBuilderAPI_RoundCorner: discontinuities are treated like round corner. The corner is treated as rotation of the profile around an axis which passes through the point of the spine's fracture. This axis is based on cross product of directions tangent to the adjacent segments of the spine at their common point. Warnings The mode BRepBuilderAPI_RightCorner provides a valid result if intersection of two pieces of the pipe (corresponding to two adjacent segments of the spine) in the neighborhood of the spine?s fracture is connected and planar. This condition can be violated if the spine is non-linear in some neighborhood of the fracture or if the profile was set with a scaling law. The last mode, BRepBuilderAPI_RoundCorner, will assuredly provide a good result only if a profile was set with option WithCorrection = True, i.e. it is strictly orthogonal to the spine. */
  SetTransitionMode(Mode: BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionMode): void;
  /** Simulates the resulting shape by calculating its cross-sections. The spine is divided by this cross-sections into (NumberOfSection - 1) equal parts, the number of cross-sections is NumberOfSection. The cross-sections are wires and they are returned in the list Result. This gives a rapid preview of the resulting shape, which will be obtained using the settings you have provided. Raises NotDone if <me> it is not Ready */
  Simulate(NumberOfSection: Standard_Integer, Result: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Transforms the sweeping Shell in Solid. If a propfile is not closed returns False */
  MakeSolid(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the sweep. */
  FirstShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the sweep. */
  LastShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns a list of new shapes generated from the shape S by the shell-generating algorithm. This function is redefined from BRepOffsetAPI_MakeShape::Generated. S can be an edge or a vertex of a given Profile (see methods Add). */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  ErrorOnSurface(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets the build history flag. If set to True, the pipe shell will store the history of the sections and the spine, which can be used for further modifications or analysis. */
  SetIsBuildHistory(theIsBuildHistory: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the build history flag. If True, the pipe shell stores the history of the sections and the spine. */
  IsBuildHistory(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the list of original profiles. */
  Profiles(theProfiles: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Returns the spine. */
  Spine(): TopoDS_Wire;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Initializes the algorithm to construct parallels to the spine Spine. Join defines the type of parallel generated by the salient vertices of the spine. The default type is GeomAbs_Arc where the vertices generate sections of a circle. If join type is GeomAbs_Intersection, the edges that intersect in a salient vertex generate the edges prolonged until intersection. */
  Init_1(Spine: TopoDS_Face, Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, IsOpenResult: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Initializes the algorithm to construct parallels to the spine Spine. Join defines the type of parallel generated by the salient vertices of the spine. The default type is GeomAbs_Arc where the vertices generate sections of a circle. If join type is GeomAbs_Intersection, the edges that intersect in a salient vertex generate the edges prolonged until intersection. */
  Init_2(Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, IsOpenResult: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Set approximation flag for conversion input contours into ones consisting of 2D circular arcs and 2D linear segments only. */
  SetApprox(ToApprox: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Initializes the algorithm to construct parallels to the wire Spine. */
  AddWire(Spine: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Computes a parallel to the spine at distance Offset and at an altitude Alt from the plane of the spine in relation to the normal to the spine. Exceptions: StdFail_NotDone if the offset is not built. */
  Perform(Offset: Standard_Real, Alt: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** returns a list of the created shapes from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Converts each wire of the face into contour consisting only of arcs and segments. New 3D curves are built too. */
  static ConvertFace(theFace: TopoDS_Face, theAngleTolerance: Standard_Real): TopoDS_Face;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_1 extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_2 extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset {
    constructor(Spine: TopoDS_Face, Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, IsOpenResult: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_3 extends BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset {
    constructor(Spine: TopoDS_Wire, Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, IsOpenResult: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffsetShape extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Constructor does nothing. */
  constructor()
  /** Constructs offset shape for the given one using simple algorithm without intersections computation. */
  PerformBySimple(theS: TopoDS_Shape, theOffsetValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Constructs a shape parallel to the shape S, where S may be a face, a shell, a solid or a compound of these shape kinds; Offset is the offset value. The offset shape is constructed: outside S, if Offset is positive, inside S, if Offset is negative; Tol defines the coincidence tolerance criterion for generated shapes; Mode defines the construction type of parallels applied to the free edges of shape S; currently, only one construction type is implemented, namely the one where the free edges do not generate parallels; this corresponds to the default value BRepOffset_Skin; Intersection specifies how the algorithm must work in order to limit the parallels to two adjacent shapes: if Intersection is false (default value), the intersection is calculated with the parallels to the two adjacent shapes, if Intersection is true, the intersection is calculated by taking all generated parallels into account; this computation method is more general as it avoids some self-intersections generated in the offset shape from features of small dimensions on shape S, however this method has not been completely implemented and therefore is not recommended for use; SelfInter tells the algorithm whether a computation to eliminate self-intersections must be applied to the resulting shape; however, as this functionality is not yet implemented, it is recommended to use the default value (false); Join defines how to fill the holes that may appear between parallels to the two adjacent faces. It may take values GeomAbs_Arc or GeomAbs_Intersection: if Join is equal to GeomAbs_Arc, then pipes are generated between two free edges of two adjacent parallels, and spheres are generated on "images" of vertices; it is the default value, if Join is equal to GeomAbs_Intersection, then the parallels to the two adjacent faces are enlarged and intersected, so that there are no free edges on parallels to faces. RemoveIntEdges flag defines whether to remove the INTERNAL edges from the result or not. Warnings All the faces of the shape S should be based on the surfaces with continuity at least C1. The offset value should be sufficiently small to avoid self-intersections in resulting shape. Otherwise these self-intersections may appear inside an offset face if its initial surface is not plane or sphere or cylinder, also some non-adjacent offset faces may intersect each other. Also, some offset surfaces may "turn inside out". The algorithm may fail if the shape S contains vertices where more than 3 edges converge. Since 3d-offset algorithm involves intersection of surfaces, it is under limitations of surface intersection algorithm. A result cannot be generated if the underlying geometry of S is BSpline with continuity C0. Exceptions Geom_UndefinedDerivative if the underlying geometry of S is BSpline with continuity C0. */
  PerformByJoin(S: TopoDS_Shape, Offset: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real, Mode: BRepOffset_Mode, Intersection: Standard_Boolean, SelfInter: Standard_Boolean, Join: GeomAbs_JoinType, RemoveIntEdges: Standard_Boolean, theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns instance of the underlying intersection / arc algorithm. */
  MakeOffset(): BRepOffset_MakeOffset;
  /** Does nothing. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes Modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape has been removed from the result. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns offset join type. */
  GetJoinType(): GeomAbs_JoinType;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_ThruSections extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Initializes an algorithm for building a shell or a solid passing through a set of sections, where: isSolid is set to true if the construction algorithm is required to build a solid or to false if it is required to build a shell (the default value), ruled is set to true if the faces generated between the edges of two consecutive wires are ruled surfaces or to false (the default value) if they are smoothed out by approximation, pres3d defines the precision criterion used by the approximation algorithm; the default value is 1.0e-6. Use AddWire and AddVertex to define the successive sections of the shell or solid to be built. */
  constructor(isSolid: Standard_Boolean, ruled: Standard_Boolean, pres3d: Standard_Real)
  /** Initializes this algorithm for building a shell or a solid passing through a set of sections, where: isSolid is set to true if this construction algorithm is required to build a solid or to false if it is required to build a shell. false is the default value; ruled is set to true if the faces generated between the edges of two consecutive wires are ruled surfaces or to false (the default value) if they are smoothed out by approximation, pres3d defines the precision criterion used by the approximation algorithm; the default value is 1.0e-6. Use AddWire and AddVertex to define the successive sections of the shell or solid to be built. */
  Init(isSolid: Standard_Boolean, ruled: Standard_Boolean, pres3d: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Adds the wire wire to the set of sections through which the shell or solid is built. Use the Build function to construct the shape. */
  AddWire(wire: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Adds the vertex Vertex (punctual section) to the set of sections through which the shell or solid is built. A vertex may be added to the set of sections only as first or last section. At least one wire must be added to the set of sections by the method AddWire. Use the Build function to construct the shape. */
  AddVertex(aVertex: TopoDS_Vertex): void;
  /** Sets/unsets the option to compute origin and orientation on wires to avoid twisted results and update wires to have same number of edges. */
  CheckCompatibility(check: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Define the approximation algorithm. */
  SetSmoothing(UseSmoothing: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Define the type of parametrization used in the approximation. */
  SetParType(ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType): void;
  /** Define the Continuity used in the approximation. */
  SetContinuity(C: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** define the Weights associed to the criterium used in the optimization. if Wi <= 0 */
  SetCriteriumWeight(W1: Standard_Real, W2: Standard_Real, W3: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Define the maximal U degree of result surface. */
  SetMaxDegree(MaxDeg: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** returns the type of parametrization used in the approximation */
  ParType(): Approx_ParametrizationType;
  /** returns the Continuity used in the approximation */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** returns the maximal U degree of result surface */
  MaxDegree(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Define the approximation algorithm. */
  UseSmoothing(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns the Weights associed to the criterium used in the optimization. */
  CriteriumWeight(): { W1: number; W2: number; W3: number };
  /** This is called by Shape(). It does nothing but may be redefined. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the loft if solid. */
  FirstShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the loft if solid. */
  LastShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** if Ruled Returns the Face generated by each edge except the last wire if smoothed Returns the Face generated by each edge of the first wire */
  GeneratedFace(Edge: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Sets the mutable input state. If true then the input profile can be modified inside the thrusection operation. Default value is true. */
  SetMutableInput(theIsMutableInput: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns a list of new shapes generated from the shape S by the shell-generating algorithm. This function is redefined from BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape::Generated. S can be an edge or a vertex of a given Profile (see methods AddWire and AddVertex). */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of original wires. */
  Wires(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the current mutable input state. */
  IsMutableInput(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the status of thrusection operation. */
  GetStatus(): BRepFill_ThruSectionErrorStatus;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle extends BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape {
  /** Cancels the results of all taper-adding transformations performed by this algorithm on the initial shape. These results will have been defined by successive calls to the function Add. */
  Clear(): void;
  /** Initializes, or reinitializes this taper-adding algorithm with the shape S. S will be referred to as the initial shape of this algorithm. */
  Init(S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Adds the face F, the direction Direction, the angle Angle, the plane NeutralPlane, and the flag Flag to the framework created at construction time, and with this data, defines the taper-adding transformation. F is a face, which belongs to the initial shape of this algorithm or to the shape loaded by the function Init. Only planar, cylindrical or conical faces can be tapered: If the face F is planar, it is tapered by inclining it through the angle Angle about the line of intersection between the plane NeutralPlane and F. Direction indicates the side of NeutralPlane from which matter is removed if Angle is positive or added if Angle is negative. If F is cylindrical or conical, it is transformed in the same way on a single face, resulting in a conical face if F is cylindrical, and a conical or cylindrical face if it is already conical. The taper-adding transformation is propagated from the face F along the series of planar, cylindrical or conical faces containing F, which are tangential to one another. Use the function AddDone to check if this taper-adding transformation is successful. Warning Nothing is done if: the face F does not belong to the initial shape of this algorithm, or the face F is not planar, cylindrical or conical. Exceptions Standard_NullObject if the initial shape is not defined, i.e. if this algorithm has not been initialized with the non-empty constructor or the Init function. Standard_ConstructionError if the previous call to Add has failed. The function AddDone ought to have been used to check for this, and the function Remove to cancel the results of the unsuccessful taper-adding transformation and to retrieve the previous shape. */
  Add(F: TopoDS_Face, Direction: gp_Dir, Angle: Standard_Real, NeutralPlane: gp_Pln, Flag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true if the previous taper-adding transformation performed by this algorithm in the last call to Add, was successful. If AddDone returns false: the function ProblematicShape returns the face on which the error occurred, the function Remove has to be used to cancel the results of the unsuccessful taper-adding transformation and to retrieve the previous shape. Exceptions Standard_NullObject if the initial shape has not been defined, i.e. if this algorithm has not been initialized with the non-empty constructor or the .Init function. */
  AddDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Cancels the taper-adding transformation previously performed by this algorithm on the face F and the series of tangential faces which contain F, and retrieves the shape before the last taper-adding transformation. Warning You will have to use this function if the previous call to Add fails. Use the function AddDone to check it. Exceptions Standard_NullObject if the initial shape has not been defined, i.e. if this algorithm has not been initialized with the non-empty constructor or the Init function. Standard_NoSuchObject if F has not been added or has already been removed. */
  Remove(F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Returns the shape on which an error occurred after an unsuccessful call to Add or when IsDone returns false. Exceptions Standard_NullObject if the initial shape has not been defined, i.e. if this algorithm has not been initialized with the non-empty constructor or the Init function. */
  ProblematicShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns an error status when an error has occurred (Face, Edge or Vertex recomputation problem). Otherwise returns Draft_NoError. The method may be called if AddDone returns false, or when IsDone returns false. */
  Status(): Draft_ErrorStatus;
  /** Returns all the faces which have been added together with the face <F>. */
  ConnectedFaces(F: TopoDS_Face): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns all the faces on which a modification has been given. */
  ModifiedFaces(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  CorrectWires(): void;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the modified shape corresponding to . S can correspond to the entire initial shape or to its subshape. Raises exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if S is not the initial shape or a subshape of the initial shape to which the transformation has been applied. */
  ModifiedShape(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_1 extends BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_2 extends BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape);
  }

export declare type BRepOffset_Mode = {
  BRepOffset_Skin: BRepOffset_ModeValue;
  BRepOffset_Pipe: BRepOffset_ModeValue;
  BRepOffset_RectoVerso: BRepOffset_ModeValue;
}

export declare type BRepOffset_ModeValue = 'BRepOffset_Skin' | 'BRepOffset_Pipe' | 'BRepOffset_RectoVerso';

export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector {
  Set(T: gp_Trsf, Persp: Standard_Boolean, Focus: Standard_Real): void;
  Directions(D1: gp_Vec2d, D2: gp_Vec2d, D3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** to compute with the given scale and translation. */
  Scaled(On: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns True if there is a perspective transformation. */
  Perspective(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the active transformation. */
  Transformation(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns the active inverted transformation. */
  InvertedTransformation(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns the original transformation. */
  FullTransformation(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns the focal length. */
  Focus(): Standard_Real;
  Transform_1(D: gp_Vec): void;
  Transform_2(Pnt: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Transform and apply perspective if needed. */
  Project_1(P: gp_Pnt, Pout: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Transform and apply perspective if needed. */
  Project_2(P: gp_Pnt): { X: number; Y: number; Z: number };
  /** Transform and apply perspective if needed. */
  Project_3(P: gp_Pnt, D1: gp_Vec, Pout: gp_Pnt2d, D1out: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** return a line going through the eye towards the 2d point <X,Y>. */
  Shoot(X: Standard_Real, Y: Standard_Real): gp_Lin;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector_1 extends HLRAlgo_Projector {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector_2 extends HLRAlgo_Projector {
    constructor(CS: gp_Ax2);
  }

  export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector_3 extends HLRAlgo_Projector {
    constructor(CS: gp_Ax2, Focus: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector_4 extends HLRAlgo_Projector {
    constructor(T: gp_Trsf, Persp: Standard_Boolean, Focus: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class HLRAlgo_Projector_5 extends HLRAlgo_Projector {
    constructor(T: gp_Trsf, Persp: Standard_Boolean, Focus: Standard_Real, v1: gp_Vec2d, v2: gp_Vec2d, v3: gp_Vec2d);
  }

export declare class HLRBRep_Algo extends HLRBRep_InternalAlgo {
  /** add the Shape . */
  Add_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, SData: any, nbIso: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** add the Shape . */
  Add_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, nbIso: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** return the index of the Shape and return 0 if the Shape is not found. */
  Index(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** nullify all the results of OutLiner from HLRTopoBRep. */
  OutLinedShapeNullify(): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class HLRBRep_Algo_1 extends HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class HLRBRep_Algo_2 extends HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor(A: any);
  }

export declare class HLRBRep_InternalAlgo extends Standard_Transient {
  /** set the projector. */
  Projector_1(P: HLRAlgo_Projector): void;
  /** set the projector. */
  Projector_2(): HLRAlgo_Projector;
  /** update the DataStructure. */
  Update(): void;
  /** add the shape . */
  Load_1(S: any, SData: any, nbIso: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** add the shape . */
  Load_2(S: any, nbIso: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** return the index of the Shape and return 0 if the Shape is not found. */
  Index(S: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** remove the Shape of Index . */
  Remove(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Change the Shape Data of the Shape of index . */
  ShapeData(I: Standard_Integer, SData: any): void;
  SeqOfShapeBounds(): any;
  NbShapes(): Standard_Integer;
  ShapeBounds(I: Standard_Integer): HLRBRep_ShapeBounds;
  /** init the status of the selected edges depending of the back faces of a closed shell. */
  InitEdgeStatus(): void;
  /** select all the DataStructure. */
  Select_1(): void;
  /** select all the DataStructure. */
  Select_2(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** select only the edges of the Shape . */
  SelectEdge(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** select only the faces of the Shape . */
  SelectFace(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** set to visible all the edges. */
  ShowAll_1(): void;
  /** set to visible all the edges. */
  ShowAll_2(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** set to hide all the edges. */
  HideAll_1(): void;
  /** set to hide all the edges. */
  HideAll_2(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** own hiding of all the shapes of the DataStructure without hiding by each other. */
  PartialHide(): void;
  /** hide all the DataStructure. */
  Hide_1(): void;
  /** hide all the DataStructure. */
  Hide_2(I: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** hide all the DataStructure. */
  Hide_3(I: Standard_Integer, J: Standard_Integer): void;
  Debug_1(deb: Standard_Boolean): void;
  Debug_2(): Standard_Boolean;
  DataStructure(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_1 extends HLRBRep_InternalAlgo {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_2 extends HLRBRep_InternalAlgo {
    constructor(A: any);
  }

export declare class HLRBRep_HLRToShape {
  /** Constructs a framework for filtering the results of the HLRBRep_Algo algorithm, A. Use the extraction filters to obtain the results you want for A. */
  constructor(A: any)
  /** Return visible sharp edges (of C0-continuity). */
  VCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible sharp edges (of C0-continuity). */
  VCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible smooth edges (G1-continuity between two surfaces). */
  Rg1LineVCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible smooth edges (G1-continuity between two surfaces). */
  Rg1LineVCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible sewn edges (of CN-continuity on one surface). */
  RgNLineVCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible sewn edges (of CN-continuity on one surface). */
  RgNLineVCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible outline edges ("silhouette"). */
  OutLineVCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible outline edges ("silhouette"). */
  OutLineVCompound3d(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible outline edges ("silhouette"). */
  OutLineVCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible isoparameters. */
  IsoLineVCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return visible isoparameters. */
  IsoLineVCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden sharp edges (of C0-continuity). */
  HCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden sharp edges (of C0-continuity). */
  HCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden smooth edges (G1-continuity between two surfaces). */
  Rg1LineHCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden smooth edges (G1-continuity between two surfaces). */
  Rg1LineHCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden sewn edges (of CN-continuity on one surface). */
  RgNLineHCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden sewn edges (of CN-continuity on one surface). */
  RgNLineHCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden outline edges ("silhouette"). */
  OutLineHCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden outline edges ("silhouette"). */
  OutLineHCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden isoparameters. */
  IsoLineHCompound_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Return hidden isoparameters. */
  IsoLineHCompound_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns compound of resulting edges of required type and visibility, taking into account the kind of space (2d or 3d) */
  CompoundOfEdges_1(type: HLRBRep_TypeOfResultingEdge, visible: Standard_Boolean, In3d: Standard_Boolean): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns compound of resulting edges of required type and visibility, taking into account the kind of space (2d or 3d) */
  CompoundOfEdges_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, type: HLRBRep_TypeOfResultingEdge, visible: Standard_Boolean, In3d: Standard_Boolean): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepMesh_DiscretRoot extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Set the shape to triangulate. */
  SetShape(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  Shape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns true if triangualtion was performed and has success. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Compute triangulation for set shape. */
  Perform(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare type BRepFill_TypeOfContact = {
  BRepFill_NoContact: BRepFill_TypeOfContactValue;
  BRepFill_Contact: BRepFill_TypeOfContactValue;
  BRepFill_ContactOnBorder: BRepFill_TypeOfContactValue;
}

export declare type BRepFill_TypeOfContactValue = 'BRepFill_NoContact' | 'BRepFill_Contact' | 'BRepFill_ContactOnBorder';

export declare class BOPAlgo_Options {
  /** Returns allocator. */
  Allocator(): TDF_HAllocator;
  /** Clears all warnings and errors, and any data cached by the algorithm. User defined options are not cleared. */
  Clear(): void;
  /** Adds the alert as error (fail) */
  AddError(theAlert: any): void;
  /** Adds the alert as warning. */
  AddWarning(theAlert: any): void;
  /** Returns true if algorithm has failed. */
  HasErrors(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if algorithm has generated error of specified type. */
  HasError(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if algorithm has generated some warning alerts. */
  HasWarnings(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if algorithm has generated warning of specified type. */
  HasWarning(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns report collecting all errors and warnings. */
  GetReport(): any;
  /** Clears the warnings of the algorithm. */
  ClearWarnings(): void;
  /** Gets the global parallel mode. */
  static GetParallelMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets the global parallel mode. */
  static SetParallelMode(theNewMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Set the flag of parallel processing if <theFlag> is true the parallel processing is switched on if <theFlag> is false the parallel processing is switched off */
  SetRunParallel(theFlag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the flag of parallel processing. */
  RunParallel(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets the additional tolerance. */
  SetFuzzyValue(theFuzz: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the additional tolerance. */
  FuzzyValue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Enables/Disables the usage of OBB. */
  SetUseOBB(theUseOBB: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the flag defining usage of OBB. */
  UseOBB(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BOPAlgo_Options_1 extends BOPAlgo_Options {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BOPAlgo_Options_2 extends BOPAlgo_Options {
    constructor(theAllocator: TDF_HAllocator);
  }

export declare type BOPAlgo_GlueEnum = {
  BOPAlgo_GlueOff: BOPAlgo_GlueEnumValue;
  BOPAlgo_GlueShift: BOPAlgo_GlueEnumValue;
  BOPAlgo_GlueFull: BOPAlgo_GlueEnumValue;
}

export declare type BOPAlgo_GlueEnumValue = 'BOPAlgo_GlueOff' | 'BOPAlgo_GlueShift' | 'BOPAlgo_GlueFull';

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo extends BRepAlgoAPI_Algo {
  /** Sets the arguments. */
  SetArguments(theLS: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Gets the arguments. */
  Arguments(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Sets the flag that defines the mode of treatment. In non-destructive mode the argument shapes are not modified. Instead a copy of a sub-shape is created in the result if it is needed to be updated. */
  SetNonDestructive(theFlag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the flag that defines the mode of treatment. In non-destructive mode the argument shapes are not modified. Instead a copy of a sub-shape is created in the result if it is needed to be updated. */
  NonDestructive(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets the glue option for the algorithm, which allows increasing performance of the intersection of the input shapes. */
  SetGlue(theGlue: BOPAlgo_GlueEnum): void;
  /** Returns the glue option of the algorithm. */
  Glue(): BOPAlgo_GlueEnum;
  /** Enables/Disables the check of the input solids for inverted status. */
  SetCheckInverted(theCheck: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the flag defining whether the check for input solids on inverted status should be performed or not. */
  CheckInverted(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Performs the algorithm. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Simplification of the result shape is performed by the means of ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain algorithm. The result of the operation will be overwritten with the simplified result. The simplification is performed without creation of the Internal shapes, i.e. shapes connections will never be broken. Simplification is performed on the whole result shape. Thus, if the input shapes contained connected tangent edges or faces unmodified during the operation they will also be unified. After simplification, the History of result simplification is merged into the main history of operation. So, it is taken into account when asking for Modified, Generated and Deleted shapes. Some options of the main operation are passed into the Unifier: Fuzzy tolerance of the operation is given to the Unifier as the linear tolerance. Non destructive mode here controls the safe input mode in Unifier. theUnifyEdges Controls the edges unification. TRUE by default. theUnifyFaces Controls the faces unification. TRUE by default. theAngularTol Angular criteria for tangency of edges and faces. Precision::Angular() by default. */
  SimplifyResult(theUnifyEdges: Standard_Boolean, theUnifyFaces: Standard_Boolean, theAngularTol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the shapes modified from the shape <theS>. If any, the list will contain only those splits of the given shape, contained in the result. */
  Modified(theS: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape <theS>. In frames of Boolean Operations algorithms only Edges and Faces could have Generated elements, as only they produce new elements during intersection: Edges can generate new vertices; Faces can generate new edges and vertices. */
  Generated(theS: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Checks if the shape <theS> has been completely removed from the result, i.e. the result does not contain the shape itself and any of its splits. Returns TRUE if the shape has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(aS: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if any of the input shapes has been modified during operation. */
  HasModified(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if any of the input shapes has generated shapes during operation. */
  HasGenerated(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if any of the input shapes has been deleted during operation. Normally, General Fuse operation should not have Deleted elements, but all derived operation can have. */
  HasDeleted(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Allows disabling the history collection. */
  SetToFillHistory(theHistFlag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns flag of history availability. */
  HasHistory(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a list of section edges. The edges represent the result of intersection between arguments of operation. */
  SectionEdges(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the Intersection tool. */
  DSFiller(): BOPAlgo_PPaveFiller;
  /** Returns the Building tool. */
  Builder(): BOPAlgo_PBuilder;
  /** History tool. */
  History(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo {
    constructor(thePF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Common extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Common_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Common {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Common_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Common {
    constructor(PF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Common_3 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Common {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Common_4 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Common {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, PF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse {
    constructor(PF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_3 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_4 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, aDSF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
  /** initialize the argument <S1> - argument Obsolete */
  Init1_1(S1: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** initialize the argument <S1> - argument Obsolete */
  Init1_2(Pl: gp_Pln): void;
  /** initialize the argument <S1> - argument Obsolete */
  Init1_3(Sf: any): void;
  /** initialize the tool <S2> - tool Obsolete */
  Init2_1(S2: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** initialize the tool <S2> - tool Obsolete */
  Init2_2(Pl: gp_Pln): void;
  /** initialize the tool <S2> - tool Obsolete */
  Init2_3(Sf: any): void;
  Approximation(B: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Indicates whether the P-Curve should be (or not) performed on the argument. By default, no parametric 2D curve (pcurve) is defined for the edges of the result. If ComputePCurve1 equals true, further computations performed to attach an P-Curve in the parametric space of the argument to the constructed edges. Obsolete */
  ComputePCurveOn1(B: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Indicates whether the P-Curve should be (or not) performed on the tool. By default, no parametric 2D curve (pcurve) is defined for the edges of the result. If ComputePCurve1 equals true, further computations performed to attach an P-Curve in the parametric space of the tool to the constructed edges. Obsolete */
  ComputePCurveOn2(B: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Performs the algorithm Filling interference Data Structure (if it is necessary) Building the result of the operation. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** get the face of the first part giving section edge <E>. Returns True on the 3 following conditions : 1/ <E> is an edge returned by the Shape() metwod. 2/ First part of section performed is a shape. 3/ <E> is built on a intersection curve (i.e <E> is not the result of common edges) When False, F remains untouched. Obsolete */
  HasAncestorFaceOn1(E: TopoDS_Shape, F: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Identifies the ancestor faces of the intersection edge E resulting from the last computation performed in this framework, that is, the faces of the two original shapes on which the edge E lies: HasAncestorFaceOn1 gives the ancestor face in the first shape, and HasAncestorFaceOn2 gives the ancestor face in the second shape. These functions return true if an ancestor face F is found, or false if not. An ancestor face is identifiable for the edge E if the following conditions are satisfied: the first part on which this algorithm performed its last computation is a shape, that is, it was not given as a surface or a plane at the time of construction of this algorithm or at a later time by the Init1 function, E is one of the elementary edges built by the last computation of this section algorithm. To use these functions properly, you have to test the returned Boolean value before using the ancestor face: F is significant only if the returned Boolean value equals true. Obsolete */
  HasAncestorFaceOn2(E: TopoDS_Shape, F: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(PF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_3 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_4 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, aDSF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_5 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, Pl: gp_Pln, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_6 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, Sf: any, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_7 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(Sf: any, S2: TopoDS_Shape, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Section_8 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Section {
    constructor(Sf1: any, Sf2: any, PerformNow: Standard_Boolean);
  }

/** Provides the root interface for the API algorithms. */
export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Algo extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Returns a shape built by the shape construction algorithm. Does not check if the shape is built. */
  Shape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Clears all warnings and errors, and any data cached by the algorithm. User defined options are not cleared. */
  Clear(): void;
  ClearWarnings(): void;
  FuzzyValue(): Standard_Real;
  GetReport(): any;
  HasError(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  HasErrors(): Standard_Boolean;
  HasWarning(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  HasWarnings(): Standard_Boolean;
  RunParallel(): Standard_Boolean;
  SetFuzzyValue(theFuzz: Standard_Real): void;
  SetRunParallel(theFlag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  SetUseOBB(theUseOBB: Standard_Boolean): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation extends BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo {
  /** Returns the first argument involved in this Boolean operation. Obsolete */
  Shape1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the second argument involved in this Boolean operation. Obsolete */
  Shape2(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Sets the Tool arguments. */
  SetTools(theLS: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Returns the Tools arguments. */
  Tools(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Sets the type of Boolean operation. */
  SetOperation(theBOP: BOPAlgo_Operation): void;
  /** Returns the type of Boolean Operation. */
  Operation(): BOPAlgo_Operation;
  /** Performs the Boolean operation. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
    constructor(thePF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Cut extends BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation {
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_1 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Cut {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_2 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Cut {
    constructor(PF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_3 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Cut {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

  export declare class BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_4 extends BRepAlgoAPI_Cut {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shape, S2: TopoDS_Shape, aDSF: BOPAlgo_PaveFiller, bFWD: Standard_Boolean, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

export declare class BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape {
  /** Sets deflection to computation of the minimum distance. */
  SetDeflection(theDeflection: Standard_Real): void;
  /** load first shape into extrema */
  LoadS1(Shape1: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** load second shape into extrema */
  LoadS2(Shape1: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** computation of the minimum distance (value and couple of points). Parameter theDeflection is used to specify a maximum deviation of extreme distances from the minimum one. Returns IsDone status. theRange - the progress indicator of algorithm */
  Perform(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** True if the minimum distance is found. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of solutions satisfying the minimum distance. */
  NbSolution(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the value of the minimum distance. */
  Value(): Standard_Real;
  /** True if one of the shapes is a solid and the other shape is completely or partially inside the solid. */
  InnerSolution(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the Point corresponding to the <N>th solution on the first Shape. */
  PointOnShape1(N: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the Point corresponding to the <N>th solution on the second Shape. */
  PointOnShape2(N: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** gives the type of the support where the Nth solution on the first shape is situated: IsVertex => the Nth solution on the first shape is a Vertex IsOnEdge => the Nth soluion on the first shape is on a Edge IsInFace => the Nth solution on the first shape is inside a face the corresponding support is obtained by the method SupportOnShape1 */
  SupportTypeShape1(N: Standard_Integer): BRepExtrema_SupportType;
  /** gives the type of the support where the Nth solution on the second shape is situated: IsVertex => the Nth solution on the second shape is a Vertex IsOnEdge => the Nth soluion on the secondt shape is on a Edge IsInFace => the Nth solution on the second shape is inside a face the corresponding support is obtained by the method SupportOnShape2 */
  SupportTypeShape2(N: Standard_Integer): BRepExtrema_SupportType;
  /** gives the support where the Nth solution on the first shape is situated. This support can be a Vertex, an Edge or a Face. */
  SupportOnShape1(N: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** gives the support where the Nth solution on the second shape is situated. This support can be a Vertex, an Edge or a Face. */
  SupportOnShape2(N: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** gives the corresponding parameter t if the Nth solution is situated on an Edge of the first shape */
  ParOnEdgeS1(N: Standard_Integer): { t: number };
  /** gives the corresponding parameter t if the Nth solution is situated on an Edge of the first shape */
  ParOnEdgeS2(N: Standard_Integer): { t: number };
  /** gives the corresponding parameters (U,V) if the Nth solution is situated on an face of the first shape */
  ParOnFaceS1(N: Standard_Integer): { u: number; v: number };
  /** gives the corresponding parameters (U,V) if the Nth solution is situated on an Face of the second shape */
  ParOnFaceS2(N: Standard_Integer): { u: number; v: number };
  /** Sets unused parameter Obsolete */
  SetFlag(F: Extrema_ExtFlag): void;
  /** Sets unused parameter Obsolete */
  SetAlgo(A: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  /** If isMultiThread == true then computation will be performed in parallel. */
  SetMultiThread(theIsMultiThread: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true then computation will be performed in parallel Default value is false */
  IsMultiThread(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_1 extends BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_2 extends BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape {
    constructor(Shape1: TopoDS_Shape, Shape2: TopoDS_Shape, F: Extrema_ExtFlag, A: Extrema_ExtAlgo, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

  export declare class BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_3 extends BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape {
    constructor(Shape1: TopoDS_Shape, Shape2: TopoDS_Shape, theDeflection: Standard_Real, F: Extrema_ExtFlag, A: Extrema_ExtAlgo, theRange: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

export declare class BRepBndLib {
  constructor();
  /** Adds the shape S to the bounding box B. More precisely are successively added to B: each face of S; the triangulation of the face is used if it exists, then each edge of S which does not belong to a face, the polygon of the edge is used if it exists and last each vertex of S which does not belong to an edge. After each elementary operation, the bounding box B is enlarged by the tolerance value of the relative sub-shape. When working with the triangulation of a face this value of enlargement is the sum of the triangulation deflection and the face tolerance. When working with the polygon of an edge this value of enlargement is the sum of the polygon deflection and the edge tolerance. Warning This algorithm is time consuming if triangulation has not been inserted inside the data structure of the shape S. The resulting bounding box may be somewhat larger than the object. */
  static Add(S: TopoDS_Shape, B: Bnd_Box, useTriangulation: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Adds the shape S to the bounding box B. This is a quick algorithm but only works if the shape S is composed of polygonal planar faces, as is the case if S is an approached polyhedral representation of an exact shape. Pay particular attention to this because this condition is not checked and, if it not respected, an error may occur in the algorithm for which the bounding box is built. Note that the resulting bounding box is not enlarged by the tolerance value of the sub-shapes as is the case with the Add function. So the added part of the resulting bounding box is closer to the shape S. */
  static AddClose(S: TopoDS_Shape, B: Bnd_Box): void;
  /** Adds the shape S to the bounding box B. This algorithm builds precise bounding box, which differs from exact geometry boundaries of shape only on shape entities tolerances Algorithm is the same as for method Add(..), but uses more precise methods for building boxes for geometry objects. If useShapeTolerance = True, bounding box is enlardged by shape tolerances and these tolerances are used for numerical methods of bounding box size calculations, otherwise bounding box is built according to sizes of uderlined geometrical entities, numerical calculation use tolerance Precision::Confusion(). */
  static AddOptimal(S: TopoDS_Shape, B: Bnd_Box, useTriangulation: Standard_Boolean, useShapeTolerance: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes the Oriented Bounding box for the shape <theS>. Two independent methods of computation are implemented: first method based on set of points (so, it demands the triangulated shape or shape with planar faces and linear edges). The second method is based on use of inertia axes and is called if use of the first method is impossible. If theIsTriangulationUsed == FALSE then the triangulation will be ignored at all. If theIsShapeToleranceUsed == TRUE then resulting box will be extended on the tolerance of the shape. theIsOptimal flag defines whether to look for the more tight OBB for the cost of performance or not. */
  static AddOBB(theS: TopoDS_Shape, theOBB: Bnd_OBB, theIsTriangulationUsed: Standard_Boolean, theIsOptimal: Standard_Boolean, theIsShapeToleranceUsed: Standard_Boolean): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepGProp {
  constructor();
  /** Computes the linear global properties of the shape S, i.e. the global properties induced by each edge of the shape S, and brings them together with the global properties still retained by the framework LProps. If the current system of LProps was empty, its global properties become equal to the linear global properties of S. For this computation no linear density is attached to the edges. So, for example, the added mass corresponds to the sum of the lengths of the edges of S. The density of the composed systems, i.e. that of each component of the current system of LProps, and that of S which is considered to be equal to 1, must be coherent. Note that this coherence cannot be checked. You are advised to use a separate framework for each density, and then to bring these frameworks together into a global one. The point relative to which the inertia of the system is computed is the reference point of the framework LProps. Note: if your programming ensures that the framework LProps retains only linear global properties (brought together for example, by the function LinearProperties) for objects the density of which is equal to 1 (or is not defined), the function Mass will return the total length of edges of the system analysed by LProps. Warning No check is performed to verify that the shape S retains truly linear properties. If S is simply a vertex, it is not considered to present any additional global properties. SkipShared is a special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, edges, shared by two or more faces, are taken into calculation only once. If we have cube with sizes 1, 1, 1, its linear properties = 12 for SkipEdges = true and 24 for SkipEdges = false. UseTriangulation is a special flag, which defines preferable source of geometry data. If UseTriangulation = false, exact geometry objects (curves) are used, otherwise polygons of triangulation are used first. */
  static LinearProperties(S: TopoDS_Shape, LProps: GProp_GProps, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean, UseTriangulation: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes the surface global properties of the shape S, i.e. the global properties induced by each face of the shape S, and brings them together with the global properties still retained by the framework SProps. If the current system of SProps was empty, its global properties become equal to the surface global properties of S. For this computation, no surface density is attached to the faces. Consequently, the added mass corresponds to the sum of the areas of the faces of S. The density of the component systems, i.e. that of each component of the current system of SProps, and that of S which is considered to be equal to 1, must be coherent. Note that this coherence cannot be checked. You are advised to use a framework for each different value of density, and then to bring these frameworks together into a global one. The point relative to which the inertia of the system is computed is the reference point of the framework SProps. Note : if your programming ensures that the framework SProps retains only surface global properties, brought together, for example, by the function SurfaceProperties, for objects the density of which is equal to 1 (or is not defined), the function Mass will return the total area of faces of the system analysed by SProps. Warning No check is performed to verify that the shape S retains truly surface properties. If S is simply a vertex, an edge or a wire, it is not considered to present any additional global properties. SkipShared is a special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, faces, shared by two or more shells, are taken into calculation only once. UseTriangulation is a special flag, which defines preferable source of geometry data. If UseTriangulation = false, exact geometry objects (surfaces) are used, otherwise face triangulations are used first. */
  static SurfaceProperties_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, SProps: GProp_GProps, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean, UseTriangulation: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes the surface global properties of the shape S, i.e. the global properties induced by each face of the shape S, and brings them together with the global properties still retained by the framework SProps. If the current system of SProps was empty, its global properties become equal to the surface global properties of S. For this computation, no surface density is attached to the faces. Consequently, the added mass corresponds to the sum of the areas of the faces of S. The density of the component systems, i.e. that of each component of the current system of SProps, and that of S which is considered to be equal to 1, must be coherent. Note that this coherence cannot be checked. You are advised to use a framework for each different value of density, and then to bring these frameworks together into a global one. The point relative to which the inertia of the system is computed is the reference point of the framework SProps. Note : if your programming ensures that the framework SProps retains only surface global properties, brought together, for example, by the function SurfaceProperties, for objects the density of which is equal to 1 (or is not defined), the function Mass will return the total area of faces of the system analysed by SProps. Warning No check is performed to verify that the shape S retains truly surface properties. If S is simply a vertex, an edge or a wire, it is not considered to present any additional global properties. SkipShared is a special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, faces, shared by two or more shells, are taken into calculation only once. UseTriangulation is a special flag, which defines preferable source of geometry data. If UseTriangulation = false, exact geometry objects (surfaces) are used, otherwise face triangulations are used first. */
  static SurfaceProperties_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, SProps: GProp_GProps, Eps: Standard_Real, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the global volume properties of the solid S, and brings them together with the global properties still retained by the framework VProps. If the current system of VProps was empty, its global properties become equal to the global properties of S for volume. For this computation, no volume density is attached to the solid. Consequently, the added mass corresponds to the volume of S. The density of the component systems, i.e. that of each component of the current system of VProps, and that of S which is considered to be equal to 1, must be coherent to each other. Note that this coherence cannot be checked. You are advised to use a separate framework for each density, and then to bring these frameworks together into a global one. The point relative to which the inertia of the system is computed is the reference point of the framework VProps. Note: if your programming ensures that the framework VProps retains only global properties of volume (brought together for example, by the function VolumeProperties) for objects the density of which is equal to 1 (or is not defined), the function Mass will return the total volume of the solids of the system analysed by VProps. Warning The shape S must represent an object whose global volume properties can be computed. It may be a finite solid, or a series of finite solids all oriented in a coherent way. Nonetheless, S must be exempt of any free boundary. Note that these conditions of coherence are not checked by this algorithm, and results will be false if they are not respected. SkipShared a is special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, the volumes formed by the equal (the same TShape, location and orientation) faces are taken into calculation only once. UseTriangulation is a special flag, which defines preferable source of geometry data. If UseTriangulation = false, exact geometry objects (surfaces) are used, otherwise face triangulations are used first. */
  static VolumeProperties_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, VProps: GProp_GProps, OnlyClosed: Standard_Boolean, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean, UseTriangulation: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes the global volume properties of the solid S, and brings them together with the global properties still retained by the framework VProps. If the current system of VProps was empty, its global properties become equal to the global properties of S for volume. For this computation, no volume density is attached to the solid. Consequently, the added mass corresponds to the volume of S. The density of the component systems, i.e. that of each component of the current system of VProps, and that of S which is considered to be equal to 1, must be coherent to each other. Note that this coherence cannot be checked. You are advised to use a separate framework for each density, and then to bring these frameworks together into a global one. The point relative to which the inertia of the system is computed is the reference point of the framework VProps. Note: if your programming ensures that the framework VProps retains only global properties of volume (brought together for example, by the function VolumeProperties) for objects the density of which is equal to 1 (or is not defined), the function Mass will return the total volume of the solids of the system analysed by VProps. Warning The shape S must represent an object whose global volume properties can be computed. It may be a finite solid, or a series of finite solids all oriented in a coherent way. Nonetheless, S must be exempt of any free boundary. Note that these conditions of coherence are not checked by this algorithm, and results will be false if they are not respected. SkipShared a is special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, the volumes formed by the equal (the same TShape, location and orientation) faces are taken into calculation only once. UseTriangulation is a special flag, which defines preferable source of geometry data. If UseTriangulation = false, exact geometry objects (surfaces) are used, otherwise face triangulations are used first. */
  static VolumeProperties_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, VProps: GProp_GProps, Eps: Standard_Real, OnlyClosed: Standard_Boolean, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Real;
  /** Updates <VProps> with the shape , that contains its principal properties. The volume properties of all the FORWARD and REVERSED faces in are computed. If OnlyClosed is True then computed faces must belong to closed Shells. Adaptive 2D Gauss integration is used. Parameter IsUseSpan says if it is necessary to define spans on a face. This option has an effect only for BSpline faces. Parameter Eps sets maximal relative error of computed property for each face. Error is delivered by the adaptive Gauss-Kronrod method of integral computation that is used for properties computation. Method returns estimation of relative error reached for whole shape. Returns negative value if the computation is failed. SkipShared is a special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, the volumes formed by the equal (the same TShape, location and orientation) faces are taken into calculation only once. */
  static VolumePropertiesGK_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, VProps: GProp_GProps, Eps: Standard_Real, OnlyClosed: Standard_Boolean, IsUseSpan: Standard_Boolean, CGFlag: Standard_Boolean, IFlag: Standard_Boolean, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Real;
  /** Updates <VProps> with the shape , that contains its principal properties. The volume properties of all the FORWARD and REVERSED faces in are computed. If OnlyClosed is True then computed faces must belong to closed Shells. Adaptive 2D Gauss integration is used. Parameter IsUseSpan says if it is necessary to define spans on a face. This option has an effect only for BSpline faces. Parameter Eps sets maximal relative error of computed property for each face. Error is delivered by the adaptive Gauss-Kronrod method of integral computation that is used for properties computation. Method returns estimation of relative error reached for whole shape. Returns negative value if the computation is failed. SkipShared is a special flag, which allows taking in calculation shared topological entities or not. For ex., if SkipShared = True, the volumes formed by the equal (the same TShape, location and orientation) faces are taken into calculation only once. */
  static VolumePropertiesGK_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, VProps: GProp_GProps, thePln: gp_Pln, Eps: Standard_Real, OnlyClosed: Standard_Boolean, IsUseSpan: Standard_Boolean, CGFlag: Standard_Boolean, IFlag: Standard_Boolean, SkipShared: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepGProp_Face {
  Load_1(F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  VIntegrationOrder(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns true if the face is not trimmed. */
  NaturalRestriction(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the TopoDS face. */
  GetFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns the value of the boundary curve of the face. */
  Value2d(U: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  SIntOrder(Eps: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  SVIntSubs(): Standard_Integer;
  SUIntSubs(): Standard_Integer;
  UKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  VKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  LIntOrder(Eps: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  LIntSubs(): Standard_Integer;
  LKnots(Knots: TColStd_Array1OfReal): void;
  /** Returns the number of points required to do the integration in the U parametric direction with a good accuracy. */
  UIntegrationOrder(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the Face. */
  Bounds(): { U1: number; U2: number; V1: number; V2: number };
  /** Computes the point of parameter U, V on the Face and the normal to the face at this point. */
  Normal(U: Standard_Real, V: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt, VNor: gp_Vec): void;
  Load_2(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the parametric value of the start point of the current arc of curve. */
  FirstParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parametric value of the end point of the current arc of curve. */
  LastParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the number of points required to do the integration along the parameter of curve. */
  IntegrationOrder(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the point of parameter U and the first derivative at this point of a boundary curve. */
  D12d(U: Standard_Real, P: gp_Pnt2d, V1: gp_Vec2d): void;
  Load_3(IsFirstParam: Standard_Boolean, theIsoType: GeomAbs_IsoType): void;
  /** Returns an array of U knots of the face. The first and last elements of the array will be theUMin and theUMax. The middle elements will be the U Knots of the face greater then theUMin and lower then theUMax in increasing order. If the face is not a BSpline, the array initialized with theUMin and theUMax only. */
  GetUKnots(theUMin: Standard_Real, theUMax: Standard_Real, theUKnots: any): void;
  /** Returns an array of combination of T knots of the arc and V knots of the face. The first and last elements of the array will be theTMin and theTMax. The middle elements will be the Knots of the arc and the values of parameters of arc on which the value points have V coordinates close to V knots of face. All the parameter will be greater then theTMin and lower then theTMax in increasing order. If the face is not a BSpline, the array initialized with theTMin and theTMax only. */
  GetTKnots(theTMin: Standard_Real, theTMax: Standard_Real, theTKnots: any): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepGProp_Face_1 extends BRepGProp_Face {
    constructor(IsUseSpan: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepGProp_Face_2 extends BRepGProp_Face {
    constructor(F: TopoDS_Face, IsUseSpan: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepLib {
  constructor();
  /** Computes the max distance between edge and its 2d representation on the face. Sets the default precision. The current Precision is returned. */
  static Precision_1(P: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes the max distance between edge and its 2d representation on the face. Sets the default precision. The current Precision is returned. */
  static Precision_2(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets the current plane to P. */
  static Plane_1(P: any): void;
  /** Sets the current plane to P. */
  static Plane_2(): any;
  /** checks if the Edge is same range IGNORING the same range flag of the edge Confusion argument is to compare real numbers idenpendently of any model space tolerance */
  static CheckSameRange(E: TopoDS_Edge, Confusion: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** will make all the curve representation have the same range domain for the parameters. This will IGNORE the same range flag value to proceed. If there is a 3D curve there it will the range of that curve. If not the first curve representation encountered in the list will give its range to the all the other curves. */
  static SameRange(E: TopoDS_Edge, Tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes the 3d curve for the edge <E> if it does not exist. Returns True if the curve was computed or existed. Returns False if there is no planar pcurve or the computation failed. <MaxSegment> >= 30 in approximation */
  static BuildCurve3d(E: TopoDS_Edge, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, MaxDegree: Standard_Integer, MaxSegment: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the 3d curves for all the edges of return False if one of the computation failed. <MaxSegment> >= 30 in approximation */
  static BuildCurves3d_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, MaxDegree: Standard_Integer, MaxSegment: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the 3d curves for all the edges of return False if one of the computation failed. <MaxSegment> >= 30 in approximation */
  static BuildCurves3d_2(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Builds pcurve of edge on face if the surface is plane, and updates the edge. */
  static BuildPCurveForEdgeOnPlane_1(theE: TopoDS_Edge, theF: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Builds pcurve of edge on face if the surface is plane, and updates the edge. */
  static BuildPCurveForEdgeOnPlane_2(theE: TopoDS_Edge, theF: TopoDS_Face, aC2D: any): { bToUpdate: boolean };
  /** Checks if the edge has a Tolerance smaller than MaxToleranceToCheck if so it will compute the radius of the cylindrical pipe surface that MinToleranceRequest is the minimum tolerance before it is useful to start testing. Usually it should be around 10e-5 contains all the curve representation of the edge returns True if the Edge tolerance had to be updated */
  static UpdateEdgeTol(E: TopoDS_Edge, MinToleranceRequest: Standard_Real, MaxToleranceToCheck: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Checks all the edges of the shape whose Tolerance is smaller than MaxToleranceToCheck Returns True if at least one edge was updated MinToleranceRequest is the minimum tolerance before it is useful to start testing. Usually it should be around 10e-5 Warning: The method is very slow as it checks all. Use only in interfaces or processing assimilate batch */
  static UpdateEdgeTolerance(S: TopoDS_Shape, MinToleranceRequest: Standard_Real, MaxToleranceToCheck: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes new 2d curve(s) for the edge <theEdge> to have the same parameter as the 3d curve. The algorithm is not done if the flag SameParameter was True on the Edge. */
  static SameParameter_1(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge, Tolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes new 2d curve(s) for the edge <theEdge> to have the same parameter as the 3d curve. The algorithm is not done if the flag SameParameter was True on the Edge. */
  static SameParameter_2(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge, theTolerance: Standard_Real, IsUseOldEdge: Standard_Boolean): { result: TopoDS_Edge; theNewTol: number };
  /** Computes new 2d curve(s) for the edge <theEdge> to have the same parameter as the 3d curve. The algorithm is not done if the flag SameParameter was True on the Edge. */
  static SameParameter_3(S: TopoDS_Shape, Tolerance: Standard_Real, forced: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes new 2d curve(s) for the edge <theEdge> to have the same parameter as the 3d curve. The algorithm is not done if the flag SameParameter was True on the Edge. */
  static SameParameter_4(S: TopoDS_Shape, theReshaper: BRepTools_ReShape, Tolerance: Standard_Real, forced: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Replaces tolerance of FACE EDGE VERTEX by the tolerance Max of their connected handling shapes. It is not necessary to use this call after SameParameter. (called in) */
  static UpdateTolerances_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, verifyFaceTolerance: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Replaces tolerance of FACE EDGE VERTEX by the tolerance Max of their connected handling shapes. It is not necessary to use this call after SameParameter. (called in) */
  static UpdateTolerances_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, theReshaper: BRepTools_ReShape, verifyFaceTolerance: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Checks tolerances of edges (including inner points) and vertices of a shape and updates them to satisfy "SameParameter" condition */
  static UpdateInnerTolerances(S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Orients the solid forward and the shell with the orientation to have matter in the solid. Returns False if the solid is unOrientable (open or incoherent) */
  static OrientClosedSolid(solid: TopoDS_Solid): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the order of continuity between two faces connected by an edge */
  static ContinuityOfFaces(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge, theFace1: TopoDS_Face, theFace2: TopoDS_Face, theAngleTol: Standard_Real): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Encodes the Regularity of edges on a Shape. Warning: <TolAng> is an angular tolerance, expressed in Rad. Warning: If the edges's regularity are coded before, nothing is done. */
  static EncodeRegularity_1(S: TopoDS_Shape, TolAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Encodes the Regularity of edges on a Shape. Warning: <TolAng> is an angular tolerance, expressed in Rad. Warning: If the edges's regularity are coded before, nothing is done. */
  static EncodeRegularity_2(S: TopoDS_Shape, LE: TopTools_ListOfShape, TolAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Encodes the Regularity of edges on a Shape. Warning: <TolAng> is an angular tolerance, expressed in Rad. Warning: If the edges's regularity are coded before, nothing is done. */
  static EncodeRegularity_3(E: TopoDS_Edge, F1: TopoDS_Face, F2: TopoDS_Face, TolAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sorts in LF the Faces of S on the complexity of their surfaces (Plane,Cylinder,Cone,Sphere,Torus,other) */
  static SortFaces(S: TopoDS_Shape, LF: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Sorts in LF the Faces of S on the reverse complexity of their surfaces (other,Torus,Sphere,Cone,Cylinder,Plane) */
  static ReverseSortFaces(S: TopoDS_Shape, LF: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Corrects the normals in Poly_Triangulation of faces, in such way that normals at nodes lying along smooth edges have the same value on both adjacent triangulations. Returns TRUE if any correction is done. */
  static EnsureNormalConsistency(S: TopoDS_Shape, theAngTol: Standard_Real, ForceComputeNormals: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Updates value of deflection in Poly_Triangulation of faces by the maximum deviation measured on existing triangulation. */
  static UpdateDeflection(S: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Calculates the bounding sphere around the set of vertexes from the theLV list. Returns the center (theNewCenter) and the radius (theNewTol) of this sphere. This can be used to construct the new vertex which covers the given set of other vertices. */
  static BoundingVertex(theLV: TopTools_ListOfShape, theNewCenter: gp_Pnt): { theNewTol: number };
  /** For an edge defined by 3d curve and tolerance and vertices defined by points, parameters on curve and tolerances, finds a range of curve between vertices not covered by vertices tolerances. Returns false if there is no such range. Otherwise, sets theFirst and theLast as its bounds. */
  static FindValidRange_1(theCurve: Adaptor3d_Curve, theTolE: Standard_Real, theParV1: Standard_Real, thePntV1: gp_Pnt, theTolV1: Standard_Real, theParV2: Standard_Real, thePntV2: gp_Pnt, theTolV2: Standard_Real): { result: Standard_Boolean; theFirst: number; theLast: number };
  /** For an edge defined by 3d curve and tolerance and vertices defined by points, parameters on curve and tolerances, finds a range of curve between vertices not covered by vertices tolerances. Returns false if there is no such range. Otherwise, sets theFirst and theLast as its bounds. */
  static FindValidRange_2(theEdge: TopoDS_Edge): { result: Standard_Boolean; theFirst: number; theLast: number };
  /** Enlarges the face on the given value. theF The face to extend theExtVal The extension value theExtUMin Defines whether to extend the face in UMin direction theExtUMax Defines whether to extend the face in UMax direction theExtVMin Defines whether to extend the face in VMin direction theExtVMax Defines whether to extend the face in VMax direction theFExtended The extended face */
  static ExtendFace(theF: TopoDS_Face, theExtVal: Standard_Real, theExtUMin: Standard_Boolean, theExtUMax: Standard_Boolean, theExtVMin: Standard_Boolean, theExtVMax: Standard_Boolean, theFExtended: TopoDS_Face): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepCheck_Analyzer {
  /** Constructs a shape validation object defined by the shape S. is the shape to control. <GeomControls> If False only topological informaions are checked. The geometricals controls are For a Vertex: BRepCheck_InvalidToleranceValue NYI For an Edge: BRepCheck_InvalidCurveOnClosedSurface, BRepCheck_InvalidCurveOnSurface, BRepCheck_InvalidSameParameterFlag, BRepCheck_InvalidToleranceValue NYI For a face: BRepCheck_UnorientableShape, BRepCheck_IntersectingWires, BRepCheck_InvalidToleranceValue NYI For a wire: BRepCheck_SelfIntersectingWire */
  constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, GeomControls: Standard_Boolean, theIsParallel: Standard_Boolean, theIsExact: Standard_Boolean)
  /** is the shape to control. <GeomControls> If False only topological informaions are checked. The geometricals controls are For a Vertex: BRepCheck_InvalidTolerance NYI For an Edge: BRepCheck_InvalidCurveOnClosedSurface, BRepCheck_InvalidCurveOnSurface, BRepCheck_InvalidSameParameterFlag, BRepCheck_InvalidTolerance NYI For a face: BRepCheck_UnorientableShape, BRepCheck_IntersectingWires, BRepCheck_InvalidTolerance NYI For a wire: BRepCheck_SelfIntersectingWire */
  Init(S: TopoDS_Shape, GeomControls: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets method to calculate distance: Calculating in finite number of points (if theIsExact is false, faster, but possible not correct result) or exact calculating by using BRepLib_CheckCurveOnSurface class (if theIsExact is true, slowly, but more correctly). Exact method is used only when edge is SameParameter. Default method is calculating in finite number of points */
  SetExactMethod(theIsExact: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true if exact method selected. */
  IsExactMethod(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets parallel flag. */
  SetParallel(theIsParallel: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true if parallel flag is set. */
  IsParallel(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** is a subshape of the original shape. Returns <STandard_True> if no default has been detected on and any of its subshape. */
  IsValid_1(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** is a subshape of the original shape. Returns <STandard_True> if no default has been detected on and any of its subshape. */
  IsValid_2(): Standard_Boolean;
  Result(theSubS: TopoDS_Shape): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  Init_1(C: any): void;
  Init_2(C: any, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  Init_3(C: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt): void;
  Init_4(C: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex): void;
  Init_5(C: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  Init_6(C: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  Init_7(C: any, S: any): void;
  Init_8(C: any, S: any, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  Init_9(C: any, S: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt): void;
  Init_10(C: any, S: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex): void;
  Init_11(C: any, S: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  Init_12(C: any, S: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns true if the edge is built. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the construction status BRepBuilderAPI_EdgeDone if the edge is built, or another value of the BRepBuilderAPI_EdgeError enumeration indicating the reason of construction failure. */
  Error(): BRepBuilderAPI_EdgeError;
  /** Returns the constructed edge. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if the edge is not built. */
  Edge(): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Returns the first vertex of the edge. May be Null. */
  Vertex1(): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the second vertex of the edge. May be Null. Warning The returned vertex in each function corresponds respectively to the lowest, or the highest parameter on the curve along which the edge is built. It does not correspond to the first or second vertex given at the time of the construction, if the edge is oriented reversed. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if the edge is not built. */
  Vertex2(): TopoDS_Vertex;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_3 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_4 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Lin);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_5 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Lin, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_6 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Lin, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_7 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Lin, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_8 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Circ);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_9 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Circ, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_10 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Circ, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_11 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Circ, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_12 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Elips);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_13 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Elips, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_14 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Elips, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_15 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Elips, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_16 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Hypr);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_17 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Hypr, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_18 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Hypr, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_19 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Hypr, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_20 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Parab);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_21 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Parab, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_22 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Parab, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_23 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: gp_Parab, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_24 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_25 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_26 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_27 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_28 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_29 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_30 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_31 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_32 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_33 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_34 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any, P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_35 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge {
    constructor(L: any, S: any, V1: TopoDS_Vertex, V2: TopoDS_Vertex, p1: Standard_Real, p2: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_Command {
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Raises NotDone if done is false. */
  Check(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform extends BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape {
  /** Applies the geometric transformation defined at the time of construction of this framework to the shape S. If the transformation T is direct and isometric (i.e. if the determinant of the vectorial part of T is equal to 1.), and if Copy equals false (default value), the resulting shape is the same as the original but with a new location assigned to it. In all other cases, the transformation is applied to a duplicate of S. Use the function Shape to access the result. Note: this framework can be reused to apply the same geometric transformation to other shapes: just specify them by calling the function Perform again. */
  Perform(S: TopoDS_Shape, Copy: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the modified shape corresponding to . */
  ModifiedShape(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform {
    constructor(T: gp_GTrsf);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, T: gp_GTrsf, Copy: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape extends BRepBuilderAPI_Command {
  /** This is called by Shape(). It does nothing but may be redefined. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns a shape built by the shape construction algorithm. Raises exception StdFail_NotDone if the shape was not built. */
  Shape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Initializes (or reinitializes) the construction of a face by creating a new object which is a copy of the face F, in order to add wires to it, using the function Add. Note: this complete copy of the geometry is only required if you want to work on the geometries of the two faces independently. */
  Init_1(F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Initializes (or reinitializes) the construction of a face by creating a new object which is a copy of the face F, in order to add wires to it, using the function Add. Note: this complete copy of the geometry is only required if you want to work on the geometries of the two faces independently. */
  Init_2(S: any, Bound: Standard_Boolean, TolDegen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Initializes (or reinitializes) the construction of a face by creating a new object which is a copy of the face F, in order to add wires to it, using the function Add. Note: this complete copy of the geometry is only required if you want to work on the geometries of the two faces independently. */
  Init_3(S: any, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, TolDegen: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Adds the wire W to the constructed face as a hole. Warning W must not cross the other bounds of the face, and all the bounds must define only one area on the surface. (Be careful, however, as this is not checked.) Example // a cylinder gp_Cylinder C = ..; // a wire TopoDS_Wire W = ...; BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace MF(C); MF.Add(W); TopoDS_Face F = MF; */
  Add(W: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Returns true if this algorithm has a valid face. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the construction status BRepBuilderAPI_FaceDone if the face is built, or another value of the BRepBuilderAPI_FaceError enumeration indicating why the construction failed, in particular when the given parameters are outside the bounds of the surface. */
  Error(): BRepBuilderAPI_FaceError;
  /** Returns the constructed face. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if no face is built. */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(F: TopoDS_Face);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_3 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(P: gp_Pln);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_4 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cylinder);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_5 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cone);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_6 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: gp_Sphere);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_7 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Torus);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_8 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: any, TolDegen: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_9 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(P: gp_Pln, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_10 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cylinder, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_11 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cone, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_12 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: gp_Sphere, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_13 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Torus, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_14 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: any, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, TolDegen: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_15 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(W: TopoDS_Wire, OnlyPlane: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_16 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(P: gp_Pln, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_17 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cylinder, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_18 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Cone, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_19 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: gp_Sphere, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_20 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(C: gp_Torus, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_21 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(S: any, W: TopoDS_Wire, Inside: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_22 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace {
    constructor(F: TopoDS_Face, W: TopoDS_Wire);
  }

export declare type BRepBuilderAPI_WireError = {
  BRepBuilderAPI_WireDone: BRepBuilderAPI_WireErrorValue;
  BRepBuilderAPI_EmptyWire: BRepBuilderAPI_WireErrorValue;
  BRepBuilderAPI_DisconnectedWire: BRepBuilderAPI_WireErrorValue;
  BRepBuilderAPI_NonManifoldWire: BRepBuilderAPI_WireErrorValue;
}

export declare type BRepBuilderAPI_WireErrorValue = 'BRepBuilderAPI_WireDone' | 'BRepBuilderAPI_EmptyWire' | 'BRepBuilderAPI_DisconnectedWire' | 'BRepBuilderAPI_NonManifoldWire';

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_Transform extends BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape {
  /** Applies the geometric transformation defined at the time of construction of this framework to the shape S. If the transformation T is direct and isometric, in other words, if the determinant of the vectorial part of T is equal to 1., and if theCopyGeom equals false (the default value), the resulting shape is the same as the original but with a new location assigned to it. In all other cases, the transformation is applied to a duplicate of theShape. If theCopyMesh is true, the triangulation will be copied, and the copy will be assigned to the result shape. Use the function Shape to access the result. Note: this framework can be reused to apply the same geometric transformation to other shapes. You only need to specify them by calling the function Perform again. */
  Perform(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theCopyGeom: Standard_Boolean, theCopyMesh: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns the modified shape corresponding to . */
  ModifiedShape(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_Transform {
    constructor(T: gp_Trsf);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_Transform {
    constructor(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theTrsf: gp_Trsf, theCopyGeom: Standard_Boolean, theCopyMesh: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Defines or redefines the arguments for the construction of a shell. The construction is initialized with the surface S, limited in the u parametric direction by the two parameter values UMin and UMax, and in the v parametric direction by the two parameter values VMin and VMax. Warning The function Error returns: BRepBuilderAPI_ShellParametersOutOfRange when the given parameters are outside the bounds of the surface or the basis surface if S is trimmed */
  Init(S: any, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, Segment: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true if the shell is built. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the construction status: BRepBuilderAPI_ShellDone if the shell is built, or another value of the BRepBuilderAPI_ShellError enumeration indicating why the construction failed. This is frequently BRepBuilderAPI_ShellParametersOutOfRange indicating that the given parameters are outside the bounds of the surface. */
  Error(): BRepBuilderAPI_ShellError;
  /** Returns the new Shell. */
  Shell(): TopoDS_Shell;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell {
    constructor(S: any, Segment: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_3 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell {
    constructor(S: any, UMin: Standard_Real, UMax: Standard_Real, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, Segment: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Adds the shell to the current solid. Warning No check is done to verify the conditions of coherence of the resulting solid. In particular, S must not intersect other shells of the solid under construction. Besides, after all shells have been added, one of these shells should constitute the outside skin of the solid. It may be closed (a finite solid) or open (an infinite solid). Other shells form hollows (cavities) in these previous ones. Each must bound a closed volume. */
  Add(S: TopoDS_Shell): void;
  /** Returns true if the solid is built. For this class, a solid under construction is always valid. If no shell has been added, it could be a whole-space solid. However, no check was done to verify the conditions of coherence of the resulting solid. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the new Solid. */
  Solid(): TopoDS_Solid;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_CompSolid);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_3 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shell);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_4 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shell, S2: TopoDS_Shell);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_5 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(S1: TopoDS_Shell, S2: TopoDS_Shell, S3: TopoDS_Shell);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_6 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(So: TopoDS_Solid);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_7 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid {
    constructor(So: TopoDS_Solid, S: TopoDS_Shell);
  }

export declare type BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionMode = {
  BRepBuilderAPI_Transformed: BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionModeValue;
  BRepBuilderAPI_RightCorner: BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionModeValue;
  BRepBuilderAPI_RoundCorner: BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionModeValue;
}

export declare type BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionModeValue = 'BRepBuilderAPI_Transformed' | 'BRepBuilderAPI_RightCorner' | 'BRepBuilderAPI_RoundCorner';

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_Sewing extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Creates an object with tolerance of connexity option for sewing (if false only control) option for analysis of degenerated shapes option for cutting of free edges. option for non manifold processing */
  constructor(tolerance: Standard_Real, option1: Standard_Boolean, option2: Standard_Boolean, option3: Standard_Boolean, option4: Standard_Boolean)
  /** initialize the parameters if necessary */
  Init(tolerance: Standard_Real, option1: Standard_Boolean, option2: Standard_Boolean, option3: Standard_Boolean, option4: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Loads the context shape. */
  Load(shape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Defines the shapes to be sewed or controlled. */
  Add(shape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Computing theProgress - progress indicator of algorithm */
  Perform(theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Gives the sewed shape a null shape if nothing constructed may be a face, a shell, a solid or a compound */
  SewedShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** set context */
  SetContext(theContext: any): void;
  /** return context */
  GetContext(): any;
  /** Gives the number of free edges (edge shared by one face) */
  NbFreeEdges(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives each free edge. */
  FreeEdge(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Gives the number of multiple edges (edge shared by more than two faces) */
  NbMultipleEdges(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives each multiple edge. */
  MultipleEdge(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Gives the number of contiguous edges (edge shared by two faces) */
  NbContigousEdges(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives each contiguous edge. */
  ContigousEdge(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Gives the sections (edge) belonging to a contiguous edge. */
  ContigousEdgeCouple(index: Standard_Integer): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Indicates if a section is bound (before use SectionToBoundary) */
  IsSectionBound(section: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gives the original edge (free boundary) which becomes the the section. Remember that sections constitute common edges. This information is important for control because with original edge we can find the surface to which the section is attached. */
  SectionToBoundary(section: TopoDS_Edge): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Gives the number of degenerated shapes. */
  NbDegeneratedShapes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives each degenerated shape. */
  DegeneratedShape(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Indicates if a input shape is degenerated. */
  IsDegenerated(shape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Indicates if a input shape has been modified. */
  IsModified(shape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gives a modifieded shape. */
  Modified(shape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Indicates if a input subshape has been modified. */
  IsModifiedSubShape(shape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Gives a modifieded subshape. */
  ModifiedSubShape(shape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** print the information */
  Dump(): void;
  /** Gives the number of deleted faces (faces smallest than tolerance) */
  NbDeletedFaces(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Gives each deleted face. */
  DeletedFace(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Gives a modified shape. */
  WhichFace(theEdg: TopoDS_Edge, index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Gets same parameter mode. */
  SameParameterMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets same parameter mode. */
  SetSameParameterMode(SameParameterMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Gives set tolerance. */
  Tolerance(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets tolerance. */
  SetTolerance(theToler: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Gives set min tolerance. */
  MinTolerance(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets min tolerance. */
  SetMinTolerance(theMinToler: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Gives set max tolerance. */
  MaxTolerance(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets max tolerance. */
  SetMaxTolerance(theMaxToler: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns mode for sewing faces By default - true. */
  FaceMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets mode for sewing faces By default - true. */
  SetFaceMode(theFaceMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns mode for sewing floating edges By default - false. */
  FloatingEdgesMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets mode for sewing floating edges By default - false. Returns mode for cutting floating edges By default - false. Sets mode for cutting floating edges By default - false. */
  SetFloatingEdgesMode(theFloatingEdgesMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns mode for accounting of local tolerances of edges and vertices during of merging. */
  LocalTolerancesMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets mode for accounting of local tolerances of edges and vertices during of merging in this case WorkTolerance = myTolerance + tolEdge1+ tolEdg2; */
  SetLocalTolerancesMode(theLocalTolerancesMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets mode for non-manifold sewing. */
  SetNonManifoldMode(theNonManifoldMode: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Gets mode for non-manifold sewing. INTERNAL FUNCTIONS */
  NonManifoldMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape . */
  Modified(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the modified shape corresponding to . S can correspond to the entire initial shape or to its subshape. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if S is not the initial shape or a subshape of the initial shape to which the transformation has been applied. Raises NoSuchObject from Standard if S is not the initial shape or a sub-shape of the initial shape. */
  ModifiedShape(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeVertex extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Constructs a vertex from point P. Example create a vertex from a 3D point. gp_Pnt P(0,0,10); TopoDS_Vertex V = BRepBuilderAPI_MakeVertex(P); */
  constructor(P: gp_Pnt)
  /** Returns the constructed vertex. */
  Vertex(): TopoDS_Vertex;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Adds the edge E to the wire under construction. E must be connectable to the wire under construction, and, unless it is the first edge of the wire, must satisfy the following condition: one of its vertices must be geometrically coincident with one of the vertices of the wire (provided that the highest tolerance factor is assigned to the two vertices). It could also be the same vertex. Warning If E is not connectable to the wire under construction it is not added. The function Error will return BRepBuilderAPI_DisconnectedWire, the function IsDone will return false and the function Wire will raise an error, until a new connectable edge is added. */
  Add_1(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds the edge E to the wire under construction. E must be connectable to the wire under construction, and, unless it is the first edge of the wire, must satisfy the following condition: one of its vertices must be geometrically coincident with one of the vertices of the wire (provided that the highest tolerance factor is assigned to the two vertices). It could also be the same vertex. Warning If E is not connectable to the wire under construction it is not added. The function Error will return BRepBuilderAPI_DisconnectedWire, the function IsDone will return false and the function Wire will raise an error, until a new connectable edge is added. */
  Add_2(W: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Adds the edge E to the wire under construction. E must be connectable to the wire under construction, and, unless it is the first edge of the wire, must satisfy the following condition: one of its vertices must be geometrically coincident with one of the vertices of the wire (provided that the highest tolerance factor is assigned to the two vertices). It could also be the same vertex. Warning If E is not connectable to the wire under construction it is not added. The function Error will return BRepBuilderAPI_DisconnectedWire, the function IsDone will return false and the function Wire will raise an error, until a new connectable edge is added. */
  Add_3(L: TopTools_ListOfShape): void;
  /** Returns true if this algorithm contains a valid wire. IsDone returns false if: there are no edges in the wire, or the last edge which you tried to add was not connectable. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the construction status BRepBuilderAPI_WireDone if the wire is built, or another value of the BRepBuilderAPI_WireError enumeration indicating why the construction failed. */
  Error(): BRepBuilderAPI_WireError;
  /** Returns the constructed wire; or the part of the wire under construction already built. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if a wire is not built. */
  Wire(): TopoDS_Wire;
  /** Returns the last edge added to the wire under construction. Warning This edge can be different from the original one (the argument of the function Add, for instance,) A null edge is returned if there are no edges in the wire under construction, or if the last edge which you tried to add was not connectable.. */
  Edge(): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Returns the last vertex of the last edge added to the wire under construction. Warning A null vertex is returned if there are no edges in the wire under construction, or if the last edge which you tried to add was not connectableR */
  Vertex(): TopoDS_Vertex;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_1 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_2 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(E: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_3 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(E1: TopoDS_Edge, E2: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_4 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(E1: TopoDS_Edge, E2: TopoDS_Edge, E3: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_5 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(E1: TopoDS_Edge, E2: TopoDS_Edge, E3: TopoDS_Edge, E4: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_6 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(W: TopoDS_Wire);
  }

  export declare class BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_7 extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire {
    constructor(W: TopoDS_Wire, E: TopoDS_Edge);
  }

export declare class Law_Interpol extends Law_BSpFunc {
  /** Constructs an empty interpolative evolution law. The function Set is used to define the law. */
  constructor()
  /** Defines this evolution law by interpolating the set of 2D points ParAndRad. The Y coordinate of a point of ParAndRad is the value of the function at the parameter point given by its X coordinate. If Periodic is true, this function is assumed to be periodic. Warning The X coordinates of points in the table ParAndRad must be given in ascendant order. If Periodic is true, the first and last Y coordinates of points in the table ParAndRad are assumed to be equal. In addition, with the second syntax, Dd and Df are also assumed to be equal. If this is not the case, Set uses the first value(s) as last value(s). */
  Set_1(ParAndRad: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Periodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  SetInRelative_1(ParAndRad: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Ud: Standard_Real, Uf: Standard_Real, Periodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Defines this evolution law by interpolating the set of 2D points ParAndRad. The Y coordinate of a point of ParAndRad is the value of the function at the parameter point given by its X coordinate. If Periodic is true, this function is assumed to be periodic. Warning The X coordinates of points in the table ParAndRad must be given in ascendant order. If Periodic is true, the first and last Y coordinates of points in the table ParAndRad are assumed to be equal. In addition, with the second syntax, Dd and Df are also assumed to be equal. If this is not the case, Set uses the first value(s) as last value(s). */
  Set_2(ParAndRad: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Dd: Standard_Real, Df: Standard_Real, Periodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  SetInRelative_2(ParAndRad: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Ud: Standard_Real, Uf: Standard_Real, Dd: Standard_Real, Df: Standard_Real, Periodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Law_BSpFunc extends Law_Function {
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters, i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the value of the function at the point of parameter X. */
  Value(X: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value F and the first derivative D of the function at the point of parameter X. */
  D1(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the value, first and second derivatives at parameter X. */
  D2(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number; D2: number };
  /** Returns a law equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. It is usfule to determines the derivatives in these values <First> and <Last> if the Law is not Cn. */
  Trim(PFirst: Standard_Real, PLast: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the function. */
  Bounds(): { PFirst: number; PLast: number };
  Curve(): any;
  SetCurve(C: any): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Law_BSpFunc_1 extends Law_BSpFunc {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Law_BSpFunc_2 extends Law_BSpFunc {
    constructor(C: any, First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real);
  }

/** Describes an "S" evolution law. */
export declare class Law_S extends Law_BSpFunc {
  /** Constructs an empty "S" evolution law. */
  constructor()
  /** Defines this S evolution law by assigning both: the bounds Pdeb and Pfin of the parameter, and the values Valdeb and Valfin of the function at these two parametric bounds. The function is assumed to have the first derivatives equal to 0 at the two parameter points Pdeb and Pfin. */
  Set_1(Pdeb: Standard_Real, Valdeb: Standard_Real, Pfin: Standard_Real, Valfin: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Defines this S evolution law by assigning both: the bounds Pdeb and Pfin of the parameter, and the values Valdeb and Valfin of the function at these two parametric bounds. The function is assumed to have the first derivatives equal to 0 at the two parameter points Pdeb and Pfin. */
  Set_2(Pdeb: Standard_Real, Valdeb: Standard_Real, Ddeb: Standard_Real, Pfin: Standard_Real, Valfin: Standard_Real, Dfin: Standard_Real): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Describes an linear evolution law. */
export declare class Law_Linear extends Law_Function {
  /** Constructs an empty linear evolution law. */
  constructor()
  /** Defines this linear evolution law by assigning both: the bounds Pdeb and Pfin of the parameter, and the values Valdeb and Valfin of the function at these two parametric bounds. */
  Set(Pdeb: Standard_Real, Valdeb: Standard_Real, Pfin: Standard_Real, Valfin: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns GeomAbs_CN. */
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns 1. */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters, i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the value of this function at the point of parameter X. */
  Value(X: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value F and the first derivative D of this function at the point of parameter X. */
  D1(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the value, first and second derivatives at parameter X. */
  D2(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number; D2: number };
  /** Returns a law equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. It is usfule to determines the derivatives in these values <First> and <Last> if the Law is not Cn. */
  Trim(PFirst: Standard_Real, PLast: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the function. */
  Bounds(): { PFirst: number; PLast: number };
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Root class for evolution laws. */
export declare class Law_Function extends Standard_Transient {
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters, i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the value of the function at the point of parameter X. */
  Value(X: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value F and the first derivative D of the function at the point of parameter X. */
  D1(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the value, first and second derivatives at parameter X. */
  D2(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number; D2: number };
  /** Returns a law equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. It is usfule to determines the derivatives in these values <First> and <Last> if the Law is not Cn. */
  Trim(PFirst: Standard_Real, PLast: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the function. */
  Bounds(): { PFirst: number; PLast: number };
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Law_Composite extends Law_Function {
  Continuity(): GeomAbs_Shape;
  /** Returns the number of intervals for continuity . May be one if Continuity(me) >= */
  NbIntervals(S: GeomAbs_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  /** Stores in <T> the parameters bounding the intervals of continuity . The array must provide enough room to accommodate for the parameters, i.e. T.Length() > NbIntervals() */
  Intervals(T: TColStd_Array1OfReal, S: GeomAbs_Shape): void;
  /** Returns the value at parameter X. */
  Value(X: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the value and the first derivative at parameter X. */
  D1(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number };
  /** Returns the value, first and second derivatives at parameter X. */
  D2(X: Standard_Real): { F: number; D: number; D2: number };
  /** Returns a law equivalent of <me> between parameters <First> and <Last>. <Tol> is used to test for 3d points confusion. It is usfule to determines the derivatives in these values <First> and <Last> if the Law is not Cn. */
  Trim(PFirst: Standard_Real, PLast: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real): any;
  /** Returns the parametric bounds of the function. */
  Bounds(): { PFirst: number; PLast: number };
  /** Returns the elementary function of the composite used to compute at parameter W. */
  ChangeElementaryLaw(W: Standard_Real): any;
  ChangeLaws(): any;
  IsPeriodic(): Standard_Boolean;
  SetPeriodic(): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Law_Composite_1 extends Law_Composite {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Law_Composite_2 extends Law_Composite {
    constructor(First: Standard_Real, Last: Standard_Real, Tol: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
  /** Approximates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D. */
  Init_1(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Interpolates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be 3. 2- his continuity will be C2. */
  Interpolate_1(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, thePeriodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Interpolates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be 3. 2- his continuity will be C2. */
  Interpolate_2(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, thePeriodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Approximates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D. */
  Init_2(ZPoints: TColStd_Array2OfReal, X0: Standard_Real, dX: Standard_Real, Y0: Standard_Real, dY: Standard_Real, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Interpolates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be 3. 2- his continuity will be C2. */
  Interpolate_3(ZPoints: TColStd_Array2OfReal, X0: Standard_Real, dX: Standard_Real, Y0: Standard_Real, dY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D. */
  Init_3(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real, thePeriodic: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Approximates a BSpline Surface passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D. */
  Init_4(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the approximate BSpline Surface. */
  Surface(): any;
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_1 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_2 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_3 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_4 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array2OfPnt, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_5 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface {
    constructor(ZPoints: TColStd_Array2OfReal, X0: Standard_Real, dX: Standard_Real, Y0: Standard_Real, dY: Standard_Real, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D */
  Init_1(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D */
  Init_2(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D */
  Init_3(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol3D */
  Init_4(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the computed BSpline curve. Raises StdFail_NotDone if the curve is not built. */
  Curve(): any;
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_1 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_2 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_3 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_4 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_5 extends GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class GeomAPI_Interpolate {
  /** Assigns this constrained BSpline curve to be tangential to vectors InitialTangent and FinalTangent at its first and last points respectively (i.e. the first and last points of the table of points through which the curve passes, as defined at the time of initialization). */
  Load_1(InitialTangent: gp_Vec, FinalTangent: gp_Vec, Scale: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Assigns this constrained BSpline curve to be tangential to vectors InitialTangent and FinalTangent at its first and last points respectively (i.e. the first and last points of the table of points through which the curve passes, as defined at the time of initialization). */
  Load_2(Tangents: TColgp_Array1OfVec, TangentFlags: any, Scale: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Computes the constrained BSpline curve. Use the function IsDone to verify that the computation is successful, and then the function Curve to obtain the result. */
  Perform(): void;
  /** Returns the computed BSpline curve. Raises StdFail_NotDone if the interpolation fails. */
  Curve(): any;
  /** Returns true if the constrained BSpline curve is successfully constructed. Note: in this case, the result is given by the function Curve. */
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GeomAPI_Interpolate_1 extends GeomAPI_Interpolate {
    constructor(Points: any, PeriodicFlag: Standard_Boolean, Tolerance: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_Interpolate_2 extends GeomAPI_Interpolate {
    constructor(Points: any, Parameters: any, PeriodicFlag: Standard_Boolean, Tolerance: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
  Init_1(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  Init_2(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  Init_3(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  Init_4(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  Init_5(Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  Init_6(Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  /** Sets the Extrema search algorithm - Grad or Tree. By default the Extrema is initialized with Grad algorithm. */
  SetExtremaAlgo(theAlgo: Extrema_ExtAlgo): void;
  /** Sets the Extrema search flag - MIN or MAX or MINMAX. By default the Extrema is set to search the MinMax solutions. */
  SetExtremaFlag(theExtFlag: Extrema_ExtFlag): void;
  /** Performs the projection of a point on the current surface. */
  Perform(P: gp_Pnt): void;
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of computed orthogonal projection points. Note: if projection fails, NbPoints returns 0. */
  NbPoints(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the orthogonal projection on the surface. Index is a number of a computed point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Point(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the parameters (U,V) on the surface of the orthogonal projection. Index is a number of a computed point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Parameters(Index: Standard_Integer): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Computes the distance between the point and its orthogonal projection on the surface. Index is a number of a computed point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Distance(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the nearest orthogonal projection of the point on the surface. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if projection fails. */
  NearestPoint(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the parameters (U,V) on the surface of the nearest computed orthogonal projection of the point. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if projection fails. */
  LowerDistanceParameters(): { U: number; V: number };
  /** Computes the distance between the point and its nearest orthogonal projection on the surface. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if projection fails. */
  LowerDistance(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_1 extends GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_2 extends GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_3 extends GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_4 extends GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Tolerance: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo);
  }

  export declare class GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_5 extends GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, Surface: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real, Vmin: Standard_Real, Vsup: Standard_Real, Algo: Extrema_ExtAlgo);
  }

export declare class Geom2dAPI_ExtremaCurveCurve {
  /** Computes the extrema between the portion of the curve C1 limited by the two points of parameter (U1min,U1max), and the portion of the curve C2 limited by the two points of parameter (U2min,U2max). Warning Use the function NbExtrema to obtain the number of solutions. If this algorithm fails, NbExtrema returns 0. */
  constructor(C1: any, C2: any, U1min: Standard_Real, U1max: Standard_Real, U2min: Standard_Real, U2max: Standard_Real)
  /** Returns the number of extrema computed by this algorithm. Note: if this algorithm fails, NbExtrema returns 0. */
  NbExtrema(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the points P1 on the first curve and P2 on the second curve, which are the ends of the extremum of index Index computed by this algorithm. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbExtrema ], where NbExtrema is the number of extrema computed by this algorithm. */
  Points(Index: Standard_Integer, P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns the parameters U1 of the point on the first curve and U2 of the point on the second curve, which are the ends of the extremum of index Index computed by this algorithm. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbExtrema ], where NbExtrema is the number of extrema computed by this algorithm. */
  Parameters(Index: Standard_Integer): { U1: number; U2: number };
  /** Computes the distance between the end points of the extremum of index Index computed by this algorithm. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbExtrema ], where NbExtrema is the number of extrema computed by this algorithm. */
  Distance(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the points P1 on the first curve and P2 on the second curve, which are the ends of the shortest extremum computed by this algorithm. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  NearestPoints(P1: gp_Pnt2d, P2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns the parameters U1 of the point on the first curve and U2 of the point on the second curve, which are the ends of the shortest extremum computed by this algorithm. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  LowerDistanceParameters(): { U1: number; U2: number };
  /** Computes the distance between the end points of the shortest extremum computed by this algorithm. Exceptions - StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  LowerDistance(): Standard_Real;
  Extrema(): Extrema_ExtCC2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve {
  /** Initializes this algorithm with the given arguments, and computes the orthogonal projections of a point on a curve <Curve> */
  Init_1(P: gp_Pnt2d, Curve: any): void;
  /** Initializes this algorithm with the given arguments, and computes the orthogonal projections of a point on a curve <Curve> */
  Init_2(P: gp_Pnt2d, Curve: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real): void;
  /** return the number of of computed orthogonal projectionn points. */
  NbPoints(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the orthogonal projection on the curve. Index is a number of a computed point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Point(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the parameter on the curve of a point which is the orthogonal projection. Index is a number of a computed projected point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Parameter_1(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the parameter on the curve of a point which is the orthogonal projection. Index is a number of a computed projected point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Parameter_2(Index: Standard_Integer): { U: number };
  /** Computes the distance between the point and its computed orthogonal projection on the curve. Index is a number of computed projected point. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of solution points. */
  Distance(Index: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the nearest orthogonal projection of the point on the curve. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  NearestPoint(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the parameter on the curve of the nearest orthogonal projection of the point. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  LowerDistanceParameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the distance between the point and its nearest orthogonal projection on the curve. Exceptions StdFail_NotDone if this algorithm fails. */
  LowerDistance(): Standard_Real;
  /** return the algorithmic object from Extrema */
  Extrema(): Extrema_ExtPC2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_1 extends Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_2 extends Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt2d, Curve: any);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_3 extends Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt2d, Curve: any, Umin: Standard_Real, Usup: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve {
  /** Initializes an algorithm with the given arguments and computes the intersections between the curves C1. and C2. */
  Init_1(C1: any, C2: any, Tol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Initializes an algorithm with the given arguments and computes the intersections between the curves C1. and C2. */
  Init_2(C1: any, Tol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the number of intersection-points in case of cross intersections. NbPoints returns 0 if no intersections were found. */
  NbPoints(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the intersection point of index Index. Intersection points are computed in case of cross intersections with a precision equal to the tolerance value assigned at the time of construction or in the function Init (this value is defaulted to 1.0e-6). Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if index is not in the range [ 1,NbPoints ], where NbPoints is the number of computed intersection points */
  Point(Index: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the number of tangential intersections. NbSegments returns 0 if no intersections were found */
  NbSegments(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Use this syntax only to get solutions of tangential intersection between two curves. Output values Curve1 and Curve2 are the intersection segments on the first curve and on the second curve accordingly. Parameter Index defines a number of computed solution. An intersection segment is a portion of an initial curve limited by two points. The distance from each point of this segment to the other curve is less or equal to the tolerance value assigned at the time of construction or in function Init (this value is defaulted to 1.0e-6). Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if Index is not in the range [ 1,NbSegments ], where NbSegments is the number of computed tangential intersections. Standard_NullObject if the algorithm is initialized for the computing of self-intersections on a curve. */
  Segment(Index: Standard_Integer, Curve1: any, Curve2: any): void;
  /** return the algorithmic object from Intersection. */
  Intersector(): Geom2dInt_GInter;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_1 extends Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_2 extends Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve {
    constructor(C1: any, C2: any, Tol: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_3 extends Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve {
    constructor(C1: any, Tol: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol2D */
  Init_1(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol2D */
  Init_2(YValues: TColStd_Array1OfReal, X0: Standard_Real, DX: Standard_Real, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol2D */
  Init_3(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol2D */
  Init_4(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Approximate a BSpline Curve passing through an array of Point. The resulting BSpline will have the following properties: 1- his degree will be in the range [Degmin,Degmax] 2- his continuity will be at least <Continuity> 3- the distance from the point <Points> to the BSpline will be lower to Tol2D */
  Init_5(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the approximate BSpline Curve. */
  Curve(): any;
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_1 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_2 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_3 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(YValues: TColStd_Array1OfReal, X0: Standard_Real, DX: Standard_Real, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_4 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, ParType: Approx_ParametrizationType, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_5 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal, DegMin: Standard_Integer, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol2D: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_6 extends Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline {
    constructor(Points: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Weight1: Standard_Real, Weight2: Standard_Real, Weight3: Standard_Real, DegMax: Standard_Integer, Continuity: GeomAbs_Shape, Tol3D: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class ShapeFix_Face extends ShapeFix_Root {
  /** Sets all modes to default. */
  ClearModes(): void;
  /** Loads a whole face already created, with its wires, sense and location */
  Init_1(face: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Loads a whole face already created, with its wires, sense and location */
  Init_2(surf: any, preci: Standard_Real, fwd: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Loads a whole face already created, with its wires, sense and location */
  Init_3(surf: any, preci: Standard_Real, fwd: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets message registrator. */
  SetMsgRegistrator(msgreg: any): void;
  /** Sets basic precision value (also to FixWireTool) */
  SetPrecision(preci: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets minimal allowed tolerance (also to FixWireTool) */
  SetMinTolerance(mintol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets maximal allowed tolerance (also to FixWireTool) */
  SetMaxTolerance(maxtol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the mode for applying fixes of ShapeFix_Wire, by default True. */
  FixWireMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix orientation mode, by default True. If True, wires oriented to border limited square. */
  FixOrientationMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the add natural bound mode. If true, natural boundary is added on faces that miss them. Default is False for faces with single wire (they are handled by FixOrientation in that case) and True for others. */
  FixAddNaturalBoundMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix missing seam mode, by default True. If True, tries to insert seam is missed. */
  FixMissingSeamMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix small area wire mode, by default False. If True, drops small wires. */
  FixSmallAreaWireMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the remove face with small area, by default False. If True, drops faces with small outer wires. */
  RemoveSmallAreaFaceMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix intersecting wires mode by default True. */
  FixIntersectingWiresMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix loop wires mode by default True. */
  FixLoopWiresMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the fix split face mode by default True. */
  FixSplitFaceMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the auto-correct precision mode by default False. */
  AutoCorrectPrecisionMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the activation flag for periodic degenerated fix. False by default. */
  FixPeriodicDegeneratedMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns a face which corresponds to the current state Warning: The finally produced face may be another one ... but with the same support */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns resulting shape (Face or Shell if split) To be used instead of Face() if FixMissingSeam involved */
  Result(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Add a wire to current face using BRep_Builder. Wire is added without taking into account orientation of face (as if face were FORWARD). */
  Add(wire: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Performs all the fixes, depending on modes Function Status returns the status of last call to Perform() ShapeExtend_OK : face was OK, nothing done ShapeExtend_DONE1: some wires are fixed ShapeExtend_DONE2: orientation of wires fixed ShapeExtend_DONE3: missing seam added ShapeExtend_DONE4: small area wire removed ShapeExtend_DONE5: natural bounds added ShapeExtend_FAIL1: some fails during fixing wires ShapeExtend_FAIL2: cannot fix orientation of wires ShapeExtend_FAIL3: cannot add missing seam ShapeExtend_FAIL4: cannot remove small area wire */
  Perform(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes orientation of wires on the face It tries to make all wires lie outside all others (according to orientation) by reversing orientation of some of them. If face lying on sphere or torus has single wire and AddNaturalBoundMode is True, that wire is not reversed in any case (supposing that natural bound will be added). Returns True if wires were reversed */
  FixOrientation_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes orientation of wires on the face It tries to make all wires lie outside all others (according to orientation) by reversing orientation of some of them. If face lying on sphere or torus has single wire and AddNaturalBoundMode is True, that wire is not reversed in any case (supposing that natural bound will be added). Returns True if wires were reversed */
  FixOrientation_2(MapWires: NCollection_DataMap<TopoDS_Shape, NCollection_List<TopoDS_Shape>, TopTools_ShapeMapHasher>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds natural boundary on face if it is missing. Two cases are supported: face has no wires face lies on geometrically double-closed surface (sphere or torus) and none of wires is left-oriented Returns True if natural boundary was added */
  FixAddNaturalBound(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Detects and fixes the special case when face on a closed surface is given by two wires closed in 3d but with gap in 2d. In that case it creates a new wire from the two, and adds a missing seam edge Returns True if missing seam was added */
  FixMissingSeam(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Detects wires with small area (that is less than 100*Precision::PConfusion(). Removes these wires if they are internal. Returns : True if at least one small wire removed, False if does nothing. */
  FixSmallAreaWire(theIsRemoveSmallFace: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Detects if wire has a loop and fixes this situation by splitting on the few parts. if wire has a loops and it was split Status was set to value ShapeExtend_DONE6. */
  FixLoopWire(aResWires: TopTools_SequenceOfShape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Detects and fixes the special case when face has more than one wire and this wires have intersection point */
  FixIntersectingWires(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** If wire contains two coincidence edges it must be removed Queries on status after Perform() */
  FixWiresTwoCoincEdges(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Split face if there are more than one out wire using inrormation after FixOrientation() */
  FixSplitFace(MapWires: NCollection_DataMap<TopoDS_Shape, NCollection_List<TopoDS_Shape>, TopTools_ShapeMapHasher>): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes topology for a specific case when face is composed by a single wire belting a periodic surface. In that case a degenerated edge is reconstructed in the degenerated pole of the surface. Initial wire gets consistent orientation. Must be used in couple and before FixMissingSeam routine */
  FixPeriodicDegenerated(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the status of last call to Perform() ShapeExtend_OK : face was OK, nothing done ShapeExtend_DONE1: some wires are fixed ShapeExtend_DONE2: orientation of wires fixed ShapeExtend_DONE3: missing seam added ShapeExtend_DONE4: small area wire removed ShapeExtend_DONE5: natural bounds added ShapeExtend_DONE8: face may be splited ShapeExtend_FAIL1: some fails during fixing wires ShapeExtend_FAIL2: cannot fix orientation of wires ShapeExtend_FAIL3: cannot add missing seam ShapeExtend_FAIL4: cannot remove small area wire */
  Status(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns tool for fixing wires. */
  FixWireTool(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class ShapeFix_Face_1 extends ShapeFix_Face {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class ShapeFix_Face_2 extends ShapeFix_Face {
    constructor(face: TopoDS_Face);
  }

export declare class ShapeFix_Solid extends ShapeFix_Root {
  /** Initializes by solid . */
  Init(solid: TopoDS_Solid): void;
  /** Iterates on shells and performs fixes (calls ShapeFix_Shell for each subshell). The passed progress indicator allows user to consult the current progress stage and abort algorithm if needed. */
  Perform(theProgress: Message_ProgressRange): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Calls MakeSolid and orients the solid to be "not infinite". */
  SolidFromShell(shell: TopoDS_Shell): TopoDS_Solid;
  /** Returns the status of the last Fix. */
  Status(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns resulting solid. */
  Solid(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns tool for fixing shells. */
  FixShellTool(): any;
  /** Sets message registrator. */
  SetMsgRegistrator(msgreg: any): void;
  /** Sets basic precision value (also to FixShellTool) */
  SetPrecision(preci: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets minimal allowed tolerance (also to FixShellTool) */
  SetMinTolerance(mintol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets maximal allowed tolerance (also to FixShellTool) */
  SetMaxTolerance(maxtol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the mode for applying fixes of ShapeFix_Shell, by default True. */
  FixShellMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the mode for applying analysis and fixes of orientation of shells in the solid; by default True. */
  FixShellOrientationMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the mode for creation of solids. If mode myCreateOpenSolidMode is equal to true solids are created from open shells else solids are created from closed shells only. ShapeFix_Shell, by default False. */
  CreateOpenSolidMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** In case of multiconnexity returns compound of fixed solids else returns one solid. */
  Shape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class ShapeFix_Solid_1 extends ShapeFix_Solid {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class ShapeFix_Solid_2 extends ShapeFix_Solid {
    constructor(solid: TopoDS_Solid);
  }

export declare class ShapeFix_Wire extends ShapeFix_Root {
  /** Sets all modes to default. */
  ClearModes(): void;
  /** Clears all statuses. */
  ClearStatuses(): void;
  /** Load analyzer with all the data for the wire and face and drops all fixing statuses */
  Init_1(wire: TopoDS_Wire, face: TopoDS_Face, prec: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Load analyzer with all the data for the wire and face and drops all fixing statuses */
  Init_2(saw: any): void;
  /** Load data for the wire, and drops all fixing statuses. */
  Load_1(wire: TopoDS_Wire): void;
  /** Load data for the wire, and drops all fixing statuses. */
  Load_2(sbwd: any): void;
  /** Set working face for the wire. */
  SetFace_1(face: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Set working face for the wire. */
  SetFace_2(theFace: TopoDS_Face, theSurfaceAnalysis: any): void;
  /** Set surface analysis for the wire. */
  SetSurface_1(theSurfaceAnalysis: any): void;
  /** Set surface analysis for the wire. */
  SetSurface_2(surf: any): void;
  /** Set surface analysis for the wire. */
  SetSurface_3(surf: any, loc: TopLoc_Location): void;
  /** Set working precision (to root and to analyzer) */
  SetPrecision(prec: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the maximal allowed angle of the tails in radians. */
  SetMaxTailAngle(theMaxTailAngle: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the maximal allowed width of the tails. */
  SetMaxTailWidth(theMaxTailWidth: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Tells if the wire is loaded. */
  IsLoaded(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Tells if the wire and face are loaded. */
  IsReady(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns number of edges in the working wire */
  NbEdges(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Makes the resulting Wire (by basic Brep_Builder) */
  Wire(): TopoDS_Wire;
  /** Makes the resulting Wire (by BRepAPI_MakeWire) */
  WireAPIMake(): TopoDS_Wire;
  /** returns field Analyzer (working tool) */
  Analyzer(): any;
  /** returns working wire */
  WireData(): any;
  /** returns working face (Analyzer.Face()) */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether it is allowed to modify topology of the wire during fixing (adding/removing edges etc.) */
  ModifyTopologyMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether the Fix..() methods are allowed to modify geometry of the edges and vertices */
  ModifyGeometryMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether the Fix..() methods are allowed to modify RemoveLoop of the edges */
  ModifyRemoveLoopMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether the wire is to be closed (by calling methods like FixDegenerated() and FixConnected() for last and first edges). */
  ClosedWireMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether the 2d (True) representation of the wire is preferable over 3d one (in the case of ambiguity in FixEdgeCurves). */
  PreferencePCurveMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag which defines whether tool tries to fix gaps first by changing curves ranges (i.e. using intersection, extrema, projections) or not. */
  FixGapsByRangesMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  FixReorderMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixSmallMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixConnectedMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixEdgeCurvesMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixDegeneratedMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixSelfIntersectionMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixLackingMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixGaps3dMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag for corresponding Fix..() method which defines whether this method will be called from the method APIFix(): -1 default 1 method will be called 0 method will not be called */
  FixGaps2dMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixReversed2dMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixRemovePCurveMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixAddPCurveMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixRemoveCurve3dMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixAddCurve3dMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixSeamMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixShiftedMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixSameParameterMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixVertexToleranceMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixNotchedEdgesMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixSelfIntersectingEdgeMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixIntersectingEdgesMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns (modifiable) the flag for corresponding Fix..() method which defines whether this method will be called from the corresponding Fix..() method of the public level: -1 default 1 method will be called 0 method will not be called */
  FixNonAdjacentIntersectingEdgesMode(): Standard_Integer;
  FixTailMode(): Standard_Integer;
  /** This method performs all the available fixes. If some fix is turned on or off explicitly by the Fix..Mode() flag, this fix is either called or not depending on that flag. Else (i.e. if flag is default) fix is called depending on the situation: some fixes are not called or are limited if order of edges in the wire is not OK, or depending on modes The order of the fixes and default behaviour of Perform() are: FixReorder FixSmall (with lockvtx true if ! TopoMode or if wire is not ordered) FixConnected (if wire is ordered) FixEdgeCurves (without FixShifted if wire is not ordered) FixDegenerated (if wire is ordered) FixSelfIntersection (if wire is ordered and ClosedMode is True) FixLacking (if wire is ordered) */
  Perform(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Performs an analysis and reorders edges in the wire using class WireOrder. Flag <theModeBoth> determines the use of miscible mode if necessary. */
  FixReorder_1(theModeBoth: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixSmall(num) to all edges in the wire. */
  FixSmall_1(lockvtx: Standard_Boolean, precsmall: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  /** Applies FixConnected(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True If <prec> is -1 then MaxTolerance() is taken. */
  FixConnected_1(prec: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Groups the fixes dealing with 3d and pcurves of the edges. The order of the fixes and the default behaviour are: ShapeFix_Edge::FixReversed2d ShapeFix_Edge::FixRemovePCurve (only if forced) ShapeFix_Edge::FixAddPCurve ShapeFix_Edge::FixRemoveCurve3d (only if forced) ShapeFix_Edge::FixAddCurve3d FixSeam, FixShifted, ShapeFix_Edge::FixSameParameter */
  FixEdgeCurves(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixDegenerated(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True */
  FixDegenerated_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixSelfIntersectingEdge(num) and FixIntersectingEdges(num) to all edges in the wire and FixIntersectingEdges(num1, num2) for all pairs num1 and num2 such that num2 >= num1 + 2 and removes wrong edges if any */
  FixSelfIntersection(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixLacking(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True If <force> is False (default), test for connectness is done with precision of vertex between edges, else it is done with minimal value of vertex tolerance and Analyzer.Precision(). Hence, <force> will lead to inserting lacking edges in replacement of vertices which have big tolerances. */
  FixLacking_1(force: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes a wire to be well closed It performs FixConnected, FixDegenerated and FixLacking between last and first edges (independingly on flag ClosedMode and modes for these fixings) If <prec> is -1 then MaxTolerance() is taken. */
  FixClosed(prec: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes gaps between ends of 3d curves on adjacent edges myPrecision is used to detect the gaps. */
  FixGaps3d(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes gaps between ends of pcurves on adjacent edges myPrecision is used to detect the gaps. */
  FixGaps2d(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Performs an analysis and reorders edges in the wire using class WireOrder. Flag <theModeBoth> determines the use of miscible mode if necessary. */
  FixReorder_2(wi: ShapeAnalysis_WireOrder): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixSmall(num) to all edges in the wire. */
  FixSmall_2(num: Standard_Integer, lockvtx: Standard_Boolean, precsmall: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixConnected(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True If <prec> is -1 then MaxTolerance() is taken. */
  FixConnected_2(num: Standard_Integer, prec: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes a seam edge A Seam edge has two pcurves, one for forward. one for reversed The forward pcurve must be set as first NOTE that correct order of pcurves in the seam edge depends on its orientation (i.e., on orientation of the wire, method of exploration of edges etc.). Since wire represented by the ShapeExtend_WireData is always forward (orientation is accounted by edges), it will work correct if: Wire created from ShapeExtend_WireData with methods ShapeExtend_WireData::Wire..() is added into the FORWARD face (orientation can be applied later) Wire is extracted from the face with orientation not composed with orientation of the face */
  FixSeam(num: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes edges which have pcurves shifted by whole parameter range on the closed surface (the case may occur if pcurve of edge was computed by projecting 3d curve, which goes along the seam). It compares each two consequent edges and tries to connect them if distance between ends is near to range of the surface. It also can detect and fix the case if all pcurves are connected, but lie out of parametric bounds of the surface. In addition to FixShifted from ShapeFix_Wire, more sophisticated check of degenerate points is performed, and special cases like sphere given by two meridians are treated. */
  FixShifted(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixDegenerated(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True */
  FixDegenerated_2(num: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Applies FixLacking(num) to all edges in the wire Connection between first and last edges is treated only if flag ClosedMode is True If <force> is False (default), test for connectness is done with precision of vertex between edges, else it is done with minimal value of vertex tolerance and Analyzer.Precision(). Hence, <force> will lead to inserting lacking edges in replacement of vertices which have big tolerances. */
  FixLacking_2(num: Standard_Integer, force: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  FixNotchedEdges(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes gap between ends of 3d curves on num-1 and num-th edges. myPrecision is used to detect the gap. If convert is True, converts curves to bsplines to bend. */
  FixGap3d(num: Standard_Integer, convert: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Fixes gap between ends of pcurves on num-1 and num-th edges. myPrecision is used to detect the gap. If convert is True, converts pcurves to bsplines to bend. */
  FixGap2d(num: Standard_Integer, convert: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  FixTails(): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusReorder(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusSmall(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusConnected(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusEdgeCurves(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusDegenerated(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusSelfIntersection(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusLacking(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusClosed(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusGaps3d(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusGaps2d(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusNotches(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Querying the status of performed API fixing procedures Each Status..() methods gives information about the last call to the corresponding Fix..() method of API level: OK : no problems detected; nothing done DONE: some problem(s) was(were) detected and successfully fixed FAIL: some problem(s) cannot be fixed */
  StatusRemovedSegment(): Standard_Boolean;
  StatusFixTails(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Queries the status of last call to methods Fix... of advanced level For details see corresponding methods; universal statuses are: OK : problem not detected; nothing done DONE: problem was detected and successfully fixed FAIL: problem cannot be fixed */
  LastFixStatus(status: ShapeExtend_Status): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns tool for fixing wires. */
  FixEdgeTool(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class ShapeFix_Wire_1 extends ShapeFix_Wire {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class ShapeFix_Wire_2 extends ShapeFix_Wire {
    constructor(wire: TopoDS_Wire, face: TopoDS_Face, prec: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class ShapeFix_Root extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Empty Constructor (no context is created) */
  constructor()
  /** Copy all fields from another Root object. */
  Set(Root: any): void;
  /** Sets context. */
  SetContext(context: any): void;
  /** Returns context. */
  Context(): any;
  /** Sets message registrator. */
  SetMsgRegistrator(msgreg: any): void;
  /** Returns message registrator. */
  MsgRegistrator(): any;
  /** Sets basic precision value. */
  SetPrecision(preci: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns basic precision value. */
  Precision(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets minimal allowed tolerance. */
  SetMinTolerance(mintol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns minimal allowed tolerance. */
  MinTolerance(): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets maximal allowed tolerance. */
  SetMaxTolerance(maxtol: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns maximal allowed tolerance. */
  MaxTolerance(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns tolerance limited by [myMinTol,myMaxTol]. */
  LimitTolerance(toler: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Sends a message to be attached to the shape. Calls corresponding message of message registrator. */
  SendMsg_1(shape: TopoDS_Shape, message: Message_Msg, gravity: Message_Gravity): void;
  /** Sends a message to be attached to the shape. Calls corresponding message of message registrator. */
  SendMsg_2(message: Message_Msg, gravity: Message_Gravity): void;
  /** Sends a warning to be attached to the shape. Calls SendMsg with gravity set to Message_Warning. */
  SendWarning_1(shape: TopoDS_Shape, message: Message_Msg): void;
  /** Sends a warning to be attached to the shape. Calls SendMsg with gravity set to Message_Warning. */
  SendWarning_2(message: Message_Msg): void;
  /** Sends a fail to be attached to the shape. Calls SendMsg with gravity set to Message_Fail. */
  SendFail_1(shape: TopoDS_Shape, message: Message_Msg): void;
  /** Sends a fail to be attached to the shape. Calls SendMsg with gravity set to Message_Fail. */
  SendFail_2(message: Message_Msg): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class ShapeFix_EdgeConnect {
  constructor()
  /** Adds information on connectivity between start vertex of second edge and end vertex of first edge, taking edges orientation into account */
  Add_1(aFirst: TopoDS_Edge, aSecond: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds information on connectivity between start vertex of second edge and end vertex of first edge, taking edges orientation into account */
  Add_2(aShape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Builds shared vertices, updates their positions and tolerances. */
  Build(): void;
  /** Clears internal data structure. */
  Clear(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Initializes with a shape and necessary flags. It does not perform unification. If you intend to nullify the History place holder do it after initialization. */
  Initialize(aShape: TopoDS_Shape, UnifyEdges: Standard_Boolean, UnifyFaces: Standard_Boolean, ConcatBSplines: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the flag defining whether it is allowed to create internal edges inside merged faces in the case of non-manifold topology. Without this flag merging through multi connected edge is forbidden. Default value is false. */
  AllowInternalEdges(theValue: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the shape for avoid merging of the faces/edges. This shape can be vertex or edge. If the shape is a vertex it forbids merging of connected edges. If the shape is a edge it forbids merging of connected faces. This method can be called several times to keep several shapes. */
  KeepShape(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Sets the map of shapes for avoid merging of the faces/edges. It allows passing a ready to use map instead of calling many times the method KeepShape. */
  KeepShapes(theShapes: TopTools_MapOfShape): void;
  /** Sets the flag defining the behavior of the algorithm regarding modification of input shape. If this flag is equal to True then the input (original) shape can't be modified during modification process. Default value is true. */
  SetSafeInputMode(theValue: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the linear tolerance. It plays the role of chord error when taking decision about merging of shapes. Default value is Precision::Confusion(). */
  SetLinearTolerance(theValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the angular tolerance. If two shapes form a connection angle greater than this value they will not be merged. Default value is Precision::Angular(). */
  SetAngularTolerance(theValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Performs unification and builds the resulting shape. */
  Build(): void;
  /** Gives the resulting shape. */
  Shape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the history of the processed shapes. */
  History_1(): any;
  /** Returns the history of the processed shapes. */
  History_2(): any;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_1 extends ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_2 extends ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain {
    constructor(aShape: TopoDS_Shape, UnifyEdges: Standard_Boolean, UnifyFaces: Standard_Boolean, ConcatBSplines: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis {
  /** Returns the algorithm. */
  Revolution(): BRepPrim_Revolution;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Meridian: any);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Meridian: any, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Meridian: any, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Meridian: any, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_5 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, Meridian: any);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_6 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, Meridian: any, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_7 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, Meridian: any, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_8 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, Meridian: any, VMin: Standard_Real, VMax: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis {
  /** Returns the algorithm. */
  Sphere(): BRepPrim_Sphere;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real, angle3: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_5 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Center: gp_Pnt, R: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_6 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Center: gp_Pnt, R: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_7 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Center: gp_Pnt, R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_8 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Center: gp_Pnt, R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real, angle3: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_9 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_10 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_11 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_12 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere {
    constructor(Axis: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real, angle3: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis {
  /** Returns the algorithm. */
  Torus(): BRepPrim_Torus;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_5 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_6 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_7 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_8 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, angle1: Standard_Real, angle2: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep {
  /** Returns the internal sweeping algorithm. */
  Prism(): BRepSweep_Prism;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the prism. */
  FirstShape_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the prism. In the case of a finite prism, FirstShape returns the basis of the prism, in other words, S if Copy is false; otherwise, the copy of S belonging to the prism. LastShape returns the copy of S translated by V at the time of construction. */
  LastShape_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns ListOfShape from TopTools. */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the prism. */
  FirstShape_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the prism. In the case of a finite prism, FirstShape returns the basis of the prism, in other words, S if Copy is false; otherwise, the copy of S belonging to the prism. LastShape returns the copy of S translated by V at the time of construction. */
  LastShape_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, V: gp_Vec, Copy: Standard_Boolean, Canonize: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, D: gp_Dir, Inf: Standard_Boolean, Copy: Standard_Boolean, Canonize: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis {
  /** Returns the algorithm. */
  Cylinder(): BRepPrim_Cylinder;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder {
    constructor(R: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real, Angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real, Angle: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Init a box with a corner at 0,0,0 and the other theDX, theDY, theDZ. */
  Init_1(theDX: Standard_Real, theDY: Standard_Real, theDZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Init a box with a corner at 0,0,0 and the other theDX, theDY, theDZ. */
  Init_2(thePnt: gp_Pnt, theDX: Standard_Real, theDY: Standard_Real, theDZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Init a box with a corner at 0,0,0 and the other theDX, theDY, theDZ. */
  Init_3(thePnt1: gp_Pnt, thePnt2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Init a box with a corner at 0,0,0 and the other theDX, theDY, theDZ. */
  Init_4(theAxes: gp_Ax2, theDX: Standard_Real, theDY: Standard_Real, theDZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the internal algorithm. */
  Wedge(): BRepPrim_Wedge;
  /** Stores the solid in myShape. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the constructed box as a shell. */
  Shell(): TopoDS_Shell;
  /** Returns the constructed box as a solid. */
  Solid(): TopoDS_Solid;
  /** Returns ZMin face. */
  BottomFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns XMin face. */
  BackFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns XMax face. */
  FrontFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns YMin face. */
  LeftFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns YMax face. */
  RightFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns ZMax face. */
  TopFace(): TopoDS_Face;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox {
    constructor(dx: Standard_Real, dy: Standard_Real, dz: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, dx: Standard_Real, dy: Standard_Real, dz: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox {
    constructor(P1: gp_Pnt, P2: gp_Pnt);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_5 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, dx: Standard_Real, dy: Standard_Real, dz: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Stores the solid in myShape. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the lateral face of the rotational primitive. */
  Face(): TopoDS_Face;
  /** Returns the constructed rotational primitive as a shell. */
  Shell(): TopoDS_Shell;
  /** Returns the constructed rotational primitive as a solid. */
  Solid(): TopoDS_Solid;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis {
  /** Returns the algorithm. */
  Cone(): BRepPrim_Cone;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone {
    constructor(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_3 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_4 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone {
    constructor(Axes: gp_Ax2, R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, H: Standard_Real, angle: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep {
  /** Returns the internal sweeping algorithm. */
  Revol(): BRepSweep_Revol;
  /** Builds the resulting shape (redefined from MakeShape). */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Returns the first shape of the revol (coinciding with the generating shape). */
  FirstShape_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the end of the revol. */
  LastShape_1(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns list of shape generated from shape S Warning: shape S must be shape of type VERTEX, EDGE, FACE, SOLID. For shapes of other types method always returns empty list */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the first shape of the revol (coinciding with the generating shape). */
  FirstShape_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the end of the revol. */
  LastShape_2(theShape: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Check if there are degenerated edges in the result. */
  HasDegenerated(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the list of degenerated edges. */
  Degenerated(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_1 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, A: gp_Ax1, D: Standard_Real, Copy: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_2 extends BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol {
    constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, A: gp_Ax1, Copy: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the bottom of the sweep. */
  FirstShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** Returns the TopoDS Shape of the top of the sweep. */
  LastShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepFilletAPI_MakeChamfer extends BRepFilletAPI_LocalOperation {
  /** Initializes an algorithm for computing chamfers on the shape S. The edges on which chamfers are built are defined using the Add function. */
  constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape)
  /** Adds edge E to the table of edges used by this algorithm to build chamfers, where the parameters of the chamfer must be set after the */
  Add_1(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds edge E to the table of edges used by this algorithm to build chamfers, where the parameters of the chamfer must be set after the */
  Add_2(Dis: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Sets the distances Dis1 and Dis2 which give the parameters of the chamfer along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm. The face F identifies the side where Dis1 is measured. Warning Nothing is done if either the edge E or the face F does not belong to the initial shape. */
  SetDist(Dis: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  GetDist(IC: Standard_Integer): { Dis: number };
  /** Adds edge E to the table of edges used by this algorithm to build chamfers, where the parameters of the chamfer must be set after the */
  Add_3(Dis1: Standard_Real, Dis2: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Sets the distances Dis1 and Dis2 which give the parameters of the chamfer along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm. The face F identifies the side where Dis1 is measured. Warning Nothing is done if either the edge E or the face F does not belong to the initial shape. */
  SetDists(Dis1: Standard_Real, Dis2: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** Returns the distances Dis1 and Dis2 which give the parameters of the chamfer along the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning -1. is returned if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  Dists(IC: Standard_Integer): { Dis1: number; Dis2: number };
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges to <E> and sets the distance <Dis1> and angle <Angle> ( parameters of the chamfer ) ). */
  AddDA(Dis: Standard_Real, Angle: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** set the distance <Dis> and <Angle> of the fillet contour of index <IC> in the DS with <Dis> on <F>. if the face <F> is not one of common faces of an edge of the contour <IC> */
  SetDistAngle(Dis: Standard_Real, Angle: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, F: TopoDS_Face): void;
  /** gives the distances <Dis> and <Angle> of the fillet contour of index <IC> in the DS */
  GetDistAngle(IC: Standard_Integer): { Dis: number; Angle: number };
  /** Sets the mode of chamfer. */
  SetMode(theMode: ChFiDS_ChamfMode): void;
  /** return True if chamfer symmetric false else. */
  IsSymetric(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** return True if chamfer is made with two distances false else. */
  IsTwoDistances(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** return True if chamfer is made with distance and angle false else. */
  IsDistanceAngle(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Erases the chamfer parameters on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Use the SetDists function to reset this data. Warning Nothing is done if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  ResetContour(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns the number of contours generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm. */
  NbContours(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the index of the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm, which contains the edge E of the shape. This function returns 0 if the edge E does not belong to any contour. Warning This index can change if a contour is removed from the internal data structure of this algorithm using the function Remove. */
  Contour(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of edges in the contour of index I in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns 0 if I is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  NbEdges(I: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the edge of index J in the contour of index I in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if: I is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or J is outside the bounds of the table of edges of the contour of index I. */
  Edge(I: Standard_Integer, J: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Removes the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm which contains the edge E of the shape. Warning Nothing is done if the edge E does not belong to the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm. */
  Remove(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Returns the length of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  Length(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first vertex of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  FirstVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the last vertex of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  LastVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the curvilinear abscissa of the vertex V on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if: IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or V is not on the contour of index IC. */
  Abscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the relative curvilinear abscissa (i.e. between 0 and 1) of the vertex V on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if: IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or V is not on the contour of index IC. */
  RelativeAbscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** eturns true if the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is closed and tangential at the point of closure. Warning Returns false if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  ClosedAndTangent(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is closed. Warning Returns false if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  Closed(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Builds the chamfers on all the contours in the internal data structure of this algorithm and constructs the resulting shape. Use the function IsDone to verify that the chamfered shape is built. Use the function Shape to retrieve the chamfered shape. Warning The construction of chamfers implements highly complex construction algorithms. Consequently, there may be instances where the algorithm fails, for example if the data defining the parameters of the chamfer is not compatible with the geometry of the initial shape. There is no initial analysis of errors and these only become evident at the construction stage. Additionally, in the current software release, the following cases are not handled: the end point of the contour is the point of intersection of 4 or more edges of the shape, or the intersection of the chamfer with a face which limits the contour is not fully contained in this face. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Reinitializes this algorithm, thus canceling the effects of the Build function. This function allows modifications to be made to the contours and chamfer parameters in order to rebuild the shape. */
  Reset(): void;
  /** Returns the internal filleting algorithm. */
  Builder(): any;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape <EorV>. */
  Generated(EorV: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape <F>. */
  Modified(F: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(F: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  Simulate(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  NbSurf(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  Sect(IC: Standard_Integer, IS: Standard_Integer): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepFilletAPI_MakeFillet extends BRepFilletAPI_LocalOperation {
  /** Initializes the computation of the fillets. <FShape> sets the type of fillet surface. The default value is ChFi3d_Rational (classical nurbs representation of circles). ChFi3d_QuasiAngular corresponds to a nurbs representation of circles which parameterisation matches the circle one. ChFi3d_Polynomial corresponds to a polynomial representation of circles. */
  constructor(S: TopoDS_Shape, FShape: ChFi3d_FilletShape)
  SetParams(Tang: Standard_Real, Tesp: Standard_Real, T2d: Standard_Real, TApp3d: Standard_Real, TolApp2d: Standard_Real, Fleche: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the parameters of continiuity InternalContinuity to produce fillet'surfaces with an continuity Ci (i=0,1 or 2). By defaultInternalContinuity = GeomAbs_C1. AngularTolerance is the G1 tolerance between fillet and support'faces. */
  SetContinuity(InternalContinuity: GeomAbs_Shape, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). The Radius must be set after. */
  Add_1(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). The Radius must be set after. */
  Add_2(Radius: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). The Radius must be set after. */
  Add_3(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). The Radius must be set after. */
  Add_4(L: any, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Adds a fillet contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). The Radius must be set after. */
  Add_5(UandR: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_1(Radius: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, IinC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_2(R1: Standard_Real, R2: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, IinC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_3(L: any, IC: Standard_Integer, IinC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_4(UandR: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, IC: Standard_Integer, IinC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Erases the radius information on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Use the SetRadius function to reset this data. Warning Nothing is done if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  ResetContour(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns true if the radius of the fillet along the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is constant, Warning False is returned if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours or if E does not belong to the contour of index IC. */
  IsConstant_1(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the radius of the fillet along the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm Warning Use this function only if the radius is constant. -1. is returned if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours or if E does not belong to the contour of index IC. */
  Radius_1(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns true if the radius of the fillet along the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is constant, Warning False is returned if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours or if E does not belong to the contour of index IC. */
  IsConstant_2(IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the radius of the fillet along the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm Warning Use this function only if the radius is constant. -1. is returned if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours or if E does not belong to the contour of index IC. */
  Radius_2(IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_5(Radius: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Sets the parameters of the fillet along the contour of index IC generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm, where Radius is the radius of the fillet. */
  SetRadius_6(Radius: Standard_Real, IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): void;
  GetBounds(IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge): { result: Standard_Boolean; F: number; L: number };
  GetLaw(IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge): any;
  SetLaw(IC: Standard_Integer, E: TopoDS_Edge, L: any): void;
  /** Assigns FShape as the type of fillet shape built by this algorithm. */
  SetFilletShape(FShape: ChFi3d_FilletShape): void;
  /** Returns the type of fillet shape built by this algorithm. */
  GetFilletShape(): ChFi3d_FilletShape;
  /** Returns the number of contours generated using the Add function in the internal data structure of this algorithm. */
  NbContours(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the index of the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm which contains the edge E of the shape. This function returns 0 if the edge E does not belong to any contour. Warning This index can change if a contour is removed from the internal data structure of this algorithm using the function Remove. */
  Contour(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of edges in the contour of index I in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns 0 if I is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  NbEdges(I: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the edge of index J in the contour of index I in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if: I is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or J is outside the bounds of the table of edges of the index I contour. */
  Edge(I: Standard_Integer, J: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** Removes the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm which contains the edge E of the shape. Warning Nothing is done if the edge E does not belong to the contour in the internal data structure of this algorithm. */
  Remove(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Returns the length of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  Length(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first vertex of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  FirstVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the last vertex of the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns a null shape if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  LastVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the curvilinear abscissa of the vertex V on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if: IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or V is not on the contour of index IC. */
  Abscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the relative curvilinear abscissa (i.e. between 0 and 1) of the vertex V on the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm. Warning Returns -1. if: IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours, or V is not on the contour of index IC. */
  RelativeAbscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns true if the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is closed and tangential at the point of closure. Warning Returns false if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  ClosedAndTangent(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the contour of index IC in the internal data structure of this algorithm is closed. Warning Returns false if IC is outside the bounds of the table of contours. */
  Closed(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Builds the fillets on all the contours in the internal data structure of this algorithm and constructs the resulting shape. Use the function IsDone to verify that the filleted shape is built. Use the function Shape to retrieve the filleted shape. Warning The construction of fillets implements highly complex construction algorithms. Consequently, there may be instances where the algorithm fails, for example if the data defining the radius of the fillet is not compatible with the geometry of the initial shape. There is no initial analysis of errors and they only become evident at the construction stage. Additionally, in the current software release, the following cases are not handled: the end point of the contour is the point of intersection of 4 or more edges of the shape, or the intersection of the fillet with a face which limits the contour is not fully contained in this face. */
  Build(theRange: Message_ProgressRange): void;
  /** Reinitializes this algorithm, thus canceling the effects of the Build function. This function allows modifications to be made to the contours and fillet parameters in order to rebuild the shape. */
  Reset(): void;
  /** Returns the internal topology building algorithm. */
  Builder(): any;
  /** Returns the list of shapes generated from the shape <EorV>. */
  Generated(EorV: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes modified from the shape <F>. */
  Modified(F: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(F: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns the number of surfaces after the shape creation. */
  NbSurfaces(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Return the faces created for surface . */
  NewFaces(I: Standard_Integer): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  Simulate(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  NbSurf(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  Sect(IC: Standard_Integer, IS: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** Returns the number of contours where the computation of the fillet failed */
  NbFaultyContours(): Standard_Integer;
  /** for each I in [1.. NbFaultyContours] returns the index IC of the contour where the computation of the fillet failed. the method NbEdges(IC) gives the number of edges in the contour IC the method Edge(IC,ie) gives the edge number ie of the contour IC */
  FaultyContour(I: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the number of surfaces which have been computed on the contour IC */
  NbComputedSurfaces(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the surface number IS concerning the contour IC */
  ComputedSurface(IC: Standard_Integer, IS: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** returns the number of vertices where the computation failed */
  NbFaultyVertices(): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the vertex where the computation failed */
  FaultyVertex(IV: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** returns true if a part of the result has been computed if the filling in a corner failed a shape with a hole is returned */
  HasResult(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** if (HasResult()) returns the partial result */
  BadShape(): TopoDS_Shape;
  /** returns the status concerning the contour IC in case of error ChFiDS_Ok : the computation is Ok ChFiDS_StartsolFailure : the computation can't start, perhaps the the radius is too big ChFiDS_TwistedSurface : the computation failed because of a twisted surface ChFiDS_WalkingFailure : there is a problem in the walking ChFiDS_Error: other error different from above */
  StripeStatus(IC: Standard_Integer): ChFiDS_ErrorStatus;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Construction of fillets on the edges of a Shell. */
export declare class BRepFilletAPI_LocalOperation extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** Adds a contour in the builder (builds a contour of tangent edges). */
  Add(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** Reset the contour of index IC, there is nomore information in the contour. */
  ResetContour(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Number of contours. */
  NbContours(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the index of the contour containing the edge E, returns 0 if E doesn't belong to any contour. */
  Contour(E: TopoDS_Edge): Standard_Integer;
  /** Number of Edges in the contour I. */
  NbEdges(I: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the Edge J in the contour I. */
  Edge(I: Standard_Integer, J: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Edge;
  /** remove the contour containing the Edge E. */
  Remove(E: TopoDS_Edge): void;
  /** returns the length the contour of index IC. */
  Length(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first Vertex of the contour of index IC. */
  FirstVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** Returns the last Vertex of the contour of index IC. */
  LastVertex(IC: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Vertex;
  /** returns the abscissa of the vertex V on the contour of index IC. */
  Abscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the relative abscissa([0.,1.]) of the vertex V on the contour of index IC. */
  RelativeAbscissa(IC: Standard_Integer, V: TopoDS_Vertex): Standard_Real;
  /** returns true if the contour of index IC is closed an tangent. */
  ClosedAndTangent(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns true if the contour of index IC is closed */
  Closed(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Reset all the fields updated by Build operation and leave the algorithm in the same state than before build call. It allows contours and radius modifications to build the result another time. */
  Reset(): void;
  Simulate(IC: Standard_Integer): void;
  NbSurf(IC: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  Sect(IC: Standard_Integer, IS: Standard_Integer): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare type ChFiDS_ChamfMode = {
  ChFiDS_ClassicChamfer: ChFiDS_ChamfModeValue;
  ChFiDS_ConstThroatChamfer: ChFiDS_ChamfModeValue;
  ChFiDS_ConstThroatWithPenetrationChamfer: ChFiDS_ChamfModeValue;
}

export declare type ChFiDS_ChamfModeValue = 'ChFiDS_ClassicChamfer' | 'ChFiDS_ConstThroatChamfer' | 'ChFiDS_ConstThroatWithPenetrationChamfer';

export declare type ChFi3d_FilletShape = {
  ChFi3d_Rational: ChFi3d_FilletShapeValue;
  ChFi3d_QuasiAngular: ChFi3d_FilletShapeValue;
  ChFi3d_Polynomial: ChFi3d_FilletShapeValue;
}

export declare type ChFi3d_FilletShapeValue = 'ChFi3d_Rational' | 'ChFi3d_QuasiAngular' | 'ChFi3d_Polynomial';

export declare class BRepFeat_MakeDPrism extends BRepFeat_Form {
  /** Initializes this algorithm for building draft prisms along surfaces. A face Pbase is selected in the basis shape Sbase to serve as the basis from the draft prism. The draft will be defined by the angle Angle and Fuse offers a choice between: removing matter with a Boolean cut using the setting 0 adding matter with Boolean fusion using the setting 1. The sketch face Skface serves to determine the type of operation. If it is inside the basis shape, a local operation such as glueing can be performed. */
  Init(Sbase: TopoDS_Shape, Pbase: TopoDS_Face, Skface: TopoDS_Face, Angle: Standard_Real, Fuse: Standard_Integer, Modify: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Indicates that the edge <E> will slide on the face <OnFace>. Raises ConstructionError if the face does not belong to the basis shape, or the edge to the prismed shape. */
  Add(E: TopoDS_Edge, OnFace: TopoDS_Face): void;
  Perform_1(Height: Standard_Real): void;
  Perform_2(Until: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  Perform_3(From: TopoDS_Shape, Until: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Realizes a semi-infinite prism, limited by the position of the prism base. */
  PerformUntilEnd(): void;
  /** Realizes a semi-infinite prism, limited by the face Funtil. */
  PerformFromEnd(FUntil: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  /** Builds an infinite prism. The infinite descendants will not be kept in the result. */
  PerformThruAll(): void;
  /** Assigns both a limiting shape, Until from TopoDS_Shape, and a height, Height at which to stop generation of the prism feature. */
  PerformUntilHeight(Until: TopoDS_Shape, Height: Standard_Real): void;
  Curves(S: any): void;
  BarycCurve(): any;
  /** Determination of TopEdges and LatEdges. sig = 1 -> TopEdges = FirstShape of the DPrism sig = 2 -> TOpEdges = LastShape of the DPrism */
  BossEdges(sig: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns the list of TopoDS Edges of the top of the boss. */
  TopEdges(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of TopoDS Edges of the bottom of the boss. */
  LatEdges(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_1 extends BRepFeat_MakeDPrism {
    constructor(Sbase: TopoDS_Shape, Pbase: TopoDS_Face, Skface: TopoDS_Face, Angle: Standard_Real, Fuse: Standard_Integer, Modify: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_2 extends BRepFeat_MakeDPrism {
    constructor();
  }

export declare class BRepFeat_Form extends BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape {
  /** returns the list of generated Faces. */
  Modified(F: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** returns a list of the created faces from the shape . */
  Generated(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns true if the shape S has been deleted. */
  IsDeleted(S: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the list of shapes created at the bottom of the created form. It may be an empty list. */
  FirstShape(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns the list of shapes created at the top of the created form. It may be an empty list. */
  LastShape(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns a list of the limiting and glueing edges generated by the feature. These edges did not originally exist in the basis shape. The list provides the information necessary for subsequent addition of fillets. It may be an empty list. */
  NewEdges(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Returns a list of the tangent edges among the limiting and glueing edges generated by the feature. These edges did not originally exist in the basis shape and are tangent to the face against which the feature is built. The list provides the information necessary for subsequent addition of fillets. It may be an empty list. If an edge is tangent, no fillet is possible, and the edge must subsequently be removed if you want to add a fillet. */
  TgtEdges(): TopTools_ListOfShape;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the basis shape is present. */
  BasisShapeValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the generated shape S is present. */
  GeneratedShapeValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the shape is present from the specified integer on. */
  ShapeFromValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the shape is present until the specified integer. */
  ShapeUntilValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the glued face is present. */
  GluedFacesValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the sketch face is present. If the sketch face is inside the basis shape, local operations such as glueing can be performed. */
  SketchFaceValid(): void;
  /** Initializes the topological construction if the selected face is present. */
  PerfSelectionValid(): void;
  Curves(S: any): void;
  BarycCurve(): any;
  CurrentStatusError(): BRepFeat_StatusError;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare type Convert_ParameterisationType = {
  Convert_TgtThetaOver2: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_TgtThetaOver2_3: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_TgtThetaOver2_4: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_QuasiAngular: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_RationalC1: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
  Convert_Polynomial: Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue;
}

export declare type Convert_ParameterisationTypeValue = 'Convert_TgtThetaOver2' | 'Convert_TgtThetaOver2_1' | 'Convert_TgtThetaOver2_2' | 'Convert_TgtThetaOver2_3' | 'Convert_TgtThetaOver2_4' | 'Convert_QuasiAngular' | 'Convert_RationalC1' | 'Convert_Polynomial';

export declare class gp_Ax1 {
  /** Assigns V as the "Direction" of this axis. */
  SetDirection(theV: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Assigns P as the origin of this axis. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Returns the direction of <me>. */
  Direction(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns the location point of <me>. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns True if: . the angle between <me> and <Other> is lower or equal to <AngularTolerance> and . the distance between <me>.Location() and <Other> is lower or equal to <LinearTolerance> and . the distance between <Other>.Location() and <me> is lower or equal to LinearTolerance. */
  IsCoaxial(Other: gp_Ax1, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real, LinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the direction of this and another axis are normal to each other. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to Pi/2. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Ax1, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the direction of this and another axis are parallel with opposite orientation. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to Pi. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Ax1, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the direction of this and another axis are parallel with same orientation or opposite orientation. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to 0 or Pi. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Ax1, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angular value, in radians, between this.Direction() and theOther.Direction(). Returns the angle between 0 and 2*PI radians. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Ax1): Standard_Real;
  /** Reverses the unit vector of this axis and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the unit vector of this axis and creates a new one. */
  Reversed(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Mirror_1(P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and creates a new axis. */
  Mirrored_1(P: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax1;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Mirror_2(A1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and creates a new axis. */
  Mirrored_2(A1: gp_Ax1): gp_Ax1;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Mirror_3(A2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry and creates a new axis. */
  Mirrored_3(A2: gp_Ax2): gp_Ax1;
  /** Rotates this axis at an angle theAngRad (in radians) about the axis theA1 and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAngRad: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates this axis at an angle theAngRad (in radians) about the axis theA1 and creates a new one. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAngRad: Standard_Real): gp_Ax1;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation to this axis with: scale factor theS, and center theP and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation to this axis with: scale factor theS, and center theP and creates a new axis. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Ax1;
  /** Applies the transformation theT to this axis and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Applies the transformation theT to this axis and creates a new one. Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <V>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Ax1;
  /** Translates this axis by the vector theV, and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates this axis by the vector theV, and creates a new one. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Ax1;
  /** Translates this axis by the vector theV, and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates this axis by the vector theV, and creates a new one. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax1;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Ax1_1 extends gp_Ax1 {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax1_2 extends gp_Ax1 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theV: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax1_3 extends gp_Ax1 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theDir: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax1_4 extends gp_Ax1 {
    constructor(theDir: gp_Dir_D);
  }

export declare class gp_Circ2d {
  /** Changes the location point (center) of the circle. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Changes the X axis of the circle. */
  SetXAxis(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes the X axis of the circle. */
  SetAxis(theA: gp_Ax22d): void;
  /** Changes the Y axis of the circle. */
  SetYAxis(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Modifies the radius of this circle. This class does not prevent the creation of a circle where theRadius is null. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if theRadius is negative. */
  SetRadius(theRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes the area of the circle. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the normalized coefficients from the implicit equation of the circle : theA * (X**2) + theB * (Y**2) + 2*theC*(X*Y) + 2*theD*X + 2*theE*Y + theF = 0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { theA: number; theB: number; theC: number; theD: number; theE: number; theF: number };
  /** Does <me> contain theP ? Returns True if the distance between theP and any point on the circumference of the circle is lower of equal to <theLinearTolerance>. */
  Contains(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the minimum of distance between the point theP and any point on the circumference of the circle. */
  Distance(theP: gp_Pnt2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between <me> and the point theP. */
  SquareDistance(theP: gp_Pnt2d): Standard_Real;
  /** computes the circumference of the circle. */
  Length(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the location point (center) of the circle. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the radius value of the circle. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the position of the circle. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax22d;
  /** returns the position of the circle. Idem Axis(me). */
  Position(): gp_Ax22d;
  /** returns the X axis of the circle. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the Y axis of the circle. Reverses the direction of the circle. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Reverses the orientation of the local coordinate system of this circle (the "Y Direction" is reversed) and therefore changes the implicit orientation of this circle. Reverse assigns the result to this circle, */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the orientation of the local coordinate system of this circle (the "Y Direction" is reversed) and therefore changes the implicit orientation of this circle. Reversed creates a new circle. */
  Reversed(): gp_Circ2d;
  /** Returns true if the local coordinate system is direct and false in the other case. */
  IsDirect(): Standard_Boolean;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a circle with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Circ2d;
  Mirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a circle with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry */
  Mirrored_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): gp_Circ2d;
  Rotate(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a circle. theP is the center of the rotation. Ang is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Circ2d;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a circle. theS is the scaling value. Warnings: If theS is negative the radius stay positive but the "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are reversed as for an ellipse. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Circ2d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms a circle with the transformation theT from class Trsf2d. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Circ2d;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Translates a circle in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Circ2d;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Translates a circle in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Circ2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Circ2d_1 extends gp_Circ2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Circ2d_2 extends gp_Circ2d {
    constructor(theXAxis: gp_Ax2d, theRadius: Standard_Real, theIsSense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class gp_Circ2d_3 extends gp_Circ2d {
    constructor(theAxis: gp_Ax22d, theRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_Ax2d {
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Changes the direction of <me>. */
  SetDirection(theV: gp_Dir2d): void;
  /** Returns the origin of <me>. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the direction of <me>. */
  Direction(): gp_Dir2d;
  /** Returns True if: . the angle between <me> and <Other> is lower or equal to <AngularTolerance> and . the distance between <me>.Location() and <Other> is lower or equal to <LinearTolerance> and . the distance between <Other>.Location() and <me> is lower or equal to LinearTolerance. */
  IsCoaxial(Other: gp_Ax2d, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real, LinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this axis and the axis theOther are normal to each other. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to Pi/2 or -Pi/2. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Ax2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this axis and the axis theOther are parallel, and have opposite orientations. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to Pi or -Pi. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Ax2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this axis and the axis theOther are parallel, and have either the same or opposite orientations. That is, if the angle between the two axes is equal to 0, Pi or -Pi. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Ax2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angle, in radians, between this axis and the axis theOther. The value of the angle is between -Pi and Pi. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Ax2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Reverses the direction of <me> and assigns the result to this axis. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Computes a new axis placement with a direction opposite to the direction of <me>. */
  Reversed(): gp_Ax2d;
  Mirror_1(P: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(P: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Ax2d;
  Mirror_2(A: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point P which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(A: gp_Ax2d): gp_Ax2d;
  Rotate(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates an axis placement. <theP> is the center of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Ax2d;
  Scale(P: gp_Pnt2d, S: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation on the axis placement. The "Location" point of the axisplacement is modified. The "Direction" is reversed if the scale is negative. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Ax2d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms an axis placement with a Trsf. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Ax2d;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Translates an axis placement in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Ax2d;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Translates an axis placement in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Ax2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Ax2d_1 extends gp_Ax2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2d_2 extends gp_Ax2d {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theV: gp_Dir2d);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2d_3 extends gp_Ax2d {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theDir: gp_Dir2d_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2d_4 extends gp_Ax2d {
    constructor(theDir: gp_Dir2d_D);
  }

export declare class gp_Dir {
  /** For this unit vector, assigns the value Xi to: the X coordinate if theIndex is 1, or the Y coordinate if theIndex is 2, or the Z coordinate if theIndex is 3, and then normalizes it. Warning: Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1, 2, or 3. Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): std::sqrt(Xv*Xv + Yv*Yv + Zv*Zv), or the modulus of the number triple formed by the new value theXi and the two other coordinates of this vector that were not directly modified. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** For this unit vector, assigns the value Xi to: the X coordinate if theIndex is 1, or the Y coordinate if theIndex is 2, or the Z coordinate if theIndex is 3, and then normalizes it. Warning: Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1, 2, or 3. Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): std::sqrt(Xv*Xv + Yv*Yv + Zv*Zv), or the modulus of the number triple formed by the new value theXi and the two other coordinates of this vector that were not directly modified. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetCoord_2(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real, theZv: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this unit vector. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this unit vector. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Z coordinate of this unit vector. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetZ(theZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the three coordinates of theCoord to this unit vector. Constexpr-compatible when input is already normalized. */
  SetXYZ(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1, 2, or 3. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1, 2, or 3. */
  Coord_2(): { theXv: number; theYv: number; theZv: number };
  /** Returns the X coordinate for a unit vector. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Y coordinate for a unit vector. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Z coordinate for a unit vector. */
  Z(): Standard_Real;
  /** for this unit vector, returns its three coordinates as a number triple. */
  XYZ(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns True if the angle between the two directions is lower or equal to theAngularTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Dir, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is equal to Pi/2 (normal). */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Dir, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is equal to Pi (opposite). */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Dir, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is equal to 0 or to Pi. Note: the tolerance criterion is given by theAngularTolerance. */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Dir, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angular value in radians between <me> and <theOther>. This value is always positive in 3D space. Returns the angle in the range [0, PI] */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Dir): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the angular value between <me> and <theOther>. <theVRef> is the direction of reference normal to <me> and <theOther> and its orientation gives the positive sense of rotation. If the cross product <me> ^ <theOther> has the same orientation as <theVRef> the angular value is positive else negative. Returns the angular value in the range -PI and PI (in radians). Raises DomainError if <me> and <theOther> are not parallel this exception is raised when <theVRef> is in the same plane as <me> and <theOther> The tolerance criterion is Resolution from package gp. */
  AngleWithRef(theOther: gp_Dir, theVRef: gp_Dir): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the cross product between two directions Raises the exception ConstructionError if the two directions are parallel because the computed vector cannot be normalized to create a direction. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  Cross(theRight: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Computes the triple vector product. <me> ^ (V1 ^ V2) Raises the exception ConstructionError if V1 and V2 are parallel or <me> and (V1^V2) are parallel because the computed vector can't be normalized to create a direction. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  Crossed(theRight: gp_Dir): gp_Dir;
  /** Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  CrossCross(theV1: gp_Dir, theV2: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Computes the double vector product this ^ (theV1 ^ theV2). CrossCrossed creates a new unit vector. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if: theV1 and theV2 are parallel, or this unit vector and (theV1 ^ theV2) are parallel. This is because, in these conditions, the computed vector is null and cannot be normalized. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  CrossCrossed(theV1: gp_Dir, theV2: gp_Dir): gp_Dir;
  /** Computes the scalar product. */
  Dot(theOther: gp_Dir): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the triple scalar product <me> * (theV1 ^ theV2). Warnings : The computed vector theV1' = theV1 ^ theV2 is not normalized to create a unitary vector. So this method never raises an exception even if theV1 and theV2 are parallel. */
  DotCross(theV1: gp_Dir, theV2: gp_Dir): Standard_Real;
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the orientation of a direction geometric transformations Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction V which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Reversed(): gp_Dir;
  Mirror_1(theV: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theV: gp_Dir): gp_Dir;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Dir;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Dir;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a direction. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Dir;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a direction with a "Trsf" from gp. Warnings : If the scale factor of the "Trsf" theT is negative then the direction <me> is reversed. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Dir;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Dir_1 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_2 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(theDir: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_3 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(theV: gp_Vec);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_4 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XYZ);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_5 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real, theZv: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_6 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(a: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir_7 extends gp_Dir {
    constructor(a: gp_Dir);
  }

export declare type gp_Dir_D = {
  X: gp_Dir_DValue;
  Y: gp_Dir_DValue;
  Z: gp_Dir_DValue;
  NX: gp_Dir_DValue;
  NY: gp_Dir_DValue;
  NZ: gp_Dir_DValue;
}

export declare type gp_Dir_DValue = 'X' | 'Y' | 'Z' | 'NX' | 'NY' | 'NZ';

export declare class gp_Sphere {
  /** Changes the center of the sphere. */
  SetLocation(theLoc: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the local coordinate system of the sphere. */
  SetPosition(theA3: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Assigns theR the radius of the Sphere. Warnings : It is not forbidden to create a sphere with null radius. Raises ConstructionError if theR < 0.0 */
  SetRadius(theR: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes the area of the sphere. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the coefficients of the implicit equation of the quadric in the absolute cartesian coordinates system : theA1.X**2+theA2.Y**2+theA3.Z**2+2.(theB1.X.Y+theB2.X.Z+theB3.Y.Z)+ 2.(theC1.X+theC2.Y+theC3.Z)+theD=0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { theA1: number; theA2: number; theA3: number; theB1: number; theB2: number; theB3: number; theC1: number; theC2: number; theC3: number; theD: number };
  /** Reverses the U parametrization of the sphere reversing the YAxis. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the V parametrization of the sphere reversing the ZAxis. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Returns true if the local coordinate system of this sphere is right-handed. */
  Direct(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Purpose ; Returns the center of the sphere. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the local coordinates system of the sphere. */
  Position(): gp_Ax3;
  /** Returns the radius of the sphere. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the volume of the sphere. */
  Volume(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the axis X of the sphere. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the axis Y of the sphere. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a sphere with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Sphere;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a sphere with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Sphere;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a sphere with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Sphere;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a sphere. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Sphere;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a sphere. theS is the scaling value. The absolute value of S is used to scale the sphere */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Sphere;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a sphere with the transformation theT from class Trsf. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Sphere;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates a sphere in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Sphere;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates a sphere in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Sphere;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Sphere_1 extends gp_Sphere {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Sphere_2 extends gp_Sphere {
    constructor(theA3: gp_Ax3, theRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_Circ {
  /** Changes the main axis of the circle. It is the axis perpendicular to the plane of the circle. Raises ConstructionError if the direction of theA1 is parallel to the "XAxis" of the circle. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (center) of the circle. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the position of the circle. */
  SetPosition(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Modifies the radius of this circle. Warning: This class does not prevent the creation of a circle where theRadius is null. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if theRadius is negative. */
  SetRadius(theRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Computes the area of the circle. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the main axis of the circle. It is the axis perpendicular to the plane of the circle, passing through the "Location" point (center) of the circle. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Computes the circumference of the circle. */
  Length(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the center of the circle. It is the "Location" point of the local coordinate system of the circle */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the position of the circle. It is the local coordinate system of the circle. */
  Position(): gp_Ax2;
  /** Returns the radius of this circle. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the "XAxis" of the circle. This axis is perpendicular to the axis of the conic. This axis and the "Yaxis" define the plane of the conic. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the "YAxis" of the circle. This axis and the "Xaxis" define the plane of the conic. The "YAxis" is perpendicular to the "Xaxis". */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Computes the minimum of distance between the point theP and any point on the circumference of the circle. */
  Distance(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between <me> and the point theP. */
  SquareDistance(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if the point theP is on the circumference. The distance between <me> and <theP> must be lower or equal to theLinearTolerance. */
  Contains(theP: gp_Pnt, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a circle with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Circ;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a circle with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Circ;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a circle with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Circ;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a circle. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Circ;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a circle. theS is the scaling value. Warnings : If theS is negative the radius stay positive but the "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are reversed as for an ellipse. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Circ;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a circle with the transformation theT from class Trsf. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Circ;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates a circle in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Circ;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates a circle in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Circ;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Circ_1 extends gp_Circ {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Circ_2 extends gp_Circ {
    constructor(theA2: gp_Ax2, theRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_Ax22d {
  /** Assigns the origin and the two unit vectors of the coordinate system theA1 to this coordinate system. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax22d): void;
  /** Changes the XAxis and YAxis ("Location" point and "Direction") of <me>. The "YDirection" is recomputed in the same sense as before. */
  SetXAxis(theA1: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes the XAxis and YAxis ("Location" point and "Direction") of <me>. The "XDirection" is recomputed in the same sense as before. */
  SetYAxis(theA1: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Assigns theVx to the "X Direction" of this coordinate system. The other unit vector of this coordinate system is recomputed, normal to theVx , without modifying the orientation (right-handed or left-handed) of this coordinate system. */
  SetXDirection(theVx: gp_Dir2d): void;
  /** Assigns theVy to the "Y Direction" of this coordinate system. The other unit vector of this coordinate system is recomputed, normal to theVy, without modifying the orientation (right-handed or left-handed) of this coordinate system. */
  SetYDirection(theVy: gp_Dir2d): void;
  /** Returns an axis, for which the origin is that of this coordinate system, and the unit vector is either the "X Direction" of this coordinate system. Note: the result is the "X Axis" of this coordinate system. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns an axis, for which the origin is that of this coordinate system, and the unit vector is either the "Y Direction" of this coordinate system. Note: the result is the "Y Axis" of this coordinate system. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the "XDirection" of <me>. */
  XDirection(): gp_Dir2d;
  /** Returns the "YDirection" of <me>. */
  YDirection(): gp_Dir2d;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. Warnings : The main direction of the axis placement is not changed. The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Ax22d;
  Mirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. Warnings : The main direction of the axis placement is not changed. The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Mirrored_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): gp_Ax22d;
  Rotate(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates an axis placement. <theA1> is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Ax22d;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation on the axis placement. The "Location" point of the axisplacement is modified. Warnings: If the scale <theS> is negative: . the main direction of the axis placement is not changed. . The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Ax22d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms an axis placement with a Trsf. The "Location" point, the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are transformed with theT. The resulting main "Direction" of <me> is the cross product between the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" after transformation. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Ax22d;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Ax22d;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Ax22d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Ax22d_1 extends gp_Ax22d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax22d_2 extends gp_Ax22d {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theVx: gp_Dir2d, theVy: gp_Dir2d);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax22d_3 extends gp_Ax22d {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theV: gp_Dir2d, theIsSense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax22d_4 extends gp_Ax22d {
    constructor(theA: gp_Ax2d, theIsSense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

export declare class gp_Pln {
  /** Returns the coefficients of the plane's cartesian equation: theA*X+theB*Y+theC*Z+theD=0. */
  Coefficients(): { theA: number; theB: number; theC: number; theD: number };
  /** Modifies this plane, by redefining its local coordinate system so that its origin and "main Direction" become those of the axis theA1 (the "X Direction" and "Y Direction" are then recomputed). Raises ConstructionError if the theA1 is parallel to the "XAxis" of the plane. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the origin of the plane. */
  SetLocation(theLoc: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the local coordinate system of the plane. */
  SetPosition(theA3: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Reverses the U parametrization of the plane reversing the XAxis. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the V parametrization of the plane reversing the YAxis. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Returns true if the Ax3 is right handed. */
  Direct(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the plane's normal Axis. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the plane's location (origin). */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the local coordinate system of the plane. */
  Position(): gp_Ax3;
  /** Computes the distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  Distance_1(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  Distance_2(theL: gp_Lin): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  Distance_3(theOther: gp_Pln): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the signed distance between <me> and the point <theP>. The sign of the distance indicates on which side of the plane the point is located: positive sign: the point is located in the direction of the plane normal, negative sign: the point is located in the opposite direction to the plane normal, zero: the point is located on the plane. */
  SignedDistance_1(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the signed distance between <me> and the point <theP>. The sign of the distance indicates on which side of the plane the point is located: positive sign: the point is located in the direction of the plane normal, negative sign: the point is located in the opposite direction to the plane normal, zero: the point is located on the plane. */
  SignedDistance_2(theL: gp_Lin): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the signed distance between <me> and the point <theP>. The sign of the distance indicates on which side of the plane the point is located: positive sign: the point is located in the direction of the plane normal, negative sign: the point is located in the opposite direction to the plane normal, zero: the point is located on the plane. */
  SignedDistance_3(theOther: gp_Pln): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  SquareDistance_1(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  SquareDistance_2(theL: gp_Lin): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between <me> and the point <theP>. */
  SquareDistance_3(theOther: gp_Pln): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the X axis of the plane. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the Y axis of the plane. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns true if this plane contains the point theP. This means that the distance between point theP and this plane is less than or equal to theLinearTolerance, or line L is normal to the "main Axis" of the local coordinate system of this plane, within the tolerance AngularTolerance, and the distance between the origin of line L and this plane is less than or equal to theLinearTolerance. */
  Contains_1(theP: gp_Pnt, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this plane contains the point theP. This means that the distance between point theP and this plane is less than or equal to theLinearTolerance, or line L is normal to the "main Axis" of the local coordinate system of this plane, within the tolerance AngularTolerance, and the distance between the origin of line L and this plane is less than or equal to theLinearTolerance. */
  Contains_2(theL: gp_Lin, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a plane with respect to the point <theP> which is the center of the symmetry Warnings : The normal direction to the plane is not changed. The "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are reversed. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Pln;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a plane with respect to the point <theP> which is the center of the symmetry Warnings : The normal direction to the plane is not changed. The "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are reversed. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Pln;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a plane with respect to the point <theP> which is the center of the symmetry Warnings : The normal direction to the plane is not changed. The "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are reversed. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Pln;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a plane. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Pln;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a plane. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Pln;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a plane with the transformation theT from class Trsf. The transformation is performed on the "Location" point, on the "XAxis" and the "YAxis". The resulting normal direction is the cross product between the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" after transformation. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Pln;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates a plane in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Pln;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates a plane in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Pln;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Pln_1 extends gp_Pln {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Pln_2 extends gp_Pln {
    constructor(theA3: gp_Ax3);
  }

  export declare class gp_Pln_3 extends gp_Pln {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theV: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Pln_4 extends gp_Pln {
    constructor(theA: Standard_Real, theB: Standard_Real, theC: Standard_Real, theD: Standard_Real);
  }

/** Defines a non-persistent vector in 2D space. */
export declare class gp_Vec2d {
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_2(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this vector. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this vector. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the two coordinates of theCoord to this vector. */
  SetXY(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raised if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raised if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_2(): { theXv: number; theYv: number };
  /** For this vector, returns its X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this vector, returns its Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this vector, returns its two coordinates as a number pair. */
  XY(): gp_XY;
  /** Returns True if the two vectors have the same magnitude value and the same direction. The precision values are theLinearTolerance for the magnitude and theAngularTolerance for the direction. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Vec2d, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if abs(std::abs(<me>.Angle(theOther)) - PI/2.) <= theAngularTolerance Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp. */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Vec2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if PI - std::abs(<me>.Angle(theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp. */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Vec2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if std::abs(Angle(<me>, theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance or PI - std::abs(Angle(<me>, theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance Two vectors with opposite directions are considered as parallel. Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Vec2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angular value between <me> and <theOther> returns the angle value between -PI and PI in radian. The orientation is from <me> to theOther. The positive sense is the trigonometric sense. Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution because the angular value is indefinite if one of the vectors has a null magnitude. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Vec2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the magnitude of this vector. */
  Magnitude(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square magnitude of this vector. */
  SquareMagnitude(): Standard_Real;
  Add(theOther: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Adds two vectors. */
  Added(theOther: gp_Vec2d): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Computes the crossing product between two vectors. */
  Crossed(theRight: gp_Vec2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight || */
  CrossMagnitude(theRight: gp_Vec2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight ||**2 */
  CrossSquareMagnitude(theRight: gp_Vec2d): Standard_Real;
  Divide(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** divides a vector by a scalar */
  Divided(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Computes the scalar product. */
  Dot(theOther: gp_Vec2d): Standard_Real;
  GetNormal(): gp_Vec2d;
  Multiply(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Normalizes a vector Raises an exception if the magnitude of the vector is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  Multiplied(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_Vec2d;
  Normalize(): void;
  /** Normalizes a vector Raises an exception if the magnitude of the vector is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. Reverses the direction of a vector */
  Normalized(): gp_Vec2d;
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the direction of a vector. */
  Reversed(): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Subtracts two vectors. */
  Subtract(theRight: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Subtracts two vectors. */
  Subtracted(theRight: gp_Vec2d): gp_Vec2d;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theV3 */
  SetLinearForm_1(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec2d, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec2d, theV3: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theV3 */
  SetLinearForm_2(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec2d, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theV3 */
  SetLinearForm_3(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec2d, theV2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theV3 */
  SetLinearForm_4(theV1: gp_Vec2d, theV2: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Vec2d;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax2d): gp_Vec2d;
  Rotate(theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a vector. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Vec2d;
  Scale(theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a vector. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scaled(theS: Standard_Real): gp_Vec2d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms a vector with a Trsf from gp. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Vec2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Vec2d_1 extends gp_Vec2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec2d_2 extends gp_Vec2d {
    constructor(theV: gp_Dir2d);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec2d_3 extends gp_Vec2d {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XY);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec2d_4 extends gp_Vec2d {
    constructor(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec2d_5 extends gp_Vec2d {
    constructor(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d);
  }

export declare class gp_Trsf {
  /** Makes the transformation into a symmetrical transformation. theP is the center of the symmetry. */
  SetMirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Makes the transformation into a symmetrical transformation. theP is the center of the symmetry. */
  SetMirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Makes the transformation into a symmetrical transformation. theP is the center of the symmetry. */
  SetMirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a rotation. theA1 is the rotation axis and theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  SetRotation_1(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a rotation. theA1 is the rotation axis and theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  SetRotation_2(theR: gp_Quaternion): void;
  /** Replaces the rotation part with specified quaternion. */
  SetRotationPart(theR: gp_Quaternion): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a scale. theP is the center of the scale and theS is the scaling value. Raises ConstructionError If <theS> is null. */
  SetScale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this transformation so that it transforms the coordinate system defined by theFromSystem1 into the one defined by theToSystem2. After this modification, this transformation transforms: the origin of theFromSystem1 into the origin of theToSystem2, the "X Direction" of theFromSystem1 into the "X Direction" of theToSystem2, the "Y Direction" of theFromSystem1 into the "Y Direction" of theToSystem2, and the "main Direction" of theFromSystem1 into the "main Direction" of theToSystem2. Warning When you know the coordinates of a point in one coordinate system and you want to express these coordinates in another one, do not use the transformation resulting from this function. Use the transformation that results from SetTransformation instead. SetDisplacement and SetTransformation create related transformations: the vectorial part of one is the inverse of the vectorial part of the other. */
  SetDisplacement(theFromSystem1: gp_Ax3, theToSystem2: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Modifies this transformation so that it transforms the coordinates of any point, (x, y, z), relative to a source coordinate system into the coordinates (x', y', z') which are relative to a target coordinate system, but which represent the same point The transformation is from the coordinate system "theFromSystem1" to the coordinate system "theToSystem2". Example : gp_Ax3theFromSystem1,theToSystem2; doublex1,y1,z1;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheFromSystem1 doublex2,y2,z2;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheToSystem2 gp_PntP1(x1,y1,z1) gp_TrsfT; T.SetTransformation(theFromSystem1,theToSystem2); gp_PntP2=P1.Transformed(T); P2.Coord(x2,y2,z2); */
  SetTransformation_1(theFromSystem1: gp_Ax3, theToSystem2: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Modifies this transformation so that it transforms the coordinates of any point, (x, y, z), relative to a source coordinate system into the coordinates (x', y', z') which are relative to a target coordinate system, but which represent the same point The transformation is from the coordinate system "theFromSystem1" to the coordinate system "theToSystem2". Example : gp_Ax3theFromSystem1,theToSystem2; doublex1,y1,z1;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheFromSystem1 doublex2,y2,z2;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheToSystem2 gp_PntP1(x1,y1,z1) gp_TrsfT; T.SetTransformation(theFromSystem1,theToSystem2); gp_PntP2=P1.Transformed(T); P2.Coord(x2,y2,z2); */
  SetTransformation_2(theToSystem: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Modifies this transformation so that it transforms the coordinates of any point, (x, y, z), relative to a source coordinate system into the coordinates (x', y', z') which are relative to a target coordinate system, but which represent the same point The transformation is from the coordinate system "theFromSystem1" to the coordinate system "theToSystem2". Example : gp_Ax3theFromSystem1,theToSystem2; doublex1,y1,z1;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheFromSystem1 doublex2,y2,z2;//arethecoordinatesofapointinthelocalsystemtheToSystem2 gp_PntP1(x1,y1,z1) gp_TrsfT; T.SetTransformation(theFromSystem1,theToSystem2); gp_PntP2=P1.Transformed(T); P2.Coord(x2,y2,z2); */
  SetTransformation_3(R: gp_Quaternion, theT: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a translation. theV is the vector of the translation. */
  SetTranslation_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a translation. theV is the vector of the translation. */
  SetTranslation_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Replaces the translation vector with the vector theV. */
  SetTranslationPart(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Modifies the scale factor. Raises ConstructionError If theS is null. */
  SetScaleFactor(theS: Standard_Real): void;
  SetForm(theP: gp_TrsfForm): void;
  /** Sets the coefficients of the transformation. The transformation of the point x,y,z is the point x',y',z' with : x'=a11x+a12y+a13z+a14 y'=a21x+a22y+a23z+a24 z'=a31x+a32y+a33z+a34 The method Value(i,j) will return aij. Raises ConstructionError if the determinant of the aij is null. The matrix is orthogonalized before future using. */
  SetValues(a11: Standard_Real, a12: Standard_Real, a13: Standard_Real, a14: Standard_Real, a21: Standard_Real, a22: Standard_Real, a23: Standard_Real, a24: Standard_Real, a31: Standard_Real, a32: Standard_Real, a33: Standard_Real, a34: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns true if the determinant of the vectorial part of this transformation is negative. */
  IsNegative(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the nature of the transformation. It can be: an identity transformation, a rotation, a translation, a mirror transformation (relative to a point, an axis or a plane), a scaling transformation, or a compound transformation. */
  Form(): gp_TrsfForm;
  /** Returns the scale factor. */
  ScaleFactor(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the translation part of the transformation's matrix. */
  TranslationPart(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the boolean True if there is non-zero rotation. In the presence of rotation, the output parameters store the axis and the angle of rotation. The method always returns positive value "theAngle", i.e., 0. < theAngle <= PI. Note that this rotation is defined only by the vectorial part of the transformation; generally you would need to check also the translational part to obtain the axis (gp_Ax1) of rotation. */
  GetRotation_1(theAxis: gp_XYZ): { result: Standard_Boolean; theAngle: number };
  /** Returns the boolean True if there is non-zero rotation. In the presence of rotation, the output parameters store the axis and the angle of rotation. The method always returns positive value "theAngle", i.e., 0. < theAngle <= PI. Note that this rotation is defined only by the vectorial part of the transformation; generally you would need to check also the translational part to obtain the axis (gp_Ax1) of rotation. */
  GetRotation_2(): gp_Quaternion;
  /** Returns the vectorial part of the transformation. It is a 3*3 matrix which includes the scale factor. */
  VectorialPart(): gp_Mat;
  /** Computes the homogeneous vectorial part of the transformation. It is a 3*3 matrix which doesn't include the scale factor. In other words, the vectorial part of this transformation is equal to its homogeneous vectorial part, multiplied by the scale factor. The coefficients of this matrix must be multiplied by the scale factor to obtain the coefficients of the transformation. */
  HVectorialPart(): gp_Mat;
  /** Returns the coefficients of the transformation's matrix. It is a 3 rows * 4 columns matrix. This coefficient includes the scale factor. Raises OutOfRanged if theRow < 1 or theRow > 3 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 4 */
  Value(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  Invert(): void;
  /** Computes the reverse transformation Raises an exception if the matrix of the transformation is not inversible, it means that the scale factor is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. Computes the transformation composed with T and <me>. In a C++ implementation you can also write Tcomposed = <me> * T. Example : gp_TrsfT1,T2,Tcomp;............... Tcomp=T2.Multiplied(T1);//or(Tcomp=T2*T1) gp_PntP1(10.,3.,4.); gp_PntP2=P1.Transformed(Tcomp);//usingTcomp gp_PntP3=P1.Transformed(T1);//usingT1thenT2 P3.Transform(T2);//P3=P2!!! */
  Inverted(): gp_Trsf;
  Multiplied(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Trsf;
  /** Computes the transformation composed with <me> and theT. <me> = <me> * theT */
  Multiply(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Computes the transformation composed with <me> and T. <me> = theT * <me> */
  PreMultiply(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  Power(theN: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes the following composition of transformations <me> * <me> * .......* <me>, theN time. if theN = 0 <me> = Identity if theN < 0 <me> = <me>.Inverse() *...........* <me>.Inverse(). Raises if theN < 0 and if the matrix of the transformation not inversible. */
  Powered(theN: Standard_Integer): gp_Trsf;
  Transforms_1(): { theX: number; theY: number; theZ: number };
  Transforms_2(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Trsf_1 extends gp_Trsf {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Trsf_2 extends gp_Trsf {
    constructor(theT: gp_Trsf2d);
  }

/** Defines a 3D cartesian point. */
export declare class gp_Pnt {
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex: theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified theIndex = 3 => Z is modified Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex: theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified theIndex = 3 => Z is modified Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  SetCoord_2(theXp: Standard_Real, theYp: Standard_Real, theZp: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this point. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this point. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Z coordinate of this point. */
  SetZ(theZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the three coordinates of theCoord to this point. */
  SetXYZ(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate of corresponding to the value of theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate of corresponding to the value of theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_2(): { theXp: number; theYp: number; theZp: number };
  /** For this point, returns its X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this point, returns its Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this point, returns its Z coordinate. */
  Z(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this point, returns its three coordinates as a XYZ object. */
  XYZ(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the coordinate of corresponding to the value of theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_3(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the coordinates of this point. Note: This syntax allows direct modification of the returned value. */
  ChangeCoord(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Assigns the result of the following expression to this point (theAlpha*this + theBeta*theP) / (theAlpha + theBeta) */
  BaryCenter(theAlpha: Standard_Real, theP: gp_Pnt, theBeta: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Comparison Returns True if the distance between the two points is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Pnt, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the distance between two points. */
  Distance(theOther: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between two points. */
  SquareDistance(theOther: gp_Pnt): Standard_Real;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to an axis placement which is the axis of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Pnt;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to an axis placement which is the axis of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Pnt;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to an axis placement which is the axis of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Pnt;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Scales a point. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt;
  /** Transforms a point with the transformation T. */
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Pnt;
  /** Translates a point in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Pnt;
  /** Translates a point in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Pnt;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Pnt_1 extends gp_Pnt {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Pnt_2 extends gp_Pnt {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XYZ);
  }

  export declare class gp_Pnt_3 extends gp_Pnt {
    constructor(theXp: Standard_Real, theYp: Standard_Real, theZp: Standard_Real);
  }

/** Defines a non-persistent 2D cartesian point. */
export declare class gp_Pnt2d {
  /** Assigns the value Xi to the coordinate that corresponds to theIndex: theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the value Xi to the coordinate that corresponds to theIndex: theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_2(theXp: Standard_Real, theYp: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this point. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this point. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the two coordinates of Coord to this point. */
  SetXY(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_2(): { theXp: number; theYp: number };
  /** For this point, returns its X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this point, returns its Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this point, returns its two coordinates as a number pair. */
  XY(): gp_XY;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_3(): gp_XY;
  /** Returns the coordinates of this point. Note: This syntax allows direct modification of the returned value. */
  ChangeCoord(): gp_XY;
  /** Comparison Returns True if the distance between the two points is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Pnt2d, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the distance between two points. */
  Distance(theOther: gp_Pnt2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square distance between two points. */
  SquareDistance(theOther: gp_Pnt2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to an axis placement which is the axis */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a point with respect to an axis placement which is the axis */
  Mirrored_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Rotates a point. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. Ang is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotate(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  Rotated(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Scales a point. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Transforms a point with the transformation theT. */
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Translates a point in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Translates a point in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Pnt2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Pnt2d_1 extends gp_Pnt2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Pnt2d_2 extends gp_Pnt2d {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XY);
  }

  export declare class gp_Pnt2d_3 extends gp_Pnt2d {
    constructor(theXp: Standard_Real, theYp: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_Dir2d {
  /** For this unit vector, assigns: the value theXi to: the X coordinate if theIndex is 1, or the Y coordinate if theIndex is 2, and then normalizes it. Warning Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1 or 2. Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): std::sqrt(theXv*theXv + theYv*theYv), or the modulus of the number pair formed by the new value theXi and the other coordinate of this vector that was not directly modified. Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** For this unit vector, assigns: the value theXi to: the X coordinate if theIndex is 1, or the Y coordinate if theIndex is 2, and then normalizes it. Warning Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_OutOfRange if theIndex is not 1 or 2. Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): std::sqrt(theXv*theXv + theYv*theYv), or the modulus of the number pair formed by the new value theXi and the other coordinate of this vector that was not directly modified. Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetCoord_2(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this unit vector, and then normalizes it. Warning Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): the modulus of Coord, or the modulus of the number pair formed from the new X or Y coordinate and the other coordinate of this vector that was not directly modified. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this unit vector, and then normalizes it. Warning Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): the modulus of Coord, or the modulus of the number pair formed from the new X or Y coordinate and the other coordinate of this vector that was not directly modified. Constexpr-compatible when result is already normalized. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns: the two coordinates of theCoord to this unit vector, and then normalizes it. Warning Remember that all the coordinates of a unit vector are implicitly modified when any single one is changed directly. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if either of the following is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(): the modulus of theCoord, or the modulus of the number pair formed from the new X or Y coordinate and the other coordinate of this vector that was not directly modified. Constexpr-compatible when input is already normalized. */
  SetXY(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  /** For this unit vector returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** For this unit vector returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_2(): { theXv: number; theYv: number };
  /** For this unit vector, returns its X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this unit vector, returns its Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this unit vector, returns its two coordinates as a number pair. Comparison between Directions The precision value is an input data. */
  XY(): gp_XY;
  /** Returns True if the two vectors have the same direction i.e. the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is less than or equal to theAngularTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Dir2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is equal to Pi/2 or -Pi/2 (normal) i.e. std::abs(std::abs(<me>.Angle(theOther)) - PI/2.) <= theAngularTolerance */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Dir2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the angle between this unit vector and the unit vector theOther is equal to Pi or -Pi (opposite). i.e. PI - std::abs(<me>.Angle(theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Dir2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the angle between this unit vector and unit vector theOther is equal to 0, Pi or -Pi. i.e. std::abs(Angle(<me>, theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance or PI - std::abs(Angle(<me>, theOther)) <= theAngularTolerance */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Dir2d, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angular value in radians between <me> and <theOther>. Returns the angle in the range [-PI, PI]. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Dir2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the cross product between two directions. */
  Crossed(theRight: gp_Dir2d): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the scalar product. */
  Dot(theOther: gp_Dir2d): Standard_Real;
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the orientation of a direction. */
  Reversed(): gp_Dir2d;
  Mirror_1(theV: gp_Dir2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theV: gp_Dir2d): gp_Dir2d;
  Mirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a direction with respect to the direction theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): gp_Dir2d;
  Rotate(Ang: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a direction. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Dir2d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms a direction with the "Trsf" theT. Warnings : If the scale factor of the "Trsf" theT is negative then the direction <me> is reversed. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Dir2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Dir2d_1 extends gp_Dir2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir2d_2 extends gp_Dir2d {
    constructor(theDir: gp_Dir2d_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir2d_3 extends gp_Dir2d {
    constructor(theV: gp_Vec2d);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir2d_4 extends gp_Dir2d {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XY);
  }

  export declare class gp_Dir2d_5 extends gp_Dir2d {
    constructor(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare type gp_Dir2d_D = {
  X: gp_Dir2d_DValue;
  Y: gp_Dir2d_DValue;
  NX: gp_Dir2d_DValue;
  NY: gp_Dir2d_DValue;
}

export declare type gp_Dir2d_DValue = 'X' | 'Y' | 'NX' | 'NY';

export declare class gp_Elips {
  /** Changes the axis normal to the plane of the ellipse. It modifies the definition of this plane. The "XAxis" and the "YAxis" are recomputed. The local coordinate system is redefined so that: its origin and "main Direction" become those of the axis theA1 (the "X Direction" and "Y Direction" are then recomputed in the same way as for any gp_Ax2), or Raises ConstructionError if the direction of theA1 is parallel to the direction of the "XAxis" of the ellipse. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate so that its origin becomes theP. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** The major radius of the ellipse is on the "XAxis" (major axis) of the ellipse. Raises ConstructionError if theMajorRadius < MinorRadius. */
  SetMajorRadius(theMajorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** The minor radius of the ellipse is on the "YAxis" (minor axis) of the ellipse. Raises ConstructionError if theMinorRadius > MajorRadius or MinorRadius < 0. */
  SetMinorRadius(theMinorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate so that it becomes theA2. */
  SetPosition(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Computes the area of the Ellipse. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the axis normal to the plane of the ellipse. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Computes the first or second directrix of this ellipse. These are the lines, in the plane of the ellipse, normal to the major axis, at a distance equal to MajorRadius/e from the center of the ellipse, where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. The first directrix (Directrix1) is on the positive side of the major axis. The second directrix (Directrix2) is on the negative side. The directrix is returned as an axis (gp_Ax1 object), the origin of which is situated on the "X Axis" of the local coordinate system of this ellipse. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the eccentricity is null (the ellipse has degenerated into a circle). */
  Directrix1(): gp_Ax1;
  /** This line is obtained by the symmetrical transformation of "Directrix1" with respect to the "YAxis" of the ellipse. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if the eccentricity is null (the ellipse has degenerated into a circle). */
  Directrix2(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the eccentricity of the ellipse between 0.0 and 1.0 If f is the distance between the center of the ellipse and the Focus1 then the eccentricity e = f / MajorRadius. Raises ConstructionError if MajorRadius = 0.0 */
  Eccentricity(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the focal distance. It is the distance between the two focus focus1 and focus2 of the ellipse. */
  Focal(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the positive side of the "XAxis" of the ellipse. */
  Focus1(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the second focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the negative side of the "XAxis" of the ellipse. */
  Focus2(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the center of the ellipse. It is the "Location" point of the coordinate system of the ellipse. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the major radius of the ellipse. */
  MajorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the minor radius of the ellipse. */
  MinorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns p = (1 - e * e) * MajorRadius where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. Returns 0 if MajorRadius = 0 */
  Parameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate system of the ellipse. */
  Position(): gp_Ax2;
  /** Returns the "XAxis" of the ellipse whose origin is the center of this ellipse. It is the major axis of the ellipse. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the "YAxis" of the ellipse whose unit vector is the "X Direction" or the "Y Direction" of the local coordinate system of this ellipse. This is the minor axis of the ellipse. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an ellipse with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Elips;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an ellipse with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Elips;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an ellipse with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Elips;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates an ellipse. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Elips;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales an ellipse. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Elips;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms an ellipse with the transformation theT from class Trsf. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Elips;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates an ellipse in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Elips;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates an ellipse in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Elips;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Elips_1 extends gp_Elips {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Elips_2 extends gp_Elips {
    constructor(theA2: gp_Ax2, theMajorRadius: Standard_Real, theMinorRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_XYZ {
  /** For this XYZ object, assigns the values theX, theY and theZ to its three coordinates */
  SetCoord_1(theX: Standard_Real, theY: Standard_Real, theZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** For this XYZ object, assigns the values theX, theY and theZ to its three coordinates */
  SetCoord_2(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Z coordinate. */
  SetZ(theZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  ChangeCoord(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_2(): { theX: number; theY: number; theZ: number };
  /** Returns a const ptr to coordinates location. Is useful for algorithms, but DOES NOT PERFORM ANY CHECKS! */
  GetData(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a ptr to coordinates location. Is useful for algorithms, but DOES NOT PERFORM ANY CHECKS! */
  ChangeData(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Z coordinate. */
  Z(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes std::sqrt(X*X + Y*Y + Z*Z) where X, Y and Z are the three coordinates of this XYZ object. */
  Modulus(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes X*X + Y*Y + Z*Z where X, Y and Z are the three coordinates of this XYZ object. */
  SquareModulus(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if he coordinates of this XYZ object are equal to the respective coordinates Other, within the specified tolerance theTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_XYZ, theTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()+theOther.X() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()+theOther.Y() <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()+theOther.Z() */
  Add(theOther: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** new.X()=<me>.X()+theOther.X() new.Y()=<me>.Y()+theOther.Y() new.Z()=<me>.Z()+theOther.Z() */
  Added(theOther: gp_XYZ): gp_XYZ;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.Y()*theOther.Z()-<me>.Z()*theOther.Y() <me>.Y()=<me>.Z()*theOther.X()-<me>.X()*theOther.Z() <me>.Z()=<me>.X()*theOther.Y()-<me>.Y()*theOther.X() */
  Cross(theOther: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** new.X()=<me>.Y()*theOther.Z()-<me>.Z()*theOther.Y() new.Y()=<me>.Z()*theOther.X()-<me>.X()*theOther.Z() new.Z()=<me>.X()*theOther.Y()-<me>.Y()*theOther.X() */
  Crossed(theOther: gp_XYZ): gp_XYZ;
  /** Computes the magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight || */
  CrossMagnitude(theRight: gp_XYZ): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight ||**2 */
  CrossSquareMagnitude(theRight: gp_XYZ): Standard_Real;
  /** Triple vector product Computes <me> = <me>.Cross(theCoord1.Cross(theCoord2)) */
  CrossCross(theCoord1: gp_XYZ, theCoord2: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Triple vector product computes New = <me>.Cross(theCoord1.Cross(theCoord2)) */
  CrossCrossed(theCoord1: gp_XYZ, theCoord2: gp_XYZ): gp_XYZ;
  /** divides <me> by a real. */
  Divide(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** divides <me> by a real. */
  Divided(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_XYZ;
  /** Computes the scalar product between <me> and theOther. */
  Dot(theOther: gp_XYZ): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the triple scalar product. */
  DotCross(theCoord1: gp_XYZ, theCoord2: gp_XYZ): Standard_Real;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_1(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_2(theOther: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_3(theMatrix: gp_Mat): void;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; New.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_1(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_XYZ;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; New.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_2(theOther: gp_XYZ): gp_XYZ;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; New.Z()=<me>.Z()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_3(theMatrix: gp_Mat): gp_XYZ;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()/<me>.Modulus() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()/<me>.Modulus() <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()/<me>.Modulus() Raised if <me>.Modulus() <= Resolution from gp */
  Normalize(): void;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()/<me>.Modulus() New.Y()=<me>.Y()/<me>.Modulus() New.Z()=<me>.Z()/<me>.Modulus() Raised if <me>.Modulus() <= Resolution from gp */
  Normalized(): gp_XYZ;
  /** <me>.X()=-<me>.X() <me>.Y()=-<me>.Y() <me>.Z()=-<me>.Z() */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** New.X()=-<me>.X() New.Y()=-<me>.Y() New.Z()=-<me>.Z() */
  Reversed(): gp_XYZ;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()-theOther.X() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()-theOther.Y() <me>.Z()=<me>.Z()-theOther.Z() */
  Subtract(theOther: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** new.X()=<me>.X()-theOther.X() new.Y()=<me>.Y()-theOther.Y() new.Z()=<me>.Z()-theOther.Z() */
  Subtracted(theOther: gp_XYZ): gp_XYZ;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_1(theA1: Standard_Real, theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theA2: Standard_Real, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ, theA3: Standard_Real, theXYZ3: gp_XYZ, theXYZ4: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_2(theA1: Standard_Real, theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theA2: Standard_Real, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ, theA3: Standard_Real, theXYZ3: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_3(theA1: Standard_Real, theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theA2: Standard_Real, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ, theXYZ3: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_4(theA1: Standard_Real, theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theA2: Standard_Real, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_5(theA1: Standard_Real, theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1*theXYZ1+theA2*theXYZ2+theA3*theXYZ3+theXYZ4 */
  SetLinearForm_6(theXYZ1: gp_XYZ, theXYZ2: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_XYZ_1 extends gp_XYZ {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_XYZ_2 extends gp_XYZ {
    constructor(theX: Standard_Real, theY: Standard_Real, theZ: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_GTrsf2d {
  /** Changes this transformation into an affinity of ratio theRatio with respect to the axis theA. Note: An affinity is a point-by-point transformation that transforms any point P into a point P' such that if H is the orthogonal projection of P on the axis theA, the vectors HP and HP' satisfy: HP' = theRatio * HP. */
  SetAffinity(theA: gp_Ax2d, theRatio: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Replaces the coefficient (theRow, theCol) of the matrix representing this transformation by theValue, Raises OutOfRange if theRow < 1 or theRow > 2 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 3 */
  SetValue(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer, theValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Replaces the translation part of this transformation by the coordinates of the number pair theCoord. */
  SetTranslationPart(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  /** Assigns the vectorial and translation parts of theT to this transformation. */
  SetTrsf2d(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Replaces the vectorial part of this transformation by theMatrix. */
  SetVectorialPart(theMatrix: gp_Mat2d): void;
  /** Returns true if the determinant of the vectorial part of this transformation is negative. */
  IsNegative(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this transformation is singular (and therefore, cannot be inverted). Note: The Gauss LU decomposition is used to invert the transformation matrix. Consequently, the transformation is considered as singular if the largest pivot found is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). Warning If this transformation is singular, it cannot be inverted. */
  IsSingular(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the nature of the transformation. It can be an identity transformation, a rotation, a translation, a mirror transformation (relative to a point or axis), a scaling transformation, a compound transformation or some other type of transformation. */
  Form(): gp_TrsfForm;
  /** Returns the translation part of the GTrsf2d. */
  TranslationPart(): gp_XY;
  /** Computes the vectorial part of the GTrsf2d. The returned Matrix is a 2*2 matrix. */
  VectorialPart(): gp_Mat2d;
  /** Returns the coefficients of the global matrix of transformation. Raised OutOfRange if theRow < 1 or theRow > 2 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 3 */
  Value(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  Invert(): void;
  /** Computes the reverse transformation. Raised an exception if the matrix of the transformation is not inversible. */
  Inverted(): gp_GTrsf2d;
  /** Computes the transformation composed with theT and <me>. In a C++ implementation you can also write Tcomposed = <me> * theT. Example : gp_GTrsf2dT1,T2,Tcomp;............... //composition: Tcomp=T2.Multiplied(T1);//or(Tcomp=T2*T1) //transformationofapoint gp_XYP(10.,3.); gp_XYP1(P); Tcomp.Transforms(P1);//usingTcomp gp_XYP2(P); T1.Transforms(P2);//usingT1thenT2 T2.Transforms(P2);//P1=P2!!! */
  Multiplied(theT: gp_GTrsf2d): gp_GTrsf2d;
  Multiply(theT: gp_GTrsf2d): void;
  /** Computes the product of the transformation theT and this transformation, and assigns the result to this transformation: this = theT * this */
  PreMultiply(theT: gp_GTrsf2d): void;
  Power(theN: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes the following composition of transformations <me> * <me> * .......* <me>, theN time. if theN = 0 <me> = Identity if theN < 0 <me> = <me>.Inverse() *...........* <me>.Inverse(). Raises an exception if theN < 0 and if the matrix of the transformation is not inversible. */
  Powered(theN: Standard_Integer): gp_GTrsf2d;
  Transforms_1(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  Transformed(theCoord: gp_XY): gp_XY;
  Transforms_2(): { theX: number; theY: number };
  /** Converts this transformation into a gp_Trsf2d transformation. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if this transformation cannot be converted, i.e. if its form is gp_Other. */
  Trsf2d(): gp_Trsf2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_GTrsf2d_1 extends gp_GTrsf2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_GTrsf2d_2 extends gp_GTrsf2d {
    constructor(theT: gp_Trsf2d);
  }

  export declare class gp_GTrsf2d_3 extends gp_GTrsf2d {
    constructor(theM: gp_Mat2d, theV: gp_XY);
  }

export declare class gp_XY {
  /** modifies the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** modifies the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  SetCoord_2(theX: Standard_Real, theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this number pair. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the Y coordinate of this number pair. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  ChangeCoord(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned Raises OutOfRange if theIndex != {1, 2}. */
  Coord_2(): { theX: number; theY: number };
  /** Returns the X coordinate of this number pair. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Y coordinate of this number pair. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes std::sqrt(X*X + Y*Y) where X and Y are the two coordinates of this number pair. */
  Modulus(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes X*X + Y*Y where X and Y are the two coordinates of this number pair. */
  SquareModulus(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns true if the coordinates of this number pair are equal to the respective coordinates of the number pair theOther, within the specified tolerance theTolerance. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_XY, theTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the sum of this number pair and number pair theOther <me>.X()=<me>.X()+theOther.X() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()+theOther.Y() */
  Add(theOther: gp_XY): void;
  /** Computes the sum of this number pair and number pair theOther new.X()=<me>.X()+theOther.X() new.Y()=<me>.Y()+theOther.Y() */
  Added(theOther: gp_XY): gp_XY;
  /** doubleD=<me>.X()*theOther.Y()-<me>.Y()*theOther.X() */
  Crossed(theOther: gp_XY): Standard_Real;
  /** computes the magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight || */
  CrossMagnitude(theRight: gp_XY): Standard_Real;
  /** computes the square magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight ||**2 */
  CrossSquareMagnitude(theRight: gp_XY): Standard_Real;
  /** divides <me> by a real. */
  Divide(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Divides <me> by a real. */
  Divided(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_XY;
  /** Computes the scalar product between <me> and theOther. */
  Dot(theOther: gp_XY): Standard_Real;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_1(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_2(theOther: gp_XY): void;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiply_3(theMatrix: gp_Mat2d): void;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_1(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_XY;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_2(theOther: gp_XY): gp_XY;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()*theScalar; New.Y()=<me>.Y()*theScalar; */
  Multiplied_3(theMatrix: gp_Mat2d): gp_XY;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()/<me>.Modulus() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()/<me>.Modulus() Raises ConstructionError if <me>.Modulus() <= Resolution from gp */
  Normalize(): void;
  /** New.X()=<me>.X()/<me>.Modulus() New.Y()=<me>.Y()/<me>.Modulus() Raises ConstructionError if <me>.Modulus() <= Resolution from gp */
  Normalized(): gp_XY;
  Reverse(): void;
  /** <me>.X()=-<me>.X() <me>.Y()=-<me>.Y() constexprvoidReverse()noexcept { x=-x; y=-y; } @code New.X()=-<me>.X() New.Y()=-<me>.Y() */
  Reversed(): gp_XY;
  /** Computes the following linear combination and assigns the result to this number pair: theA1*theXY1+theA2*theXY2 */
  SetLinearForm_1(theA1: Standard_Real, theXY1: gp_XY, theA2: Standard_Real, theXY2: gp_XY): void;
  /** Computes the following linear combination and assigns the result to this number pair: theA1*theXY1+theA2*theXY2 */
  SetLinearForm_2(theA1: Standard_Real, theXY1: gp_XY, theA2: Standard_Real, theXY2: gp_XY, theXY3: gp_XY): void;
  /** Computes the following linear combination and assigns the result to this number pair: theA1*theXY1+theA2*theXY2 */
  SetLinearForm_3(theA1: Standard_Real, theXY1: gp_XY, theXY2: gp_XY): void;
  /** Computes the following linear combination and assigns the result to this number pair: theA1*theXY1+theA2*theXY2 */
  SetLinearForm_4(theXY1: gp_XY, theXY2: gp_XY): void;
  /** <me>.X()=<me>.X()-theOther.X() <me>.Y()=<me>.Y()-theOther.Y() */
  Subtract(theOther: gp_XY): void;
  /** new.X()=<me>.X()-theOther.X() new.Y()=<me>.Y()-theOther.Y() */
  Subtracted(theOther: gp_XY): gp_XY;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_XY_1 extends gp_XY {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_XY_2 extends gp_XY {
    constructor(theX: Standard_Real, theY: Standard_Real);
  }

/** Defines a non-persistent vector in 3D space. */
export declare class gp_Vec {
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified theIndex = 3 => Z is modified Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  SetCoord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theXi: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the coordinate of range theIndex theIndex = 1 => X is modified theIndex = 2 => Y is modified theIndex = 3 => Z is modified Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  SetCoord_2(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real, theZv: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this vector. */
  SetX(theX: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this vector. */
  SetY(theY: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the given value to the X coordinate of this vector. */
  SetZ(theZ: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Assigns the three coordinates of theCoord to this vector. */
  SetXYZ(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coordinate of range theIndex : theIndex = 1 => X is returned theIndex = 2 => Y is returned theIndex = 3 => Z is returned Raised if theIndex != {1, 2, 3}. */
  Coord_2(): { theXv: number; theYv: number; theZv: number };
  /** For this vector, returns its X coordinate. */
  X(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this vector, returns its Y coordinate. */
  Y(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this vector, returns its Z coordinate. */
  Z(): Standard_Real;
  /** For this vector, returns its three coordinates as a number triple */
  XYZ(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns True if the two vectors have the same magnitude value and the same direction. The precision values are theLinearTolerance for the magnitude and theAngularTolerance for the direction. */
  IsEqual(theOther: gp_Vec, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if abs(<me>.Angle(theOther) - PI/2.) <= theAngularTolerance Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp */
  IsNormal(theOther: gp_Vec, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if PI - <me>.Angle(theOther) <= theAngularTolerance Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or Other.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp */
  IsOpposite(theOther: gp_Vec, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if Angle(<me>, theOther) <= theAngularTolerance or PI - Angle(<me>, theOther) <= theAngularTolerance This definition means that two parallel vectors cannot define a plane but two vectors with opposite directions are considered as parallel. Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution or Other.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp */
  IsParallel(theOther: gp_Vec, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Computes the angular value between <me> and <theOther> Returns the angle value between 0 and PI in radian. Raises VectorWithNullMagnitude if <me>.Magnitude() <= Resolution from gp or theOther.Magnitude() <= Resolution because the angular value is indefinite if one of the vectors has a null magnitude. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the angle, in radians, between this vector and vector theOther. The result is a value between -Pi and Pi. For this, theVRef defines the positive sense of rotation: the angular value is positive, if the cross product this ^ theOther has the same orientation as theVRef relative to the plane defined by the vectors this and theOther. Otherwise, the angular value is negative. Exceptions gp_VectorWithNullMagnitude if the magnitude of this vector, the vector theOther, or the vector theVRef is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). Standard_DomainError if this vector, the vector theOther, and the vector theVRef are coplanar, unless this vector and the vector theOther are parallel. */
  AngleWithRef(theOther: gp_Vec, theVRef: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the magnitude of this vector. */
  Magnitude(): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square magnitude of this vector. */
  SquareMagnitude(): Standard_Real;
  /** Adds two vectors. */
  Add(theOther: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Adds two vectors. */
  Added(theOther: gp_Vec): gp_Vec;
  /** Subtracts two vectors. */
  Subtract(theRight: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Subtracts two vectors. */
  Subtracted(theRight: gp_Vec): gp_Vec;
  /** Multiplies a vector by a scalar. */
  Multiply(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Multiplies a vector by a scalar. */
  Multiplied(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_Vec;
  /** Divides a vector by a scalar. */
  Divide(theScalar: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Divides a vector by a scalar. */
  Divided(theScalar: Standard_Real): gp_Vec;
  /** computes the cross product between two vectors */
  Cross(theRight: gp_Vec): void;
  /** computes the cross product between two vectors */
  Crossed(theRight: gp_Vec): gp_Vec;
  /** Computes the magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight || */
  CrossMagnitude(theRight: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the square magnitude of the cross product between <me> and theRight. Returns || <me> ^ theRight ||**2 */
  CrossSquareMagnitude(theRight: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the triple vector product. <me> ^= (theV1 ^ theV2) */
  CrossCross(theV1: gp_Vec, theV2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Computes the triple vector product. <me> ^ (theV1 ^ theV2) */
  CrossCrossed(theV1: gp_Vec, theV2: gp_Vec): gp_Vec;
  /** computes the scalar product */
  Dot(theOther: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** Computes the triple scalar product <me> * (theV1 ^ theV2). */
  DotCross(theV1: gp_Vec, theV2: gp_Vec): Standard_Real;
  /** normalizes a vector Raises an exception if the magnitude of the vector is lower or equal to Resolution from gp. */
  Normalize(): void;
  /** normalizes a vector Raises an exception if the magnitude of the vector is lower or equal to Resolution from gp. */
  Normalized(): gp_Vec;
  /** Reverses the direction of a vector. */
  Reverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the direction of a vector. */
  Reversed(): gp_Vec;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_1(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec, theA3: Standard_Real, theV3: gp_Vec, theV4: gp_Vec): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_2(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec, theA3: Standard_Real, theV3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_3(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec, theV3: gp_Vec): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_4(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec, theA2: Standard_Real, theV2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_5(theA1: Standard_Real, theV1: gp_Vec, theV2: gp_Vec): void;
  /** <me> is set to the following linear form : theA1 * theV1 + theA2 * theV2 + theA3 * theV3 + theV4 */
  SetLinearForm_6(theV1: gp_Vec, theV2: gp_Vec): void;
  Mirror_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Vec;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Vec;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a vector with respect to the vector theV which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Vec;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a vector. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Vec;
  Scale(theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a vector. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scaled(theS: Standard_Real): gp_Vec;
  /** Transforms a vector with the transformation theT. */
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a vector with the transformation theT. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Vec;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Vec_1 extends gp_Vec {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec_2 extends gp_Vec {
    constructor(theV: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec_3 extends gp_Vec {
    constructor(theCoord: gp_XYZ);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec_4 extends gp_Vec {
    constructor(theXv: Standard_Real, theYv: Standard_Real, theZv: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class gp_Vec_5 extends gp_Vec {
    constructor(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt);
  }

export declare class gp_Ax3 {
  /** Reverses the X direction of <me>. */
  XReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the Y direction of <me>. */
  YReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the Z direction of <me>. */
  ZReverse(): void;
  /** Assigns the origin and "main Direction" of the axis theA1 to this coordinate system, then recomputes its "X Direction" and "Y Direction". Note: The new "X Direction" is computed as follows: new "X Direction" = V1 ^(previous "X Direction" ^ V) where V is the "Direction" of theA1. The orientation of this coordinate system (right-handed or left-handed) is not modified. Raises ConstructionError if the "Direction" of <theA1> and the "XDirection" of <me> are parallel (same or opposite orientation) because it is impossible to calculate the new "XDirection" and the new "YDirection". */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the main direction of this coordinate system, then recomputes its "X Direction" and "Y Direction". Note: The new "X Direction" is computed as follows: new "X Direction" = theV ^ (previous "X Direction" ^ theV). The orientation of this coordinate system (left- or right-handed) is not modified. Raises ConstructionError if <theV> and the previous "XDirection" are parallel because it is impossible to calculate the new "XDirection" and the new "YDirection". */
  SetDirection(theV: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the "Xdirection" of <me>. The main direction "Direction" is not modified, the "Ydirection" is modified. If <theVx> is not normal to the main direction then <XDirection> is computed as follows XDirection = Direction ^ (theVx ^ Direction). Raises ConstructionError if <theVx> is parallel (same or opposite orientation) to the main direction of <me> */
  SetXDirection(theVx: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Changes the "Ydirection" of <me>. The main direction is not modified but the "Xdirection" is changed. If <theVy> is not normal to the main direction then "YDirection" is computed as follows YDirection = Direction ^ (<theVy> ^ Direction). Raises ConstructionError if <theVy> is parallel to the main direction of <me> */
  SetYDirection(theVy: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Computes the angular value between the main direction of <me> and the main direction of <theOther>. Returns the angle between 0 and PI in radians. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Ax3): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the main axis of <me>. It is the "Location" point and the main "Direction". */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Computes a right-handed coordinate system with the same "X Direction" and "Y Direction" as those of this coordinate system, then recomputes the "main Direction". If this coordinate system is right-handed, the result returned is the same coordinate system. If this coordinate system is left-handed, the result is reversed. */
  Ax2(): gp_Ax2;
  /** Returns the main direction of <me>. */
  Direction(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the "XDirection" of <me>. */
  XDirection(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns the "YDirection" of <me>. */
  YDirection(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns True if the coordinate system is right-handed. i.e. XDirection().Crossed(YDirection()).Dot(Direction()) > 0 */
  Direct(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if . the distance between the "Location" point of <me> and <theOther> is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance and . the distance between the "Location" point of <theOther> and <me> is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance and . the main direction of <me> and the main direction of <theOther> are parallel (same or opposite orientation). */
  IsCoplanar_1(theOther: gp_Ax3, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if . the distance between the "Location" point of <me> and <theOther> is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance and . the distance between the "Location" point of <theOther> and <me> is lower or equal to theLinearTolerance and . the main direction of <me> and the main direction of <theOther> are parallel (same or opposite orientation). */
  IsCoplanar_2(theA1: gp_Ax1, theLinearTolerance: Standard_Real, theAngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. Warnings : The main direction of the axis placement is not changed. The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax3;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. Warnings : The main direction of the axis placement is not changed. The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Ax3;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of an axis placement with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. Warnings : The main direction of the axis placement is not changed. The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Ax3;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates an axis placement. <theA1> is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Ax3;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation on the axis placement. The "Location" point of the axisplacement is modified. Warnings: If the scale <theS> is negative : . the main direction of the axis placement is not changed. . The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Ax3;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms an axis placement with a Trsf. The "Location" point, the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are transformed with theT. The resulting main "Direction" of <me> is the cross product between the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" after transformation. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Ax3;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Ax3;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax3;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Ax3_1 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_2 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theA: gp_Ax2);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_3 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theN: gp_Dir, theVx: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_4 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theN: gp_Dir_D, theVx: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_5 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theV: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_6 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theV: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax3_7 extends gp_Ax3 {
    constructor(theV: gp_Dir_D);
  }

export declare class gp_Trsf2d {
  /** Changes the transformation into a symmetrical transformation. theP is the center of the symmetry. */
  SetMirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a symmetrical transformation. theP is the center of the symmetry. */
  SetMirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a rotation. theP is the rotation's center and theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radian. */
  SetRotation(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a scale. theP is the center of the scale and theS is the scaling value. */
  SetScale(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes a transformation allowing passage from the coordinate system "theFromSystem1" to the coordinate system "theToSystem2". */
  SetTransformation_1(theFromSystem1: gp_Ax2d, theToSystem2: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes a transformation allowing passage from the coordinate system "theFromSystem1" to the coordinate system "theToSystem2". */
  SetTransformation_2(theToSystem: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a translation. theV is the vector of the translation. */
  SetTranslation_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Changes the transformation into a translation. theV is the vector of the translation. */
  SetTranslation_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Replaces the translation vector with theV. */
  SetTranslationPart(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Modifies the scale factor. */
  SetScaleFactor(theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns true if the determinant of the vectorial part of this transformation is negative.. */
  IsNegative(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the nature of the transformation. It can be an identity transformation, a rotation, a translation, a mirror (relative to a point or an axis), a scaling transformation, or a compound transformation. */
  Form(): gp_TrsfForm;
  /** Returns the scale factor. */
  ScaleFactor(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the translation part of the transformation's matrix. */
  TranslationPart(): gp_XY;
  /** Returns the vectorial part of the transformation. It is a 2*2 matrix which includes the scale factor. */
  VectorialPart(): gp_Mat2d;
  /** Returns the homogeneous vectorial part of the transformation. It is a 2*2 matrix which doesn't include the scale factor. The coefficients of this matrix must be multiplied by the scale factor to obtain the coefficients of the transformation. */
  HVectorialPart(): gp_Mat2d;
  /** Returns the angle corresponding to the rotational component of the transformation matrix (operation opposite to SetRotation()). */
  RotationPart(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coefficients of the transformation's matrix. It is a 2 rows * 3 columns matrix. Raises OutOfRange if theRow < 1 or theRow > 2 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 3 */
  Value(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  Invert(): void;
  /** Computes the reverse transformation. Raises an exception if the matrix of the transformation is not inversible, it means that the scale factor is lower or equal to Resolution from package gp. */
  Inverted(): gp_Trsf2d;
  Multiplied(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Trsf2d;
  /** Computes the transformation composed from <me> and theT. <me> = <me> * theT */
  Multiply(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Computes the transformation composed from <me> and theT. <me> = theT * <me> */
  PreMultiply(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  Power(theN: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes the following composition of transformations <me> * <me> * .......* <me>, theN time. if theN = 0 <me> = Identity if theN < 0 <me> = <me>.Inverse() *...........* <me>.Inverse(). Raises if theN < 0 and if the matrix of the transformation not inversible. */
  Powered(theN: Standard_Integer): gp_Trsf2d;
  Transforms_1(): { theX: number; theY: number };
  Transforms_2(theCoord: gp_XY): void;
  /** Sets the coefficients of the transformation. The transformation of the point x,y is the point x',y' with : x'=a11x+a12y+a13 y'=a21x+a22y+a23 The method Value(i,j) will return aij. Raises ConstructionError if the determinant of the aij is null. If the matrix as not a uniform scale it will be orthogonalized before future using. */
  SetValues(a11: Standard_Real, a12: Standard_Real, a13: Standard_Real, a21: Standard_Real, a22: Standard_Real, a23: Standard_Real): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Trsf2d_1 extends gp_Trsf2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Trsf2d_2 extends gp_Trsf2d {
    constructor(theT: gp_Trsf);
  }

export declare class gp_Ax2 {
  /** Assigns the origin and "main Direction" of the axis A1 to this coordinate system, then recomputes its "X Direction" and "Y Direction". Note: The new "X Direction" is computed as follows: new "X Direction" = V1 ^(previous "X Direction" ^ V) where V is the "Direction" of A1. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if A1 is parallel to the "X Direction" of this coordinate system. */
  SetAxis(A1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the "main Direction" of this coordinate system, then recomputes its "X Direction" and "Y Direction". Note: the new "X Direction" is computed as follows: new "X Direction" = V ^ (previous "X Direction" ^ V) Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if V is parallel to the "X Direction" of this coordinate system. */
  SetDirection(V: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Changes the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Changes the "Xdirection" of <me>. The main direction "Direction" is not modified, the "Ydirection" is modified. If <Vx> is not normal to the main direction then <XDirection> is computed as follows XDirection = Direction ^ (Vx ^ Direction). Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if Vx or Vy is parallel to the "main Direction" of this coordinate system. */
  SetXDirection(theVx: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Changes the "Ydirection" of <me>. The main direction is not modified but the "Xdirection" is changed. If <Vy> is not normal to the main direction then "YDirection" is computed as follows YDirection = Direction ^ (<Vy> ^ Direction). Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if Vx or Vy is parallel to the "main Direction" of this coordinate system. */
  SetYDirection(theVy: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Computes the angular value, in radians, between the main direction of <me> and the main direction of <theOther>. Returns the angle between 0 and PI in radians. */
  Angle(theOther: gp_Ax2): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the main axis of <me>. It is the "Location" point and the main "Direction". */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the main direction of <me>. */
  Direction(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns the "Location" point (origin) of <me>. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the "XDirection" of <me>. */
  XDirection(): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns the "YDirection" of <me>. */
  YDirection(): gp_Dir;
  IsCoplanar_1(Other: gp_Ax2, LinearTolerance: Standard_Real, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  IsCoplanar_2(A1: gp_Ax1, LinearTolerance: Standard_Real, AngularTolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and assigns the result to this coordinate system. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirror_1(P: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and creates a new one. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirrored_1(P: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax2;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and assigns the result to this coordinate system. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirror_2(A1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and creates a new one. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirrored_2(A1: gp_Ax1): gp_Ax2;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and assigns the result to this coordinate system. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirror_3(A2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs a symmetrical transformation of this coordinate system with respect to: the point P, and creates a new one. Warning This transformation is always performed on the origin. In case of a reflection with respect to a point: the main direction of the coordinate system is not changed, and the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction" are simply reversed In case of a reflection with respect to an axis or a plane: the transformation is applied to the "X Direction" and the "Y Direction", then the "main Direction" is recomputed as the cross product "X Direction" ^ "Y Direction". This maintains the right-handed property of the coordinate system. */
  Mirrored_3(A2: gp_Ax2): gp_Ax2;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates an axis placement. <theA1> is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Ax2;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Applies a scaling transformation on the axis placement. The "Location" point of the axisplacement is modified. Warnings: If the scale is negative: . the main direction of the axis placement is not changed. . The "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are reversed. So the axis placement stay right handed. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Ax2;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms an axis placement with a Trsf. The "Location" point, the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" are transformed with theT. The resulting main "Direction" of <me> is the cross product between the "XDirection" and the "YDirection" after transformation. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Ax2;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Ax2;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates an axis plaxement in the direction of the vector <theV>. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Ax2;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Ax2_1 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2_2 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, N: gp_Dir, Vx: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2_3 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theN: gp_Dir_D, theVx: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2_4 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor(P: gp_Pnt, V: gp_Dir);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2_5 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor(theP: gp_Pnt, theV: gp_Dir_D);
  }

  export declare class gp_Ax2_6 extends gp_Ax2 {
    constructor(theV: gp_Dir_D);
  }

export declare class gp_Cylinder {
  /** Changes the symmetry axis of the cylinder. Raises ConstructionError if the direction of theA1 is parallel to the "XDirection" of the coordinate system of the cylinder. */
  SetAxis(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Changes the location of the surface. */
  SetLocation(theLoc: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Change the local coordinate system of the surface. */
  SetPosition(theA3: gp_Ax3): void;
  /** Modifies the radius of this cylinder. Exceptions Standard_ConstructionError if theR is negative. */
  SetRadius(theR: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Reverses the U parametrization of the cylinder reversing the YAxis. */
  UReverse(): void;
  /** Reverses the V parametrization of the plane reversing the Axis. */
  VReverse(): void;
  /** Returns true if the local coordinate system of this cylinder is right-handed. */
  Direct(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the symmetry axis of the cylinder. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Computes the coefficients of the implicit equation of the quadric in the absolute cartesian coordinate system : theA1.X**2 + theA2.Y**2 + theA3.Z**2 + 2.(theB1.X.Y + theB2.X.Z + theB3.Y.Z) + 2.(theC1.X + theC2.Y + theC3.Z) + theD = 0.0 */
  Coefficients(): { theA1: number; theA2: number; theA3: number; theB1: number; theB2: number; theB3: number; theC1: number; theC2: number; theC3: number; theD: number };
  /** Returns the "Location" point of the cylinder. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt;
  /** Returns the local coordinate system of the cylinder. */
  Position(): gp_Ax3;
  /** Returns the radius of the cylinder. */
  Radius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the axis X of the cylinder. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  /** Returns the axis Y of the cylinder. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax1;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a cylinder with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt): gp_Cylinder;
  Mirror_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a cylinder with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_2(theA1: gp_Ax1): gp_Cylinder;
  Mirror_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a cylinder with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry. */
  Mirrored_3(theA2: gp_Ax2): gp_Cylinder;
  Rotate(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Rotates a cylinder. theA1 is the axis of the rotation. theAng is the angular value of the rotation in radians. */
  Rotated(theA1: gp_Ax1, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Cylinder;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a cylinder. theS is the scaling value. The absolute value of theS is used to scale the cylinder */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Cylinder;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Transforms a cylinder with the transformation theT from class Trsf. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf): gp_Cylinder;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec): void;
  /** Translates a cylinder in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec): gp_Cylinder;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Translates a cylinder in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt, theP2: gp_Pnt): gp_Cylinder;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Cylinder_1 extends gp_Cylinder {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Cylinder_2 extends gp_Cylinder {
    constructor(theA3: gp_Ax3, theRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_Elips2d {
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate system so that its origin becomes theP. */
  SetLocation(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Changes the value of the major radius. Raises ConstructionError if theMajorRadius < MinorRadius. */
  SetMajorRadius(theMajorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes the value of the minor radius. Raises ConstructionError if MajorRadius < theMinorRadius or MinorRadius < 0.0 */
  SetMinorRadius(theMinorRadius: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate system so that it becomes theA. */
  SetAxis(theA: gp_Ax22d): void;
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate system so that its origin and its "X Direction" become those of the axis theA. The "Y Direction" is then recomputed. The orientation of the local coordinate system is not modified. */
  SetXAxis(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Modifies this ellipse, by redefining its local coordinate system so that its origin and its "Y Direction" become those of the axis theA. The "X Direction" is then recomputed. The orientation of the local coordinate system is not modified. */
  SetYAxis(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Computes the area of the ellipse. */
  Area(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the coefficients of the implicit equation of the ellipse. theA * (X**2) + theB * (Y**2) + 2*theC*(X*Y) + 2*theD*X + 2*theE*Y + theF = 0. */
  Coefficients(): { theA: number; theB: number; theC: number; theD: number; theE: number; theF: number };
  /** This directrix is the line normal to the XAxis of the ellipse in the local plane (Z = 0) at a distance d = MajorRadius / e from the center of the ellipse, where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. This line is parallel to the "YAxis". The intersection point between directrix1 and the "XAxis" is the location point of the directrix1. This point is on the positive side of the "XAxis". Raised if Eccentricity = 0.0. (The ellipse degenerates into a circle) */
  Directrix1(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** This line is obtained by the symmetrical transformation of "Directrix1" with respect to the minor axis of the ellipse. Raised if Eccentricity = 0.0. (The ellipse degenerates into a circle). */
  Directrix2(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the eccentricity of the ellipse between 0.0 and 1.0 If f is the distance between the center of the ellipse and the Focus1 then the eccentricity e = f / MajorRadius. Returns 0 if MajorRadius = 0. */
  Eccentricity(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the distance between the center of the ellipse and focus1 or focus2. */
  Focal(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the first focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the positive side of the major axis of the ellipse. */
  Focus1(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the second focus of the ellipse. This focus is on the negative side of the major axis of the ellipse. */
  Focus2(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the center of the ellipse. */
  Location(): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Returns the major radius of the Ellipse. */
  MajorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the minor radius of the Ellipse. */
  MinorRadius(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns p = (1 - e * e) * MajorRadius where e is the eccentricity of the ellipse. Returns 0 if MajorRadius = 0 */
  Parameter(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the major axis of the ellipse. */
  Axis(): gp_Ax22d;
  /** Returns the major axis of the ellipse. */
  XAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  /** Returns the minor axis of the ellipse. Reverses the direction of the circle. */
  YAxis(): gp_Ax2d;
  Reverse(): void;
  Reversed(): gp_Elips2d;
  /** Returns true if the local coordinate system is direct and false in the other case. */
  IsDirect(): Standard_Boolean;
  Mirror_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a ellipse with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry */
  Mirrored_1(theP: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Elips2d;
  Mirror_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): void;
  /** Performs the symmetrical transformation of a ellipse with respect to the point theP which is the center of the symmetry */
  Mirrored_2(theA: gp_Ax2d): gp_Elips2d;
  Rotate(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): void;
  Rotated(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theAng: Standard_Real): gp_Elips2d;
  Scale(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Scales a ellipse. theS is the scaling value. */
  Scaled(theP: gp_Pnt2d, theS: Standard_Real): gp_Elips2d;
  Transform(theT: gp_Trsf2d): void;
  /** Transforms an ellipse with the transformation theT from class Trsf2d. */
  Transformed(theT: gp_Trsf2d): gp_Elips2d;
  Translate_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): void;
  /** Translates a ellipse in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_1(theV: gp_Vec2d): gp_Elips2d;
  Translate_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Translates a ellipse in the direction of the vector theV. The magnitude of the translation is the vector's magnitude. */
  Translated_2(theP1: gp_Pnt2d, theP2: gp_Pnt2d): gp_Elips2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_Elips2d_1 extends gp_Elips2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_Elips2d_2 extends gp_Elips2d {
    constructor(theMajorAxis: gp_Ax2d, theMajorRadius: Standard_Real, theMinorRadius: Standard_Real, theIsSense: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class gp_Elips2d_3 extends gp_Elips2d {
    constructor(theA: gp_Ax22d, theMajorRadius: Standard_Real, theMinorRadius: Standard_Real);
  }

export declare class gp_GTrsf {
  /** Changes this transformation into an affinity of ratio theRatio with respect to the axis theA1. Note: an affinity is a point-by-point transformation that transforms any point P into a point P' such that if H is the orthogonal projection of P on the axis theA1 or the plane A2, the vectors HP and HP' satisfy: HP' = theRatio * HP. */
  SetAffinity_1(theA1: gp_Ax1, theRatio: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Changes this transformation into an affinity of ratio theRatio with respect to the axis theA1. Note: an affinity is a point-by-point transformation that transforms any point P into a point P' such that if H is the orthogonal projection of P on the axis theA1 or the plane A2, the vectors HP and HP' satisfy: HP' = theRatio * HP. */
  SetAffinity_2(theA2: gp_Ax2, theRatio: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Replaces the coefficient (theRow, theCol) of the matrix representing this transformation by theValue. Raises OutOfRange if theRow < 1 or theRow > 3 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 4 */
  SetValue(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer, theValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Replaces the vectorial part of this transformation by theMatrix. */
  SetVectorialPart(theMatrix: gp_Mat): void;
  /** Replaces the translation part of this transformation by the coordinates of the number triple theCoord. */
  SetTranslationPart(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  /** Assigns the vectorial and translation parts of theT to this transformation. */
  SetTrsf(theT: gp_Trsf): void;
  /** Returns true if the determinant of the vectorial part of this transformation is negative. */
  IsNegative(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this transformation is singular (and therefore, cannot be inverted). Note: The Gauss LU decomposition is used to invert the transformation matrix. Consequently, the transformation is considered as singular if the largest pivot found is less than or equal to gp::Resolution(). Warning If this transformation is singular, it cannot be inverted. */
  IsSingular(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the nature of the transformation. It can be an identity transformation, a rotation, a translation, a mirror transformation (relative to a point, an axis or a plane), a scaling transformation, a compound transformation or some other type of transformation. */
  Form(): gp_TrsfForm;
  /** verify and set the shape of the GTrsf Other or CompoundTrsf Ex : myGTrsf.SetValue(row1,col1,val1); myGTrsf.SetValue(row2,col2,val2); ... myGTrsf.SetForm(); */
  SetForm(): void;
  /** Returns the translation part of the GTrsf. */
  TranslationPart(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Computes the vectorial part of the GTrsf. The returned Matrix is a 3*3 matrix. */
  VectorialPart(): gp_Mat;
  /** Returns the coefficients of the global matrix of transformation. Raises OutOfRange if theRow < 1 or theRow > 3 or theCol < 1 or theCol > 4 */
  Value(theRow: Standard_Integer, theCol: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  Invert(): void;
  /** Computes the reverse transformation. Raises an exception if the matrix of the transformation is not inversible. */
  Inverted(): gp_GTrsf;
  /** Computes the transformation composed from theT and <me>. In a C++ implementation you can also write Tcomposed = <me> * theT. Example : gp_GTrsfT1,T2,Tcomp;............... //composition: Tcomp=T2.Multiplied(T1);//or(Tcomp=T2*T1) //transformationofapoint gp_XYZP(10.,3.,4.); gp_XYZP1(P); Tcomp.Transforms(P1);//usingTcomp gp_XYZP2(P); T1.Transforms(P2);//usingT1thenT2 T2.Transforms(P2);//P1=P2!!! */
  Multiplied(theT: gp_GTrsf): gp_GTrsf;
  /** Computes the transformation composed with <me> and theT. <me> = <me> * theT */
  Multiply(theT: gp_GTrsf): void;
  /** Computes the product of the transformation theT and this transformation and assigns the result to this transformation. this = theT * this */
  PreMultiply(theT: gp_GTrsf): void;
  Power(theN: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Computes: the product of this transformation multiplied by itself theN times, if theN is positive, or the product of the inverse of this transformation multiplied by itself |theN| times, if theN is negative. If theN equals zero, the result is equal to the Identity transformation. I.e.: <me> * <me> * .......* <me>, theN time. if theN =0 <me> = Identity if theN < 0 <me> = <me>.Inverse() *...........* <me>.Inverse(). Raises an exception if N < 0 and if the matrix of the transformation not inversible. */
  Powered(theN: Standard_Integer): gp_GTrsf;
  Transforms_1(theCoord: gp_XYZ): void;
  Transforms_2(): { theX: number; theY: number; theZ: number };
  Trsf(): gp_Trsf;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class gp_GTrsf_1 extends gp_GTrsf {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class gp_GTrsf_2 extends gp_GTrsf {
    constructor(theT: gp_Trsf);
  }

  export declare class gp_GTrsf_3 extends gp_GTrsf {
    constructor(theM: gp_Mat, theV: gp_XYZ);
  }

export declare type GeomAbs_CurveType = {
  GeomAbs_Line: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Circle: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Ellipse: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Hyperbola: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Parabola: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_BezierCurve: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_BSplineCurve: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_OffsetCurve: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_OtherCurve: GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue;
}

export declare type GeomAbs_CurveTypeValue = 'GeomAbs_Line' | 'GeomAbs_Circle' | 'GeomAbs_Ellipse' | 'GeomAbs_Hyperbola' | 'GeomAbs_Parabola' | 'GeomAbs_BezierCurve' | 'GeomAbs_BSplineCurve' | 'GeomAbs_OffsetCurve' | 'GeomAbs_OtherCurve';

export declare type GeomAbs_SurfaceType = {
  GeomAbs_Plane: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Cylinder: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Cone: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Sphere: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Torus: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_BezierSurface: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_BSplineSurface: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_SurfaceOfRevolution: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_SurfaceOfExtrusion: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_OffsetSurface: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_OtherSurface: GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue;
}

export declare type GeomAbs_SurfaceTypeValue = 'GeomAbs_Plane' | 'GeomAbs_Cylinder' | 'GeomAbs_Cone' | 'GeomAbs_Sphere' | 'GeomAbs_Torus' | 'GeomAbs_BezierSurface' | 'GeomAbs_BSplineSurface' | 'GeomAbs_SurfaceOfRevolution' | 'GeomAbs_SurfaceOfExtrusion' | 'GeomAbs_OffsetSurface' | 'GeomAbs_OtherSurface';

export declare type GeomAbs_JoinType = {
  GeomAbs_Arc: GeomAbs_JoinTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Tangent: GeomAbs_JoinTypeValue;
  GeomAbs_Intersection: GeomAbs_JoinTypeValue;
}

export declare type GeomAbs_JoinTypeValue = 'GeomAbs_Arc' | 'GeomAbs_Tangent' | 'GeomAbs_Intersection';

export declare type GeomAbs_Shape = {
  GeomAbs_C0: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_G1: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_C1: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_G2: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_C2: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_C3: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
  GeomAbs_CN: GeomAbs_ShapeValue;
}

export declare type GeomAbs_ShapeValue = 'GeomAbs_C0' | 'GeomAbs_G1' | 'GeomAbs_C1' | 'GeomAbs_G2' | 'GeomAbs_C2' | 'GeomAbs_C3' | 'GeomAbs_CN';

export declare class Poly_Triangle {
  /** Sets the value of the three nodes of this triangle. */
  Set_1(theN1: Standard_Integer, theN2: Standard_Integer, theN3: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Sets the value of the three nodes of this triangle. */
  Set_2(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theNode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns the node indices of this triangle. */
  Get(): { theN1: number; theN2: number; theN3: number };
  /** Get the node of given Index. Raises OutOfRange from Standard if Index is not in 1,2,3 */
  Value(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Get the node of given Index. Raises OutOfRange if Index is not in 1,2,3 */
  ChangeValue(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Poly_Triangle_1 extends Poly_Triangle {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Poly_Triangle_2 extends Poly_Triangle {
    constructor(theN1: Standard_Integer, theN2: Standard_Integer, theN3: Standard_Integer);
  }

export declare class Poly_Connect {
  /** Initialize the algorithm to explore the adjacency data of nodes or triangles for the triangulation theTriangulation. */
  Load(theTriangulation: any): void;
  /** Returns the triangulation analyzed by this tool. */
  Triangulation(): any;
  /** Returns the index of a triangle containing the node at index N in the nodes table specific to the triangulation analyzed by this tool */
  Triangle(N: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns in t1, t2 and t3, the indices of the 3 triangles adjacent to the triangle at index T in the triangles table specific to the triangulation analyzed by this tool. Warning Null indices are returned when there are fewer than 3 adjacent triangles. */
  Triangles(T: Standard_Integer): { t1: number; t2: number; t3: number };
  /** Returns, in n1, n2 and n3, the indices of the 3 nodes adjacent to the triangle referenced at index T in the triangles table specific to the triangulation analyzed by this tool. Warning Null indices are returned when there are fewer than 3 adjacent nodes. */
  Nodes(T: Standard_Integer): { n1: number; n2: number; n3: number };
  /** Initializes an iterator to search for all the triangles containing the node referenced at index N in the nodes table, for the triangulation analyzed by this tool. The iterator is managed by the following functions: More, which checks if there are still elements in the iterator Next, which positions the iterator on the next element Value, which returns the current element. The use of such an iterator provides direct access to the triangles around a particular node, i.e. it avoids iterating on all the component triangles of a triangulation. Example Poly_Connect C(Tr); for (C.Initialize(n1);C.More();C.Next()) { t = C.Value(); } */
  Initialize(N: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns true if there is another element in the iterator defined with the function Initialize (i.e. if there is another triangle containing the given node). */
  More(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Advances the iterator defined with the function Initialize to access the next triangle. Note: There is no action if the iterator is empty (i.e. if the function More returns false).- */
  Next(): void;
  /** Returns the index of the current triangle to which the iterator, defined with the function Initialize, points. This is an index in the triangles table specific to the triangulation analyzed by this tool */
  Value(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Poly_Connect_1 extends Poly_Connect {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Poly_Connect_2 extends Poly_Connect {
    constructor(theTriangulation: any);
  }

export declare class Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation extends Standard_Transient {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Creates a copy of current polygon. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Returns the deflection of this polygon. */
  Deflection_1(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the deflection of this polygon. */
  Deflection_2(theDefl: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the number of nodes for this polygon. Note: If the polygon is closed, the point of closure is repeated at the end of its table of nodes. Thus, on a closed triangle, the function NbNodes returns 4. */
  NbNodes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns node at the given index. */
  Node(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Sets node at the given index. */
  SetNode(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theNode: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns true if parameters are associated with the nodes in this polygon. */
  HasParameters(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns parameter at the given index. */
  Parameter(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Real;
  /** Sets parameter at the given index. */
  SetParameter(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theValue: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the table of the parameters associated with each node in this polygon. Raises exception if array size doesn't much number of polygon nodes. */
  SetParameters(theParameters: any): void;
  /** Returns the table of nodes for this polygon. A node value is an index in the table of nodes specific to an existing triangulation of a shape. */
  Nodes(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  /** Returns the table of the parameters associated with each node in this polygon. Warning! Use the function HasParameters to check if parameters are associated with the nodes in this polygon. */
  Parameters(): any;
  ChangeNodes(): TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  ChangeParameters(): TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1 extends Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(theNbNodes: Standard_Integer, theHasParams: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2 extends Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(Nodes: TColStd_Array1OfInteger);
  }

  export declare class Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3 extends Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(Nodes: TColStd_Array1OfInteger, Parameters: TColStd_Array1OfReal);
  }

export declare class Poly_Triangulation extends Standard_Transient {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Creates full copy of current triangulation. */
  Copy(): any;
  /** Returns the deflection of this triangulation. */
  Deflection_1(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the deflection of this triangulation. */
  Deflection_2(theDeflection: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns initial set of parameters used to generate this triangulation. */
  Parameters_1(): any;
  /** Returns initial set of parameters used to generate this triangulation. */
  Parameters_2(theParams: any): void;
  /** Clears internal arrays of nodes and all attributes. */
  Clear(): void;
  /** Returns TRUE if triangulation has some geometry. */
  HasGeometry(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of nodes for this triangulation. */
  NbNodes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the number of triangles for this triangulation. */
  NbTriangles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns true if 2D nodes are associated with 3D nodes for this triangulation. */
  HasUVNodes(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if nodal normals are defined. */
  HasNormals(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a node at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range 3D point coordinates */
  Node(theIndex: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt;
  /** Sets a node coordinates. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range thePnt 3D point coordinates */
  SetNode(theIndex: Standard_Integer, thePnt: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Returns UV-node at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range 2D point defining UV coordinates */
  UVNode(theIndex: Standard_Integer): gp_Pnt2d;
  /** Sets an UV-node coordinates. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range thePnt UV coordinates */
  SetUVNode(theIndex: Standard_Integer, thePnt: gp_Pnt2d): void;
  /** Returns triangle at the given index. theIndex triangle index within [1, NbTriangles()] range triangle node indices, with each node defined within [1, NbNodes()] range */
  Triangle(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Poly_Triangle;
  /** Sets a triangle. theIndex triangle index within [1, NbTriangles()] range theTriangle triangle node indices, with each node defined within [1, NbNodes()] range */
  SetTriangle(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theTriangle: Poly_Triangle): void;
  /** Returns normal at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range normalized 3D vector defining a surface normal */
  Normal_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer): gp_Dir;
  /** Returns normal at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range normalized 3D vector defining a surface normal */
  Normal_2(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theVec3: NCollection_Vec3<float>): void;
  /** Changes normal at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range theVec3 normalized 3D vector defining a surface normal */
  SetNormal_1(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theNormal: NCollection_Vec3<float>): void;
  /** Changes normal at the given index. theIndex node index within [1, NbNodes()] range theVec3 normalized 3D vector defining a surface normal */
  SetNormal_2(theIndex: Standard_Integer, theNormal: gp_Dir): void;
  /** Returns mesh purpose bits. */
  MeshPurpose(): Poly_MeshPurpose;
  /** Sets mesh purpose bits. */
  SetMeshPurpose(thePurpose: Poly_MeshPurpose): void;
  /** Returns cached min - max range of triangulation data, which is VOID by default (e.g, no cached information). */
  CachedMinMax(): Bnd_Box;
  /** Sets a cached min - max range of this triangulation. The bounding box should exactly match actual range of triangulation data without a gap or transformation, or otherwise undefined behavior will be observed. Passing a VOID range invalidates the cache. */
  SetCachedMinMax(theBox: Bnd_Box): void;
  /** Returns TRUE if there is some cached min - max range of this triangulation. */
  HasCachedMinMax(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Updates cached min - max range of this triangulation with bounding box of nodal data. */
  UpdateCachedMinMax(): void;
  /** Extends the passed box with bounding box of this triangulation. Uses cached min - max range when available and: input transformation theTrsf has no rotation part; theIsAccurate is set to FALSE; no triangulation data available (e.g. it is deferred and not loaded). out] theBox bounding box to extend by this triangulation theTrsf optional transformation theIsAccurate when FALSE, allows using a cached min - max range of this triangulation even for non-identity transformation. FALSE if there is no any data to extend the passed box (no both triangulation and cached min - max range). */
  MinMax(theBox: Bnd_Box, theTrsf: gp_Trsf, theIsAccurate: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns TRUE if node positions are defined with double precision; TRUE by default. */
  IsDoublePrecision(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set if node positions should be defined with double or single precision for 3D and UV nodes. Raises exception if data was already allocated. */
  SetDoublePrecision(theIsDouble: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Method resizing internal arrays of nodes (synchronously for all attributes). theNbNodes new number of nodes theToCopyOld copy old nodes into the new array */
  ResizeNodes(theNbNodes: Standard_Integer, theToCopyOld: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Method resizing an internal array of triangles. theNbTriangles new number of triangles theToCopyOld copy old triangles into the new array */
  ResizeTriangles(theNbTriangles: Standard_Integer, theToCopyOld: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** If an array for UV coordinates is not allocated yet, do it now. */
  AddUVNodes(): void;
  /** Deallocates the UV nodes array. */
  RemoveUVNodes(): void;
  /** If an array for normals is not allocated yet, do it now. */
  AddNormals(): void;
  /** Deallocates the normals array. */
  RemoveNormals(): void;
  /** Compute smooth normals by averaging triangle normals. */
  ComputeNormals(): void;
  /** Returns the table of 3D points for read-only access or NULL if nodes array is undefined. Poly_Triangulation::Node() should be used instead when possible. Returned object should not be used after Poly_Triangulation destruction. */
  MapNodeArray(): any;
  /** Returns the triangle array for read-only access or NULL if triangle array is undefined. Poly_Triangulation::Triangle() should be used instead when possible. Returned object should not be used after Poly_Triangulation destruction. */
  MapTriangleArray(): any;
  /** Returns the table of 2D nodes for read-only access or NULL if UV nodes array is undefined. Poly_Triangulation::UVNode() should be used instead when possible. Returned object should not be used after Poly_Triangulation destruction. */
  MapUVNodeArray(): any;
  /** Returns the table of per-vertex normals for read-only access or NULL if normals array is undefined. Poly_Triangulation::Normal() should be used instead when possible. Returned object should not be used after Poly_Triangulation destruction. */
  MapNormalArray(): any;
  /** Returns an internal array of triangles. Triangle()/SetTriangle() should be used instead in portable code. */
  InternalTriangles(): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  /** Returns an internal array of nodes. Node()/SetNode() should be used instead in portable code. */
  InternalNodes(): Poly_ArrayOfNodes;
  /** Returns an internal array of UV nodes. UBNode()/SetUVNode() should be used instead in portable code. */
  InternalUVNodes(): Poly_ArrayOfUVNodes;
  /** Return an internal array of normals. Normal()/SetNormal() should be used instead in portable code. */
  InternalNormals(): any;
  SetNormals(theNormals: any): void;
  Triangles(): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  ChangeTriangles(): Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  ChangeTriangle(theIndex: Standard_Integer): Poly_Triangle;
  /** Returns number of deferred nodes that can be loaded using LoadDeferredData(). Note: this is estimated values, which might be different from actually loaded values. Always check triangulation size of actually loaded data in code to avoid out-of-range issues. */
  NbDeferredNodes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns number of deferred triangles that can be loaded using LoadDeferredData(). Note: this is estimated values, which might be different from actually loaded values Always check triangulation size of actually loaded data in code to avoid out-of-range issues. */
  NbDeferredTriangles(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns TRUE if there is some triangulation data that can be loaded using LoadDeferredData(). */
  HasDeferredData(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Loads triangulation data into itself from some deferred storage using specified shared input file system. */
  LoadDeferredData(theFileSystem: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Loads triangulation data into new Poly_Triangulation object from some deferred storage using specified shared input file system. */
  DetachedLoadDeferredData(theFileSystem: any): any;
  /** Releases triangulation data if it has connected deferred storage. */
  UnloadDeferredData(): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Poly_Triangulation_1 extends Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Poly_Triangulation_2 extends Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(theNbNodes: Standard_Integer, theNbTriangles: Standard_Integer, theHasUVNodes: Standard_Boolean, theHasNormals: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Triangulation_3 extends Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(Nodes: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, Triangles: Poly_Array1OfTriangle);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Triangulation_4 extends Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(Nodes: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, UVNodes: TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d, Triangles: Poly_Array1OfTriangle);
  }

  export declare class Poly_Triangulation_5 extends Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(theTriangulation: any);
  }

export declare class TopLoc_Location {
  /** Returns true if this location is equal to the Identity transformation. */
  IsIdentity(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Resets this location to the Identity transformation. */
  Identity(): void;
  /** Returns the first elementary datum of the Location. Use the NextLocation function recursively to access the other data comprising this location. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this location is empty. */
  FirstDatum(): any;
  /** Returns the power elevation of the first elementary datum. Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this location is empty. */
  FirstPower(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns a Location representing <me> without the first datum. We have the relation: <me> = NextLocation() * FirstDatum() ^ FirstPower() Exceptions Standard_NoSuchObject if this location is empty. */
  NextLocation(): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns the transformation associated to the coordinate system. */
  Transformation(): gp_Trsf;
  /** Returns the inverse of <me>. <me> * Inverted() is an Identity. */
  Inverted(): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns <me> * <Other>, the elementary datums are concatenated. */
  Multiplied(Other: TopLoc_Location): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns <me> / <Other>. */
  Divided(Other: TopLoc_Location): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns <Other>.Inverted() * <me>. */
  Predivided(Other: TopLoc_Location): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns me at the power <pwr>. If <pwr> is zero returns Identity. <pwr> can be lower than zero (usual meaning for powers). */
  Powered(pwr: Standard_Integer): TopLoc_Location;
  /** Returns a hashed value for this local coordinate system. This value is used, with map tables, to store and retrieve the object easily a computed hash code */
  HashCode(): Standard_Size;
  /** Returns true if this location and the location Other have the same elementary data, i.e. contain the same series of TopLoc_Datum3D and respective powers. This method is an alias for operator ==. */
  IsEqual(theOther: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this location and the location Other do not have the same elementary data, i.e. do not contain the same series of TopLoc_Datum3D and respective powers. This method is an alias for operator !=. */
  IsDifferent(theOther: TopLoc_Location): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Clear myItems. */
  Clear(): void;
  static ScalePrec(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TopLoc_Location_1 extends TopLoc_Location {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TopLoc_Location_2 extends TopLoc_Location {
    constructor(theOther: TopLoc_Location);
  }

  export declare class TopLoc_Location_3 extends TopLoc_Location {
    constructor(theOther: TopLoc_Location);
  }

  export declare class TopLoc_Location_4 extends TopLoc_Location {
    constructor(T: gp_Trsf);
  }

  export declare class TopLoc_Location_5 extends TopLoc_Location {
    constructor(D: any);
  }

export declare class Bnd_OBB {
  /** Creates new OBB covering every point in theListOfPoints. Tolerance of every such point is set by *theListOfTolerances array. If this array is not void (not null-pointer) then the resulted Bnd_OBB will be enlarged using tolerances of points lying on the box surface. <theIsOptimal> flag defines the mode in which the OBB will be built. Constructing Optimal box takes more time, but the resulting box is usually more tight. In case of construction of Optimal OBB more possible axes are checked. */
  ReBuild(theListOfPoints: TColgp_Array1OfPnt, theListOfTolerances: TColStd_Array1OfReal, theIsOptimal: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Sets the center of OBB. */
  SetCenter(theCenter: gp_Pnt): void;
  /** Sets the X component of OBB - direction and size. */
  SetXComponent(theXDirection: gp_Dir, theHXSize: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the Y component of OBB - direction and size. */
  SetYComponent(theYDirection: gp_Dir, theHYSize: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Sets the Z component of OBB - direction and size. */
  SetZComponent(theZDirection: gp_Dir, theHZSize: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the local coordinates system of this oriented box. So that applying it to axis-aligned box ((-XHSize, -YHSize, -ZHSize), (XHSize, YHSize, ZHSize)) will produce this oriented box. gp_TrsfaLoc; aLoc.SetTransformation(theOBB.Position(),gp::XOY()); */
  Position(): gp_Ax3;
  /** Returns the center of OBB. */
  Center(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the X Direction of OBB. */
  XDirection(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the Y Direction of OBB. */
  YDirection(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the Z Direction of OBB. */
  ZDirection(): gp_XYZ;
  /** Returns the X Dimension of OBB. */
  XHSize(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Y Dimension of OBB. */
  YHSize(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Z Dimension of OBB. */
  ZHSize(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the half-size dimensions of the OBB as a HalfSizes structure. Can be used with C++17 structured bindings: auto[aHX,aHY,aHZ]=anOBB.GetHalfSizes(); */
  GetHalfSizes(): HalfSizes;
  /** Checks if the box is empty. */
  IsVoid(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Clears this box. */
  SetVoid(): void;
  /** Sets the flag for axes aligned box. */
  SetAABox(theFlag: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns TRUE if the box is axes aligned. */
  IsAABox(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Enlarges the box with the given value. */
  Enlarge(theGapAdd: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the array of vertices in <this>. The local coordinate of the vertex depending on the index of the array are follow: Index == 0: (-XHSize(), -YHSize(), -ZHSize()) Index == 1: ( XHSize(), -YHSize(), -ZHSize()) Index == 2: (-XHSize(), YHSize(), -ZHSize()) Index == 3: ( XHSize(), YHSize(), -ZHSize()) Index == 4: (-XHSize(), -YHSize(), ZHSize()) Index == 5: ( XHSize(), -YHSize(), ZHSize()) Index == 6: (-XHSize(), YHSize(), ZHSize()) Index == 7: ( XHSize(), YHSize(), ZHSize()). */
  GetVertex(theP: gp_Pnt[8]): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns square diagonal of this box. */
  SquareExtent(): Standard_Real;
  /** Check if the box do not interfere the other box. */
  IsOut_1(theOther: Bnd_OBB): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Check if the box do not interfere the other box. */
  IsOut_2(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the point is inside or on the boundary of this OBB. */
  Contains(theP: gp_Pnt): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the other OBB intersects or is inside this OBB. */
  Intersects(theOther: Bnd_OBB): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Check if the theOther is completely inside *this. */
  IsCompletelyInside(theOther: Bnd_OBB): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Rebuilds this in order to include all previous objects (which it was created from) and theOther. */
  Add_1(theOther: Bnd_OBB): void;
  /** Rebuilds this in order to include all previous objects (which it was created from) and theOther. */
  Add_2(theP: gp_Pnt): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Bnd_OBB_1 extends Bnd_OBB {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Bnd_OBB_2 extends Bnd_OBB {
    constructor(theCenter: gp_Pnt, theXDirection: gp_Dir, theYDirection: gp_Dir, theZDirection: gp_Dir, theHXSize: Standard_Real, theHYSize: Standard_Real, theHZSize: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class Bnd_OBB_3 extends Bnd_OBB {
    constructor(theBox: Bnd_Box);
  }

export declare class Precision {
  constructor();
  /** Returns the recommended precision value when checking the equality of two angles (given in radians). double Angle1 = ... , Angle2 = ... ; If ( std::abs( Angle2 - Angle1 ) < Precision::Angular() ) ... The tolerance of angular equality may be used to check the parallelism of two vectors : gp_Vec V1, V2 ; V1 = ... V2 = ... If ( V1.IsParallel (V2, Precision::Angular() ) ) ... The tolerance of angular equality is equal to 1.e-12. Note : The tolerance of angular equality can be used when working with scalar products or cross products since sines and angles are equivalent for small angles. Therefore, in order to check whether two unit vectors are perpendicular : gp_Dir D1, D2 ; D1 = ... D2 = ... you can use : If ( std::abs( D1.D2 ) < Precision::Angular() ) ... (although the function IsNormal does exist). */
  static Angular(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the recommended precision value when checking coincidence of two points in real space. The tolerance of confusion is used for testing a 3D distance : Two points are considered to be coincident if their distance is smaller than the tolerance of confusion. gp_Pnt P1, P2 ; P1 = ... P2 = ... if ( P1.IsEqual ( P2 , Precision::Confusion() ) ) then ... A vector is considered to be null if it has a null length : gp_Vec V ; V = ... if ( V.Magnitude() < Precision::Confusion() ) then ... The tolerance of confusion is equal to 1.e-7. The value of the tolerance of confusion is also used to define : the tolerance of intersection, and the tolerance of approximation. Note : As a rule, coordinate values in Cas.Cade are not dimensioned, so 1. represents one user unit, whatever value the unit may have : the millimeter, the meter, the inch, or any other unit. Let's say that Cas.Cade algorithms are written to be tuned essentially with mechanical design applications, on the basis of the millimeter. However, these algorithms may be used with any other unit but the tolerance criterion does no longer have the same signification. So pay particular attention to the type of your application, in relation with the impact of your unit on the precision criterion. For example in mechanical design, if the unit is the millimeter, the tolerance of confusion corresponds to a distance of 1 / 10000 micron, which is rather difficult to measure. However in other types of applications, such as cartography, where the kilometer is frequently used, the tolerance of confusion corresponds to a greater distance (1 / 10 millimeter). This distance becomes easily measurable, but only within a restricted space which contains some small objects of the complete scene. */
  static Confusion(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns square of Confusion. Created for speed and convenience. */
  static SquareConfusion(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value at machine epsilon level, used for low-level numerical computations and floating-point comparisons. Unlike the geometric tolerances (Confusion, Intersection, Approximation) which are application-level values for modeling operations, this value represents the fundamental limit of floating-point arithmetic precision. Typical use cases include: Checking if squared magnitudes are effectively zero (e.g., vector.SquareMagnitude() < SquareComputational()) Division-by-zero protection in numerical algorithms Convergence criteria in iterative solvers at machine precision level Detecting numerical degeneracies in low-level computations The computational tolerance is equal to DBL_EPSILON (approximately 2.22e-16), which is the smallest positive value such that 1.0 + eps != 1.0 in double precision floating-point arithmetic. This is the fundamental machine epsilon for double (double) type. Note: This value should NOT be used for geometric comparisons. Use Precision::Confusion() for comparing geometric distances, Precision::Angular() for angles, etc. */
  static Computational(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns square of Computational. Created for speed and convenience when comparing squared values. */
  static SquareComputational(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the precision value in real space, frequently used by intersection algorithms to decide that a solution is reached. This function provides an acceptable level of precision for an intersection process to define the adjustment limits. The tolerance of intersection is designed to ensure that a point computed by an iterative algorithm as the intersection between two curves is indeed on the intersection. It is obvious that two tangent curves are close to each other, on a large distance. An iterative algorithm of intersection may find points on these curves within the scope of the confusion tolerance, but still far from the true intersection point. In order to force the intersection algorithm to continue the iteration process until a correct point is found on the tangent objects, the tolerance of intersection must be smaller than the tolerance of confusion. On the other hand, the tolerance of intersection must be large enough to minimize the time required by the process to converge to a solution. The tolerance of intersection is equal to : Precision::Confusion() / 100. (that is, 1.e-9). */
  static Intersection(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the precision value in real space, frequently used by approximation algorithms. This function provides an acceptable level of precision for an approximation process to define adjustment limits. The tolerance of approximation is designed to ensure an acceptable computation time when performing an approximation process. That is why the tolerance of approximation is greater than the tolerance of confusion. The tolerance of approximation is equal to : Precision::Confusion() * 10. (that is, 1.e-6). You may use a smaller tolerance in an approximation algorithm, but this option might be costly. */
  static Approximation(): Standard_Real;
  /** Convert a real space precision to a parametric space precision. <T> is the mean value of the length of the tangent of the curve or the surface. Value is P / T */
  static Parametric_1(P: Standard_Real, T: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used : to test the coincidence of two points in the real space, by using parameter values, or to test the equality of two parameter values in a parametric space. The parametric tolerance of confusion is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of confusion is equal to : Precision::Confusion() / 100., or Precision::Confusion() / T. The value of the parametric tolerance of confusion is also used to define : the parametric tolerance of intersection, and the parametric tolerance of approximation. Warning It is rather difficult to define a unique precision value in parametric space. First consider a curve (c) ; if M is the point of parameter u and M' the point of parameter u+du on the curve, call 'parametric tangent' at point M, for the variation du of the parameter, the quantity : T(u,du)=MM'/du (where MM' represents the distance between the two points M and M', in the real space). Consider the other curve resulting from a scaling transformation of (c) with a scale factor equal to The 'parametric tangent' at the point of parameter u of this curve is ten times greater than the previous one. This shows that for two different curves, the distance between two points on the curve, resulting from the same variation of parameter du, may vary considerably. Moreover, the variation of the parameter along the curve is generally not proportional to the curvilinear abscissa along the curve. So the distance between two points resulting from the same variation of parameter du, at two different points of a curve, may completely differ. Moreover, the parameterization of a surface may generate two quite different 'parametric tangent' values in the u or in the v parametric direction. Last, close to the poles of a sphere (the points which correspond to the values -Pi/2. and Pi/2. of the v parameter) the u parameter may change from 0 to 2.Pi without impacting on the resulting point. Therefore, take great care when adjusting a parametric tolerance to your own algorithm. */
  static PConfusion_1(T: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns square of PConfusion. Created for speed and convenience. */
  static SquarePConfusion(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used by intersection algorithms, to decide that a solution is reached. The purpose of this function is to provide an acceptable level of precision in parametric space, for an intersection process to define the adjustment limits. The parametric tolerance of intersection is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of intersection is equal to : Precision::Intersection() / 100., or Precision::Intersection() / T. */
  static PIntersection_1(T: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used by approximation algorithms. The purpose of this function is to provide an acceptable level of precision in parametric space, for an approximation process to define the adjustment limits. The parametric tolerance of approximation is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of intersection is equal to : Precision::Approximation() / 100., or Precision::Approximation() / T. */
  static PApproximation_1(T: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Convert a real space precision to a parametric space precision. <T> is the mean value of the length of the tangent of the curve or the surface. Value is P / T */
  static Parametric_2(P: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used : to test the coincidence of two points in the real space, by using parameter values, or to test the equality of two parameter values in a parametric space. The parametric tolerance of confusion is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of confusion is equal to : Precision::Confusion() / 100., or Precision::Confusion() / T. The value of the parametric tolerance of confusion is also used to define : the parametric tolerance of intersection, and the parametric tolerance of approximation. Warning It is rather difficult to define a unique precision value in parametric space. First consider a curve (c) ; if M is the point of parameter u and M' the point of parameter u+du on the curve, call 'parametric tangent' at point M, for the variation du of the parameter, the quantity : T(u,du)=MM'/du (where MM' represents the distance between the two points M and M', in the real space). Consider the other curve resulting from a scaling transformation of (c) with a scale factor equal to The 'parametric tangent' at the point of parameter u of this curve is ten times greater than the previous one. This shows that for two different curves, the distance between two points on the curve, resulting from the same variation of parameter du, may vary considerably. Moreover, the variation of the parameter along the curve is generally not proportional to the curvilinear abscissa along the curve. So the distance between two points resulting from the same variation of parameter du, at two different points of a curve, may completely differ. Moreover, the parameterization of a surface may generate two quite different 'parametric tangent' values in the u or in the v parametric direction. Last, close to the poles of a sphere (the points which correspond to the values -Pi/2. and Pi/2. of the v parameter) the u parameter may change from 0 to 2.Pi without impacting on the resulting point. Therefore, take great care when adjusting a parametric tolerance to your own algorithm. */
  static PConfusion_2(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used by intersection algorithms, to decide that a solution is reached. The purpose of this function is to provide an acceptable level of precision in parametric space, for an intersection process to define the adjustment limits. The parametric tolerance of intersection is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of intersection is equal to : Precision::Intersection() / 100., or Precision::Intersection() / T. */
  static PIntersection_2(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns a precision value in parametric space, which may be used by approximation algorithms. The purpose of this function is to provide an acceptable level of precision in parametric space, for an approximation process to define the adjustment limits. The parametric tolerance of approximation is designed to give a mean value in relation with the dimension of the curve or the surface. It considers that a variation of parameter equal to 1. along a curve (or an isoparametric curve of a surface) generates a segment whose length is equal to 100. (default value), or T. The parametric tolerance of intersection is equal to : Precision::Approximation() / 100., or Precision::Approximation() / T. */
  static PApproximation_2(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if R may be considered as an infinite number. Currently std::abs(R) > 1e100 */
  static IsInfinite(R: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if R may be considered as a positive infinite number. Currently R > 1e100 */
  static IsPositiveInfinite(R: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if R may be considered as a negative infinite number. Currently R < -1e100 */
  static IsNegativeInfinite(R: Standard_Real): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a big number that can be considered as infinite. Use -Infinite() for a negative big number. */
  static Infinite(): Standard_Real;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Message_ProgressRange {
  /** Returns true if ProgressIndicator signals UserBreak. */
  UserBreak(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns false if ProgressIndicator signals UserBreak. */
  More(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this progress range is attached to some indicator. */
  IsActive(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Closes the current range and advances indicator. */
  Close(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Message_ProgressRange_1 extends Message_ProgressRange {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Message_ProgressRange_2 extends Message_ProgressRange {
    constructor(theOther: Message_ProgressRange);
  }

export declare class NCollection_BaseList {
  Extent(): Standard_Integer;
  IsEmpty(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns attached allocator. */
  Allocator(): TDF_HAllocator;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString {
  /** Appends the other extended string to this extended string. Note that this method is an alias of operator +=. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); TCollection_ExtendedStringanotherString(u"World"); aString+=anotherString; //Result:aString==u"HelloWorld" theOther the string to append */
  AssignCat_1(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Appends the other extended string to this extended string. Note that this method is an alias of operator +=. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); TCollection_ExtendedStringanotherString(u"World"); aString+=anotherString; //Result:aString==u"HelloWorld" theOther the string to append */
  AssignCat_2(theChar: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Appends the other extended string to this extended string. Note that this method is an alias of operator +=. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); TCollection_ExtendedStringanotherString(u"World"); aString+=anotherString; //Result:aString==u"HelloWorld" theOther the string to append */
  AssignCat_3(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Appends the other extended string to this extended string. Note that this method is an alias of operator +=. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); TCollection_ExtendedStringanotherString(u"World"); aString+=anotherString; //Result:aString==u"HelloWorld" theOther the string to append */
  AssignCat_4(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Appends the other extended string to this extended string. Note that this method is an alias of operator +=. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); TCollection_ExtendedStringanotherString(u"World"); aString+=anotherString; //Result:aString==u"HelloWorld" theOther the string to append */
  AssignCat_6(theStringView: any): void;
  /** Core implementation: Concatenates char16_t string (pointer and length) and returns a new string. theOther pointer to the string to append theLength length of the string to append new string with theOther appended */
  Cat_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Core implementation: Concatenates char16_t string (pointer and length) and returns a new string. theOther pointer to the string to append theLength length of the string to append new string with theOther appended */
  Cat_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Core implementation: Concatenates char16_t string (pointer and length) and returns a new string. theOther pointer to the string to append theLength length of the string to append new string with theOther appended */
  Cat_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Substitutes all the characters equal to theChar by theNewChar in this ExtendedString. The substitution can be case sensitive. If you don't use default case sensitive, no matter whether theChar is uppercase or not. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Histake"); aString.ChangeAll(u'H',u'M'); //Result:aString==u"Mistake" theChar the character to replace theNewChar the replacement character */
  ChangeAll(theChar: Standard_ExtCharacter, theNewChar: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Removes all characters contained in this string. This produces an empty ExtendedString. */
  Clear(): void;
  /** Core implementation: Copy from a char16_t pointer with explicit length. theString pointer to the string to copy theLength length of the string to copy */
  Copy_1(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Core implementation: Copy from a char16_t pointer with explicit length. theString pointer to the string to copy theLength length of the string to copy */
  Copy_2(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Core implementation: Copy from a char16_t pointer with explicit length. theString pointer to the string to copy theLength length of the string to copy */
  Copy_3(theFromWhere: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Moves string without reallocations. theOther the string to move from */
  Move(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Exchange the data of two strings (without reallocating memory). theOther the string to exchange data with */
  Swap(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Insert a Character at position theWhere. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"hynot?"); aString.Insert(1,u'W'); //Result:aString==u"Whynot?" theWhere the position to insert at (1-based) theWhat the character to insert */
  Insert_1(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Insert a Character at position theWhere. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"hynot?"); aString.Insert(1,u'W'); //Result:aString==u"Whynot?" theWhere the position to insert at (1-based) theWhat the character to insert */
  Insert_2(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Insert a Character at position theWhere. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"hynot?"); aString.Insert(1,u'W'); //Result:aString==u"Whynot?" theWhere the position to insert at (1-based) theWhat the character to insert */
  Insert_3(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Insert a Character at position theWhere. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"hynot?"); aString.Insert(1,u'W'); //Result:aString==u"Whynot?" theWhere the position to insert at (1-based) theWhat the character to insert */
  Insert_4(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Returns True if this string contains no characters. */
  IsEmpty(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string equals theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are equal, false otherwise */
  IsEqual_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string equals theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are equal, false otherwise */
  IsEqual_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string equals theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are equal, false otherwise */
  IsEqual_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string differs from theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are different, false otherwise */
  IsDifferent_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string differs from theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are different, false otherwise */
  IsDifferent_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string differs from theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are different, false otherwise */
  IsDifferent_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically less than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is less than theOther */
  IsLess_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically less than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is less than theOther */
  IsLess_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically less than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is less than theOther */
  IsLess_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically greater than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is greater than theOther */
  IsGreater_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically greater than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is greater than theOther */
  IsGreater_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Returns TRUE if this string is lexicographically greater than theOther. theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if this string is greater than theOther */
  IsGreater_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string starts with theStartString. theStartString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string starts with theStartString */
  StartsWith_1(theStartString: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string starts with theStartString. theStartString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string starts with theStartString */
  StartsWith_2(theStartString: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string starts with theStartString. theStartString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string starts with theStartString */
  StartsWith_3(theStartString: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string ends with theEndString. theEndString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string ends with theEndString */
  EndsWith_1(theEndString: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string ends with theEndString. theEndString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string ends with theEndString */
  EndsWith_2(theEndString: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Core implementation: Determines whether this string ends with theEndString. theEndString pointer to the string to check for theLength length of the string to check for true if this string ends with theEndString */
  EndsWith_3(theEndString: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the ExtendedString contains only "Ascii Range" characters. true if string contains only ASCII characters */
  IsAscii(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of 16-bit code units (might be greater than number of Unicode symbols if string contains surrogate pairs). the number of 16-bit code units */
  Length(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Removes every theWhat characters from this string. theWhat the character to remove */
  RemoveAll(theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Erases theHowMany characters from position theWhere, theWhere included. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); aString.Remove(2,2);//erases2charactersfromposition2 //Result:aString==u"Hlo" theWhere the position to start erasing from (1-based) theHowMany the number of characters to erase */
  Remove(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theHowMany: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the beginning. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  Search_1(theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the beginning. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  Search_2(theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Integer;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the beginning. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  Search_3(theWhat: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Integer;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the end. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match from end (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  SearchFromEnd_1(theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the end. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match from end (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  SearchFromEnd_2(theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): Standard_Integer;
  /** Core implementation: Searches for theWhat (pointer and length) from the end. theWhat pointer to the string to search for theLength length of the string to search for the position of first match from end (1-based), or -1 if not found */
  SearchFromEnd_3(theWhat: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Integer;
  /** Replaces one character in the ExtendedString at position theWhere. If theWhere is less than zero or greater than the length of this string an exception is raised. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Garbake"); aString.SetValue(6,u'g'); //Result:aString==u"Garbage" theWhere the position to replace at (1-based) theWhat the character to replace with */
  SetValue_1(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Replaces one character in the ExtendedString at position theWhere. If theWhere is less than zero or greater than the length of this string an exception is raised. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Garbake"); aString.SetValue(6,u'g'); //Result:aString==u"Garbage" theWhere the position to replace at (1-based) theWhat the character to replace with */
  SetValue_2(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Replaces one character in the ExtendedString at position theWhere. If theWhere is less than zero or greater than the length of this string an exception is raised. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Garbake"); aString.SetValue(6,u'g'); //Result:aString==u"Garbage" theWhere the position to replace at (1-based) theWhat the character to replace with */
  SetValue_3(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Replaces one character in the ExtendedString at position theWhere. If theWhere is less than zero or greater than the length of this string an exception is raised. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Garbake"); aString.SetValue(6,u'g'); //Result:aString==u"Garbage" theWhere the position to replace at (1-based) theWhat the character to replace with */
  SetValue_4(theWhere: Standard_Integer, theWhat: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Copies characters from this string starting from index theFromIndex to the index theToIndex (inclusive). Raises an exception if theToIndex or theFromIndex is out of bounds. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"abcdefg"); TCollection_ExtendedStringaSubString=aString.SubString(3,6); //Result:aSubString==u"cdef" theFromIndex the starting index (1-based) theToIndex the ending index (1-based, inclusive) the substring from theFromIndex to theToIndex */
  SubString(theFromIndex: Standard_Integer, theToIndex: Standard_Integer): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Splits this extended string into two sub-strings at position theWhere. The second sub-string (from position theWhere + 1 of this string to the end) is returned in a new extended string. This extended string is modified: its last characters are removed, it becomes equal to the first sub-string (from the first character to position theWhere). Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"abcdefg"); TCollection_ExtendedStringaSecondPart=aString.Split(3); //Result:aString==u"abc"andaSecondPart==u"defg" theWhere the position to split at (0-based) the second part of the split string */
  Split(theWhere: Standard_Integer): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Extracts theWhichOne token from this string. By default, the theSeparators is set to space and tabulation. By default, the token extracted is the first one (theWhichOne = 1). theSeparators contains all separators you need. If no token indexed by theWhichOne is found, it returns an empty ExtendedString. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Thisisamessage"); TCollection_ExtendedStringaToken1=aString.Token(); //Result:aToken1==u"This" TCollection_ExtendedStringaToken2=aString.Token(u"",4); //Result:aToken2==u"message" TCollection_ExtendedStringaToken3=aString.Token(u"",2); //Result:aToken3==u"is" TCollection_ExtendedStringaToken4=aString.Token(u"",9); //Result:aToken4==u"" TCollection_ExtendedStringbString(u"1234;test:message,value"); TCollection_ExtendedStringbToken1=bString.Token(u";:,",4); //Result:bToken1==u"value" theSeparators the separator characters theWhichOne the token number to extract (1-based) the extracted token */
  Token(theSeparators: Standard_ExtCharacter, theWhichOne: Standard_Integer): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Returns pointer to ExtString (char16_t*). the char16_t string representation */
  ToExtString(): Standard_ExtCharacter;
  /** Truncates this string to theHowMany characters. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"HelloDolly"); aString.Trunc(3); //Result:aString==u"Hel" theHowMany the number of characters to keep */
  Trunc(theHowMany: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns character at position theWhere in this string. If theWhere is less than zero or greater than the length of this string, an exception is raised. Example: TCollection_ExtendedStringaString(u"Hello"); char16_taChar=aString.Value(2); //Result:aChar==u'e' theWhere the position to get character from (1-based) the character at the specified position */
  Value(theWhere: Standard_Integer): Standard_ExtCharacter;
  /** Returns a hashed value for the extended string. Note: if string is ASCII, the computed value is the same as the value computed with the HashCode function on a TCollection_AsciiString string composed with equivalent ASCII characters. a computed hash code */
  HashCode(): Standard_Size;
  /** Returns a const reference to a single shared empty string instance. This method provides access to a static empty string to avoid creating temporary empty strings. Use this method instead of constructing empty strings when you need a const reference. Example: constTCollection_ExtendedString&anEmptyStr=TCollection_ExtendedString::EmptyString(); //UseanEmptyStrinsteadofTCollection_ExtendedString() const reference to static empty string */
  static EmptyString(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Core implementation: Returns true if this string equals theOther (pointer and length). theOther pointer to the string to compare with theLength length of the string to compare with true if strings are equal, false otherwise */
  static IsEqual_4(theString1: TCollection_ExtendedString, theString2: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns expected CString length in UTF8 coding (like strlen, without null terminator). It can be used for memory calculation before converting to CString containing symbols in UTF8 coding. For external allocation, use: char* buf = new char[str.LengthOfCString() + 1]; expected UTF-8 string length */
  LengthOfCString(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Removes all space characters in the beginning of the string. */
  LeftAdjust(): void;
  /** Removes all space characters at the end of the string. */
  RightAdjust(): void;
  /** Left justify. Length becomes equal to theWidth and the new characters are equal to theFiller. If theWidth < Length nothing happens. theWidth the desired width of the string theFiller the character to fill with */
  LeftJustify(theWidth: Standard_Integer, theFiller: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Right justify. Length becomes equal to theWidth and the new characters are equal to theFiller. If theWidth < Length nothing happens. theWidth the desired width of the string theFiller the character to fill with */
  RightJustify(theWidth: Standard_Integer, theFiller: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Modifies this string so that its length becomes equal to theWidth and the new characters are equal to theFiller. New characters are added both at the beginning and at the end of this string. If theWidth is less than the length of this string, nothing happens. theWidth the desired width of the string theFiller the character to fill with */
  Center(theWidth: Standard_Integer, theFiller: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Converts the first character into its corresponding upper-case character and the other characters into lowercase. Only ASCII characters (a-z, A-Z) are affected by case conversion. */
  Capitalize(): void;
  /** Core implementation: Inserts char16_t string (pointer and length) at the beginning. theOther pointer to the string to prepend theLength length of the string to prepend */
  Prepend_1(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Core implementation: Inserts char16_t string (pointer and length) at the beginning. theOther pointer to the string to prepend theLength length of the string to prepend */
  Prepend_2(theOther: Standard_ExtCharacter): void;
  /** Core implementation: Inserts char16_t string (pointer and length) at the beginning. theOther pointer to the string to prepend theLength length of the string to prepend */
  Prepend_3(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Returns the index of the first character of this string that is present in theSet. The search begins at index theFromIndex and ends at index theToIndex. Returns zero if failure. theSet the set of characters to search for theFromIndex the starting index for search (1-based) theToIndex the ending index for search (1-based) the index of first character found in set, or 0 if not found */
  FirstLocationInSet(theSet: TCollection_ExtendedString, theFromIndex: Standard_Integer, theToIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the index of the first character of this string that is NOT present in theSet. The search begins at index theFromIndex and ends at index theToIndex. Returns zero if failure. theSet the set of characters to check against theFromIndex the starting index for search (1-based) theToIndex the ending index for search (1-based) the index of first character not in set, or 0 if not found */
  FirstLocationNotInSet(theSet: TCollection_ExtendedString, theFromIndex: Standard_Integer, theToIndex: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** Converts this extended string containing a numeric expression to an Integer. the integer value */
  IntegerValue(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns True if this extended string contains an integer value. true if string represents an integer value */
  IsIntegerValue(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Converts this extended string containing a numeric expression to a Real. the real value */
  RealValue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns True if this extended string starts with characters that can be interpreted as a real value. theToCheckFull when TRUE, checks if entire string defines a real value; otherwise checks if string starts with a real value true if string represents a real value */
  IsRealValue(theToCheckFull: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the strings contain same characters. theOther the string to compare with theIsCaseSensitive flag indicating case sensitivity When case-insensitive, only ASCII characters (a-z, A-Z) are affected. true if strings contain same characters */
  IsSameString(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString, theIsCaseSensitive: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_1 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_2 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theString: Standard_Character, theIsMultiByte: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_3 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_4 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theStringUtf: Standard_WideChar);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_5 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theChar: Standard_Character);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_6 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theChar: Standard_ExtCharacter);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_7 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theLength: Standard_Integer, theFiller: Standard_ExtCharacter);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_8 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theValue: Standard_Integer);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_9 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theValue: Standard_Real);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_10 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theString: TCollection_ExtendedString);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_11 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theOther: TCollection_ExtendedString);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_12 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theString: XCAFDoc_PartId, theIsMultiByte: Standard_Boolean);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_13 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theString: Standard_ExtCharacter, theLength: Standard_Integer);
  }

  export declare class TCollection_ExtendedString_15 extends TCollection_ExtendedString {
    constructor(theStringView: any);
  }

export declare class Standard_Transient {
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  /** Returns type descriptor of Standard_Transient class. */
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Returns a type descriptor about this object. */
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  /** Returns a true value if this is an instance of Type. */
  IsInstance_1(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns a true value if this is an instance of Type. */
  IsInstance_2(theTypeName: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this is an instance of Type or an instance of any class that inherits from Type. Note that multiple inheritance is not supported by OCCT RTTI mechanism. */
  IsKind_1(theType: Handle_Standard_Type): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this is an instance of Type or an instance of any class that inherits from Type. Note that multiple inheritance is not supported by OCCT RTTI mechanism. */
  IsKind_2(theTypeName: Standard_Character): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns non-const pointer to this object (like const_cast). For protection against creating handle to objects allocated in stack or call from constructor, it will raise exception Standard_ProgramError if reference counter is zero. */
  This(): Standard_Transient;
  /** Get the reference counter of this object. */
  GetRefCount(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Increments the reference counter of this object. Uses relaxed memory ordering since incrementing only requires atomicity, not synchronization with other memory operations. */
  IncrementRefCounter(): void;
  /** Decrements the reference counter of this object; returns the decremented value. Uses release ordering for the decrement to ensure all writes to the object are visible before the count reaches zero. An acquire fence is added only when the count reaches zero, ensuring proper synchronization before deletion. This is more efficient than using acq_rel for every decrement. */
  DecrementRefCounter(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Memory deallocator for transient classes. */
  Delete(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Standard_Transient_1 extends Standard_Transient {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Standard_Transient_2 extends Standard_Transient {
    constructor(a: Standard_Transient);
  }

export declare class Quantity_Color {
  /** Returns the name of the nearest color from the Quantity_NameOfColor enumeration. */
  Name_1(): Quantity_NameOfColor;
  /** Updates the color from specified named color. */
  SetValues_1(theName: Quantity_NameOfColor): void;
  /** Return the color as vector of 3 float elements. */
  Rgb(): any;
  /** Returns in theC1, theC2 and theC3 the components of this color according to the color system definition theType. */
  Values(theType: Quantity_TypeOfColor): { theC1: number; theC2: number; theC3: number };
  /** Updates the color from specified named color. */
  SetValues_2(theC1: Standard_Real, theC2: Standard_Real, theC3: Standard_Real, theType: Quantity_TypeOfColor): void;
  /** Returns the Red component (quantity of red) of the color within range [0.0; 1.0]. */
  Red(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Green component (quantity of green) of the color within range [0.0; 1.0]. */
  Green(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Blue component (quantity of blue) of the color within range [0.0; 1.0]. */
  Blue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Hue component (hue angle) of the color in degrees within range [0.0; 360.0], 0.0 being Red. -1.0 is a special value reserved for grayscale color (S should be 0.0) */
  Hue(): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the Light component (value of the lightness) of the color within range [0.0; 1.0]. */
  Light(): Standard_Real;
  /** Increases or decreases the intensity (variation of the lightness). The delta is a percentage. Any value greater than zero will increase the intensity. The variation is expressed as a percentage of the current value. */
  ChangeIntensity(theDelta: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns the Saturation component (value of the saturation) of the color within range [0.0; 1.0]. */
  Saturation(): Standard_Real;
  /** Increases or decreases the contrast (variation of the saturation). The delta is a percentage. Any value greater than zero will increase the contrast. The variation is expressed as a percentage of the current value. */
  ChangeContrast(theDelta: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Returns TRUE if the distance between two colors is greater than Epsilon(). */
  IsDifferent(theOther: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns TRUE if the distance between two colors is no greater than Epsilon(). */
  IsEqual(theOther: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the distance between two colors. It's a value between 0 and the square root of 3 (the black/white distance). */
  Distance(theColor: Quantity_Color): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the square of distance between two colors. */
  SquareDistance(theColor: Quantity_Color): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the percentage change of contrast and intensity between this and another color. <DC> and <DI> are percentages, either positive or negative. The calculation is with respect to this color. If <DC> is positive then <me> is more contrasty. If <DI> is positive then <me> is more intense. */
  Delta(theColor: Quantity_Color): { DC: number; DI: number };
  /** Returns the value of the perceptual difference between this color and theOther, computed using the CIEDE2000 formula. The difference is in range [0, 100.], with 1 approximately corresponding to the minimal perceivable difference (usually difference 5 or greater is needed for the difference to be recognizable in practice). */
  DeltaE2000(theOther: Quantity_Color): Standard_Real;
  /** Returns the name of the nearest color from the Quantity_NameOfColor enumeration. */
  static Name_2(theR: Standard_Real, theG: Standard_Real, theB: Standard_Real): Quantity_NameOfColor;
  /** Returns the name of the color identified by the given Quantity_NameOfColor enumeration value. */
  static StringName(theColor: Quantity_NameOfColor): Standard_Character;
  /** Finds color from predefined names. For example, the name of the color which corresponds to "BLACK" is Quantity_NOC_BLACK. Returns FALSE if name is unknown. */
  static ColorFromName_2(theColorNameString: Standard_Character, theColor: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Parses the string as a hex color (like "#FF0" for short sRGB color, or "#FFFF00" for sRGB color) theHexColorString the string to be parsed theColor a color that is a result of parsing true if parsing was successful, or false otherwise */
  static ColorFromHex(theHexColorString: Standard_Character, theColor: Quantity_Color): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns hex sRGB string in format "#FFAAFF". */
  static ColorToHex(theColor: Quantity_Color, theToPrefixHash: Standard_Boolean): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Converts sRGB components into HLS ones. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_HLS(theRgb: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts HLS components into RGB ones. */
  static Convert_HLS_To_sRGB(theHls: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts Linear RGB components into HLS ones. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_HLS(theRgb: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts HLS components into linear RGB ones. */
  static Convert_HLS_To_LinearRGB(theHls: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts linear RGB components into CIE Lab ones. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_Lab(theRgb: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts CIE Lab components into CIE Lch ones. */
  static Convert_Lab_To_Lch(theLab: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts CIE Lab components into linear RGB ones. Note that the resulting values may be out of the valid range for RGB. */
  static Convert_Lab_To_LinearRGB(theLab: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts CIE Lch components into CIE Lab ones. */
  static Convert_Lch_To_Lab(theLch: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Convert the color value to ARGB integer value, with alpha equals to 0. So the output is formatted as 0x00RRGGBB. Note that this unpacking does NOT involve non-linear sRGB -> linear RGB conversion, as would be usually expected for RGB color packed into 4 bytes. theColor color to convert theARGB result color encoded as integer */
  static Color2argb(theColor: Quantity_Color): { theARGB: number };
  /** Convert integer ARGB value to Color. Alpha bits are ignored. Note that this packing does NOT involve linear -> non-linear sRGB conversion, as would be usually expected to preserve higher (for human eye) color precision in 4 bytes. */
  static Argb2color(theARGB: Standard_Integer, theColor: Quantity_Color): void;
  /** Convert linear RGB component into sRGB using OpenGL specs formula (double precision), also known as gamma correction. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_sRGB_1(theLinearValue: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Convert linear RGB component into sRGB using OpenGL specs formula (double precision), also known as gamma correction. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_sRGB_2(theLinearValue: Standard_ShortReal): Standard_ShortReal;
  /** Convert sRGB component into linear RGB using OpenGL specs formula (double precision), also known as gamma correction. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_LinearRGB_1(thesRGBValue: Standard_Real): Standard_Real;
  /** Convert sRGB component into linear RGB using OpenGL specs formula (double precision), also known as gamma correction. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_LinearRGB_2(thesRGBValue: Standard_ShortReal): Standard_ShortReal;
  /** Convert linear RGB component into sRGB using approximated uniform gamma coefficient 2.2. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_sRGB_approx22_1(theLinearValue: Standard_ShortReal): Standard_ShortReal;
  /** Convert sRGB component into linear RGB using approximated uniform gamma coefficient 2.2. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_LinearRGB_approx22_1(thesRGBValue: Standard_ShortReal): Standard_ShortReal;
  /** Convert linear RGB component into sRGB using approximated uniform gamma coefficient 2.2. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_sRGB_approx22_2(theRGB: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Convert sRGB component into linear RGB using approximated uniform gamma coefficient 2.2. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_LinearRGB_approx22_2(theRGB: NCollection_Vec3<float>): any;
  /** Converts HLS components into sRGB ones. */
  static HlsRgb(theH: Standard_Real, theL: Standard_Real, theS: Standard_Real): { theR: number; theG: number; theB: number };
  /** Converts sRGB components into HLS ones. */
  static RgbHls(theR: Standard_Real, theG: Standard_Real, theB: Standard_Real): { theH: number; theL: number; theS: number };
  /** Returns the value used to compare two colors for equality; 0.0001 by default. */
  static Epsilon(): Standard_Real;
  /** Set the value used to compare two colors for equality. */
  static SetEpsilon(theEpsilon: Standard_Real): void;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Quantity_Color_1 extends Quantity_Color {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Quantity_Color_2 extends Quantity_Color {
    constructor(theName: Quantity_NameOfColor);
  }

  export declare class Quantity_Color_3 extends Quantity_Color {
    constructor(theC1: Standard_Real, theC2: Standard_Real, theC3: Standard_Real, theType: Quantity_TypeOfColor);
  }

  export declare class Quantity_Color_4 extends Quantity_Color {
    constructor(theRgb: NCollection_Vec3<float>);
  }

/** The pair of Quantity_Color and Alpha component (1.0 opaque, 0.0 transparent). */
export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA {
  /** Assign new values to the color. */
  SetValues(theRed: Standard_ShortReal, theGreen: Standard_ShortReal, theBlue: Standard_ShortReal, theAlpha: Standard_ShortReal): void;
  /** Return RGB color value. */
  GetRGB(): Quantity_Color;
  /** Modify RGB color components without affecting alpha value. */
  ChangeRGB(): Quantity_Color;
  /** Assign RGB color components without affecting alpha value. */
  SetRGB(theRgb: Quantity_Color): void;
  /** Return alpha value (1.0 means opaque, 0.0 means fully transparent). */
  Alpha(): Standard_ShortReal;
  /** Assign the alpha value. */
  SetAlpha(theAlpha: Standard_ShortReal): void;
  /** Returns true if the distance between colors is greater than Epsilon(). */
  IsDifferent(theOther: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Two colors are considered to be equal if their distance is no greater than Epsilon(). */
  IsEqual(theOther: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds color from predefined names. For example, the name of the color which corresponds to "BLACK" is Quantity_NOC_BLACK. An alpha component is set to 1.0. theColorNameString the color name theColor a found color false if the color name is unknown, or true if the search by color name was successful */
  static ColorFromName(theColorNameString: Standard_Character, theColor: Quantity_ColorRGBA): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Parses the string as a hex color (like "#FF0" for short sRGB color, "#FF0F" for short sRGBA color, "#FFFF00" for RGB color, or "#FFFF00FF" for RGBA color) theHexColorString the string to be parsed theColor a color that is a result of parsing theAlphaComponentIsOff the flag that indicates if a color alpha component is presented in the input string (false) or not (true) true if parsing was successful, or false otherwise */
  static ColorFromHex(theHexColorString: Standard_Character, theColor: Quantity_ColorRGBA, theAlphaComponentIsOff: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns hex sRGBA string in format "#RRGGBBAA". */
  static ColorToHex(theColor: Quantity_ColorRGBA, theToPrefixHash: Standard_Boolean): XCAFDoc_PartId;
  /** Convert linear RGB components into sRGB using OpenGL specs formula. */
  static Convert_LinearRGB_To_sRGB(theRGB: NCollection_Vec4<float>): any;
  /** Convert sRGB components into linear RGB using OpenGL specs formula. */
  static Convert_sRGB_To_LinearRGB(theRGB: NCollection_Vec4<float>): any;
  /** Inits the content of me from the stream. */
  InitFromJson(theSStream: Standard_SStream): { result: Standard_Boolean; theStreamPos: number };
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA_1 extends Quantity_ColorRGBA {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA_2 extends Quantity_ColorRGBA {
    constructor(theRgb: Quantity_Color);
  }

  export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA_3 extends Quantity_ColorRGBA {
    constructor(theRgb: Quantity_Color, theAlpha: Standard_ShortReal);
  }

  export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA_4 extends Quantity_ColorRGBA {
    constructor(theRgba: NCollection_Vec4<float>);
  }

  export declare class Quantity_ColorRGBA_5 extends Quantity_ColorRGBA {
    constructor(theRed: Standard_ShortReal, theGreen: Standard_ShortReal, theBlue: Standard_ShortReal, theAlpha: Standard_ShortReal);
  }

export declare class CDM_Document extends Standard_Transient {
  /** The Update method will be called once for each reference, but it should not perform any computation, to avoid multiple computation of a same document. */
  Update_2(ErrorString: TCollection_ExtendedString): Standard_Boolean;
  /** The Storage Format is the key which is used to determine in the application resources the storage driver plugin, the file extension and other data used to store the document. */
  StorageFormat(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** by default empties the extensions. */
  Extensions(Extensions: TColStd_SequenceOfExtendedString): void;
  /** This method can be redefined to extract another document in a different format. For example, to extract a Shape from an applicative document. */
  GetAlternativeDocument(aFormat: TCollection_ExtendedString, anAlternativeDocument: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates a reference from this document to {anOtherDocument}. Returns a reference identifier. This reference identifier is unique in the document and will not be used for the next references, even after the storing of the document. If there is already a reference between the two documents, the reference is not created, but its reference identifier is returned. */
  CreateReference_1(anOtherDocument: any): Standard_Integer;
  /** Removes the reference between the From Document and the To Document identified by a reference identifier. */
  RemoveReference(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Removes all references having this document for From Document. */
  RemoveAllReferences(): void;
  /** Returns the To Document of the reference identified by aReferenceIdentifier. If the ToDocument is stored and has not yet been retrieved, this method will retrieve it. */
  Document(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): any;
  /** returns True if the To Document of the reference identified by aReferenceIdentifier is in session, False if it corresponds to a not yet retrieved document. */
  IsInSession(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns True if the To Document of the reference identified by aReferenceIdentifier has already been stored, False otherwise. */
  IsStored_1(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns the name of the metadata of the To Document of the reference identified by aReferenceIdentifier. */
  Name(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** returns the number of references having this document as From Document. */
  ToReferencesNumber(): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns the number of references having this document as To Document. */
  FromReferencesNumber(): Standard_Integer;
  /** returns True is this document references aDocument; */
  ShallowReferences(aDocument: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns True is this document references aDocument; */
  DeepReferences(aDocument: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Copies a reference to this document. This method avoid retrieval of referenced document. The arguments are the original document and a valid reference identifier Returns the local identifier. */
  CopyReference(aFromDocument: any, aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  /** indicates that this document cannot be modified. */
  IsReadOnly_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** indicates that this document cannot be modified. */
  IsReadOnly_2(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  SetIsReadOnly(): void;
  UnsetIsReadOnly(): void;
  /** Indicates that this document has been modified. This method increments the modification counter. */
  Modify(): void;
  /** returns the current modification counter. */
  Modifications(): Standard_Integer;
  UnModify(): void;
  /** returns true if the modification counter found in the given reference is equal to the actual modification counter of the To Document. This method is able to deal with a reference to a not retrieved document. */
  IsUpToDate(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Resets the modification counter in the given reference to the actual modification counter of its To Document. This method should be called after the application has updated this document. */
  SetIsUpToDate(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** associates a comment with this document. */
  SetComment(aComment: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** appends a comment into comments of this document. */
  AddComment(aComment: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** associates a comments with this document. */
  SetComments(aComments: TColStd_SequenceOfExtendedString): void;
  /** returns the associated comments through <aComments>. Returns empty sequence if no comments are associated. */
  Comments(aComments: TColStd_SequenceOfExtendedString): void;
  /** Returns the first of associated comments. By default the comment is an empty string. */
  Comment(): Standard_ExtCharacter;
  /** returns True if the To Document of the reference identified by aReferenceIdentifier has already been stored, False otherwise. */
  IsStored_2(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns the value of the modification counter at the time of storage. By default returns 0. */
  StorageVersion(): Standard_Integer;
  /** associates database information to a document which has been stored. The name of the document is now the name which has beenused to store the data. */
  SetMetaData(aMetaData: any): void;
  UnsetIsStored(): void;
  MetaData(): any;
  Folder(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** defines the folder in which the object should be stored. */
  SetRequestedFolder(aFolder: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  RequestedFolder(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  HasRequestedFolder(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** defines the name under which the object should be stored. */
  SetRequestedName(aName: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Determines under which the document is going to be store. By default the name of the document will be used. If the document has no name its presentation will be used. */
  RequestedName(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  SetRequestedPreviousVersion(aPreviousVersion: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  UnsetRequestedPreviousVersion(): void;
  HasRequestedPreviousVersion(): Standard_Boolean;
  RequestedPreviousVersion(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** defines the Comment with which the object should be stored. */
  SetRequestedComment(aComment: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  RequestedComment(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** read (or rereads) the following resource. */
  LoadResources(): void;
  FindFileExtension(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** gets the Desktop.Domain.Application.FileFormat.FileExtension resource. */
  FileExtension(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  FindDescription(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** gets the FileFormat.Description resource. */
  Description(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** returns true if the version is greater than the storage version */
  IsModified(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsOpened_1(): Standard_Boolean;
  Open(anApplication: any): void;
  CanClose(): CDM_CanCloseStatus;
  Close(): void;
  Application(): any;
  /** A referenced document may indicate through this virtual method that it does not allow the closing of aDocument which it references through the reference aReferenceIdentifier. By default returns true. */
  CanCloseReference(aDocument: any, aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** A referenced document may update its internal data structure when {aDocument} which it references through the reference {aReferenceIdentifier} is being closed. By default this method does nothing. */
  CloseReference(aDocument: any, aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): void;
  IsOpened_2(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Creates a reference from this document to {anOtherDocument}. Returns a reference identifier. This reference identifier is unique in the document and will not be used for the next references, even after the storing of the document. If there is already a reference between the two documents, the reference is not created, but its reference identifier is returned. */
  CreateReference_2(aMetaData: any, aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer, anApplication: any, aToDocumentVersion: Standard_Integer, UseStorageConfiguration: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Creates a reference from this document to {anOtherDocument}. Returns a reference identifier. This reference identifier is unique in the document and will not be used for the next references, even after the storing of the document. If there is already a reference between the two documents, the reference is not created, but its reference identifier is returned. */
  CreateReference_3(aMetaData: any, anApplication: any, aDocumentVersion: Standard_Integer, UseStorageConfiguration: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Integer;
  ReferenceCounter(): Standard_Integer;
  /** The Update method will be called once for each reference, but it should not perform any computation, to avoid multiple computation of a same document. */
  Update_3(): void;
  Reference(aReferenceIdentifier: Standard_Integer): any;
  SetModifications(Modifications: Standard_Integer): void;
  SetReferenceCounter(aReferenceCounter: Standard_Integer): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TDF_Label {
  /** Constructs an empty label object. */
  constructor()
  /** Nullifies the label. */
  Nullify(): void;
  /** Returns the Data owning <me>. */
  Data(): any;
  /** Returns the tag of the label. This is the integer assigned randomly to a label in a data framework. This integer is used to identify this label in an entry. */
  Tag(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the label father. This label may be null if the label is root. */
  Father(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns True if the <aLabel> is null, i.e. it has not been included in the data framework. */
  IsNull(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Sets or unsets <me> and all its descendants as imported label, according to <aStatus>. */
  Imported(aStatus: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns True if the <aLabel> is imported. */
  IsImported(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns True if the <aLabel> is equal to me (same LabelNode*). */
  IsEqual(aLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  IsDifferent(aLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  IsRoot(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if <me> owns an attribute with <anID> as ID. */
  IsAttribute(anID: Standard_GUID): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds an Attribute to the current label. Raises if there is already one. */
  AddAttribute(anAttribute: any, append: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Forgets an Attribute from the current label, setting its forgotten status true and its valid status false. Raises if the attribute is not in the structure. */
  ForgetAttribute_1(anAttribute: any): void;
  /** Forgets an Attribute from the current label, setting its forgotten status true and its valid status false. Raises if the attribute is not in the structure. */
  ForgetAttribute_2(aguid: Standard_GUID): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Forgets all the attributes. Does it on also on the sub-labels if <clearChildren> is set to true. Of course, this method is compatible with Transaction & Delta mechanisms. */
  ForgetAllAttributes(clearChildren: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Undo Forget action, setting its forgotten status false and its valid status true. Raises if the attribute is not in the structure. */
  ResumeAttribute(anAttribute: any): void;
  /** Finds an attribute of the current label, according to <anID>. If anAttribute is not a valid one, false is returned. The method returns True if found, False otherwise. A removed attribute cannot be found. */
  FindAttribute_1(anID: Standard_GUID, anAttribute: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds an attribute of the current label, according to <anID>. If anAttribute is not a valid one, false is returned. The method returns True if found, False otherwise. A removed attribute cannot be found. */
  FindAttribute_3(anID: Standard_GUID, aTransaction: Standard_Integer, anAttribute: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if <me> or a DESCENDANT of <me> owns attributes not yet available in transaction 0. It means at least one of their attributes is new, modified or deleted. */
  MayBeModified(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if <me> owns attributes not yet available in transaction 0. It means at least one attribute is new, modified or deleted. */
  AttributesModified(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if this label has at least one attribute. */
  HasAttribute(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of attributes. */
  NbAttributes(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the depth of the label in the data framework. This corresponds to the number of fathers which this label has, and is used in determining whether a label is root, null or equivalent to another label. Exceptions: Standard_NullObject if this label is null. This is because a null object can have no depth. */
  Depth(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns True if <me> is a descendant of <aLabel>. Attention: every label is its own descendant. */
  IsDescendant(aLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the root label Root of the data structure. This has a depth of 0. Exceptions: Standard_NullObject if this label is null. This is because a null object can have no depth. */
  Root(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns true if this label has at least one child. */
  HasChild(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of children. */
  NbChildren(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Finds a child label having <aTag> as tag. Creates The tag aTag identifies the label which will be the parent. If create is true and no child label is found, a new one is created. Example: //creating a label with tag 10 at Root TDF_Label lab1 = aDF->Root().FindChild(10); //creating labels 7 and 2 on label 10 TDF_Label lab2 = lab1.FindChild(7); TDF_Label lab3 = lab1.FindChild(2); */
  FindChild(aTag: Standard_Integer, create: Standard_Boolean): TDF_Label;
  /** Create a new child label of me using automatic delivery tags provided by TagSource. */
  NewChild(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns the current transaction index. */
  Transaction(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns true if node address of <me> is lower than <otherLabel> one. Used to quickly sort labels (not on entry criterion). -C++: inline */
  HasLowerNode(otherLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if node address of <me> is greater than <otherLabel> one. Used to quickly sort labels (not on entry criterion). -C++: inline */
  HasGreaterNode(otherLabel: TDF_Label): Standard_Boolean;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TDF_Attribute extends Standard_Transient {
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Sets specific ID of the attribute (supports several attributes of one type at the same label feature). */
  SetID_1(a0: Standard_GUID): void;
  /** Sets specific ID of the attribute (supports several attributes of one type at the same label feature). */
  SetID_2(): void;
  /** Returns the label to which the attribute is attached. If the label is not included in a DF, the label is null. See Label. Warning: If the label is not included in a data framework, it is null. This function should not be redefined inline. */
  Label(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns the transaction index in which the attribute has been created or modified. */
  Transaction(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns the upper transaction index until which the attribute is/was valid. This number may vary. A removed attribute validity range is reduced to its transaction index. */
  UntilTransaction(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Returns true if the attribute is valid; i.e. not a backuped or removed one. */
  IsValid(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the attribute has no backup. */
  IsNew(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if the attribute forgotten status is set. ShortCut Methods concerning associated attributes */
  IsForgotten(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns true if it exists an associated attribute of <me> with <anID> as ID. */
  IsAttribute(anID: Standard_GUID): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Finds an associated attribute of <me>, according to <anID>. the returned <anAttribute> is a valid one. The method returns True if found, False otherwise. A removed attribute cannot be found using this method. */
  FindAttribute_1(anID: Standard_GUID, anAttribute: any): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Adds an Attribute <other> to the label of <me>. Raises if there is already one of the same GUID than <other>. */
  AddAttribute(other: any): void;
  /** Forgets the Attribute of GUID <aguid> associated to the label of <me>. Be careful that if <me> is the attribute of <guid>, <me> will have a null label after this call. If the attribute doesn't exist returns False. Otherwise returns True. */
  ForgetAttribute(aguid: Standard_GUID): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Forgets all the attributes attached to the label of <me>. Does it on the sub-labels if <clearChildren> is set to true. Of course, this method is compatible with Transaction & Delta mechanisms. Be careful that if <me> will have a null label after this call */
  ForgetAllAttributes(clearChildren: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Something to do after adding an Attribute to a label. */
  AfterAddition(): void;
  /** Something to do before removing an Attribute from a label. */
  BeforeRemoval(): void;
  /** Something to do before forgetting an Attribute to a label. */
  BeforeForget(): void;
  /** Something to do after resuming an Attribute from a label. */
  AfterResume(): void;
  /** Something to do AFTER creation of an attribute by persistent-transient translation. The returned status says if AfterUndo has been performed (true) or if this callback must be called once again further (false). If <forceIt> is set to true, the method MUST perform and return true. Does nothing by default and returns true. */
  AfterRetrieval(forceIt: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Something to do before applying <anAttDelta>. The returned status says if AfterUndo has been performed (true) or if this callback must be called once again further (false). If <forceIt> is set to true, the method MUST perform and return true. Does nothing by default and returns true. */
  BeforeUndo(anAttDelta: any, forceIt: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Something to do after applying <anAttDelta>. The returned status says if AfterUndo has been performed (true) or if this callback must be called once again further (false). If <forceIt> is set to true, the method MUST perform and return true. Does nothing by default and returns true. */
  AfterUndo(anAttDelta: any, forceIt: Standard_Boolean): Standard_Boolean;
  /** A callback. By default does nothing. It is called by TDF_Data::CommitTransaction() method. */
  BeforeCommitTransaction(): void;
  /** Backups the attribute. The backuped attribute is flagged "Backuped" and not "Valid". The method does nothing: 1) If the attribute transaction number is equal to the current transaction number (the attribute has already been backuped). 2) If the attribute is not attached to a label. */
  Backup_1(): void;
  /** Returns true if the attribute backup status is set. This status is set/unset by the Backup() method. */
  IsBackuped(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Copies the attribute contents into a new other attribute. It is used by Backup(). */
  BackupCopy(): any;
  /** Restores the backuped contents from <anAttribute> into this one. It is used when aborting a transaction. */
  Restore(anAttribute: any): void;
  /** Makes an AttributeDelta because <me> appeared. The only known use of a redefinition of this method is to return a null handle (no delta). */
  DeltaOnAddition(): any;
  /** Makes an AttributeDelta because <me> has been forgotten. */
  DeltaOnForget(): any;
  /** Makes an AttributeDelta because <me> has been resumed. */
  DeltaOnResume(): any;
  /** Makes a DeltaOnModification between <me> and */
  DeltaOnModification_1(anOldAttribute: any): any;
  /** Makes a DeltaOnModification between <me> and */
  DeltaOnModification_2(aDelta: any): void;
  /** Makes a DeltaOnRemoval on <me> because <me> has disappeared from the DS. */
  DeltaOnRemoval(): any;
  /** Returns an new empty attribute from the good end type. It is used by the copy algorithm. */
  NewEmpty(): any;
  /** This method is different from the "Copy" one, because it is used when copying an attribute from a source structure into a target structure. This method may paste the contents of <me> into <intoAttribute>. The given pasted attribute can be full or empty of its contents. But don't make a NEW! Just set the contents! It is possible to use <aRelocationTable> to get/set the relocation value of a source attribute. */
  Paste(intoAttribute: any, aRelocationTable: any): void;
  /** Adds the first level referenced attributes and labels to <aDataSet>. For this, use the AddLabel or AddAttribute of DataSet. If there is none, do not implement the method. */
  References(aDataSet: any): void;
  /** Forgets the attribute. <aTransaction> is the current transaction in which the forget is done. A forgotten attribute is also flagged not "Valid". A forgotten attribute is invisible. Set also the "Valid" status to False. Obviously, DF cannot empty an attribute (this has a semantic signification), but can remove it from the structure. So, a forgotten attribute is NOT an empty one, but a soon DEAD one. Should be private. */
  Forget(aTransaction: Standard_Integer): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

/** Used to define a name attribute containing a string which specifies the name. */
export declare class TDataStd_Name extends TDataStd_GenericExtString {
  constructor()
  /** class methods working on the name itself Returns the GUID for name attributes. */
  static GetID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Creates (if does not exist) and sets the name in the name attribute. from any label <L> search in father labels (L is not concerned) the first name attribute. if found set it in <father>. class methods working on the name tree Search in the whole TDF_Data the Name attribute which fit with <fullPath>. Returns True if found. Search under <currentLabel> a label which fit with <name>. Returns True if found. Shortcut which avoids building a ListOfExtendedStrin. Search in the whole TDF_Data the label which fit with name Returns True if found. tools methods to translate path <-> pathlist move to draw For Draw test we may provide this tool method which convert a path in a sequence of string to call after the FindLabel methods. Example: if it's given "Assembly:Part_1:Sketch_5" it will return in <pathlist> the list of 3 strings: "Assembly","Part_1","Sketch_5". move to draw from <pathlist> build the string path Name methods */
  static Set_1(label: TDF_Label, string: TCollection_ExtendedString): any;
  /** Creates (if does not exist) and sets the name in the name attribute. from any label <L> search in father labels (L is not concerned) the first name attribute. if found set it in <father>. class methods working on the name tree Search in the whole TDF_Data the Name attribute which fit with <fullPath>. Returns True if found. Search under <currentLabel> a label which fit with <name>. Returns True if found. Shortcut which avoids building a ListOfExtendedStrin. Search in the whole TDF_Data the label which fit with name Returns True if found. tools methods to translate path <-> pathlist move to draw For Draw test we may provide this tool method which convert a path in a sequence of string to call after the FindLabel methods. Example: if it's given "Assembly:Part_1:Sketch_5" it will return in <pathlist> the list of 3 strings: "Assembly","Part_1","Sketch_5". move to draw from <pathlist> build the string path Name methods */
  static Set_2(label: TDF_Label, guid: Standard_GUID, string: TCollection_ExtendedString): any;
  /** Creates (if does not exist) and sets the name in the name attribute. from any label <L> search in father labels (L is not concerned) the first name attribute. if found set it in <father>. class methods working on the name tree Search in the whole TDF_Data the Name attribute which fit with <fullPath>. Returns True if found. Search under <currentLabel> a label which fit with <name>. Returns True if found. Shortcut which avoids building a ListOfExtendedStrin. Search in the whole TDF_Data the label which fit with name Returns True if found. tools methods to translate path <-> pathlist move to draw For Draw test we may provide this tool method which convert a path in a sequence of string to call after the FindLabel methods. Example: if it's given "Assembly:Part_1:Sketch_5" it will return in <pathlist> the list of 3 strings: "Assembly","Part_1","Sketch_5". move to draw from <pathlist> build the string path Name methods */
  Set_3(S: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Sets the explicit user defined GUID to the attribute. */
  SetID_1(guid: Standard_GUID): void;
  /** Sets the explicit user defined GUID to the attribute. */
  SetID_2(): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  NewEmpty(): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TDataStd_GenericExtString extends TDF_Attribute {
  /** Sets as name. Raises if is not a valid name. */
  Set(S: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Sets the explicit user defined GUID to the attribute. */
  SetID(guid: Standard_GUID): void;
  /** Returns the name contained in this name attribute. */
  Get(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Returns the ID of the attribute. */
  ID(): Standard_GUID;
  /** Restores the backuped contents from <anAttribute> into this one. It is used when aborting a transaction. */
  Restore(with_: any): void;
  /** This method is different from the "Copy" one, because it is used when copying an attribute from a source structure into a target structure. This method may paste the contents of <me> into <intoAttribute>. The given pasted attribute can be full or empty of its contents. But don't make a NEW! Just set the contents! It is possible to use <aRelocationTable> to get/set the relocation value of a source attribute. */
  Paste(into: any, RT: any): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TDataStd_GenericEmpty extends TDF_Attribute {
  /** Restores the backuped contents from <anAttribute> into this one. It is used when aborting a transaction. */
  Restore(a0: any): void;
  /** This method is different from the "Copy" one, because it is used when copying an attribute from a source structure into a target structure. This method may paste the contents of <me> into <intoAttribute>. The given pasted attribute can be full or empty of its contents. But don't make a NEW! Just set the contents! It is possible to use <aRelocationTable> to get/set the relocation value of a source attribute. */
  Paste(a0: any, a1: any): void;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TDocStd_Document extends CDM_Document {
  /** Constructs a document object defined by the string astorageformat. If a document is created outside of an application using this constructor, it must be managed by a Handle. Otherwise memory problems could appear: call of TDocStd_Owner::GetDocument creates a occ::handle<TDocStd_Document>, so, releasing it will produce a crash. */
  constructor(astorageformat: TCollection_ExtendedString)
  /** Will Abort any execution, clear fields returns the document which contains <L>. raises an exception if the document is not found. */
  static Get(L: TDF_Label): any;
  /** the document is saved in a file. */
  IsSaved(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** returns True if document differs from the state of last saving. this method have to be called only working in the transaction mode */
  IsChanged(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** This method have to be called to show document that it has been saved. */
  SetSaved(): void;
  /** Say to document what it is not saved. Use value, returned earlier by GetSavedTime(). */
  SetSavedTime(theTime: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Returns value of <mySavedTime> to be used later in SetSavedTime() */
  GetSavedTime(): Standard_Integer;
  /** raise if <me> is not saved. */
  GetName(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** returns the OS path of the file, in which one <me> is saved. Raise an exception if <me> is not saved. */
  GetPath(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  SetData(data: any): void;
  GetData(): any;
  /** Returns the main label in this data framework. By definition, this is the label with the entry 0:1. */
  Main(): TDF_Label;
  /** Returns True if the main label has no attributes. */
  IsEmpty(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns False if the document has been modified but not recomputed. */
  IsValid(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Notify the label as modified, the Document becomes UnValid. returns True if <L> has been notified as modified. */
  SetModified(L: TDF_Label): void;
  /** Remove all modifications. After this call The document becomesagain Valid. */
  PurgeModified(): void;
  /** Returns the labels which have been modified in this document. */
  GetModified(): any;
  /** Launches a new command. This command may be undone. */
  NewCommand(): void;
  /** returns True if a Command transaction is open in the current . */
  HasOpenCommand(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Opens a new command transaction in this document. You can use HasOpenCommand to see whether a command is already open. Exceptions Standard_DomainError if a command is already open in this document. */
  OpenCommand(): void;
  /** Commits documents transactions and fills the transaction manager with documents that have been changed during the transaction. If no command transaction is open, nothing is done. Returns True if a new delta has been added to myUndos. */
  CommitCommand(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Abort the Command transaction. Does nothing If there is no Command transaction open. */
  AbortCommand(): void;
  /** The current limit on the number of undos. */
  GetUndoLimit(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Set the limit on the number of Undo Delta stored 0 will disable Undo on the document A negative value means no limit. Note that by default Undo is disabled. Enabling it will take effect with the next call to NewCommand. Of course this limit is the same for Redo */
  SetUndoLimit(L: Standard_Integer): void;
  /** Remove all stored Undos and Redos. */
  ClearUndos(): void;
  /** Remove all stored Redos. */
  ClearRedos(): void;
  /** Returns the number of undos stored in this document. If this figure is greater than 0, the method Undo can be used. */
  GetAvailableUndos(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Will UNDO one step, returns False if no undo was done (Undos == 0). Otherwise, true is returned and one step in the list of undoes is undone. */
  Undo(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Returns the number of redos stored in this document. If this figure is greater than 0, the method Redo can be used. */
  GetAvailableRedos(): Standard_Integer;
  /** Will REDO one step, returns False if no redo was done (Redos == 0). Otherwise, true is returned, and one step in the list of redoes is done again. */
  Redo(): Standard_Boolean;
  GetUndos(): any;
  GetRedos(): any;
  /** Removes the first undo in the list of document undos. It is used in the application when the undo limit is exceed. */
  RemoveFirstUndo(): void;
  /** Initializes the procedure of delta compaction Returns false if there is no delta to compact Marks the last delta as a "from" delta */
  InitDeltaCompaction(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Performs the procedure of delta compaction Makes all deltas starting from "from" delta till the last one to be one delta. */
  PerformDeltaCompaction(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Set modifications on labels impacted by external references to the entry. The document becomes invalid and must be recomputed. */
  UpdateReferences(aDocEntry: XCAFDoc_PartId): void;
  /** Recompute if the document was not valid and propagate the recorded modification. */
  Recompute(): void;
  /** The Storage Format is the key which is used to determine in the application resources the storage driver plugin, the file extension and other data used to store the document. */
  StorageFormat(): TCollection_ExtendedString;
  /** Sets saving mode for empty labels. If true, empty labels will be saved. */
  SetEmptyLabelsSavingMode(isAllowed: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns saving mode for empty labels. */
  EmptyLabelsSavingMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** methods for the nested transaction mode */
  ChangeStorageFormat(newStorageFormat: TCollection_ExtendedString): void;
  /** Sets nested transaction mode if isAllowed == true. */
  SetNestedTransactionMode(isAllowed: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** Returns true if mode is set. */
  IsNestedTransactionMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** if theTransactionOnly is True changes is denied outside transactions */
  SetModificationMode(theTransactionOnly: Standard_Boolean): void;
  /** returns True if changes allowed only inside transactions */
  ModificationMode(): Standard_Boolean;
  /** Prepares document for closing. */
  BeforeClose(): void;
  /** Returns version of the format to be used to store the document. */
  StorageFormatVersion(): TDocStd_FormatVersion;
  /** Sets version of the format to be used to store the document. */
  ChangeStorageFormatVersion(theVersion: TDocStd_FormatVersion): void;
  /** Returns current storage format version of the document. */
  static CurrentStorageFormatVersion(): TDocStd_FormatVersion;
  static get_type_name(): Standard_Character;
  static get_type_descriptor(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  DynamicType(): Handle_Standard_Type;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopologyResult {
  getShapesCount(): Standard_Integer;
  getShape(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TopologyResult_1 extends TopologyResult {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TopologyResult_2 extends TopologyResult {
    constructor(other: TopologyResult);
  }

export declare class MeshBatchData {
  constructor();
  getOffsetsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getOffsetsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getVerticesPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getVerticesSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getNormalsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getNormalsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getTrianglesPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getTrianglesSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getShapeCount(): Standard_Integer;
  dispose(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Law_Function {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Law_Function): void;
  get(): Law_Function;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Law_Function_1 extends Handle_Law_Function {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Law_Function_2 extends Handle_Law_Function {
    constructor(thePtr: Law_Function);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Law_Function_3 extends Handle_Law_Function {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Law_Function);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Law_Function_4 extends Handle_Law_Function {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Law_Function);
  }

export declare class Handle_HLRBRep_Algo {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: HLRBRep_Algo): void;
  get(): HLRBRep_Algo;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_1 extends Handle_HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_2 extends Handle_HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor(thePtr: HLRBRep_Algo);
  }

  export declare class Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_3 extends Handle_HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_HLRBRep_Algo);
  }

  export declare class Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_4 extends Handle_HLRBRep_Algo {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_HLRBRep_Algo);
  }

export declare class FilletBatch {
  constructor();
  beginFillet(shape: TopoDS_Shape): Standard_Integer;
  addEdge(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, shape: TopoDS_Shape, radius: Standard_Real): void;
  addEdgeVariable(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, shape: TopoDS_Shape, r1: Standard_Real, r2: Standard_Real): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  execute(): ShapeBatchResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class LoftBatch {
  constructor();
  beginLoft(solid: Standard_Boolean, ruled: Standard_Boolean, tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  addWire(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, wire: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  setStartVertex(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, vertex: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  setEndVertex(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, vertex: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  execute(): ShapeBatchResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_BezierCurve): void;
  get(): Geom2d_BezierCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_BezierCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve);
  }

export declare class BRepToolsWrapper {
  constructor();
  static Write(shape: TopoDS_Shape): string;
  static Read(data: string): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_StepData_StepModel {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: StepData_StepModel): void;
  get(): StepData_StepModel;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_StepData_StepModel_1 extends Handle_StepData_StepModel {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_StepData_StepModel_2 extends Handle_StepData_StepModel {
    constructor(thePtr: StepData_StepModel);
  }

  export declare class Handle_StepData_StepModel_3 extends Handle_StepData_StepModel {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_StepData_StepModel);
  }

  export declare class Handle_StepData_StepModel_4 extends Handle_StepData_StepModel {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_StepData_StepModel);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_BSplineCurve): void;
  get(): Geom_BSplineCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_BSplineCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_BoundedCurve): void;
  get(): Geom2d_BoundedCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_BoundedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve);
  }

export declare class MeshExtractor {
  constructor();
  static extract(shape: TopoDS_Shape, tolerance: Standard_Real, angularTolerance: Standard_Real, skipNormals: Standard_Boolean, includeUVs: Standard_Boolean): MeshData;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_TDocStd_Document {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: TDocStd_Document): void;
  get(): TDocStd_Document;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_TDocStd_Document_1 extends Handle_TDocStd_Document {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDocStd_Document_2 extends Handle_TDocStd_Document {
    constructor(thePtr: TDocStd_Document);
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDocStd_Document_3 extends Handle_TDocStd_Document {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_TDocStd_Document);
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDocStd_Document_4 extends Handle_TDocStd_Document {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_TDocStd_Document);
  }

export declare class ShellBatch {
  constructor();
  beginShell(shape: TopoDS_Shape, thickness: Standard_Real, tolerance: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  addFaceToRemove(entryIndex: Standard_Integer, face: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  execute(): ShapeBatchResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class BRepMesh_IncrementalMeshWrapper {
  constructor(theShape: TopoDS_Shape, theLinDeflection: Standard_Real, isRelative: Standard_Boolean, theAngDeflection: Standard_Real, isInParallel: Standard_Boolean)
  IsDone(): Standard_Boolean;
  IsModified(): Standard_Boolean;
  GetStatusFlags(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom_Surface {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_Surface): void;
  get(): Geom_Surface;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Surface_1 extends Handle_Geom_Surface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Surface_2 extends Handle_Geom_Surface {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_Surface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Surface_3 extends Handle_Geom_Surface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Surface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Surface_4 extends Handle_Geom_Surface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Surface);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom_Curve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_Curve): void;
  get(): Geom_Curve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Curve_1 extends Handle_Geom_Curve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Curve_2 extends Handle_Geom_Curve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_Curve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Curve_3 extends Handle_Geom_Curve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Curve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Curve_4 extends Handle_Geom_Curve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Curve);
  }

export declare class EdgeMeshData {
  getLinesPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getLinesSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getEdgeGroupsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getEdgeGroupsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class EdgeMeshData_1 extends EdgeMeshData {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class EdgeMeshData_2 extends EdgeMeshData {
    constructor(other: EdgeMeshData);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_ElementarySurface): void;
  get(): Geom_ElementarySurface;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_1 extends Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_2 extends Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_ElementarySurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_3 extends Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_4 extends Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface);
  }

export declare class BooleanPipeline {
  constructor();
  addStep(opCode: Standard_Integer, tool: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  execute(base: TopoDS_Shape, glueMode: Standard_Integer, fuzzyValue: Standard_Real): TopoDS_Shape;
  stepCount(): Standard_Integer;
  clear(): void;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class ExtrudeBatch {
  constructor();
  addExtrude(face: TopoDS_Shape, dx: Standard_Real, dy: Standard_Real, dz: Standard_Real): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  execute(): ShapeBatchResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Curve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_Curve): void;
  get(): Geom2d_Curve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Curve_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_Curve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Curve_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_Curve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_Curve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Curve_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_Curve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Curve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Curve_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_Curve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Curve);
  }

export declare class Handle_Poly_Triangulation {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Poly_Triangulation): void;
  get(): Poly_Triangulation;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Poly_Triangulation_1 extends Handle_Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_Triangulation_2 extends Handle_Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(thePtr: Poly_Triangulation);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_Triangulation_3 extends Handle_Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Poly_Triangulation);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_Triangulation_4 extends Handle_Poly_Triangulation {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Poly_Triangulation);
  }

export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: XCAFDoc_ShapeTool): void;
  get(): XCAFDoc_ShapeTool;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_1 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_2 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool {
    constructor(thePtr: XCAFDoc_ShapeTool);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_3 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_4 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool);
  }

export declare class MeasurementData {
  getDataPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getDataSize(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class MeasurementData_1 extends MeasurementData {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class MeasurementData_2 extends MeasurementData {
    constructor(other: MeasurementData);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom_Geometry {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_Geometry): void;
  get(): Geom_Geometry;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Geometry_1 extends Handle_Geom_Geometry {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Geometry_2 extends Handle_Geom_Geometry {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_Geometry);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Geometry_3 extends Handle_Geom_Geometry {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Geometry);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_Geometry_4 extends Handle_Geom_Geometry {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_Geometry);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_SphericalSurface): void;
  get(): Geom_SphericalSurface;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_1 extends Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_2 extends Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_SphericalSurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_3 extends Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_4 extends Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_TrimmedCurve): void;
  get(): Geom2d_TrimmedCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_TrimmedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve);
  }

export declare class SpatialIndex3D {
  constructor()
  addPoint(x: Standard_Real, y: Standard_Real, z: Standard_Real): void;
  build(): void;
  nearestPoint(x: Standard_Real, y: Standard_Real, z: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  pointsInRadius(x: Standard_Real, y: Standard_Real, z: Standard_Real, radius: Standard_Real, outPtr: Standard_Integer, maxResults: Standard_Integer): Standard_Integer;
  size(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class MeshBatchExtractor {
  constructor();
  addShape(shape: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  extract(tolerance: Standard_Real, angularTolerance: Standard_Real): MeshBatchData;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom_BezierCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_BezierCurve): void;
  get(): Geom_BezierCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_BezierCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BezierCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom_BezierCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BezierCurve);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_BSplineCurve): void;
  get(): Geom2d_BSplineCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_BSplineCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve);
  }

export declare class StepStreamIO {
  constructor();
  static exportSTEP(shape: TopoDS_Shape, schema: Standard_Integer): string;
  static importSTEP(data: string): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopologyExtractor {
  constructor();
  static extract(shape: TopoDS_Shape, shapeType: Standard_Integer): TopologyResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class ShapeBatchResult {
  getShapesCount(): Standard_Integer;
  getShape(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class ShapeBatchResult_1 extends ShapeBatchResult {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class ShapeBatchResult_2 extends ShapeBatchResult {
    constructor(other: ShapeBatchResult);
  }

export declare class Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Adaptor2d_Curve2d): void;
  get(): Adaptor2d_Curve2d;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_1 extends Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_2 extends Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
    constructor(thePtr: Adaptor2d_Curve2d);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_3 extends Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_4 extends Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d);
  }

export declare class BooleanBatch {
  constructor();
  addShape(s: TopoDS_Shape): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  fuseAll(glueMode: Standard_Integer, simplify: Standard_Boolean, fuzzyValue: Standard_Real): TopoDS_Shape;
  cutAll(base: TopoDS_Shape, glueMode: Standard_Integer, simplify: Standard_Boolean, fuzzyValue: Standard_Real): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: XCAFDoc_ColorTool): void;
  get(): XCAFDoc_ColorTool;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_1 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_2 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool {
    constructor(thePtr: XCAFDoc_ColorTool);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_3 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_4 extends Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool);
  }

export declare class Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation): void;
  get(): Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1 extends Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2 extends Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(thePtr: Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3 extends Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_4 extends Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation);
  }

export declare class EdgeMeshExtractor {
  constructor();
  static extract(shape: TopoDS_Shape, tolerance: Standard_Real, angularTolerance: Standard_Real): EdgeMeshData;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TransformBatchResult {
  getShapesCount(): Standard_Integer;
  getShape(index: Standard_Integer): TopoDS_Shape;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class TransformBatchResult_1 extends TransformBatchResult {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class TransformBatchResult_2 extends TransformBatchResult {
    constructor(other: TransformBatchResult);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Geometry {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_Geometry): void;
  get(): Geom2d_Geometry;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_Geometry {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_Geometry {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_Geometry);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_Geometry {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Geometry);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_Geometry {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Geometry);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_Ellipse): void;
  get(): Geom2d_Ellipse;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_Ellipse);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse);
  }

export declare class Curve2dBatchEval {
  constructor();
  static evaluate(curve: Handle_Geom2d_Curve, params: Standard_Real, paramCount: Standard_Integer, outPtr: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  static evaluateD1(curve: Handle_Geom2d_Curve, params: Standard_Real, paramCount: Standard_Integer, outPtr: Standard_Real): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class TopoDS_Cast {
  constructor();
  static Vertex(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Vertex;
  static Edge(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Edge;
  static Wire(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Wire;
  static Face(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Face;
  static Shell(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Shell;
  static Solid(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Solid;
  static Compound(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_Compound;
  static CompSolid(S: TopoDS_Shape): TopoDS_CompSolid;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class MeasurementExtractor {
  constructor();
  static extract(shape: TopoDS_Shape, includeLinear: Standard_Boolean): MeasurementData;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_BSplineSurface): void;
  get(): Geom_BSplineSurface;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_1 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_2 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_BSplineSurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_3 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_4 extends Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface);
  }

export declare class TransformBatch {
  constructor();
  addTranslate(shape: TopoDS_Shape, x: Standard_Real, y: Standard_Real, z: Standard_Real): void;
  addRotate(shape: TopoDS_Shape, angle: Standard_Real, axX: Standard_Real, axY: Standard_Real, axZ: Standard_Real, cX: Standard_Real, cY: Standard_Real, cZ: Standard_Real): void;
  addScale(shape: TopoDS_Shape, cX: Standard_Real, cY: Standard_Real, cZ: Standard_Real, factor: Standard_Real): void;
  addMirror(shape: TopoDS_Shape, oX: Standard_Real, oY: Standard_Real, oZ: Standard_Real, nX: Standard_Real, nY: Standard_Real, nZ: Standard_Real): void;
  clear(): void;
  count(): Standard_Integer;
  execute(): TransformBatchResult;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Circle {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_Circle): void;
  get(): Geom2d_Circle;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Circle_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Circle_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_Circle);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Circle_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Circle);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Circle_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_Circle {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Circle);
  }

export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Line {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom2d_Line): void;
  get(): Geom2d_Line;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Line_1 extends Handle_Geom2d_Line {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Line_2 extends Handle_Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom2d_Line);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Line_3 extends Handle_Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Line);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom2d_Line_4 extends Handle_Geom2d_Line {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom2d_Line);
  }

export declare class EvolutionExtractor {
  constructor();
  static extract(builder: BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape, inputShape: TopoDS_Shape, hashUpperBound: Standard_Integer): EvolutionData;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: Geom_TrimmedCurve): void;
  get(): Geom_TrimmedCurve;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_1 extends Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_2 extends Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(thePtr: Geom_TrimmedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_3 extends Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve);
  }

  export declare class Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_4 extends Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve);
  }

export declare class Handle_XSControl_WorkSession {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: XSControl_WorkSession): void;
  get(): XSControl_WorkSession;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_1 extends Handle_XSControl_WorkSession {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_2 extends Handle_XSControl_WorkSession {
    constructor(thePtr: XSControl_WorkSession);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_3 extends Handle_XSControl_WorkSession {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XSControl_WorkSession);
  }

  export declare class Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_4 extends Handle_XSControl_WorkSession {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_XSControl_WorkSession);
  }

export declare class Handle_TDataStd_Name {
  Nullify(): void;
  IsNull(): boolean;
  reset(thePtr: TDataStd_Name): void;
  get(): TDataStd_Name;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class Handle_TDataStd_Name_1 extends Handle_TDataStd_Name {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDataStd_Name_2 extends Handle_TDataStd_Name {
    constructor(thePtr: TDataStd_Name);
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDataStd_Name_3 extends Handle_TDataStd_Name {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_TDataStd_Name);
  }

  export declare class Handle_TDataStd_Name_4 extends Handle_TDataStd_Name {
    constructor(theHandle: Handle_TDataStd_Name);
  }

export declare class GeomToolsWrapper {
  constructor();
  static Write(geometry: any): string;
  static Read(data: string): any;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

export declare class EvolutionData {
  getModifiedPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getGeneratedPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getDeletedPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getModifiedSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getGeneratedSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getDeletedSize(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class EvolutionData_1 extends EvolutionData {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class EvolutionData_2 extends EvolutionData {
    constructor(other: EvolutionData);
  }

export declare class MeshData {
  getVerticesPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getNormalsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getTrianglesPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getFaceGroupsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getUvsPtr(): Standard_Integer;
  getVerticesSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getNormalsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getTrianglesSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getFaceGroupsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  getUvsSize(): Standard_Integer;
  delete(): void;
  [Symbol.dispose](): void;
}

  export declare class MeshData_1 extends MeshData {
    constructor();
  }

  export declare class MeshData_2 extends MeshData {
    constructor(other: MeshData);
  }

type Standard_Boolean = boolean;
type Standard_Byte = number;
type Standard_Character = string;
type Standard_CString = string;
type Standard_Integer = number;
type Standard_Real = number;
type Standard_ShortReal = number;
type Standard_Size = number;

declare namespace FS {
  interface Lookup {
      path: string;
      node: FSNode;
  }

  interface FSStream {}
  interface FSNode {}
  interface ErrnoError {}

  let ignorePermissions: boolean;
  let trackingDelegate: any;
  let tracking: any;
  let genericErrors: any;

  //
  // paths
  //
  function lookupPath(path: string, opts: any): Lookup;
  function getPath(node: FSNode): string;

  //
  // nodes
  //
  function isFile(mode: number): boolean;
  function isDir(mode: number): boolean;
  function isLink(mode: number): boolean;
  function isChrdev(mode: number): boolean;
  function isBlkdev(mode: number): boolean;
  function isFIFO(mode: number): boolean;
  function isSocket(mode: number): boolean;

  //
  // devices
  //
  function major(dev: number): number;
  function minor(dev: number): number;
  function makedev(ma: number, mi: number): number;
  function registerDevice(dev: number, ops: any): void;

  //
  // core
  //
  function syncfs(populate: boolean, callback: (e: any) => any): void;
  function syncfs(callback: (e: any) => any, populate?: boolean): void;
  function mount(type: any, opts: any, mountpoint: string): any;
  function unmount(mountpoint: string): void;

  function mkdir(path: string, mode?: number): any;
  function mkdev(path: string, mode?: number, dev?: number): any;
  function symlink(oldpath: string, newpath: string): any;
  function rename(old_path: string, new_path: string): void;
  function rmdir(path: string): void;
  function readdir(path: string): any;
  function unlink(path: string): void;
  function readlink(path: string): string;
  function stat(path: string, dontFollow?: boolean): any;
  function lstat(path: string): any;
  function chmod(path: string, mode: number, dontFollow?: boolean): void;
  function lchmod(path: string, mode: number): void;
  function fchmod(fd: number, mode: number): void;
  function chown(path: string, uid: number, gid: number, dontFollow?: boolean): void;
  function lchown(path: string, uid: number, gid: number): void;
  function fchown(fd: number, uid: number, gid: number): void;
  function truncate(path: string, len: number): void;
  function ftruncate(fd: number, len: number): void;
  function utime(path: string, atime: number, mtime: number): void;
  function open(path: string, flags: string, mode?: number, fd_start?: number, fd_end?: number): FSStream;
  function close(stream: FSStream): void;
  function llseek(stream: FSStream, offset: number, whence: number): any;
  function read(stream: FSStream, buffer: ArrayBufferView, offset: number, length: number, position?: number): number;
  function write(
      stream: FSStream,
      buffer: ArrayBufferView,
      offset: number,
      length: number,
      position?: number,
      canOwn?: boolean,
  ): number;
  function allocate(stream: FSStream, offset: number, length: number): void;
  function mmap(
      stream: FSStream,
      buffer: ArrayBufferView,
      offset: number,
      length: number,
      position: number,
      prot: number,
      flags: number,
  ): any;
  function ioctl(stream: FSStream, cmd: any, arg: any): any;
  function readFile(path: string, opts: { encoding: 'binary'; flags?: string }): Uint8Array;
  function readFile(path: string, opts: { encoding: 'utf8'; flags?: string }): string;
  function readFile(path: string, opts?: { flags?: string }): Uint8Array;
  function writeFile(path: string, data: string | ArrayBufferView, opts?: { flags?: string }): void;

  //
  // module-level FS code
  //
  function cwd(): string;
  function chdir(path: string): void;
  function init(
      input: null | (() => number | null),
      output: null | ((c: number) => any),
      error: null | ((c: number) => any),
  ): void;

  function createLazyFile(
      parent: string | FSNode,
      name: string,
      url: string,
      canRead: boolean,
      canWrite: boolean,
  ): FSNode;
  function createPreloadedFile(
      parent: string | FSNode,
      name: string,
      url: string,
      canRead: boolean,
      canWrite: boolean,
      onload?: () => void,
      onerror?: () => void,
      dontCreateFile?: boolean,
      canOwn?: boolean,
  ): void;
  function createDataFile(
      parent: string | FSNode,
      name: string,
      data: ArrayBufferView | string,
      canRead: boolean,
      canWrite: boolean,
      canOwn: boolean,
  ): FSNode;
  interface AnalysisResults {
    isRoot: boolean,
    exists: boolean,
    error: Error,
    name: string,
    path: any,
    object: any,
    parentExists: boolean,
    parentPath: any,
    parentObject: any
  }
  function analyzePath(path: string): AnalysisResults;
}

export type OpenCascadeInstance = {FS: typeof FS} & {
  Adaptor3d_Curve: typeof Adaptor3d_Curve;
  Adaptor3d_Surface: typeof Adaptor3d_Surface;
  Geom_CylindricalSurface: typeof Geom_CylindricalSurface;
  Geom_CylindricalSurface_1: typeof Geom_CylindricalSurface_1;
  Geom_CylindricalSurface_2: typeof Geom_CylindricalSurface_2;
  Geom_Geometry: typeof Geom_Geometry;
  Geom_ConicalSurface: typeof Geom_ConicalSurface;
  Geom_ConicalSurface_1: typeof Geom_ConicalSurface_1;
  Geom_ConicalSurface_2: typeof Geom_ConicalSurface_2;
  Geom_BezierCurve: typeof Geom_BezierCurve;
  Geom_BezierCurve_1: typeof Geom_BezierCurve_1;
  Geom_BezierCurve_2: typeof Geom_BezierCurve_2;
  Geom_BezierCurve_3: typeof Geom_BezierCurve_3;
  Geom_TrimmedCurve: typeof Geom_TrimmedCurve;
  Geom_ElementarySurface: typeof Geom_ElementarySurface;
  Geom_BoundedSurface: typeof Geom_BoundedSurface;
  Geom_Curve: typeof Geom_Curve;
  Geom_Surface: typeof Geom_Surface;
  Geom_SphericalSurface: typeof Geom_SphericalSurface;
  Geom_SphericalSurface_1: typeof Geom_SphericalSurface_1;
  Geom_SphericalSurface_2: typeof Geom_SphericalSurface_2;
  Geom_BoundedCurve: typeof Geom_BoundedCurve;
  Geom_BSplineSurface: typeof Geom_BSplineSurface;
  Geom_BSplineSurface_1: typeof Geom_BSplineSurface_1;
  Geom_BSplineSurface_2: typeof Geom_BSplineSurface_2;
  Geom_BSplineSurface_3: typeof Geom_BSplineSurface_3;
  Geom_BSplineCurve: typeof Geom_BSplineCurve;
  Geom_BSplineCurve_1: typeof Geom_BSplineCurve_1;
  Geom_BSplineCurve_2: typeof Geom_BSplineCurve_2;
  Geom_BSplineCurve_3: typeof Geom_BSplineCurve_3;
  GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface: typeof GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface;
  GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_1: typeof GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_1;
  GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_2: typeof GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_2;
  GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_3: typeof GeomAdaptor_TransformedSurface_3;
  TopAbs_ShapeEnum: TopAbs_ShapeEnum;
  TopAbs_Orientation: TopAbs_Orientation;
  GProp_GProps: typeof GProp_GProps;
  GProp_GProps_1: typeof GProp_GProps_1;
  GProp_GProps_2: typeof GProp_GProps_2;
  Geom2d_Conic: typeof Geom2d_Conic;
  Geom2d_OffsetCurve: typeof Geom2d_OffsetCurve;
  Geom2d_OffsetCurve_1: typeof Geom2d_OffsetCurve_1;
  Geom2d_OffsetCurve_2: typeof Geom2d_OffsetCurve_2;
  Geom2d_Curve: typeof Geom2d_Curve;
  Geom2d_BezierCurve: typeof Geom2d_BezierCurve;
  Geom2d_BezierCurve_1: typeof Geom2d_BezierCurve_1;
  Geom2d_BezierCurve_2: typeof Geom2d_BezierCurve_2;
  Geom2d_BezierCurve_3: typeof Geom2d_BezierCurve_3;
  Geom2d_Ellipse: typeof Geom2d_Ellipse;
  Geom2d_Ellipse_1: typeof Geom2d_Ellipse_1;
  Geom2d_Ellipse_2: typeof Geom2d_Ellipse_2;
  Geom2d_Ellipse_3: typeof Geom2d_Ellipse_3;
  Geom2d_BoundedCurve: typeof Geom2d_BoundedCurve;
  Geom2d_BSplineCurve: typeof Geom2d_BSplineCurve;
  Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1: typeof Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1;
  Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2: typeof Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2;
  Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3: typeof Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3;
  Geom2d_Circle: typeof Geom2d_Circle;
  Geom2d_Circle_1: typeof Geom2d_Circle_1;
  Geom2d_Circle_2: typeof Geom2d_Circle_2;
  Geom2d_Circle_3: typeof Geom2d_Circle_3;
  Geom2d_Geometry: typeof Geom2d_Geometry;
  Geom2d_TrimmedCurve: typeof Geom2d_TrimmedCurve;
  Geom2d_Line: typeof Geom2d_Line;
  Geom2d_Line_1: typeof Geom2d_Line_1;
  Geom2d_Line_2: typeof Geom2d_Line_2;
  Geom2d_Line_3: typeof Geom2d_Line_3;
  Geom2dAdaptor_Curve: typeof Geom2dAdaptor_Curve;
  Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_1: typeof Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_1;
  Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_2: typeof Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_2;
  Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_3: typeof Geom2dAdaptor_Curve_3;
  Adaptor2d_Curve2d: typeof Adaptor2d_Curve2d;
  BinTools: typeof BinTools;
  BRep_Tool: typeof BRep_Tool;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve_1: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve_1;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve_2: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve_2;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve_3: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve_3;
  BRepAdaptor_Surface: typeof BRepAdaptor_Surface;
  BRepAdaptor_Surface_1: typeof BRepAdaptor_Surface_1;
  BRepAdaptor_Surface_2: typeof BRepAdaptor_Surface_2;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve2d: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve2d;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_1: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_1;
  BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_2: typeof BRepAdaptor_Curve2d_2;
  BRepAdaptor_CompCurve: typeof BRepAdaptor_CompCurve;
  BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_1: typeof BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_1;
  BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_2: typeof BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_2;
  BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_3: typeof BRepAdaptor_CompCurve_3;
  TopExp_Explorer: typeof TopExp_Explorer;
  TopExp_Explorer_1: typeof TopExp_Explorer_1;
  TopExp_Explorer_2: typeof TopExp_Explorer_2;
  BRepTools: typeof BRepTools;
  TopoDS_Solid: typeof TopoDS_Solid;
  TopoDS_Builder: typeof TopoDS_Builder;
  TopoDS_Wire: typeof TopoDS_Wire;
  TopoDS_Vertex: typeof TopoDS_Vertex;
  TopoDS_Edge: typeof TopoDS_Edge;
  TopoDS_Shell: typeof TopoDS_Shell;
  TopoDS_Compound: typeof TopoDS_Compound;
  TopoDS_Shape: typeof TopoDS_Shape;
  TopoDS_Face: typeof TopoDS_Face;
  TopoDS_CompSolid: typeof TopoDS_CompSolid;
  BndLib_Add2dCurve: typeof BndLib_Add2dCurve;
  GC_Root: typeof GC_Root;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle_1: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle_1;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle_2: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle_2;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle_3: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle_3;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle_4: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle_4;
  GC_MakeArcOfCircle_5: typeof GC_MakeArcOfCircle_5;
  GC_MakeArcOfEllipse: typeof GC_MakeArcOfEllipse;
  GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_1: typeof GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_1;
  GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_2: typeof GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_2;
  GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_3: typeof GC_MakeArcOfEllipse_3;
  Extrema_ExtAlgo: Extrema_ExtAlgo;
  Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve: typeof Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve;
  Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_1: typeof Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_1;
  Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_2: typeof Geom2dConvert_BSplineCurveToBezierCurve_2;
  Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve: typeof Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve;
  Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_1: typeof Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_1;
  Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_2: typeof Geom2dConvert_ApproxCurve_2;
  Geom2dConvert: typeof Geom2dConvert;
  GeomLib: typeof GeomLib;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_1: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_1;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_2: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_2;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_3: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_3;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_4: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_4;
  GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_5: typeof GCPnts_TangentialDeflection_5;
  GCE2d_Root: typeof GCE2d_Root;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_1: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_1;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_2: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_2;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_3: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_3;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_4: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_4;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_5: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfCircle_5;
  GCE2d_MakeEllipse: typeof GCE2d_MakeEllipse;
  GCE2d_MakeEllipse_1: typeof GCE2d_MakeEllipse_1;
  GCE2d_MakeEllipse_2: typeof GCE2d_MakeEllipse_2;
  GCE2d_MakeEllipse_3: typeof GCE2d_MakeEllipse_3;
  GCE2d_MakeEllipse_4: typeof GCE2d_MakeEllipse_4;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_1: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_1;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_2: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_2;
  GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_3: typeof GCE2d_MakeArcOfEllipse_3;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_1: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_1;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_2: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_2;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_3: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_3;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_4: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_4;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_5: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_5;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_6: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_6;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_7: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_7;
  GCE2d_MakeCircle_8: typeof GCE2d_MakeCircle_8;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment_1: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment_1;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment_2: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment_2;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment_3: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment_3;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment_4: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment_4;
  GCE2d_MakeSegment_5: typeof GCE2d_MakeSegment_5;
  GeomConvert: typeof GeomConvert;
  GeomTools: typeof GeomTools;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt_1: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt_1;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt_2: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt_2;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt_4: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt_4;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt_5: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt_5;
  TColgp_Array2OfPnt_6: typeof TColgp_Array2OfPnt_6;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir_1: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir_1;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir_2: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir_2;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir_4: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir_4;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir_5: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir_5;
  TColgp_Array1OfDir_6: typeof TColgp_Array1OfDir_6;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal_1: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal_1;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal_2: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal_2;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal_4: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal_4;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal_5: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal_5;
  TColStd_Array1OfReal_6: typeof TColStd_Array1OfReal_6;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle_1: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle_1;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle_2: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle_2;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle_4: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle_4;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle_5: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle_5;
  Poly_Array1OfTriangle_6: typeof Poly_Array1OfTriangle_6;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec_1: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec_1;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec_2: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec_2;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec_4: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec_4;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec_5: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec_5;
  TColgp_Array1OfVec_6: typeof TColgp_Array1OfVec_6;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_1: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_1;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_2: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_2;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_4: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_4;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_5: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_5;
  TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_6: typeof TColStd_Array1OfBoolean_6;
  TopTools_ListOfShape: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape;
  TopTools_ListOfShape_1: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape_1;
  TopTools_ListOfShape_2: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape_2;
  TopTools_ListOfShape_3: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape_3;
  TopTools_ListOfShape_4: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape_4;
  TopTools_ListOfShape_5: typeof TopTools_ListOfShape_5;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger_1: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger_1;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger_2: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger_2;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger_4: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger_4;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger_5: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger_5;
  TColStd_Array1OfInteger_6: typeof TColStd_Array1OfInteger_6;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_1: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_1;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_2: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_2;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_4: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_4;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_5: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_5;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_6: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt2d_6;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt_1: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt_1;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt_2: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt_2;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt_4: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt_4;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt_5: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt_5;
  TColgp_Array1OfPnt_6: typeof TColgp_Array1OfPnt_6;
  IFSelect_ReturnStatus: IFSelect_ReturnStatus;
  IFSelect_WorkSession: typeof IFSelect_WorkSession;
  Interface_TypedValue: typeof Interface_TypedValue;
  Interface_Static: typeof Interface_Static;
  Interface_Static_1: typeof Interface_Static_1;
  Interface_Static_2: typeof Interface_Static_2;
  XSControl_Reader: typeof XSControl_Reader;
  XSControl_Reader_1: typeof XSControl_Reader_1;
  XSControl_Reader_2: typeof XSControl_Reader_2;
  XSControl_Reader_3: typeof XSControl_Reader_3;
  XSControl_WorkSession: typeof XSControl_WorkSession;
  MoniTool_TypedValue: typeof MoniTool_TypedValue;
  MoniTool_TypedValue_1: typeof MoniTool_TypedValue_1;
  MoniTool_TypedValue_2: typeof MoniTool_TypedValue_2;
  StlAPI_Reader: typeof StlAPI_Reader;
  StlAPI_Writer: typeof StlAPI_Writer;
  StlAPI: typeof StlAPI;
  XCAFDoc_LengthUnit: typeof XCAFDoc_LengthUnit;
  XCAFDoc_ColorType: XCAFDoc_ColorType;
  XCAFDoc_DocumentTool: typeof XCAFDoc_DocumentTool;
  XCAFDoc_ColorTool: typeof XCAFDoc_ColorTool;
  XCAFDoc_ShapeTool: typeof XCAFDoc_ShapeTool;
  STEPControl_Writer: typeof STEPControl_Writer;
  STEPControl_Writer_1: typeof STEPControl_Writer_1;
  STEPControl_Writer_2: typeof STEPControl_Writer_2;
  STEPControl_StepModelType: STEPControl_StepModelType;
  STEPControl_Reader: typeof STEPControl_Reader;
  STEPControl_Reader_1: typeof STEPControl_Reader_1;
  STEPControl_Reader_2: typeof STEPControl_Reader_2;
  STEPCAFControl_Writer: typeof STEPCAFControl_Writer;
  STEPCAFControl_Writer_1: typeof STEPCAFControl_Writer_1;
  STEPCAFControl_Writer_2: typeof STEPCAFControl_Writer_2;
  STEPCAFControl_Reader: typeof STEPCAFControl_Reader;
  STEPCAFControl_Reader_1: typeof STEPCAFControl_Reader_1;
  STEPCAFControl_Reader_2: typeof STEPCAFControl_Reader_2;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeThickSolid: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeThickSolid;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_1: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_1;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_2: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipe_2;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeFilling: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeFilling;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipeShell: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakePipeShell;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_1: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_1;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_2: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_2;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_3: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffset_3;
  BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffsetShape: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_MakeOffsetShape;
  BRepOffsetAPI_ThruSections: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_ThruSections;
  BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle;
  BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_1: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_1;
  BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_2: typeof BRepOffsetAPI_DraftAngle_2;
  BRepOffset_Mode: BRepOffset_Mode;
  HLRAlgo_Projector: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector;
  HLRAlgo_Projector_1: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector_1;
  HLRAlgo_Projector_2: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector_2;
  HLRAlgo_Projector_3: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector_3;
  HLRAlgo_Projector_4: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector_4;
  HLRAlgo_Projector_5: typeof HLRAlgo_Projector_5;
  HLRBRep_Algo: typeof HLRBRep_Algo;
  HLRBRep_Algo_1: typeof HLRBRep_Algo_1;
  HLRBRep_Algo_2: typeof HLRBRep_Algo_2;
  HLRBRep_InternalAlgo: typeof HLRBRep_InternalAlgo;
  HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_1: typeof HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_1;
  HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_2: typeof HLRBRep_InternalAlgo_2;
  HLRBRep_HLRToShape: typeof HLRBRep_HLRToShape;
  BRepMesh_DiscretRoot: typeof BRepMesh_DiscretRoot;
  BRepFill_TypeOfContact: BRepFill_TypeOfContact;
  BOPAlgo_Options: typeof BOPAlgo_Options;
  BOPAlgo_Options_1: typeof BOPAlgo_Options_1;
  BOPAlgo_Options_2: typeof BOPAlgo_Options_2;
  BOPAlgo_GlueEnum: BOPAlgo_GlueEnum;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BuilderAlgo_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Common: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Common;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Common_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Common_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Common_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Common_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Common_3: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Common_3;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Common_4: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Common_4;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_3: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_3;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_4: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Fuse_4;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_3: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_3;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_4: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_4;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_5: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_5;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_6: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_6;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_7: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_7;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Section_8: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Section_8;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Algo: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Algo;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_BooleanOperation_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Cut: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Cut;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_1: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_1;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_2: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_2;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_3: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_3;
  BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_4: typeof BRepAlgoAPI_Cut_4;
  BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape: typeof BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape;
  BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_1: typeof BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_1;
  BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_2: typeof BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_2;
  BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_3: typeof BRepExtrema_DistShapeShape_3;
  BRepBndLib: typeof BRepBndLib;
  BRepGProp: typeof BRepGProp;
  BRepGProp_Face: typeof BRepGProp_Face;
  BRepGProp_Face_1: typeof BRepGProp_Face_1;
  BRepGProp_Face_2: typeof BRepGProp_Face_2;
  BRepLib: typeof BRepLib;
  BRepCheck_Analyzer: typeof BRepCheck_Analyzer;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_3: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_3;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_4: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_4;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_5: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_5;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_6: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_6;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_7: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_7;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_8: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_8;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_9: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_9;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_10: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_10;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_11: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_11;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_12: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_12;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_13: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_13;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_14: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_14;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_15: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_15;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_16: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_16;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_17: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_17;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_18: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_18;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_19: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_19;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_20: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_20;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_21: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_21;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_22: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_22;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_23: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_23;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_24: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_24;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_25: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_25;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_26: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_26;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_27: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_27;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_28: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_28;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_29: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_29;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_30: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_30;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_31: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_31;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_32: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_32;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_33: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_33;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_34: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_34;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_35: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeEdge_35;
  BRepBuilderAPI_Command: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_Command;
  BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform;
  BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_GTransform_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShape;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_3: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_3;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_4: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_4;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_5: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_5;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_6: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_6;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_7: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_7;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_8: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_8;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_9: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_9;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_10: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_10;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_11: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_11;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_12: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_12;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_13: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_13;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_14: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_14;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_15: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_15;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_16: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_16;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_17: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_17;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_18: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_18;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_19: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_19;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_20: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_20;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_21: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_21;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_22: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeFace_22;
  BRepBuilderAPI_WireError: BRepBuilderAPI_WireError;
  BRepBuilderAPI_Transform: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_Transform;
  BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_Transform_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_3: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeShell_3;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_3: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_3;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_4: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_4;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_5: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_5;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_6: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_6;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_7: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeSolid_7;
  BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionMode: BRepBuilderAPI_TransitionMode;
  BRepBuilderAPI_Sewing: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_Sewing;
  BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_ModifyShape;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeVertex: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeVertex;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_1: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_1;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_2: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_2;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_3: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_3;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_4: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_4;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_5: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_5;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_6: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_6;
  BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_7: typeof BRepBuilderAPI_MakeWire_7;
  Law_Interpol: typeof Law_Interpol;
  Law_BSpFunc: typeof Law_BSpFunc;
  Law_BSpFunc_1: typeof Law_BSpFunc_1;
  Law_BSpFunc_2: typeof Law_BSpFunc_2;
  Law_S: typeof Law_S;
  Law_Linear: typeof Law_Linear;
  Law_Function: typeof Law_Function;
  Law_Composite: typeof Law_Composite;
  Law_Composite_1: typeof Law_Composite_1;
  Law_Composite_2: typeof Law_Composite_2;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_1: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_1;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_2: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_2;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_3: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_3;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_4: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_4;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_5: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSplineSurface_5;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_1: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_1;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_2: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_2;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_3: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_3;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_4: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_4;
  GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_5: typeof GeomAPI_PointsToBSpline_5;
  GeomAPI_Interpolate: typeof GeomAPI_Interpolate;
  GeomAPI_Interpolate_1: typeof GeomAPI_Interpolate_1;
  GeomAPI_Interpolate_2: typeof GeomAPI_Interpolate_2;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_1: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_1;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_2: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_2;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_3: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_3;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_4: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_4;
  GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_5: typeof GeomAPI_ProjectPointOnSurf_5;
  Geom2dAPI_ExtremaCurveCurve: typeof Geom2dAPI_ExtremaCurveCurve;
  Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve: typeof Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve;
  Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_1: typeof Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_1;
  Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_2: typeof Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_2;
  Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_3: typeof Geom2dAPI_ProjectPointOnCurve_3;
  Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve: typeof Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve;
  Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_1: typeof Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_1;
  Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_2: typeof Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_2;
  Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_3: typeof Geom2dAPI_InterCurveCurve_3;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_1: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_1;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_2: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_2;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_3: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_3;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_4: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_4;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_5: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_5;
  Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_6: typeof Geom2dAPI_PointsToBSpline_6;
  ShapeFix_Face: typeof ShapeFix_Face;
  ShapeFix_Face_1: typeof ShapeFix_Face_1;
  ShapeFix_Face_2: typeof ShapeFix_Face_2;
  ShapeFix_Solid: typeof ShapeFix_Solid;
  ShapeFix_Solid_1: typeof ShapeFix_Solid_1;
  ShapeFix_Solid_2: typeof ShapeFix_Solid_2;
  ShapeFix_Wire: typeof ShapeFix_Wire;
  ShapeFix_Wire_1: typeof ShapeFix_Wire_1;
  ShapeFix_Wire_2: typeof ShapeFix_Wire_2;
  ShapeFix_Root: typeof ShapeFix_Root;
  ShapeFix_EdgeConnect: typeof ShapeFix_EdgeConnect;
  ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain: typeof ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain;
  ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_1: typeof ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_1;
  ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_2: typeof ShapeUpgrade_UnifySameDomain_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_5: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_5;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_6: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_6;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_7: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_7;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_8: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevolution_8;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_5: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_5;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_6: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_6;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_7: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_7;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_8: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_8;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_9: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_9;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_10: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_10;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_11: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_11;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_12: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSphere_12;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_5: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_5;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_6: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_6;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_7: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_7;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_8: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeTorus_8;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakePrism_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCylinder_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_5: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeBox_5;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeOneAxis;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_3: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_3;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_4: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeCone_4;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_1: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_1;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_2: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeRevol_2;
  BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep: typeof BRepPrimAPI_MakeSweep;
  BRepFilletAPI_MakeChamfer: typeof BRepFilletAPI_MakeChamfer;
  BRepFilletAPI_MakeFillet: typeof BRepFilletAPI_MakeFillet;
  BRepFilletAPI_LocalOperation: typeof BRepFilletAPI_LocalOperation;
  ChFiDS_ChamfMode: ChFiDS_ChamfMode;
  ChFi3d_FilletShape: ChFi3d_FilletShape;
  BRepFeat_MakeDPrism: typeof BRepFeat_MakeDPrism;
  BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_1: typeof BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_1;
  BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_2: typeof BRepFeat_MakeDPrism_2;
  BRepFeat_Form: typeof BRepFeat_Form;
  Convert_ParameterisationType: Convert_ParameterisationType;
  gp_Ax1: typeof gp_Ax1;
  gp_Ax1_1: typeof gp_Ax1_1;
  gp_Ax1_2: typeof gp_Ax1_2;
  gp_Ax1_3: typeof gp_Ax1_3;
  gp_Ax1_4: typeof gp_Ax1_4;
  gp_Circ2d: typeof gp_Circ2d;
  gp_Circ2d_1: typeof gp_Circ2d_1;
  gp_Circ2d_2: typeof gp_Circ2d_2;
  gp_Circ2d_3: typeof gp_Circ2d_3;
  gp_Ax2d: typeof gp_Ax2d;
  gp_Ax2d_1: typeof gp_Ax2d_1;
  gp_Ax2d_2: typeof gp_Ax2d_2;
  gp_Ax2d_3: typeof gp_Ax2d_3;
  gp_Ax2d_4: typeof gp_Ax2d_4;
  gp_Dir: typeof gp_Dir;
  gp_Dir_1: typeof gp_Dir_1;
  gp_Dir_2: typeof gp_Dir_2;
  gp_Dir_3: typeof gp_Dir_3;
  gp_Dir_4: typeof gp_Dir_4;
  gp_Dir_5: typeof gp_Dir_5;
  gp_Dir_6: typeof gp_Dir_6;
  gp_Dir_7: typeof gp_Dir_7;
  gp_Dir_D: typeof gp_Dir_D;
  gp_Sphere: typeof gp_Sphere;
  gp_Sphere_1: typeof gp_Sphere_1;
  gp_Sphere_2: typeof gp_Sphere_2;
  gp_Circ: typeof gp_Circ;
  gp_Circ_1: typeof gp_Circ_1;
  gp_Circ_2: typeof gp_Circ_2;
  gp_Ax22d: typeof gp_Ax22d;
  gp_Ax22d_1: typeof gp_Ax22d_1;
  gp_Ax22d_2: typeof gp_Ax22d_2;
  gp_Ax22d_3: typeof gp_Ax22d_3;
  gp_Ax22d_4: typeof gp_Ax22d_4;
  gp_Pln: typeof gp_Pln;
  gp_Pln_1: typeof gp_Pln_1;
  gp_Pln_2: typeof gp_Pln_2;
  gp_Pln_3: typeof gp_Pln_3;
  gp_Pln_4: typeof gp_Pln_4;
  gp_Vec2d: typeof gp_Vec2d;
  gp_Vec2d_1: typeof gp_Vec2d_1;
  gp_Vec2d_2: typeof gp_Vec2d_2;
  gp_Vec2d_3: typeof gp_Vec2d_3;
  gp_Vec2d_4: typeof gp_Vec2d_4;
  gp_Vec2d_5: typeof gp_Vec2d_5;
  gp_Trsf: typeof gp_Trsf;
  gp_Trsf_1: typeof gp_Trsf_1;
  gp_Trsf_2: typeof gp_Trsf_2;
  gp_Pnt: typeof gp_Pnt;
  gp_Pnt_1: typeof gp_Pnt_1;
  gp_Pnt_2: typeof gp_Pnt_2;
  gp_Pnt_3: typeof gp_Pnt_3;
  gp_Pnt2d: typeof gp_Pnt2d;
  gp_Pnt2d_1: typeof gp_Pnt2d_1;
  gp_Pnt2d_2: typeof gp_Pnt2d_2;
  gp_Pnt2d_3: typeof gp_Pnt2d_3;
  gp_Dir2d: typeof gp_Dir2d;
  gp_Dir2d_1: typeof gp_Dir2d_1;
  gp_Dir2d_2: typeof gp_Dir2d_2;
  gp_Dir2d_3: typeof gp_Dir2d_3;
  gp_Dir2d_4: typeof gp_Dir2d_4;
  gp_Dir2d_5: typeof gp_Dir2d_5;
  gp_Dir2d_D: typeof gp_Dir2d_D;
  gp_Elips: typeof gp_Elips;
  gp_Elips_1: typeof gp_Elips_1;
  gp_Elips_2: typeof gp_Elips_2;
  gp_XYZ: typeof gp_XYZ;
  gp_XYZ_1: typeof gp_XYZ_1;
  gp_XYZ_2: typeof gp_XYZ_2;
  gp_GTrsf2d: typeof gp_GTrsf2d;
  gp_GTrsf2d_1: typeof gp_GTrsf2d_1;
  gp_GTrsf2d_2: typeof gp_GTrsf2d_2;
  gp_GTrsf2d_3: typeof gp_GTrsf2d_3;
  gp_XY: typeof gp_XY;
  gp_XY_1: typeof gp_XY_1;
  gp_XY_2: typeof gp_XY_2;
  gp_Vec: typeof gp_Vec;
  gp_Vec_1: typeof gp_Vec_1;
  gp_Vec_2: typeof gp_Vec_2;
  gp_Vec_3: typeof gp_Vec_3;
  gp_Vec_4: typeof gp_Vec_4;
  gp_Vec_5: typeof gp_Vec_5;
  gp_Ax3: typeof gp_Ax3;
  gp_Ax3_1: typeof gp_Ax3_1;
  gp_Ax3_2: typeof gp_Ax3_2;
  gp_Ax3_3: typeof gp_Ax3_3;
  gp_Ax3_4: typeof gp_Ax3_4;
  gp_Ax3_5: typeof gp_Ax3_5;
  gp_Ax3_6: typeof gp_Ax3_6;
  gp_Ax3_7: typeof gp_Ax3_7;
  gp_Trsf2d: typeof gp_Trsf2d;
  gp_Trsf2d_1: typeof gp_Trsf2d_1;
  gp_Trsf2d_2: typeof gp_Trsf2d_2;
  gp_Ax2: typeof gp_Ax2;
  gp_Ax2_1: typeof gp_Ax2_1;
  gp_Ax2_2: typeof gp_Ax2_2;
  gp_Ax2_3: typeof gp_Ax2_3;
  gp_Ax2_4: typeof gp_Ax2_4;
  gp_Ax2_5: typeof gp_Ax2_5;
  gp_Ax2_6: typeof gp_Ax2_6;
  gp_Cylinder: typeof gp_Cylinder;
  gp_Cylinder_1: typeof gp_Cylinder_1;
  gp_Cylinder_2: typeof gp_Cylinder_2;
  gp_Elips2d: typeof gp_Elips2d;
  gp_Elips2d_1: typeof gp_Elips2d_1;
  gp_Elips2d_2: typeof gp_Elips2d_2;
  gp_Elips2d_3: typeof gp_Elips2d_3;
  gp_GTrsf: typeof gp_GTrsf;
  gp_GTrsf_1: typeof gp_GTrsf_1;
  gp_GTrsf_2: typeof gp_GTrsf_2;
  gp_GTrsf_3: typeof gp_GTrsf_3;
  GeomAbs_CurveType: GeomAbs_CurveType;
  GeomAbs_SurfaceType: GeomAbs_SurfaceType;
  GeomAbs_JoinType: GeomAbs_JoinType;
  GeomAbs_Shape: GeomAbs_Shape;
  Poly_Triangle: typeof Poly_Triangle;
  Poly_Triangle_1: typeof Poly_Triangle_1;
  Poly_Triangle_2: typeof Poly_Triangle_2;
  Poly_Connect: typeof Poly_Connect;
  Poly_Connect_1: typeof Poly_Connect_1;
  Poly_Connect_2: typeof Poly_Connect_2;
  Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation: typeof Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation;
  Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1: typeof Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1;
  Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2: typeof Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2;
  Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3: typeof Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3;
  Poly_Triangulation: typeof Poly_Triangulation;
  Poly_Triangulation_1: typeof Poly_Triangulation_1;
  Poly_Triangulation_2: typeof Poly_Triangulation_2;
  Poly_Triangulation_3: typeof Poly_Triangulation_3;
  Poly_Triangulation_4: typeof Poly_Triangulation_4;
  Poly_Triangulation_5: typeof Poly_Triangulation_5;
  TopLoc_Location: typeof TopLoc_Location;
  TopLoc_Location_1: typeof TopLoc_Location_1;
  TopLoc_Location_2: typeof TopLoc_Location_2;
  TopLoc_Location_3: typeof TopLoc_Location_3;
  TopLoc_Location_4: typeof TopLoc_Location_4;
  TopLoc_Location_5: typeof TopLoc_Location_5;
  Bnd_OBB: typeof Bnd_OBB;
  Bnd_OBB_1: typeof Bnd_OBB_1;
  Bnd_OBB_2: typeof Bnd_OBB_2;
  Bnd_OBB_3: typeof Bnd_OBB_3;
  Precision: typeof Precision;
  Message_ProgressRange: typeof Message_ProgressRange;
  Message_ProgressRange_1: typeof Message_ProgressRange_1;
  Message_ProgressRange_2: typeof Message_ProgressRange_2;
  NCollection_BaseList: typeof NCollection_BaseList;
  TCollection_ExtendedString: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_1: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_1;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_2: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_2;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_3: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_3;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_4: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_4;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_5: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_5;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_6: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_6;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_7: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_7;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_8: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_8;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_9: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_9;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_10: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_10;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_11: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_11;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_12: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_12;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_13: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_13;
  TCollection_ExtendedString_15: typeof TCollection_ExtendedString_15;
  Standard_Transient: typeof Standard_Transient;
  Standard_Transient_1: typeof Standard_Transient_1;
  Standard_Transient_2: typeof Standard_Transient_2;
  Quantity_Color: typeof Quantity_Color;
  Quantity_Color_1: typeof Quantity_Color_1;
  Quantity_Color_2: typeof Quantity_Color_2;
  Quantity_Color_3: typeof Quantity_Color_3;
  Quantity_Color_4: typeof Quantity_Color_4;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA_1: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA_1;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA_2: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA_2;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA_3: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA_3;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA_4: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA_4;
  Quantity_ColorRGBA_5: typeof Quantity_ColorRGBA_5;
  CDM_Document: typeof CDM_Document;
  TDF_Label: typeof TDF_Label;
  TDF_Attribute: typeof TDF_Attribute;
  TDataStd_Name: typeof TDataStd_Name;
  TDataStd_GenericExtString: typeof TDataStd_GenericExtString;
  TDataStd_GenericEmpty: typeof TDataStd_GenericEmpty;
  TDocStd_Document: typeof TDocStd_Document;
  TopologyResult: typeof TopologyResult;
  TopologyResult_1: typeof TopologyResult_1;
  TopologyResult_2: typeof TopologyResult_2;
  MeshBatchData: typeof MeshBatchData;
  Handle_Law_Function: typeof Handle_Law_Function;
  Handle_Law_Function_1: typeof Handle_Law_Function_1;
  Handle_Law_Function_2: typeof Handle_Law_Function_2;
  Handle_Law_Function_3: typeof Handle_Law_Function_3;
  Handle_Law_Function_4: typeof Handle_Law_Function_4;
  Handle_HLRBRep_Algo: typeof Handle_HLRBRep_Algo;
  Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_1: typeof Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_1;
  Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_2: typeof Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_2;
  Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_3: typeof Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_3;
  Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_4: typeof Handle_HLRBRep_Algo_4;
  FilletBatch: typeof FilletBatch;
  LoftBatch: typeof LoftBatch;
  Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve;
  Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BezierCurve_4;
  BRepToolsWrapper: typeof BRepToolsWrapper;
  Handle_StepData_StepModel: typeof Handle_StepData_StepModel;
  Handle_StepData_StepModel_1: typeof Handle_StepData_StepModel_1;
  Handle_StepData_StepModel_2: typeof Handle_StepData_StepModel_2;
  Handle_StepData_StepModel_3: typeof Handle_StepData_StepModel_3;
  Handle_StepData_StepModel_4: typeof Handle_StepData_StepModel_4;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineCurve_4;
  Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve;
  Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BoundedCurve_4;
  MeshExtractor: typeof MeshExtractor;
  Handle_TDocStd_Document: typeof Handle_TDocStd_Document;
  Handle_TDocStd_Document_1: typeof Handle_TDocStd_Document_1;
  Handle_TDocStd_Document_2: typeof Handle_TDocStd_Document_2;
  Handle_TDocStd_Document_3: typeof Handle_TDocStd_Document_3;
  Handle_TDocStd_Document_4: typeof Handle_TDocStd_Document_4;
  ShellBatch: typeof ShellBatch;
  BRepMesh_IncrementalMeshWrapper: typeof BRepMesh_IncrementalMeshWrapper;
  Handle_Geom_Surface: typeof Handle_Geom_Surface;
  Handle_Geom_Surface_1: typeof Handle_Geom_Surface_1;
  Handle_Geom_Surface_2: typeof Handle_Geom_Surface_2;
  Handle_Geom_Surface_3: typeof Handle_Geom_Surface_3;
  Handle_Geom_Surface_4: typeof Handle_Geom_Surface_4;
  Handle_Geom_Curve: typeof Handle_Geom_Curve;
  Handle_Geom_Curve_1: typeof Handle_Geom_Curve_1;
  Handle_Geom_Curve_2: typeof Handle_Geom_Curve_2;
  Handle_Geom_Curve_3: typeof Handle_Geom_Curve_3;
  Handle_Geom_Curve_4: typeof Handle_Geom_Curve_4;
  EdgeMeshData: typeof EdgeMeshData;
  EdgeMeshData_1: typeof EdgeMeshData_1;
  EdgeMeshData_2: typeof EdgeMeshData_2;
  Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface: typeof Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface;
  Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_1: typeof Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_1;
  Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_2: typeof Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_2;
  Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_3: typeof Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_3;
  Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_4: typeof Handle_Geom_ElementarySurface_4;
  BooleanPipeline: typeof BooleanPipeline;
  ExtrudeBatch: typeof ExtrudeBatch;
  Handle_Geom2d_Curve: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Curve;
  Handle_Geom2d_Curve_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Curve_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_Curve_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Curve_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Curve_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Curve_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_Curve_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Curve_4;
  Handle_Poly_Triangulation: typeof Handle_Poly_Triangulation;
  Handle_Poly_Triangulation_1: typeof Handle_Poly_Triangulation_1;
  Handle_Poly_Triangulation_2: typeof Handle_Poly_Triangulation_2;
  Handle_Poly_Triangulation_3: typeof Handle_Poly_Triangulation_3;
  Handle_Poly_Triangulation_4: typeof Handle_Poly_Triangulation_4;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_1: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_1;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_2: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_2;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_3: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_3;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_4: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ShapeTool_4;
  MeasurementData: typeof MeasurementData;
  MeasurementData_1: typeof MeasurementData_1;
  MeasurementData_2: typeof MeasurementData_2;
  Handle_Geom_Geometry: typeof Handle_Geom_Geometry;
  Handle_Geom_Geometry_1: typeof Handle_Geom_Geometry_1;
  Handle_Geom_Geometry_2: typeof Handle_Geom_Geometry_2;
  Handle_Geom_Geometry_3: typeof Handle_Geom_Geometry_3;
  Handle_Geom_Geometry_4: typeof Handle_Geom_Geometry_4;
  Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface: typeof Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface;
  Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_1: typeof Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_1;
  Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_2: typeof Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_2;
  Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_3: typeof Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_3;
  Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_4: typeof Handle_Geom_SphericalSurface_4;
  Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve: typeof Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve;
  Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_TrimmedCurve_4;
  SpatialIndex3D: typeof SpatialIndex3D;
  MeshBatchExtractor: typeof MeshBatchExtractor;
  Handle_Geom_BezierCurve: typeof Handle_Geom_BezierCurve;
  Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom_BezierCurve_4;
  Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve;
  Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_BSplineCurve_4;
  StepStreamIO: typeof StepStreamIO;
  TopologyExtractor: typeof TopologyExtractor;
  ShapeBatchResult: typeof ShapeBatchResult;
  ShapeBatchResult_1: typeof ShapeBatchResult_1;
  ShapeBatchResult_2: typeof ShapeBatchResult_2;
  Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d: typeof Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d;
  Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_1: typeof Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_1;
  Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_2: typeof Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_2;
  Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_3: typeof Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_3;
  Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_4: typeof Handle_Adaptor2d_Curve2d_4;
  BooleanBatch: typeof BooleanBatch;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_1: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_1;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_2: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_2;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_3: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_3;
  Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_4: typeof Handle_XCAFDoc_ColorTool_4;
  Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation: typeof Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation;
  Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1: typeof Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_1;
  Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2: typeof Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_2;
  Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3: typeof Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_3;
  Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_4: typeof Handle_Poly_PolygonOnTriangulation_4;
  EdgeMeshExtractor: typeof EdgeMeshExtractor;
  TransformBatchResult: typeof TransformBatchResult;
  TransformBatchResult_1: typeof TransformBatchResult_1;
  TransformBatchResult_2: typeof TransformBatchResult_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Geometry: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Geometry;
  Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Geometry_4;
  Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse;
  Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Ellipse_4;
  Curve2dBatchEval: typeof Curve2dBatchEval;
  TopoDS_Cast: typeof TopoDS_Cast;
  MeasurementExtractor: typeof MeasurementExtractor;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_1: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_1;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_2: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_2;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_3: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_3;
  Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_4: typeof Handle_Geom_BSplineSurface_4;
  TransformBatch: typeof TransformBatch;
  Handle_Geom2d_Circle: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Circle;
  Handle_Geom2d_Circle_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Circle_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_Circle_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Circle_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Circle_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Circle_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_Circle_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Circle_4;
  Handle_Geom2d_Line: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Line;
  Handle_Geom2d_Line_1: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Line_1;
  Handle_Geom2d_Line_2: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Line_2;
  Handle_Geom2d_Line_3: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Line_3;
  Handle_Geom2d_Line_4: typeof Handle_Geom2d_Line_4;
  EvolutionExtractor: typeof EvolutionExtractor;
  Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve: typeof Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve;
  Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_1: typeof Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_1;
  Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_2: typeof Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_2;
  Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_3: typeof Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_3;
  Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_4: typeof Handle_Geom_TrimmedCurve_4;
  Handle_XSControl_WorkSession: typeof Handle_XSControl_WorkSession;
  Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_1: typeof Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_1;
  Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_2: typeof Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_2;
  Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_3: typeof Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_3;
  Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_4: typeof Handle_XSControl_WorkSession_4;
  Handle_TDataStd_Name: typeof Handle_TDataStd_Name;
  Handle_TDataStd_Name_1: typeof Handle_TDataStd_Name_1;
  Handle_TDataStd_Name_2: typeof Handle_TDataStd_Name_2;
  Handle_TDataStd_Name_3: typeof Handle_TDataStd_Name_3;
  Handle_TDataStd_Name_4: typeof Handle_TDataStd_Name_4;
  GeomToolsWrapper: typeof GeomToolsWrapper;
  EvolutionData: typeof EvolutionData;
  EvolutionData_1: typeof EvolutionData_1;
  EvolutionData_2: typeof EvolutionData_2;
  MeshData: typeof MeshData;
  MeshData_1: typeof MeshData_1;
  MeshData_2: typeof MeshData_2;
};

declare function init(): Promise<OpenCascadeInstance>;

export default init;